JP2024053625A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine capable of performing suitable customer waiting control. [Solution] A performance control CPU 120 displays a first background display 004SG081 during a first customer waiting period (first period) after a game in a low base state ends (variable display stops), and displays a demo movie during a second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends. [Selected figure] Fig. 31

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be played.

Among gaming machines, there are pachinko gaming machines that execute control to display a normal background display during a first customer waiting period after the variable display of the symbols has ended, and to display a demonstration display during a second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period has ended (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In addition, among conventional gaming machines, there are some that are capable of executing variable display and are controllable to a jackpot gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player, and that, when a reserved memory containing information regarding a variable display is generated due to the occurrence of a new start winning, are capable of executing display of an appearance animation that gradually displays a reserved display based on the reserved memory (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2016-22196 A JP 2016-97173 A

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A display means;
A reservation storage means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters as an animation,
The warning display scene is a scene in which text display of a warning when playing the gaming machine is displayed in an animated form,
the animated display of the text display of the company name related to the gaming machine is emphasized more than the animated display of the text display of the caution when playing the gaming machine,
the animation display of the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is emphasized more than the animation display of the character display of the attention calling for playing the gaming machine,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is one state before the completion state,
When the reserved memory is stored, a winning performance can be executed,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the reserved display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
The winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the N-hour variable display of the reserved memory number when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than the specified period; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the N-hour variable display of the reserved memory number when the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the specified period; and when the N-hour variable display of the reserved memory number ends and a new reserved memory is stored before the specific period has elapsed from the reservation shift start timing.
According to this feature, in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, a gaming machine with improved marketability can be provided.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a demo performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a demo performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a demo performance control process. (A1) and (A2) are figures showing the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) are figures showing the second presentation mode, and (C1) and (C2) are figures showing the third presentation mode. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 22. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third presentation mode. 13A is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first presentation mode, and FIG. 13B is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the second and third presentation modes. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation in a low base state. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation in a high base state. 13A shows the start and end conditions for displaying a demo movie, and FIG. 13B shows the configuration of the demo movie display. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in a demo movie. This is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demo performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a demo movie display operation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a demo movie display operation. 13A is a display example of the first scene (company name), FIG. 13B is a display example of the fourth scene (warning 1), and FIG. 13C is a display example of the fourth scene (warning 2). This is a diagram comparing the display modes of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and small patterns. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing the light emission patterns of lamps corresponding to game states. 1A is a diagram showing the arrangement of lamps in a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of FIG. (A1) to (A8) are figures showing an example of operation when a customer waiting demo performance is introduced after the variable display of the first special pattern in a low base state has ended. 37(A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing the main part of FIG. 37. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of a customer waiting demo presentation in a low base state. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of a customer waiting demo presentation in a low base state. (B1) to (B8) are diagrams showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of a customer waiting demo presentation in a high base state. 13 is a timing chart showing the flow of a customer waiting demo presentation in a high base state. A figure showing an example of operation when a pachinko gaming machine is started with a cold start and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of how a pachinko gaming machine starts a customer waiting demo performance after being started up by a cold start. A figure showing an example of operation when a pachinko game machine is hot started in a low base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the start of a customer waiting demo performance after a pachinko gaming machine is started with a hot start in a low base state. A figure showing an example of operation when a pachinko game machine is started with a hot start in a high base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the start of a customer waiting demo presentation after a pachinko gaming machine is started with a hot start in a high base state. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow in which the demo movie display ends over time in a high base state. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends with a starting win in a low base state. 54(A) to 54(G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 53. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a low base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a low base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow in which the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a high base state. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of operation when a demo movie display is ended by steering operation in a low base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a process in which the demo movie display ends in response to a steering wheel operation in a low base state. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing an example of operation when a demo movie display is ended by a menu operation in a low base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a demo movie display ends by a menu operation in a low base state. 11 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a demo movie display ends by a menu operation in a high base state. 13A is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device when a prize is won, and FIG. 13B is a timing chart showing an example of erroneous operation of the payout device when a prize is won. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a bulb failure error occurs during a customer waiting demo performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a priority layer. This figure shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance that is started in a low base state. This figure shows the flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance that starts in a high base state. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for outputting to an LED driver. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a parent table constituting a lamp data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a child table constituting a lamp data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a grandchild table constituting a lamp data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a grandchild table constituting a lamp data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a grandchild table constituting a lamp data table; A diagram showing a lamp data table used when not playing (only the button flashing white and the button flashing red are used during play). Lamp Data Table: Background Normal Parent Table Settings. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: background normal child table. FIG. Lamp Data Table: Background Normal Grandchild Table Settings. Lamp Data Table: Background Normal Grandchild Table Settings. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of background time reduction. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the child table of background time reduction. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of background time reduction. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for background probability change. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the settings of the background probability change child table. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the background probability change grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the background probability change grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the customer waiting demo. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: button white lighting. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the child table for the button white lighting. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of the button white lighting. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button blinking in white. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the button blinking white child table. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the table for indicating that the button is blinking white. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button flashing red. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the child table for the button flashing red. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of the lamp data table: the grandchild table of the button red flashing. FIG. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of a parent table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of a child table of initialization notification. Lamp data table: A diagram showing the setting contents of a grandchild table of initialization notification. Lamp Data Table: A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of an error. Lamp data table: a diagram showing the setting contents of an error child table. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error grandchild table. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a common table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a common table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a common table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a common table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the setting contents of a common table. 1A to 1C are diagrams showing examples of character display and light emission modes in each scene. 13A is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a first scene, FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a third scene, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a fourth scene. 1 is a comparison table showing character animation displays. 1A and 1B are diagrams for explaining similar colors. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a display timing list of a demo movie display. 54(A) to 54(G) are diagrams showing details of the high base state of the display mode of FIG. 53. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state or the special state. 13A to 13F are explanatory diagrams of the fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13A is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a random number value when a prize is won, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing variable categories. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram of whether or not a pending display effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram of a determination ratio for whether or not to execute a continuous breaking effect in a normal state. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a dialogue preview performance setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a dialogue preview performance is executed in the normal state and the performance pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the performance pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a background change is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio of the background change presentation, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a reach suggestion presentation is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a cut-in presentation is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the normal state and the performance patterns of the broken effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the normal state and the performance patterns of the broken effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the time-saving state and the special state, and the performance patterns of the breaking effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach β. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach β. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the first consecutive break effect. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the second consecutive break effect. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a dialogue preview performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change presentation B. A figure showing details of some examples of the operation of pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a reach suggestion performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a reach suggestion performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a weak development performance. A figure showing details of a part of an example of the operation of strong development performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of strong development performance B. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of strong development performance B. A figure showing details of an example of a cut-in performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a jackpot. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a jackpot. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a miss. This is an explanatory diagram for comparing the details of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram for comparing the details of each performance. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the dialogue preview performance. 13 is a timing chart showing details of background change performance A. 13 is a timing chart showing details of background change performance B. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart showing details of the reach suggestion performance. This is a timing chart showing details of the weak development performance. This is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance A. This is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance B. 13 is a timing chart showing details of a cut-in effect. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the result notification presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the speed change of fragment images in each performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a crack pattern in a crack effect. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing display examples of each crack pattern. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern E. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in a crack pattern G. 13A shows a pseudo consecutive effect, and FIG. 13B shows a fragment image displayed in a cut-in effect. (A) shows a fragment image displayed in background change performance A, and (B) shows a fragment image displayed in strong development performance B. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a first modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example 3 of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a fourth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example 5 of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a sixth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a seventh modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an eighth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a ninth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a ninth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a modified example 10 of the present invention. FIG. 1 is a front view showing a gaming machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a main board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a miss effect determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern type determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the special state. (A) to (F) are explanatory diagrams of the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table. 13A to 13D are explanatory diagrams of the loss fluctuation pattern determination table. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams of the fluctuation pattern determination table for misses. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams of the fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot. 4 is an explanatory diagram of each game state. FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram of a special pattern unit, (B) is an explanatory diagram of a variable display of a special pattern, (C) is an explanatory diagram of a display unit for performance, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of a variable display of a sub-pattern. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an input port. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an output port. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing two-byte buffers formed in a RAM used in the switch process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a switch process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a random number update process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start port switch passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning presentation process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol buffer shift process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a display process. An explanatory diagram of the lighting control mode of each hold indicator. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a display control process. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the timing of command transmission when a start winning occurs and the timing of starting light control of the reserve display, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the timing of command transmission at the start of variable display and the timing of starting light control when the reserve memory number of the reserve display has been subtracted, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the timing of starting light control of the special pattern and the timing of starting subtraction of the variable display time at the start of variable display. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the trigger for changing the presentation mode in the presentation mode determination process. FIG. This is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a hold change effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a flash effect process when a prize is won. An explanatory diagram of the ratio for determining whether or not to execute a flash effect when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a button vibration effect process. An explanatory diagram of the lighting control mode of each sub-hold indicator. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 1A is an explanatory diagram of the processing cycle of the CPU and the performance control CPU, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of the animation execution period for each performance mode. (A1) and (A2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode A, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode B, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode C, and (D1) and (D2) are explanatory diagrams of the display mode of the image display device in presentation mode D. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing the movement pattern of the pending display in the appearance animation in presentation mode A. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a shift animation. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode B. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode B. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode C. An explanatory diagram showing the appearance animation in presentation mode D. 13A is an explanatory diagram showing the dwell animation in presentation mode A, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing the dwell animation in presentation mode B. FIG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode A, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode B, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode C, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the ending animation in presentation mode D. An explanatory diagram showing a shift animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing a shift animation in presentation mode A. An explanatory diagram showing a shift animation in presentation mode B. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the active display area and the pending display area in each presentation mode, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the animation in each presentation mode. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is one or more. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is one or more. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0. This is an explanatory diagram of the animation that appears when a pending memory occurs when the number of pending memories is 0. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display of 1 to 3 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display of 1 to 3 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram of when a new pending memory occurs during the shift animation after the variable display of pending memories from 1 to 3 has ended and the next variable display has begun. This is an explanatory diagram of the case where a pending memory occurs within 33 ms after the variable display of pending memory numbers from 1 to 3 has ended and the next variable display has started. This is an explanatory diagram of the case where a new pending memory occurs less than 33 ms before the start of the next variable display after the variable display of pending memories from 1 to 3 has ended. This is an explanatory diagram showing when a new start winning occurs while the number of pending memories is variable displayed as four. This is an explanatory diagram of when a new pending memory occurs in the shift animation of the next variable display after the variable display of four pending memories has ended. This is an explanatory diagram showing when a new starting winning occurs during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the number of reserved memories being four has ended. This is an explanatory diagram of what happens when a new pending memory occurs within 33 ms from the start of the next variable display after the variable display of four pending memories has ended. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display with 0 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram of a case where a new pending memory occurs during a variable display with 0 pending memories, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display. This is an explanatory diagram of the case where a new reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories. This is an explanatory diagram of the case where a new reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms before the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories. This is an explanatory diagram showing the occurrence of a new reserved memory more than 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the timing of starting variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs when variable display is not being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the timing of starting variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs when variable display is not being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when the number of hold memories is 0 and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when there is one hold memory and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when the number of hold memories is 0 and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. This is an explanatory diagram regarding the display timing of the hold indicator and hold display when the number of hold memories is 0 and a new hold memory occurs when variable display is being executed. A comparison diagram of each performance. 13 is an explanatory diagram for storing a random number value extracted during the start port switch passing process. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a special buffer shifting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a special buffer shifting process. This is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in presentation mode C or presentation mode D. This is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in presentation mode C or presentation mode D. This is an explanatory diagram when a new pending memory occurs during a shift animation in presentation mode C or presentation mode D. This is an explanatory diagram of what happens when reserved memory occurs continuously. This is an explanatory diagram showing when the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new reserved memory occurs when variable display is not being executed.

The following describes how to implement the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
Before the display means switches from the background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table for the background display is switched to the luminance data table for the demonstration display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 18, 19, 38, 39, 40, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a step-by-step design in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched on first and then the demonstration display starts makes it possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting everything at once, and to make people aware of the start of the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table;
before the display means switches the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table is switched from the normal state background display luminance data table to the demonstration display luminance data table to control the light emitting means;
Before the display means switches the display from the special status background display to the demonstration display, the luminance data table for the special status background display is switched to the luminance data table for the demonstration display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 18, 19, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a step-by-step design in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched on first and then the display of the demonstration display is started makes it possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting everything at once, and to make people aware of the start of the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1,
The luminance data used initially in the luminance data table for demonstration display is data that emits light in a color different from the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for normal state background display and the final luminance data used in the luminance data table for special state background display (Figures 80, 84, 88, 92, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the color of the last luminance data during the normal state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display, and the color of the last luminance data during the special state background display is different from the color of the first luminance data during the demonstration display. Therefore, when the demonstration display starts in each state, the change in color of the light-emitting means stands out, making it easy to understand that the demonstration display is starting, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
the third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In the first period and the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the background display luminance data table and the demonstration display luminance data table (FIGS. 29, 38, 39, 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the state of the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation. Therefore, by keeping the state constant, this mistake can be prevented, and as a result, ideal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
the third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided corresponding to the performance operation means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the normal state ends, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the luminance data table for demonstration display;
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the third light-emitting means using one luminance data table different from the luminance data table for displaying the background in the normal state, the luminance data table for displaying the background in the special state, and the luminance data table for displaying the demonstration;
during a first period after a game in the special state is ended, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the normal state ends, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table;
In a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table (FIGS. 29, 38, 39, 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the state of the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation. Therefore, by keeping the state constant in both the normal and special states, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused in either the normal or special state, and as a result, it is possible to carry out ideal customer waiting control.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting means, a second light emitting means, and a third light emitting means;
the third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a first scene and a second scene;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means in the first scene in the second period by using a first scene luminance data table corresponding to the first scene;
controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means in the second scene in the second period by using a second scene luminance data table corresponding to the second scene;
controlling the third light-emitting means by using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the first scene and the luminance data table for the second scene in the second period;
In the second scene in the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the one luminance data table (FIGS. 29, 38, 39, 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the state of the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation. Therefore, by keeping the state constant, this mistake can be prevented, and as a result, ideal customer waiting control can be achieved.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1, aspect 4-1, or aspect 5-1,
The first luminance data table is a luminance data table different from the promotion performance luminance data table used when a promotion performance for encouraging the operation of the performance operation means is executed, and the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table has less change in luminance than the luminance data constituting the promotion performance luminance data table (Figures 97 to 105, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, one brightness data table is composed of brightness data for making the operation of the performance operation means less emphasized than when the operation of the performance operation means is being urged, thereby preventing the player from mistakenly thinking that he or she is being urged to operate the performance operation means, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1, aspect 4-1, or aspect 5-1,
The first brightness data table is characterized in that it is composed of brightness data for turning off the light.
According to this feature, one brightness data table is composed of brightness data for turning off the light, which prevents the player from misunderstanding that he is being prompted to operate the performance operation means, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-4 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1, aspect 4-1, or aspect 5-1,
The first light emitting means is provided on the game board,
The second light emitting means and the third light emitting means are provided on the game frame (FIG. 36, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means for presentation is provided in the game slot, but by managing it separately rather than using the same brightness data table as the other light-emitting means provided in the game slot, it is possible to appropriately design the device to prevent the player from mistakingly believing that he or she is being prompted to operate the operation means for presentation, and as a result, it is possible to carry out appropriate customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 3-1, aspect 4-1, or aspect 5-1,
The display means displays a message indicating that the device is starting up after the device is powered on,
The light emission control means includes:
controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is running;
The third light-emitting means is controlled using one luminance data table at a timing related to displaying a display indicating that the display means is activated (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using the brightness data table to emit light before the background is displayed, it is possible to check whether the light emitting means is normal at the start-up stage, and then the light emitting mode can be seamlessly changed to the one for waiting customers, resulting in optimal control of waiting for customers.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, a warning display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the name of a company related to the gaming machine is displayed in text,
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which textual display of a warning is displayed when playing the gaming machine,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which text introducing the gaming machine is displayed,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which text introduction of the gaming machine is displayed,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the title name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a title name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
In the attention-calling display scene in the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled by using a luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene corresponding to the attention-calling display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using one luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene, the luminance data table for the title name display scene, and the luminance data table for the warning display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using the one brightness data table (FIG. 29, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.

The company name includes the name of the company involved in the development, manufacturing, and sales of the gaming machine.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text displays, and since it is desired to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, by emitting dedicated light for each piece, it is possible to highlight them in comparison with other text displays, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
There is another scene between the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene.
In other scenes, a luminance data table different from the first luminance data table is used (e.g., FIG. 29).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a common brightness data table is used in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, so that suitable light emission can be achieved without increasing capacity, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
the execution period of the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene (30 sec)>the execution period of the company name display scene (10 sec), and the execution period of the model introduction scene including the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene (30 sec)>the execution period of the warning display scene (5 sec),
A distinctive feature of this system is that the company name and warning text may be displayed at times other than during the demonstration display.
According to this feature, the model introduction scene and the title name display scene that are displayed only during the demonstration display can be highlighted for a longer period of time, thereby achieving suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
the company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which text display introducing the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which a character display introducing the gaming machine is animated.
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the one luminance data table;
the company name display scene luminance data table includes luminance data linked to an animation of the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine,
The one brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the introduction of the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene and brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the introduction of the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (FIGS. 29, 31, 32, 91 to 98, 119).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are several scenes in which information is conveyed by displaying text, but since it is particularly desired to convey information about a company name, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, it is possible to emphasize the name in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene;
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters as an animation,
The first model introduction scene is a scene in which text display introducing the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
The second model introduction scene is a scene different from the first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which a character display introducing the gaming machine is animated.
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the title name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a title name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table different from the title name display luminance data table in the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period;
The title name display scene brightness data table includes brightness data linked to an animation of the character display of the title name of the gaming machine,
The one brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the introduction of the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene and brightness data linked to the animation of the character display of the introduction of the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (FIGS. 29, 31, 32, 91 to 98, 119).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are several scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, but since it is particularly desired to convey information about the model name, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, it is possible to emphasize it in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the name of a company related to the gaming machine is displayed in text,
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which textual display of a warning is displayed when playing the gaming machine,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the title name display scene in the second period, the light emitting means is controlled using a title name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the title name display scene;
In the attention-calling display scene in the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled by using a luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene corresponding to the attention-calling display scene;
the state of the light-emitting means controlled by using the luminance data table for the company name display scene is emphasized more than the state of the light-emitting means controlled by using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene,
The state of the light-emitting means controlled by using the luminance data table for the title name display scene is emphasized more than the state of the light-emitting means controlled by using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene (FIG. 28, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, and since it is desired to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, this can be emphasized by emitting dedicated light for each piece. In particular, by emphasizing the lighting state of the company name and model title display scenes compared to warning scenes, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-1,
The manner in which the state of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the company name display scene is emphasized more than the state of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene, and the manner in which the state of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the title name display scene is emphasized more than the state of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the attention-calling display scene are any of the following: (1) A manner in which there is a lot of blinking; (2) A manner in which there are a lot of colors that are lit up; and (3) A large number of light-emitting means are used (Figure 28, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the company name and the model title can be emphasized, resulting in an optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of aspect 9-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 9-1,
The aspect of the light-emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the company name display scene is characterized in that it is more emphasized than the aspect of the light-emitting means controlled using the brightness data table for the title name display scene.
According to this feature, the company name can be more emphasized, and it is possible to clearly appeal to players which company the gaming machine is related to, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a model introduction scene,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the model introduction scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a model introduction display scene luminance data table corresponding to the model introduction display scene;
the plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the company name display scene are luminance data configured to be emitted by the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means,
The plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the model introduction scene are luminance data configured so that the first light-emitting means emits light and the second light-emitting means does not emit light (FIG. 29, FIG. 90 to FIG. 98).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are a number of scenes in which information is conveyed by text display; in the company name display scene, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are made to emit light, and in the model introduction scene, the first light-emitting means emits light but the second light-emitting means does not emit light, thereby making it possible to relatively emphasize the company name display scene, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a first model introduction scene, and a second model introduction scene,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
In the company name display scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a company name display scene luminance data table corresponding to the company name display scene;
In the first model introduction scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for a first model introduction display scene corresponding to the first model introduction display scene;
In the second model introduction scene in the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for a second model introduction display scene corresponding to the second model introduction display scene;
The second light-emitting means is controlled using one luminance data table in the first model introduction scene in the second period and in the second model introduction scene in the second period.
According to this feature, there are a number of scenes in which information is conveyed by text display, and in the company name display scene, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are made to emit light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, and in the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, the first light-emitting means is made to emit light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, but the second light-emitting means is made to emit light in a common light-emitting mode, thereby making it possible to relatively emphasize the company name display scene, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a rainbow luminance data table;
When a specific performance is executed, the light emitting means is controlled using a rainbow luminance data table;
The rainbow luminance data table used in the second period and the rainbow luminance data table used when the specific performance is executed are a common luminance data table (FIGS. 28, 31, 32, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more vibrant, and further, by making the brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow common to the brightness data table used in response to specific effects executed during play, there is no need to increase capacity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a rainbow luminance data table;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using a rainbow luminance data table;
When a specific effect executable in the normal state and a special effect executable in the special state are executed, the light emitting means is controlled using a rainbow luminance data table;
The rainbow luminance data table used in the second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the rainbow luminance data table used in the second period after the first period after the end of the game in the special state, and the rainbow luminance data table used when a specific effect executable in the normal state and a special effect executable in the special state are executed are common luminance data tables (FIGS. 28, 31, 32, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more gorgeous, and further, by making the brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow common to the brightness data table used in response to specific effects that can be executed in the normal state and special effects that can be executed in the special state, there is no increase in capacity, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

The gaming machine of aspect 12-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 12-1,
The specific effects and the special effects are characterized in that they are effects that definitively notify the player that they are being controlled to an advantageous state.
According to this feature, the brightness data table used for the performance that is determined to be controlled to an advantageous state is also used for the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene,
The title name display scene is composed of a main title name display part which displays a character display of a main title name of the gaming machine, and a subtitle name display part which displays a character display of a subtitle name of the gaming machine thereafter,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a subtitle name display part luminance data table corresponding to the subtitle name display part at a timing when the main title name display part is switched to the subtitle name display part;
The brightness data table for the subtitle name display part is a brightness data table for making the light-emitting means emit light in a lighting mode linked to the animation of the character display of the subtitle name based on a plurality of brightness data (see FIG. 29, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the main title name and the subtitle name are displayed in that order, and the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed. Therefore, by illuminating the light-emitting means in conjunction with the display animation of the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is animated;
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters as an animation,
The warning display scene is a scene in which a character display of a warning to a player when playing the gaming machine is displayed in the form of an animation,
the animated display of the text display of the company name related to the gaming machine is emphasized more than the animated display of the text display of the caution when playing the gaming machine,
The animation display of the title name of the gaming machine is more emphasized than the animation display of the text display of the caution when playing the gaming machine (FIGS. 120, 121, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by displaying text, and since it is desired to emphasize each piece of information, such as company name information, model title, and warnings, this can be emphasized by displaying each piece with a dedicated display animation. In particular, by emphasizing the display animation of the company name and model title display scenes compared to warning scenes, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a title name display scene and a warning display scene,
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which textual display of a warning is displayed when playing the gaming machine,
The display means includes:
In the title name display scene, the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is animated at a specified display position;
Then, the title name of the game machine is animated.
In the attention-calling display scene, a character display of a warning to a player when playing the gaming machine is displayed in an animation at a specified display position;
After that, the text display of the caution when playing the gaming machine is displayed without animation (FIG. 120, FIG. 121, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display of the game title name is given a lingering movement to draw attention to the title, and the attention is drawn to the title without any lingering movement, so that the characters can be read clearly, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The demonstration display includes a warning display scene,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which textual display of a caution when playing the gaming machine is performed,
the attention-calling display scene is composed of a first attention-calling display part that displays a text display of an attention-call for a first event, and a second attention-calling display part that displays a text display of an attention-call for a second event,
The background color of the text display in the first attention-calling display part is different from the background color of the text display in the second attention-calling display part (FIGS. 33, 34, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using different background colors to draw attention to different events, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when the event changes, thereby enabling optimal control of customer waiting.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The demonstration display includes a company name display scene and a warning display scene,
the company name display scene is a scene in which the name of a company related to the gaming machine is displayed in text,
The attention-calling display scene is a scene in which textual display of a caution when playing the gaming machine is performed,
The background color of the character display in the company name display scene is different from the background color of the character display in the warning display scene (FIGS. 33, 34, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using different background colors for the company name display and the warning notice, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when they switch, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
After the second period ends, the background display is displayed again;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
Before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the background display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the background display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 50, 51, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a step-by-step design is adopted in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched on first, and then the background display starts, thereby preventing a bad feeling when the demonstration display ends, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
After the second period in the normal state ends, the normal state background display is displayed again;
After a second period in the special state has ended, displaying the special state background display again;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table;
before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal state background display, the luminance data table is switched from the demonstration display luminance data table to the normal state background display luminance data table to control the light emitting means;
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the special status background display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the special status background display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 50 to 52, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by adopting a step-by-step design in which the control of the light-emitting means is switched on first and then the background display starts, it is possible to prevent a bad feeling from being felt when the demonstration display ends, and furthermore, the state of the lamp can be quickly notified to the player, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is satisfied,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the variable display is ended, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIGS. 53 to 58, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is satisfied,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the variable display in the normal state is terminated;
displaying a special status background display during a first period after the variable display in the special status is terminated;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the special state has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means
during a first period after the variable display in the normal state is ended, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the variable display in the special state is ended, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for special state background display corresponding to the special state background display;
during a second period following the end of a first period following the end of the variable display in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
during a second period following the end of a first period following the end of the variable display in the special state, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
when the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state, thereby controlling the light emitting means;
When the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state, and the light emitting means is controlled (FIGS. 53 to 58, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is satisfied, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is satisfied,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
displaying a background display during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed;
displaying the background display during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information can be displayed,
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information can be displayed,
The light emission control means
during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table;
In a second period after the first period after the first special identification information ends, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after the first period after the second special identification information ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for demonstration display;
when the first start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information, thereby controlling the light emitting means;
When the second start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information, and the light emitting means is controlled (Figures 53 to 58, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of which of the starting conditions is satisfied, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the starting conditions have been satisfied and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is satisfied,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the variable display is ended, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable display of the effect identification information is displayed so that a transparency of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
When the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value (FIGS. 25, 54, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, it is possible to inform the customer that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is satisfied,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the variable display in the normal state is terminated;
displaying a special status background display during a first period after the variable display in the special status is terminated;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display in the special state has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information can be displayed,
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable display of the effect identification information is displayed so that a transparency of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
When the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed in the normal state, before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state,
In the special state, when the start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information in the special state (FIGS. 25, 54, 124, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in either the normal state or the special state, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, it is possible to inform the customer that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is satisfied, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is satisfied,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
displaying a background display during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed;
displaying the background display during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information can be displayed,
A variable display of a performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information can be displayed,
When the start condition is satisfied, a variable display of the effect identification information is displayed so that a transparency of the effect identification information changes from a first value to a second value higher than the first value;
When the first start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value, the demonstration display is switched to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information,
When the second start condition is satisfied while the demonstration display is being displayed, before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes the second value, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information (FIGS. 25, 54, 124, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of which start condition is met, by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information becomes high, it is possible to inform the customer that the start condition has been met and the demonstration display has ended, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying special identification information when a start condition is satisfied,
A launch operation means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the variable display is ended, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
when the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to the background display and displayed;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the display means switches from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table for the background display and controls the light emitting means before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the background display (FIGS. 59, 60, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify the user that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the launch operating means, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A menu operation means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to a menu display and displayed;
The light emission control means
during the first period, controlling the light emitting means using a background display luminance data table;
during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the menu is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled using a menu display luminance data table corresponding to the menu display;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the menu display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 61 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the menu operation means, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A menu operation means;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed, the demonstration display is switched to a menu display and displayed;
The light emission control means
during a first period after the end of a game in the normal state, controlling the light emitting means using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, controlling the light emitting means using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
In a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for demonstration display;
When the menu is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled using a menu display luminance data table corresponding to the menu display;
when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the normal state, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the menu display to control the light emitting means;
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means in the special state, the luminance data table for the demonstration display is switched to the luminance data table for the menu display and the light emitting means is controlled before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display (FIGS. 61 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, by switching the control of the light-emitting means first, the switching of the light-emitting means can quickly notify that the menu operation means has been operated and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature results in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
After the second period ends, displaying a switching display, and then displaying the background display;
When the demonstration display is being displayed, if an interruption condition is met, the demonstration display is switched to the background display without displaying the switching display (FIGS. 50 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the end of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing as an abrupt change by inserting a switching display, and the end of the demonstration display due to an interruption condition is made to appear as an abrupt change without an interrupting switching display, so that by contrasting these events, it is possible to highlight in particular the fact that the demonstration display ended due to an interruption, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
After the second period in the normal state ends, displaying a switching display, and then displaying the normal state background display;
After the second period in the special state has ended, display the switching indication, and then display the special state background indication;
When the demonstration display is displayed in the normal state, if an interruption condition is met, the demonstration display is switched to the normal state background display without displaying the switching display.

When the demonstration display is displayed in the special state, if the interrupt condition is met, the demonstration display is switched to the special state background display without displaying the switching display (FIGS. 50 to 63, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state and the special state, the end of the demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing as a sudden change by inserting a switching display in between, and the end of the demonstration display due to an interruption condition is made to appear as a sudden change without an interruption display, so that by contrasting these events, it is possible to particularly highlight the fact that the display ended due to an interruption, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

[Mode 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying a guide display related to the performance adjustment at the display start timing of the background display;
Then, display the demonstration display,
Thereafter, the background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed at a timing when the background display starts;
When a power outage occurs and the power is turned on with initialization,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying a guide display related to performance adjustment at a display start timing of the background display;
Thereafter, displaying said demonstration display;
Thereafter, the background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed at the display start timing of the background display (FIGS. 44 and 45).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the start-up situation before an amusement store opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization). In either case of start-up, an amusement store staff member can check the displays by checking the background display after powering on, checking the demonstration display, and checking the guide display, thereby improving the efficiency of the check. Furthermore, when the background display is displayed when the amusement store opens and players are welcomed, the guide display will be the background display, so that proper guidance can be given to adjustments to the presentation from the timing of the start of play, and a suitable gaming environment can be provided to players, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Mode 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, a normal state background display is displayed;
displaying a special status background display in the special status;
In the normal state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the normal state background display is displayed without displaying a guide display related to the performance adjustment at the display start timing of the normal state background display;
Then, display the demonstration display,
Thereafter, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display at a display start timing of the normal state background display;
In the special state, if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on,
After the power is turned on, the special state background display is displayed without displaying a guide display regarding performance adjustment at a display start timing of the special state background display;
Thereafter, displaying said demonstration display;
Thereafter, the special status background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display at the timing when the special status background display starts (FIGS. 46 to 49, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the start-up state before the gaming establishment opens can be either a normal state or a special state, and in order to make it possible to check in the background which state the establishment has started up in, no information display is displayed to avoid any intrusion, and if the background is subsequently displayed again, it is highly likely that the state has already been confirmed, so by displaying the information display from the timing at which the background display starts to be displayed, if the background display is displayed when the gaming establishment opens and players are welcomed, it will be the background display that displays the information display, so that proper guidance can be given to adjustments to the presentation from the timing at which play begins, and a suitable gaming environment can be provided to players, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Mode 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, after the variable display is finished,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guide display related to the performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guide display;
Then, a demonstration display is displayed, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display is completed,
A special status background display is displayed without displaying a guide display related to the performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while displaying the guide display;
Then, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in either the normal state or the special state, by not displaying a guide immediately after the end of the fluctuation, it is possible to prevent the player from being prompted to make unnecessary adjustments to the presentation, and since there is a possibility that the player will have left their seat once the demonstration display has ended, by prompting the player to make adjustments to the presentation immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is satisfied, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is satisfied,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed,
displaying a normal state background display without displaying a guide display related to the performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guide display;
Then, a demonstration display is displayed, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display;
In the normal state, after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed,
displaying the normal state background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the normal state background display while displaying the guidance display;
Then, the demonstration display is displayed, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed,
displaying a special status background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special status background display while displaying the guidance display;
Then, displaying the demonstration display, and after a display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, displaying the special status background display while displaying the guidance display;
In the special state, after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed,
displaying the special status background display without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, displaying the special status background display while displaying the guidance display;
Then, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the change of the first special identification information has finished in either the normal state or the special state, or even after the change of the second special identification information has finished, a guidance display is not displayed immediately after the change has finished, thereby preventing unnecessary prompting for adjustment of the presentation, and since there is a possibility that the player has left his/her seat once the demonstration display has finished, by prompting the player to adjust the presentation as soon as the demonstration display is switched to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
The display means includes:
After the variable display is completed,
displaying a background display without displaying a guide display relating to the performance adjustment, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, displaying the guide display in a specific animation so as to be superimposed on the background display;
Then, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is displayed in the specific animation so as to be superimposed on the background display (FIGS. 39 to 44, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not displaying the information immediately after the change has ended, it is possible to prevent the player from being prompted to make more adjustments to the presentation than necessary, and once the demonstration display has ended, by prompting the player to make adjustments to the presentation immediately after the display switches from the demonstration display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and further, by displaying the information immediately after the display switches from the demonstration display to the background display using the same animation as when the information display is displayed after the change has ended, it is possible to appeal to the player that the information display has been displayed without incurring any costs, and as a result, it is possible to perform suitable customer waiting control.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, after the variable display is ended, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the variable display is ended, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period has elapsed;
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on. Then, a second specific period of time elapses, and the demonstration display is displayed.
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is turned on, the second specific period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 39, 42, 47, 49, 123, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the fluctuation has ended, there is a possibility that the player has not yet been replaced, which would be annoying, so a longer time is set, and since an arcade attendant, not a player, is present after the power is turned on, a shorter time is set so that the arcade attendant can immediately check the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, after the variable display is ended, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed;
In the special state, after the variable display is ended, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period has elapsed;
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then power is turned on with initialization, and then a second specific period has elapsed, whereby the demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and then power-on with initialization is performed. Then, the second specific period elapses, and the demonstration display is displayed.
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 39, 42, 45, 123, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the end of the fluctuation, there is a possibility that the player has not yet been replaced, which would be annoying, so a longer time is set, and since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the starting method that must be performed first when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement store, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, gaming store staff can immediately check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, which results in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then the power is turned on. Then, a first specific period of time elapses, and a demonstration display is displayed.
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is turned on, the first specific period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed;
In the normal state, a power outage occurs, and then power is turned on with initialization, and then a second specific period has elapsed, whereby the demonstration display is displayed;
In the special state, a power outage occurs, and then power-on with initialization is performed. Then, the second specific period elapses, and the demonstration display is displayed.
The first specific period is a period longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 45, 47, 49, 123, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement establishment, by making the demonstration display appear immediately, gaming establishment staff can immediately check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, which results in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 39]
The gaming machine of embodiment 39-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means is provided,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
In the normal state, after the variable display is ended, a demonstration display is displayed when a first specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display is ended, a predetermined period has elapsed, and the demonstration display is displayed again;
In the special state, after the variable display is ended, the demonstration display is displayed when the first specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display is ended, the demonstration display is displayed again when the predetermined period has elapsed;
In the normal state, after a power outage occurs and power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when a second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display ends, the demonstration display is displayed again when the predetermined period has elapsed;
In the special state, after a power outage occurs and power is turned on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed when the second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display ends, the demonstration display is displayed again when the predetermined period has elapsed;
The first specific period is longer than the second specific period (FIGS. 39, 42, 45, 123, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is displayed immediately after the end of the fluctuation, there is a possibility that the player has not been replaced and it would be annoying, so a longer time is set, and since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement store, by making the demonstration display displayed immediately, gaming store staff can immediately check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, and further, by making the period of time until the demonstration display is displayed again after the demonstration display is displayed once the same in any of the situations, that is, after the end of the fluctuation in the normal state, after the end of the fluctuation in the special state, and after a cold start, a demo movie can be shown stably, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (FIGS. 65 to 67, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by continuing to use the lamp to notify of specific errors that occur during play whether the background is being displayed or the demonstration is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of specific errors, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during a game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state is ended, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (FIGS. 65 to 68, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by allowing the lamp to continue to notify of specific errors that occur during play in both the normal and special states, whether the background is being displayed or the demonstration is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of specific errors, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying a first special identification information when a first start condition is satisfied, and variably displaying a second special identification information when a second start condition is satisfied,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
displaying a background display during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed;
displaying the background display during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended;
displaying the demonstration display during the second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed, the light emitting means is controlled using the background display luminance data table;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
In a second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is ended, if the specific error does not occur, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error luminance data table corresponding to the specific error.
Then, in a first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is completed, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Then, in a second period after the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information is ended, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during the variable display of the second special identification information, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Then, in a first period after the variable display of the second special identification information is completed, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information ends, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (FIGS. 65 to 68, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by allowing the lamp notification of a specific error that occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information to be continued and executed both during background display and during demonstration display, it is possible to provide stable notification of specific errors, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
The brightness data constituting the brightness data table for demonstration display and the brightness data constituting the brightness data table for specific errors have different colors that account for a large proportion of the brightness data (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for a demonstration display to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the demonstration display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
The luminance data constituting the background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different colors that account for a large proportion of the luminance data (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for background display to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during a game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state is ended, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Then, in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
the luminance data constituting the normal state background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different colors that account for a large proportion of the luminance data,
The luminance data constituting the special status background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different colors that account for a large proportion of the data (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the luminance data table for a specific error and the luminance data table for normal status background display are configured to have different main colors in the luminance data, and the luminance data table for a specific error and the luminance data table for special status background display are configured to have different main colors in the luminance data, so that regardless of which background is being displayed, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the background display, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using luminance data for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs during the second period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the luminance data for the demonstration display;
The colors that make up the majority of the luminance data for the demonstration display and the luminance data for the specific error are different (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the demonstration display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control to be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error has not occurred during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using background display luminance data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs during the first period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the background display luminance data;
The colors that make up the majority of the luminance data for background display and the luminance data for specific errors are different (FIG. 35, FIGS. 78 to 89, FIGS. 110 to 112, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for a specific error and the luminance data for background display to have different main colors, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using normal state background display luminance data corresponding to the normal state background display;
In a first period after the game in the special state is ended, if the specific error does not occur, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using special state background display luminance data corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the normal state background display luminance data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
Controlling the second light emitting means using the luminance data for the special status background display;
The normal state background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data have different colors that occupy a large proportion of the data,
The colors that make up the majority of the luminance data for the special status background display and the luminance data for the specific error are different (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for a specific error and the luminance data for normal status background display to have different main colors in the luminance data, and by configuring the luminance data for a specific error and the luminance data for special status background display to have different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display in either the normal status or the special status, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued,
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for demonstration display and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for a demonstration display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting mode during the demonstration display, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued,
The luminance data constituting the background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player differs (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for background display, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting state during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Mode 51]
The gaming machine of form 51-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
If no specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a normal state background display luminance data table corresponding to the normal state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the special state is ended, the light emitting means is controlled using a special state background display luminance data table corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error does not occur during a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, the light emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table;
When the specific error occurs during the game in the normal state, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
Thereafter, in a first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Thereafter, in a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
When the specific error occurs during a game in the special state, the light emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table;
Thereafter, in a first period after the game in the special state is ended, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
Then, in a second period after the first period after the game in the special state ends, if the specific error is not resolved, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued;
The luminance data constituting the normal state background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured so that the light emitting operation state of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different,
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the special state background and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the light emitting means visually recognized by the player is different (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for normal state background display, and by configuring the movement of the light emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data table for a specific error and the brightness data table for special state background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light emitting state during the background display regardless of which background is being displayed, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using luminance data for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
If the specific error occurs during the second period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light emitting means using the luminance data for the demonstration display;
The luminance data for the demonstration display and the luminance data for the specific error are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are different (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for a demonstration display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting state during the demonstration display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control to be performed.

[Mode 53]
The gaming machine of form 53-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means and a second light emitting means,
The display means is
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When a specific error has not occurred during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using background display luminance data corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error occurs during the first period,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the background display luminance data;
The light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are configured to be different from each other based on the background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to be different between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for the background display, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting state during the background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state,
The display means includes:
displaying a normal state background display during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended;
displaying a special state background display during a first period after the game in the special state is ended;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period after the end of the game in the normal state;
displaying the demonstration display during a second period after a first period after a game in the special state ends;
The light emission control means
When a specific error does not occur during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using normal state background display luminance data corresponding to the normal state background display;
In a first period after the game in the special state is ended, if the specific error does not occur, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using special state background display luminance data corresponding to the special state background display;
If the specific error occurs during a first period after the game in the normal state is ended,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
controlling the second light-emitting means using the normal state background display luminance data;
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the game in the special state ends,
controlling the first light-emitting means using specific error luminance data corresponding to the specific error;
Controlling the second light emitting means using the luminance data for the special status background display;
The normal state background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data are configured so that the light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by a player are different from each other;
The light emitting operation mode of the first light emitting means and the light emitting operation mode of the second light emitting means visually recognized by the player are configured to be different from each other by the luminance data for displaying the special state background and the luminance data for the specific error (FIG. 35, FIG. 78 to FIG. 89, FIG. 110 to FIG. 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for normal state background display, and by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data for a specific error and the brightness data for special state background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting mode during background display, regardless of whether the state is normal or special, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A payout unit that pays out game media;
A detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game media is satisfied, and the detection means does not detect the game media, and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued,
When the specific error occurs during the second period, in either case where game media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing section or game media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing section, the light emitting section switches from the specific error brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table at a timing related to the detection of the first game medium distributed by the detection means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of gaming balls dispensed to the payout section, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the demonstration display at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first gaming ball, so that the demonstration display can be made to look natural and the processing can be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A payout unit that pays out game media;
A detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game media is satisfied, and the detection means does not detect the game media, and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
When the specific error occurs during a game, the light emitting means is controlled using a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the first period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued;
Thereafter, if the specific error is not eliminated during the second period, the control of the light emitting means using the specific error luminance data table is continued,
When the specific error occurs during the first period, in either case where game media exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing section or game media not exceeding the unpaid number are distributed to the dispensing section, the light emitting section switches from the specific error luminance data table to the background display luminance data table at a timing related to the detection of the first game medium distributed by the detection section (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of the number of gaming balls dispensed to the payout section, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the background display at the timing when the detection sensor detects the first gaming ball, so that the background display can be quickly made to look natural and the processing can be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A payout unit that pays out game media;
A detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game media is satisfied, and the detection means does not detect the game media, and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
during the second period, if a condition for paying out game media is established and a period during which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error to control the light emitting means;
When the specific error occurs during the second period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the luminance data table for the specific error is switched to the luminance data table for the demonstration display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the detection means does not detect a ball, this may be due to a specific error, but it may also be due to a delayed ball, etc., so the light emission mode of the light emitting means is not immediately switched. When a game ball is detected, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the demonstration display, so that the demonstration display can be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, ideal customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of form 58-1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A payout unit that pays out game media;
A detection means provided in the payout unit for detecting game media;
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
When the payout condition of the game media is satisfied, and the detection means does not detect the game media, and unpaid game media occurs, a specific error occurs.
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
The light emission control means
When the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for demonstration display corresponding to the demonstration display;
during the first period, when a condition for paying out game media is established and a period during which the detection means does not detect game media continues for a predetermined period, switching from the background display brightness data table to a specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error, and controlling the light emitting means;
When the specific error occurs during the first period, when a specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the luminance data table for specific errors is switched to the luminance data table for background display to control the light emitting means (FIGS. 35, 64, 65, 78 to 89, 110 to 112, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the detection means does not detect a ball, this may be due to a specific error, but it may also be due to a delayed ball, etc., so the light emission mode of the light emitting means is not immediately switched. When a game ball is detected, the light emission mode of the light emitting means is immediately switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the background display, so that the background display can be made to look natural, and as a result, ideal customer waiting control can be performed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

Next, an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the near side of FIG. 1 is the front (front face, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side is the rear (rear face, back) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing with the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "004SGS1", "Normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach", and "Super reach" may be abbreviated to "SP reach".

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided at the top left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small symbol, the error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the right-hit notification image 004SG201 (see FIG. 21) that prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation, and the remaining time-saving display 004SG202 (see FIG. 21) indicating the number of remaining time-saving turns are displayed in front of the performance images such as characters (higher layer), thereby preventing the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the small symbol, and the error display, while the decorative symbol may be displayed behind the performance images (lower layer), thereby preventing the decorative symbol from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The small pattern is also called the fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable body 32 covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Also, the performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command.

The pattern displayed on the fourth pattern display device provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7 at a specified location on the game board 2), such as the first special pattern LED or the second special pattern LED, is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there are provided display areas (special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying reserved displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. The reserved displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided, but a first special pattern reserved memory display area in which a first reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special pattern is pending is displayed, and a second special pattern reserved memory display area in which a second reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special pattern is pending may be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided, and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. In addition, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also called "board lamps". In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. In addition, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are configured to include LEDs (see FIG. 36). In addition, the various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as time-saving states and probability-varying states, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board 004SG030, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The payout control board 004SG030 is connected to a payout device 004SG031 that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on receiving a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 004SG032 that is provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device 004SG031 pass, and it is possible to stop driving the payout device 004SG031 depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 004SG032.

The payout control board 004SG030 is also connected to a handle sensor 004SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 004SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 004SG030 controls the launcher 004SG033, which can launch game balls onto the game board 2. A signal indicating whether the touch ring 004SG35 is being detected and a signal indicating that the game ball has been launched by the launcher 004SG033 are input from the payout control board 004SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that there is a concept of upper, middle, and lower for each layer, and the higher the layer image, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

The VRAM area contains a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images from layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images from layer 2, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images from layer 3. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (composite) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area is an area in which an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area, is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set as the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set as the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set as the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5. In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing these images to display a first interface image at the bottom of the display screen of the image display device 5, which includes a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U that identifiably displays the first special pattern reserved memory count and the second special pattern reserved memory count, and a second interface image at the top left of the display screen of the image display device 5, which includes a small pattern that is smaller on the display screen than the decorative pattern and a reserved memory count display.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background display is drawn to display the background display across the entire display screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) are set to have the highest display priority, and are therefore displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) is set to have a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, and is therefore displayed as the middle image in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background display) is set to have the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as the lower image in the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently on the display screen of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 3(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 3(A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 3(B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 3B, in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that a cold start refers to a state in which the data is initialized when the power is turned on, without restoring the data before the power is turned on, and the gaming machine is in a state in which various processes can be executed. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that a hot start refers to a state in which the gaming machine is in a state in which various processes can be executed based on the backed-up data when the power is turned on. A hot start is also called a power-on without initialization, since no initialization is performed when the power is turned on. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability-changing control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability-changing control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability-changing control are performed (high probability high base state, time-saving with probability-changing state). Note that the time-saving with probability-changing state may simply be referred to as the "probability-changing state". Command 96XXH is an error designation command that designates that an error has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 and that the error has been released.

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "0" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of the special game when either the first or second start condition is met (when the pending memory number has decreased). Command E100H is a customer waiting demo designation command that designates the execution of a customer waiting demo (demo performance). Command F100H is a frame status display designation command that designates the status of each input port (including the on/off status of the touch ring 004SG35).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 3(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball having entered each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 4, on the main board 11 side, numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result of a special symbol or other such in a special symbol game to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the change pattern is a random number value used to determine the change pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "0" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 5 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state so that when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot game state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B), a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C".

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 6(B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which after the jackpot game state ends, probable variable control and time-saving control are executed to transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "non-probable variable jackpot", in which after the jackpot game state ends, only time-saving control is executed to transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The variable probability control and time-saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C are ended on the condition that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, the time-saving control that is started after the end of the non-variable probability jackpot game state is ended on the condition that 100 variable displays are ended, or that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state before the 100 variable displays are ended. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is any of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C, the variable probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot game state ends, so that the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is called a consecutive state. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays unless the variable display result becomes a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, while when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 7 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, one normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, three types of fluctuation patterns are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns: super reach (no pseudo consecutive hits), super reach (one pseudo consecutive hit), and super reach (two pseudo consecutive hits), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns are as follows: a variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo consecutive hits) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-2); a variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo consecutive hit) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-3); and a variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo consecutive hits) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-4).

As shown in FIG. 7, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the variable display result is a non-variable jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a sure-win A to C, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is one or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern without shortening), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B. More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C. More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a high base state (time-saving state or probability-changing state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 80% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 10% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selection ratio of one of the multiple jackpot variable patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied according to the game state, for example, regardless of the jackpot type. In this way, the variable display is performed with a variable pattern suitable for the game state, which can increase the interest in the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 004SG150 as shown in FIG. 9 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 004SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 004SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 004SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 004SG151C, a game control flag setting section 004SG152, a game control timer setting section 004SG153, a game control counter setting section 004SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 004SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151A stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151B stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but which have not yet started.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 004SG151A associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the first start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 004SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 004SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 004SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in separate reserved memory units in association with the reserved number, the variable display based on the second reserved memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 004SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 004SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 004SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 004SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 004SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 004SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores not only a performance control program, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data holding area 004SG190 as shown in Figure 10 (A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 004SG190 shown in Figure 10 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 004SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 004SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 004SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 004SG194A as shown in FIG. 10 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special chart being variably displayed. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 004SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special chart being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, two commands, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 004SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 004SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 004SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "0" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory or the second special chart reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 004SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing in Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was fluctuating, it is sufficient if the fluctuating special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (step S8). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, the process enters a loop. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 12. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 12.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
14 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 13. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (004SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (004SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (004SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 004SGS102 is not the upper limit (004SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "0" (004SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 004SGS101 (004SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 004SGS102 (004SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (004SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (004SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (004SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in 004SGS105 (004SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "2" (004SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 004SGS103 and 004SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (004SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (004SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 004SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 (004SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random numbers extracted in this way and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserved information at the top of the empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit (004SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 004SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 004SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (004SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12.

Following the processing of 004SGS111, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (004SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

After executing the process of 004SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (004SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is advanced to. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid game ball start winning, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Fig. 13 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in Fig. 15, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (step 004SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 004SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; N), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" (step 004SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 004SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 004SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 004SGS144), and the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 004SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 004SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 004SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 004SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 004SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 004SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 004SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 004SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

In step 004SGS149, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 5 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 004SGS150). In addition, in this step 004SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of a jackpot is off and the game is in a low probability state (this feature is in a low probability, low base state), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result judgment table selected in step 004SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so in the processing of step 004SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine whether the special game display result is a "jackpot", so that when the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is judged (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 004SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 004SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 004SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot type the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 004SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 004SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as a variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is to be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, for example, the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, is set (step 004SGS155), and the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, it is set to "2", and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, it is set to "3". After processing step 004SGS155, proceed to step 004SGS156.

Also, if step 004SGS150 determines that the result is a miss (step 004SGS150; N), step 004SGS156 is executed without executing steps 004SGS152 to 004SGS155.

In step 004SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in response to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determined jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being "miss", a special symbol showing the symbol "-", which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be "jackpot" in step 004SGS150a, if the jackpot type in step 004SGS154 is "variable jackpot A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "C-type jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the fixed special symbol. Note that these fixed special symbols are only examples, and other fixed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 004SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 004SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 004SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 16. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 16 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update processing (step S77), a demo performance control processing (step S78) for executing a demo performance on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a background display update processing (step S79) for updating the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display, and a menu display processing (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in a game standby state are executed. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the first background display 004SG081 corresponding to the first presentation mode, the second background display 004SG082 corresponding to the second presentation mode, and the third background display 004SG083 corresponding to the third presentation mode is selected and displayed. The first background display 004SG081 can be displayed when the game state is in the normal state, the second background display 004SG082 can be displayed when the game state is in the low probability high base state, and the third background display 004SG083 can be displayed when the game state is in the high probability high base state.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes a process for adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and a process for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 17, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a reservation display update process (step S161) to perform a shift display, which will be described later, to update the reservation memory display (first reservation display 004SG101 or second reservation display 004SG102) in the special chart reservation memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 004SG194A. After the reservation display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed according to the value of the performance process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, a pre-reading preview setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process, in which judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading preview performance (such as a performance that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Demo performance control process)
Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figures 18 to 20 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step S78 in Figure 16. In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether or not a demo movie display is being executed (step 004SGS501). Whether or not a demo movie display is being executed is judged by whether or not a demo movie execution flag, which indicates that a demo movie display is being executed, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is not in progress, it is determined whether or not the menu is being displayed (step 004SGS502). Whether or not the menu is being displayed is determined by whether or not the menu display flag, which indicates that the menu is being displayed, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is not being displayed, it is determined whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS503). Whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on is determined by whether or not a touch ring on flag, which indicates that the touch ring 004SG035 is on, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is not on, it is determined whether or not the device is waiting to start a demo movie (step 004SGS504). Whether or not the device is waiting to start a demo movie is determined by whether or not a demo movie start waiting flag, which indicates that the device is waiting to start a demo movie, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is not waiting to start, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demo designation command has been received (step 004SGS505). Whether or not a customer waiting demo designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not a customer waiting demo designation command reception flag, which indicates that a customer waiting demo designation command has been received, has been set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that a customer waiting demo designation command has been received, the demo movie start waiting timer for timing the time until the demo movie display starts is set to a timer value (60,000) equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (step 004SGS506), a demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), a guide display start waiting timer for timing the time until the guide display starts is set to a timer value (15,000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), a guide display start waiting flag indicating a wait for guide display start is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that the customer waiting demo designation command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received (step 004SGS507). Whether or not a power-on designation command has been received is determined by whether or not a power-on designation command reception flag, which indicates that a power-on designation command has been received, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on command has been received, the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (30,000) equivalent to approximately 60 seconds (step 004SGS508), a demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), the guide display start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15,000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), a guide display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that the power-on command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power outage recovery command has been received (step 004SGS509). Whether or not a power outage recovery command has been received is determined by whether or not a power outage recovery command reception flag, which indicates that a power outage recovery command has been received, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS509 that the power outage recovery command has not been received, the demo performance control process is terminated and the main performance control process is returned to. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS509 that the power outage recovery command has been received, the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (45000) equivalent to approximately 90 seconds (step 004SGS510), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), the information display start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), the information display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated and the main performance control process is returned to.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the demo movie is waiting to start, it is determined whether or not the end condition E2 is satisfied, i.e., whether or not a start winning has occurred (step 004SGS514). Whether or not the end condition E2 is satisfied is determined by whether or not the start winning designation command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the start winning designation command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that termination condition E2 is satisfied, the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that the termination condition E2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E3 is satisfied, i.e., whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS515). Whether or not the termination condition E3 is satisfied is determined by whether or not the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 specified by the frame state display specification command has changed from off to on.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied, i.e., whether or not the menu display has started (step 004SGS517). Whether or not the termination condition E4 is satisfied is determined based on whether or not the control of the menu display has started in the previous menu display process in step 80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that termination condition E4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that the termination condition E4 is not satisfied, the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (step 004SGS523), and it is determined whether or not the device is waiting for the start of the guidance display (step 004SGS524). Whether or not the device is waiting for the start of the guidance display is determined by whether or not the guidance display start waiting flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the guidance display start waiting timer is waiting for the display to start, the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is decremented by 1 (step 004SGS525), and it is determined whether the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is 0, i.e., whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the guidance display start waiting timer started timing (step 004SGS526).

If it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is 0, the guidance display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS527), the guidance display is started (step 004SGS528), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the device is not waiting for the guidance display to start, or if it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is not 0, it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is 0, i.e., whether a specified time (60 seconds, 90 seconds, or 120 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer started timing (step 004SGS529).

If it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is not 0, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the performance control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS529 that the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is 0, the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS530), the demo movie running flag is set (step 004SGS531), a timer value (27500) equivalent to approximately 55 seconds is set as the demo movie timer value for timing the time until the demo movie display ends (step 004SGS532), the demo movie display is started (step 004SGS533), the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is in progress, it is determined whether any of the end conditions E2 to E4 has been met, i.e., whether a start winning has occurred, the touch ring 004SG035 has been turned on, or the menu display has started (step 004SGS534).

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that none of the termination conditions E2 to E4 are met, the timer value of the demo movie timer is decremented by 1 (step 004SGS535), and it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, i.e., whether 55 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie timer started timing (step 004SGS536).

If it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is not 0, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS536 that the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, the demo movie running flag is cleared (step 004SGS537), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS538), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS539), a guide display is started (step 004SGS540), the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 has been met, the demo movie running flag is cleared (step 004SGS541), the timer value of the demo movie timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS542), the demo movie display is terminated (step 004SGS543), and it is determined whether or not the termination condition E3 has been met, i.e., whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS544).

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the termination condition E3 is not satisfied, it is determined whether the termination condition E4 is satisfied, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS545).

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 is not satisfied, i.e., if termination condition E2 is satisfied, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that the termination condition E3 is satisfied, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is being displayed, it is determined whether or not end condition 2 is met, i.e., whether or not a start winning has occurred (step 004SGS546).

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is met, i.e., the menu display has ended due to the start winning, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS547), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that the end condition 2 is not satisfied, it is determined whether the menu display has ended (step 004SGS548). Whether the menu display has ended is determined based on whether the control of the menu display has ended in the previous menu display process in step S80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has not ended, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has ended, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS549), the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (60,000) equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), the guide display start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15,000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), the guide display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that touch ring 004SG035 is on, it is determined whether or not end condition 2 is met, i.e., whether or not a start winning has occurred (step 004SGS550).

If it is determined in step 004SGS550 that end condition 2 is met, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the performance control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS550 that end condition 2 is not met, it is determined whether end condition 4 is met, i.e., whether menu display has started (step 004SGS551).

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is not satisfied, it is determined whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is off (step 004SGS552). Whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is off is determined based on whether or not the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 has changed from on to off in response to the frame state display specification command.

If it is determined in step 004SGS552 that the touch ring 004SG035 is off, the touch ring on flag is cleared (step 004SGS553), the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value (60,000) equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS511), the guide display start waiting timer is set to a timer value (15,000) equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (step 004SGS512), the guide display start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guide display start waiting flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guide display start waiting timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

(Type of performance mode)
Next, the types of presentation modes will be described with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21 shows (A1) and (A2) the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) the second presentation mode, and (C1) and (C2) the third presentation mode.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A1), the decorative patterns (for low base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display section 004SG051 consisting of a circular number base section when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section, a character display section 004SG052 displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display section 004SG051, an information display section 004SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base section when viewed from the front and information about the character (for example, in this embodiment, the name of the character) displayed on the front of the information base section, and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG054 displayed so as to surround the periphery of the number display section 004SG051, the character display section 004SG052, and the information display section 004SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 004SG053 shows the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various information other than the name (such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052.

Also, as shown in Figures 21 (B1) and (C1), the decorative patterns (for high base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the high base state are composed of a number display section 004SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9", and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG064 displayed surrounding the number display section 004SG061. The decorative patterns for the high base state do not have a character display section and information display section like the decorative patterns for the low base state.

In addition, the display area 5S provided in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern. The small pattern consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but it is not necessary that all the numbers of both patterns correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern may be numbers "1" to "5", which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" of the decorative pattern, or may be symbols or figures different from the numbers of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 21, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute any one of the following presentation modes: the first presentation mode (see FIG. 21 (A1) (A2)), the second presentation mode (see FIG. 21 (B1) (B2)), and the third presentation mode (see FIG. 21 (C1) (C2)). The first presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. The second presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and the third presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state.

As shown in FIG. 21 (A1), in the first presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a first background display 004SG081 depicting a daytime cityscape is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative pattern is framed in from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward, then moves linearly downward, and is framed out from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward. Also, when the leading decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) that is framed in passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative pattern (e.g., the "4" decorative pattern) is framed in and moves downward. In other words, when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of numbers "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., returning to "0" after "9," and then repeatedly updating and displaying "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing a scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

The display area 5S located in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and the small symbol, while the special pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display the first pending display 004SG101 and the second pending display 004SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display that is being executed. Note that the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, the small symbol, the special pending memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common to all performance modes, so their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in FIG. 21 (B1), in the second presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background display 004SG082 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotating display that rotates around an axis of rotation that faces in the vertical direction.

For example, the decorative pattern in the second presentation mode has a first surface and a second surface that is the opposite surface of the first surface, and the preceding decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of "3") is displayed on the first surface. On the other hand, when the first surface faces forward, it is not possible to determine whether the succeeding decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of "4") is displayed on the second surface. In other words, because the base display unit 004SG064 has low transmittance (is opaque), the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative pattern).

The decorative patterns can also be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from the first side, to the second side, to the first side, to the second side, etc., the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative patterns.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a time-saving remaining display 004SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 21 (C1), in the third presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background display 004SG083 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background display for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 21 (C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative pattern is framed in from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward, then moves linearly downward, and is framed out from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward. Also, when the leading decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) that is framed in passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative pattern (e.g., the "4" decorative pattern) is framed in and moves downward. In other words, when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., before returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

The decorative patterns and small patterns also have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which the decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed, one decorative pattern is framed-in from the top edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a predetermined period is required for it to be framed-out from the bottom edge. In other words, a predetermined period is required for one decorative pattern to be displayed and for the decorative pattern display to cease. Meanwhile, during the predetermined period, the small patterns are displayed by switching (updating) the small patterns of losing combinations multiple times (e.g., five times).

In addition, in the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the first and third presentation modes, and in the rotating display in the second presentation mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts, and changes from high to low when the variable display stops; in other words, the variable display speed is variable, whereas the small patterns are variably displayed at a constant speed from when the variable display starts until it stops.

In this embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 is exemplified as being capable of executing the first, second, and third presentation modes as presentation modes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of presentation modes may be executable. In particular, multiple types of presentation modes may be executable in response to one game state (for example, a low probability, low base state).

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be described with reference to Figs. 22 to 25. Fig. 22 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first presentation mode. Fig. 23 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Fig. 22. Fig. 24 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third presentation mode. Fig. 25 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in (A) the first presentation mode and (B) the second and third presentation modes.

In the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams using lines other than solid lines (e.g., dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without symbols do not indicate images displayed on the display screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in first presentation mode)
First, an example of the operation of each section when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs. 22 and 23.

Figure 22 (A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the first performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. Also, the active display area 5F displays an active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 004SG101 (first reserved memory number "2").

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, while the decorative symbol change start action starts in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 004SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 22(D)). In addition, the first hold display 004SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 004SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 22(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 22(D)).

The erase effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 22(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 22(E), when the shift display of the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moving to the active display area 5F ends, the action of the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (the character's inversion movement) ends and an upward action begins, and when the upward movement ends, a downward movement begins and a scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 22(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(F), the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (character flipping action) ends and an upward action begins, and when the upward movement ends, as shown in FIG. 22(G), a downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22(G), the action of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (the character's flipping action) ends and an upward action begins, and when the upward movement ends, as shown in FIG. 22(H), a downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins.

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts and the variable display of the small pattern starts, the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R, and middle decorative pattern display area starts, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first reserved display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, scrolling display begins after the first pending display 004SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (shift display ends) and is displayed as active display 004SG103, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on the pending display has begun. Also, from when the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative pattern does not scroll, but a variable start action is performed in which the character flips, allowing the player to recognize that a variable display has begun. The operating mode of the variable start action can be changed in various ways.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speeds, a fade-out display is executed with a transmittance of approximately 90%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is slow immediately after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 22(F) and (G), and then moves through the medium speed shown in Figure 22(H) to the high speed shown in Figures 23(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so at high speeds, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Also, as shown in Figures 22(G) to 23(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, then go through medium speed and then fast, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency increases as the display accelerates.

(Example of variable display operation in the third presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the third presentation mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 24 (A) shows the state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolled in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the third performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 004SG101 (first reserved memory number "2"). In addition, the small symbols and the right hit notification image 004SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See Figure 24 (A))

Next, as shown in FIG. 24(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, but since it is in a high base state, the decorative symbol change start action (see FIG. 24(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 004SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 004SG103 (see FIG. 24(C)). In addition, the first hold display 004SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 004SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 24(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 24(D)).

The erase effect 004SG110 displayed in FIG. 24(B) continues to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 24(C), when the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins (see FIG. 24(D)). In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R starts all at once, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scroll display begins after the first pending display 004SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on the pending display has begun.

In addition, when the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speeds a fade-out display is executed with a transmittance of nearly 90%. For example, as shown in Figures 24(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, as shown in Figure 24(G), and then move to the medium speed shown in Figure 24(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually see each decorative pattern at high speeds.

In the present embodiment, the transparency of the decorative pattern is set to a first value (0%) when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary, and when the variable display starts, the transparency gradually increases, and finally becomes a second value (90%) in the high-speed scroll display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In detail, the first value is the minimum value of the transparency, and may be a value at which the decorative pattern is clearly visible. For example, if the decorative pattern is most clearly displayed when the transparency is 5% in the settings, the first value may be set to 5% instead of 0%. The second value is the maximum value of the transparency, and may be a value at which the decorative pattern is almost difficult to see. For example, if the decorative pattern is almost invisible when the transparency is 100% in the settings, the second value may be set to 100% instead of 90%. In other words, the first value and the second value can be changed in various ways.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in response to the start of variable display, it performs an action to start varying the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the shift display ends, which switches the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pending memory display area 5U to active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display, and a variable start action is performed to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is being performed, making it possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the shift display. Also, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is being performed in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute a variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and can perform a common shift display when a variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command). This allows a common shift display to be performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, thereby reducing the number of shift display patterns.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low base state, when the effect control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display with the start of the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 performs a decorative pattern change start action, and does not start the scroll display of the decorative pattern until the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched to and displayed as active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 does not perform a decorative pattern change start action when the pending shift display is being performed with the start of the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 may perform a decorative pattern change start action when the effect control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display with the start of the variable display, and may not start the scroll display of the decorative pattern until the first pending display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched to and displayed as active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display, and a variable start action is performed to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is being performed, making it possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the shift display. Also, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is being performed in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state.

Even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and a common shift display can be performed when a variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command). This allows a common shift display to be performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, thereby reducing the number of shift display patterns.

In addition, in this embodiment, the scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center is started after the shift display that switches the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the special pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the scroll display of the decorative patterns displayed in any one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R among the left, right, and center is started after the shift display that switches the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the active display is completed in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the special pattern, the scroll display of any of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be started while the shift display is being performed.

(Operation of each part when variable display starts)
As shown in Fig. 25 (A), in the first performance mode, when the reserved memory number is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the scroll display is started after the variable start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. In addition, the reserved display is shifted, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started.

The decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scrolling to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed as the decorative patterns are faded out. This fade-out display period A21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in that order. Also, during the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small patterns are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative patterns ends and they are stopped and displayed. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed and the next variable display can start.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(B), in the second and third presentation modes, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-3 is executed, as the variable display of the special pattern starts, the small patterns are displayed variably at high speed, and the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all start rotating or scrolling at the same time without any action to start the variation. In addition, a shift display of the pending display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts.

The decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scrolling to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed as the decorative patterns are faded out. This fade-out display period A23 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually decelerate all at once and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing the patterns to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed statically. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action like those in the first and second presentation modes are not executed, and the variable display ends as is, and the decorative symbols are displayed statically together with the small symbols. After that, a symbol determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed, and the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when a scroll display is performed in the first presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when a rotating display is performed in the second presentation mode or a scroll display is performed in the third presentation mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21. See Figures 25 (A) and (B)).

In the first presentation mode, the appearance shown in FIG. 25(A) will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. In the second and third presentation modes, the appearance shown in FIG. 25(B) will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started.

(Example of SP reach performance)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP reach performance will be described based on Fig. 26 and Fig. 27. Fig. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach performance in a low base state. Fig. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach performance in a high base state. Note that Fig. 27 describes an example of the operation of the reach performance in the third performance mode, but the same reach performance may be executed in the second performance mode, or a different reach performance may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 26(A), when a variable display based on a super reach variation pattern is started in a low base state, the CPU 120 for controlling the display judges whether or not to execute a step-up display in which multiple characters appear step by step, and whether or not to display a specific step-up display pattern (see FIG. 26(B)) in which the background display becomes a rainbow form that notifies a confirmed jackpot at a specific step in the step-up display, based on the result of the variable display. Then, when it is decided to execute the step-up display and to display the specific step-up display pattern, the step-up display is started when a specific time has elapsed since the variable display was started, and the specific step-up display pattern is displayed at the specific step (see FIG. 26(B)). Note that if it is decided not to execute the step-up display, or if it is decided to execute the step-up display but not to display the specific step-up display pattern, a step-up display pattern that does not include a rainbow background is displayed.

Next, after a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode and the reach performance begins (see FIG. 26 (C)). At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed at high speed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach performance is displayed to notify the reach title, and the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as a notification performance to notify whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 26(D)). In the SP reach performance, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is an image different from the first background display 004SG081, which is the normal background display, and which shows space corresponding to the SP reach performance (see FIG. 26(E)(F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with a different mode depending on the type of SP reach performance.

Next, the game starts by displaying an operation prompt display 004SG071, consisting of the text "PRESS!!" that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, and a button display 004SG072 that resembles the push button 31B, for a period of time from when the battle is concluded until the specified operation valid period has elapsed (see FIG. 26 (G)).

When operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 004SG071 and button display 004SG072 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a specified light color while the movable body 32 descends from the origin position to the performance position, the effect display 004SG073 that highlights the movable body 32 is displayed, a specified performance sound effect is output, and the game is informed that it has been controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 26 (H)).

Next, a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background display, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed (see FIG. 26(I)). With the end of the SP reach performance, the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, and when the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (e.g., "222") is temporarily displayed, and then the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 26(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32 does not descend from the origin position to the performance position, and after a result notification display 004SG078 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character (see FIG. 26(K)), a combination of confirmed symbols that is not a jackpot combination (e.g., "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the notification performance when a fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background display (see FIG. 26(L)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(M), when the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fourth background display 004SG084 is hidden and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, and while the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm the loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed, after which the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed temporarily, and the loss display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 26(M)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 27(A), when a variable display based on a super reach fluctuation pattern is started in a high base state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges, based on the variable display result, whether or not to display a specific cut-in performance display pattern (see FIG. 27(D)) in which a specific character appears and the background display becomes a rainbow pattern to notify that a jackpot has been confirmed, and stores the judgment result.

After the decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode and the reach performance begins (see FIG. 27 (B)). At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed at high speed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070 indicating the type of SP reach effect is displayed to notify the reach title, and the SP reach effect (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as an indication effect to notify whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot (see FIG. 27(C)).

Here, if it is decided to display a specific cut-in performance display pattern at the start of the variable display, the reach title display 004SG070 is displayed, and then the cut-in performance starts with the specific cut-in performance display pattern (see FIG. 27 (D)). Note that if it is decided not to execute the cut-in performance, or if it is decided to execute the cut-in performance but not to display the specific cut-in performance display pattern, a cut-in display with a background color other than rainbow is displayed.

In the SP reach performance, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is an image different from the first background display 004SG081, which is the normal background display, and which depicts space corresponding to the SP reach performance (see FIG. 27 (E) (F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with a different appearance depending on the type of SP reach performance.

The flow of Figures 27(G)-(M) is almost the same as Figures 26(G)-(M), except that in Figures 27(J)-(M) the third background display 004SG083 for high base is used, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a specific step-up performance with a rainbow background in a low base state as a specific performance to notify a confirmed jackpot (see FIG. 26(B)), and can execute a specific cut-in performance including a cut-in with a rainbow background in a high base state (see FIG. 27(D)). Although the specific step-up performance and the specific cut-in performance have the same rainbow background, their display modes are different, but the lighting modes of the board lamps and side lamps at this time are the same. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lighting of the board lamps and side lamps based on a common brightness data table (common table), so the data capacity for lighting can be reduced.

(Customer waiting demo performance [demo movie display])
Next, the customer waiting demo performance will be explained based on Fig. 28 to Fig. 34. Fig. 28 shows (A) the start and end conditions for the demo movie display, and (B) the configuration of the demo movie display. Fig. 29 shows an example of the operation of each part during the demo movie display. Fig. 30 is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demo performance. Fig. 31 shows an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Fig. 32 shows an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Fig. 33 shows (A) the first scene (company name), (B) the fourth scene (attention 1), and (C) the fourth scene (attention 2) display examples. Fig. 34 is a diagram comparing the display mode of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (attention 1, 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small pattern.

The "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect that the effect control CPU 120 uses to notify the user that the machine is in a waiting state where no game (e.g. variable display, big win game, small win game, etc.) is being played, i.e., the machine is waiting for customers, and is mainly performed by displaying a demo movie display (see Figures 31 and 32) on the image display device 5.

The demo movie display is a display that is different from the background display during play, and is intended to inform the player that the machine is vacant and not being used by the player. It is made up of a company name scene that informs the player of which company the gaming machine is related to, a machine introduction scene that explains the story of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the characters that appear, the production and specifications, a machine introduction scene that explains the title and subtitle of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a warning scene that informs the player of the precautions to take while playing before playing. In addition to the above content, the demo movie display may also introduce the production or explain the machine specifications in the machine introduction scene, and the content can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figures 28(A) to 30, the "customer waiting demo performance" (hereinafter also referred to as demo movie display or demonstration display) is started based on the performance control CPU 120 determining that any of the following start conditions S1 to S6 has been met. In detail, start condition S1 is met when a first time (e.g., 120 seconds) has passed since a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 has been received following the end of variable display, start condition S2 is met when a second time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since a power-on designation command output from the main board 11 has been received following power-on with initialization, and start condition S3 is met when a third time (e.g., 90 seconds) has passed since a power outage recovery designation command output from the main board 11 has been received following power-on without initialization. Start condition S4 is met when a fourth time (e.g., 120 seconds) has passed since the touch sensor (touch ring 004SG035) was turned off, start condition S5 is met when a fifth time (e.g., 120 seconds) has passed since the menu screen display ended, and start condition S6 is met when a sixth time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the demo movie display that went through conditions S1 to S5 ended (from the second week onwards, the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the customer waiting demo performance ends, just like condition S6).

The "demo movie display" ends when the performance control CPU 120 determines that any one of the following end conditions E1 to E4 has been met. In detail, end condition E1 is met when an end time (e.g., 55 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display started, end condition E2 is met when a start winning occurs, end condition E3 is met when touch ring 004SG035 is detected as being on, and end condition E4 is met when an operation to start displaying the menu screen is performed.

In addition, when the demo movie display is not being executed but the first to sixth hours are being timed in the waiting state for the above start conditions to be met (demo movie start waiting period), if the above end conditions E2 to E4 are met, the timekeeping is stopped, and thereafter, if the above start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are met, the timekeeping is reset (reset).

In addition, during the waiting period for the demo movie to start, the demo movie display is not displayed, but the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed on various background displays as guide displays regarding performance adjustments (see Figure 37 (A4) and Figure 123).

In addition, the guidance display regarding the adjustment of the effect may include, for example, a menu guidance display 004SG401 that displays guidance on the operation of the push button 31B to display a menu screen that allows adjustment of the effect functions, such as customizing and resetting the customization of various effect functions such as the vibration function, V flash function, auto button function, and effect mode provided on the push button 31B, and a volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 that provides guidance on the button operation for adjusting the volume and light intensity, as well as guidance displays for adjusting the effect functions other than those mentioned above.

In addition, if end condition E3 is met, end condition E2 is almost never met. In other words, because the ball-hitting handle 30 must be operated in order for a starting win to occur, end condition E3 is generally met before end condition E2. However, in the following irregular cases, there is a possibility that end condition E2 will be met without end condition E3 being met.

Irregular case 1: The player calls a store attendant based on the occurrence of a grape (so-called a ball stuck between the nails), but the demo movie display starts before the store attendant arrives. If the grape is then released and an initial winning occurs, the demo movie display ends without the ball-hitting operation handle 30 being operated, so that the end condition E3 is not met and the end condition E2 is met.

Irregular case 2: If the on state of the touch sensor cannot be confirmed by the performance control CPU 120 due to some malfunction in the CPU 103 or the performance control CPU 120, a start winning may occur without being able to confirm the on state of the touch sensor, so that the end condition E2 is met without the end condition E3 being met.

Note that the end condition E3, which is satisfied when the touch sensor is in the on state, does not have to be set as the end condition. In such a case, the demo movie display will not end due to the handle operation alone, and the end condition E2 will be satisfied when the start winning occurs, and the demo movie display will end.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the demo movie display is made up of four scenes, Scene 1 to Scene 4. In more detail, Scene 1 is the "Company Name" part (Company Name Part) that displays the names and slogans of companies involved in the development, manufacturing, sales, etc. of the company in question (see FIG. 31(A)(B)).

The second scene is made up of the "machine introduction 1" to "machine introduction 3" parts (machine introduction 1 to 3 parts) in which the story of the performance performed by the pachinko game machine is introduced. In the "machine introduction 1" part (machine introduction 1 part), the friendly characters and their names appearing in the performance are displayed (see FIG. 31 (C) to (F)). In the "machine introduction 2-1" part (machine introduction 2-1 part), a confrontation scene between friendly characters and enemy characters and narration text are displayed (see FIG. 31 (G) and (H)). In the "machine introduction 2-2" part (machine introduction 2-2 part), a confrontation scene between friendly characters and enemy characters and narration text are displayed (see FIG. 31 (J) and (K)). In the "machine introduction 2-3" part (machine introduction 2-3 part), a confrontation scene between friendly characters and enemy characters and narration text are displayed (see FIG. 32 (M) to (O)). In the "Model Introduction 3-1" part (Model Introduction 3-1 part), a cut-in display of an ally character is displayed without text between the "Model Introduction 2-1" part (Model Introduction 2-1 part) and the "Model Introduction 2-2" part (Model Introduction 2-2 part) (see Figure 32 (I)), and in the "Model Introduction 3-2" part (Model Introduction 3-2 part), a cut-in display of an ally character is displayed without text between the "Model Introduction 2-2" (Model Introduction 2-2 part) and the "Model Introduction 2-3" part (Model Introduction 2-3 part) (see Figure 32 (L)).

The third scene is composed of a "Machine Name Main Title Name" part (main title part) in which the main title name of the pachinko machine is displayed, and a "Machine Subtitle Name" part (subtitle parts 1 and 2) (see Figures 32 (P) to (V)). In the "Machine Main Title Name" part (main title part), the main title name "FEVER POWER" is displayed, and in the "Machine Subtitle Name" part, the subtitle name "II/All Together Ver." is displayed.

The "machine main title name" is the main theme of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and expresses the theme of the machine in one word, while the "machine subtitle name" is the subtitle of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be supplementary information added to the machine main title name (for example, "II" indicating that this is the second work of this title, or the heading "All Together Ver."), and the content can be changed in various ways.

The fourth scene is made up of a "warning 1" part (warning 1 part) and a "warning 2" part (warning 2 part), in which the player is warned (see Figure 32 (W) to (X)). In the "warning 1" part (warning 1 part), a warning message is displayed to prevent the player from becoming addicted to playing the game, and in the "warning 2" part (warning 2 part), a warning message is displayed to prevent physical accidents caused by the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 29, after the start condition is satisfied, various demo images are displayed in the order of the first scene, the second scene, the third scene, and the fourth scene. The display period tb2a of the first scene is about 10 seconds (tb2a=10 seconds), the display period tb2b of the second scene is about 30 seconds (tb2b=30 seconds), the display period tb2c of the third scene is about 10 seconds (tb2c=10 seconds), and the display period tb2d of the fourth scene is about 10 seconds (tb2d=5 seconds), and the display period tb of one demo movie display is about 55 seconds (tb2=55 seconds). Then, as shown in FIG. 30, if the first demo movie display ends without the end conditions E2 to E4 being satisfied during the display of the demo movie display, that is, if the first demo movie display started by the satisfaction of any of the start conditions S1 to S5 ends by the end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) will be entered. After that, when 30 seconds, which is the sixth time, have elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is deemed to be met and the demo movie display starts again. After that, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display end conditions E2 to E4 end.

While the demo movie display is being displayed on the image display device 5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are hidden, and the display of the number of reserved memories and small symbols is maintained (see Figures 31 and 32). Note that, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the number of reserved memories and small symbols are displayed while the demo movie display is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories and small symbols may be hidden while the demo movie is being displayed.

In addition, while the demo movie display is being displayed on the image display device 5, the performance control CPU 120 controls the illumination of the board lamps (attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f) and frame lamps (main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b) based on a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo), while controlling the illumination of the button lamp 9e based on a white lighting (default) brightness data table (lamp data table described later: button white lighting) that does not correspond to the demo movie display. Also, although background music is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R, music for the demo movie display may be output.

The brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (the lamp data table: customer waiting demo described later) is made up of multiple brightness data tables (grandchild tables described later).

In more detail, the brightness data table for the main lamp 9a (grandchild table described later) that constitutes the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo described later) includes a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period from model introduction part 1 to model introduction part 2-3, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the main title part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 1, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of subtitle part 2, and a brightness data table corresponding to the period from warning part 1 to warning part 2, and light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table for each period.

The brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) for the side lamp 9b, the attacca lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the decorative lamp 9f (grandchild tables described later) includes a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the company name part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 2-1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 3-1 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 2-2 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 3-2 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the model introduction 2-3 part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the main title part, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the subtitle part 1, a brightness data table corresponding to the period of the subtitle part 2, and a brightness data table corresponding to the periods of the warning 1 part to the warning 2 part. The light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table for each period.

The control using the brightness data table during the period when the demo movie is displayed will be described in detail later.

(Example of demo movie display)
Next, an example of the operation of the demo movie display will be described with reference to Figs. 31, 32, 119 to 121. In Fig. 119, (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing an example of the character display and light emission mode in each scene. Fig. 120 shows an example of the operation of the first scene (A), the third scene (B), and the fourth scene (C). Fig. 121 is a comparison table showing the character animation display.

An example of an expression showing a display mode used in the following description will be described.
A "fade-out display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image increases over time, whereas a "fade-in display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image decreases over time.

An "animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (moving image display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame before, and visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transparency of the displayed image different from that of the image one frame before. In other words, an "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement, such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarged display", "reduced display", "frame-in display", and "frame-out display", but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display", in which the display mode, such as color tone, changes. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of animation display, and refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) in which the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous image, and the display mode does not change at all.

In addition, an example of an expression used in the following description to indicate a light emission mode will be described.
"Wave lighting" is a lighting pattern that sequentially changes the brightness of the brightness data, and has less change in brightness between each data than the following flash, for example, the brightness of the lamp increases at a predetermined cycle, the color changes at a predetermined cycle, or a predetermined color is emitted to move within the lighting area. It is also used when the effect element is not sufficient to simply keep the lamp lit, or when it is desired to emphasize the image display device 5 rather than the lamp, as in the following flash, so that the lamp does not stand out too much.

"Flash" is a lighting pattern that alternates between high brightness data and low brightness data (including off). By varying the intensity of the light, it is possible to greatly change the brightness perceived by the player, and this lighting pattern is used for emphasis.

"Rainbow" is a pattern commonly used when the display in FIG. 26(B) is executed in a low base state, and when the effect in FIG. 27(D) is executed in a high base state. In this embodiment, a rainbow wave pattern is used in which the seven colors are lit in waves by sequentially changing the brightness data, but a rainbow flash pattern may also be used by sequentially changing the brightness data of the seven colors and alternating between the brightness data with low brightness data (including off).

As shown in Fig. 31 (A) and (B), when the start conditions for the demo movie display are met, the display of the first scene starts. Note that, as described later, depending on the start conditions, a switching display may be displayed before the display of the first scene starts. In the first scene, a company name background display 004SG301 consisting of white characters is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302 consisting mainly of a blue company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B is displayed in a "small" size at the center of the screen, and then faded in while gradually expanding and decreasing the transmittance (transparency), so that the company name display 004SG302 appears to be moving from the back side of the display screen to the front side. Note that the number of reserved memories and small patterns are displayed and maintained in the display area 5S at the upper left of the display screen. In this way, even if the decorative pattern is not displayed, the small pattern is displayed, so that the player can recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

In addition, in the first scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) change their light emission state (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302. For example, the brightness of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may increase or the color may change as the transmittance of the company name display 004SG302 decreases.

To explain in more detail using Figure 120(A), first, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed in "small" size at the center of the screen, and then fades in over a period of about three seconds while gradually expanding and decreasing in transmittance (transparency) (see Figure 120(A1)). When it is displayed at the specified position, a bound display is displayed in which the company name display 004SG302 collides with a wall, bounces off, and is then displayed at the specified position (see Figure 120(A2)). Then, after being statically displayed at the specified position in the center of the screen for about four seconds (see Figure 120(A3)), it is faded out over one second (see Figure 120(A4)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (A1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash white when the company name display 004SG302 is displayed, and then light up in white. In this way, the white flash at the start of the demo movie display emphasizes that the display of the company name display 004SG302 is about to begin. Then, the brightness increases in conjunction with the company name display 004SG302 expanding and fading in (white fade-in lighting), flashes white in conjunction with the bound display of the company name display 004SG302, then lights up in white, and the brightness decreases in conjunction with the fade-out display (white fade-out lighting).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 1" part of the second scene begins to be displayed, the friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D that appear in various effects and the text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D showing the names of each character are faded in sequentially (animated display), while the effect display 004SG502 is displayed in the background (see Figures 31 (C)-(F)). Note that, as shown in Figure 119 (A2), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in the color corresponding to each character as each character appears and their names fade in, and then light up white.

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-1" part of the second scene begins to be displayed, an animation of the enemy character 004SG510A that appears in various effects is displayed, and a fade-in (animated) text display 004SG511A reads "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" (see Figures 31 (G) and (H)). Next, when the "Model Introduction 3-1" part begins to be displayed, a background display 004SG503 showing the city and an ally character 004SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in display is displayed showing the ally character flying through the city to rush to the scene (see Figure 31 (I)).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-2" part of the second scene starts to be displayed again, the ally character 004SG500A, enemy character 004SG510A, and text display 004SG511B saying "Protect the town from the enemy!" are faded in (animated) (see Figures 31 (J) and (K)). After that, when the "Model Introduction 3-2" display starts, the ally character 004SG500A is enlarged and a cut-in display is displayed with the effect display 004SG504 in the background (see Figure 31 (L)).

Next, when the "Model Introduction 2-3" part of the second scene starts to be displayed again, an image of friendly character 004SG500A and enemy character 004SG510A fighting and text display 004SG511C saying "Don't lose!" are faded in (animated) (see Figures 32 (M) to (N)). After that, all friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and text display 004SG511D saying "Everyone unite!" are faded in (animated) (see Figure 32 (O)).

Note that the animation display of the friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A in the second scene involves the friendly characters expanding and contracting and fighting, while the various text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D and 004SG511A-004SG511D are animated with less change in visibility than the animation displays involving movement such as the friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D, for example by fading in at the start of the display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (A2), in the second scene, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash green when "Model Introduction 3-1" and "Model Introduction 3-2" are displayed, but they are basically lit in a white wave pattern, and the lighting state (e.g., lighting, blinking, turning off, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or never) changes in conjunction with the animation display (fade-in display) of the various text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D, 004SG511A-004SG511D. Basically, the lighting state (e.g., lighting, blinking, turning off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes in conjunction with the dynamic animation display of friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A running, jumping, punching, etc.

Specifically, for example, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may light up, flash, or change color in accordance with movements such as running, jumping, and punching of friendly characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A.

In the second scene, the main lamp 9a is controlled to be turned off, but the light emission mode of the main lamp 9a may be changed in the same way as the other panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Next, when the display of the third scene begins, an effect display 004SG505 is displayed in the background, and a model main title name display 004SG520A consisting of the words "FEVER POWER" and a cloud-shaped background is displayed in "small" size in the center of the display screen (prescribed display position), and then fades in (animated) while gradually enlarging and decreasing its transmittance (transparency), giving the appearance that the model main title name display 004SG520A is moving from the back of the display screen to the front (see Figures 32 (P) to (R)).

Next, the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, consisting of the letters "II," is displayed in "extra large" size to the right of the model main title name display 004SG520A (standard display position), then fades in while shrinking slightly and decreasing its transmittance (transparency), and finally bounds in "large" size to the right of "FEVER POWER" (standard display position) (see Figures 32 (S) to (T)).

In addition, the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, which consists of the characters "Everyone Assemble Ver.", is displayed in "extra large" size in the center (default display position) in front of the model main title name display 004SG520A, and then it shrinks slightly and moves to the bottom of "FEVER POWER" (default display position) where it is displayed in "large" size (see Figures 32 (U) to (V)).

In addition, in the third scene, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are basically lit in a rainbow wave pattern, and the lighting state changes in conjunction with the animated display of the model subtitle name displays 004SG520C, 004SG520C. In particular, in the "Model Subtitle Name" part, when the model subtitle name displays 004SG520C, 004SG520C move and bound to the specified display position, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash.

Using Fig. 120(B), the display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C consisting of the characters "Everyone Gathers Ver." will be explained in detail. After being displayed in "extra large" size in the center (prescribed display position) in front of the model main title name display 004SG520A (see Fig. 120(B1)), it moves slightly shrinking over about 0.5 seconds to the lower side of "FEVER POWER" (prescribed display position) and bounds in "large" size (see Fig. 120(B2)), and is statically displayed at the prescribed display position for 0.5 seconds (see Fig. 120(B3)). After that, the entire model title name display 004SG520 consisting of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C is gradually enlarged (animated) over about 1.5 seconds (see Fig. 120(B4)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (A3), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in rainbow (rainbow wave) when model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed, and when model subtitle name display 004SG520B and model subtitle name display 004SG520C are displayed, they flash white in conjunction with the zoom in/out (animation) display and then light up in rainbow (rainbow wave) lights.

Next, when the "Caution 1" part of the fourth scene starts to be displayed, a dark green caution background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the anti-addiction display 004SG312 is faded in (animated) in the center of the screen (see FIG. 32 (W)). Next, when the "Caution 2" part starts to be displayed, the display switches to a black caution background display 004SG321, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed (see FIG. 32 (X)).

Using Figure 120 (C), the display of the "Warning 1" part will be explained in more detail. When the display of the "Warning 1" part of the fourth scene begins, a dark green warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and an anti-addiction display 004SG312 is displayed in the center of the screen at the specified display position, fading in (animated) for 0.5 seconds (see Figures 120 (C1) and (C2)). Next, after the transparency of the anti-addiction display 004SG312 becomes 0% (see Figure 120 (C3)), it is displayed still for 2 seconds (see Figure 120 (C4)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 119 (A4), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not flash white in conjunction with the fade-in display of the anti-adventure display 004SG312 in the "Caution 1" and "Caution 2" parts, but continue to light up in white waves in the fourth scene.

In addition, in the fourth scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not change their light emission state (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the addiction prevention display 004SG312, so the addiction prevention display 004SG312 is prevented from being displayed more emphasized than the company name display 004SG302, the model main title name display 004SG520A, and the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C.

(Comparison of display modes for each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 28B, the display modes of the image display device 5 in the various scenes during the demo movie display will be compared with reference to FIGS.

<Display mode when text display begins> In the first scene (company name), second scene (model introduction 1, 2), third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and fourth scene (warning 1), various text is faded in (animated), whereas in the second scene (model introduction 3) and fourth scene (warning 2), various text is not faded in (animated).

<Text animation (degree of change in visibility)> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), an animation is displayed with a "large" degree of change in visibility, in the second scene (model introduction 1, 2) an animation is displayed with a "medium" degree of change in visibility, in the second scene (model introduction 3) and fourth scene (warning 1) an animation is displayed with a "small" degree of change in visibility, while in the second scene (model introduction 3) and fourth scene (warning 2), no animation is displayed for the text.

<Text size> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (main title name of the model), the text is displayed in "small" size and then enlarged to "large", while in the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the text is displayed at a fixed "small" or "medium" size from the start. Also, in the second scene (model introductions 1 and 2), the text is displayed in "medium" size, while in the third scene (subtitle name of the model), the subtitle text is displayed in "extra large" size and then reduced to "large".

<Background color> In the first scene (company name), the background color is white, in the second scene (model introductions 1-3) the color corresponds to the story, in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) the color corresponds to the title, and in the fourth scene (warning 1), the warning 1 part is dark blue and the warning 2 part is black.

For example, when displaying text, the text will be emphasized more when it is animated than when it is not animated, the text will be emphasized more when there is a large change in visibility in the animation than when there is a small change in visibility, and the text will be emphasized more when there are many text colors than when there are few text colors.

As shown in FIG. 28(B), the animation display of the company name display 004SG302, which is made up of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B displayed in the first scene (company name), is displayed in such a way that the text fades in and then bounds and expands in size, whereas the animation display of the anti-addiction display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1) fades in, but the size remains "medium", so that the animation display of the company name display 004SG302 is more emphasized than the animation display of the anti-addiction display 004SG312, i.e., the degree of change in the visibility of the text display is greater.

In addition, the animated display of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) is a display in which the text display fades in to a specified display position and then expands, contracts or moves, whereas the animated display of the anti-addiction display 004SG312 displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1) is a display in which the text display simply fades in to a specified display position and does not change thereafter by expanding, contracting or moving, so that the animated display of the company name display 004SG302 is more emphasized than the animated display of the anti-addiction display 004SG312, i.e., the degree of change in the visibility of the text display is greater.

Here, based on Figures 120 and 121, we will compare the animated text displays in the first scene (company name), the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and the fourth scene (warning 1).

As shown in Fig. 121, in the first scene (company name), the company name display 004SG302 is displayed with a fade-in while expanding at the start of display (see Fig. 120 (A1)), is displayed with a bounding display when the specified position is displayed (see Fig. 120 (A2)), and is displayed as still after the specified position is displayed (see Fig. 120 (A3)). In the third scene (model main title name), the model main title name display 004SG520A is displayed with a fade-in while expanding at the start of display, is displayed as still when the specified position is displayed (see Figs. 32 (P) to (R)), and is displayed as expanded after the specified position is displayed (see Fig. 120 (B4)). In the third scene (model subtitle name), the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C is enlarged at the start of display and then reduced (see Figs. 120(B1) and (B2)), is still displayed when the specified position is displayed (see Fig. 120(B3)), and is enlarged after the specified position is displayed (see Fig. 120(B4)). In the fourth scene (warning 1), the addiction prevention display 004SG312 is faded in at the start of display (see Figs. 120(C1) and (C2)), and is still displayed when and after the specified position is displayed (see Figs. 120(C3) and (C4)).

In other words, the degree of emphasis in the display is as follows: company name >= model title (main, sub) > warning. The warning is only a fade-in display when the display starts, and there is no animation when the specified position is displayed or after the specified position is displayed, so the degree of emphasis is low. On the other hand, the company name is emphasized more than the warning because it uses animation display in two places, when the display starts and when the specified position is displayed, and the model title name (main, sub) is emphasized more than the warning because it uses animation display in two places, when the display starts and after the specified position is displayed.

In this way, the demo movie display has multiple scenes that convey information through text display, but since it is desired to emphasize information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, each can be emphasized by displaying them with a dedicated display animation. Among these, by emphasizing the animation display of the company name and model title display scene compared to the warning 1 scene, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the text display of the model main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, 004SG520C is faded in to the specified display position, and then an animation display is performed in which the size is enlarged, reduced, or moved, whereas in the fourth scene (warning 1), the addictive prevention display 004SG312 is faded in to the specified display position, and then it is displayed without an animation display in which the size is enlarged, reduced, or moved.

In this way, by adding a lingering movement to the display of the machine title name, customers are drawn to the title, and by not adding a lingering movement to the display of the attention, the characters can be read clearly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Comparison of company names and warning notices)
Here, based on Figures 33 and 34, the display modes of the number of reserved memories and small patterns in the first scene (company name) and the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) are compared.

As shown in FIG. 33(A), in the first scene (company name), a company name background display 004SG301 is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302 consisting of a company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B is displayed in the center of the screen. The number of reserved memories and small patterns are displayed in the display area 5S located in the upper left of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 33(B), in the fourth scene (warning 1), a warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and an animation of an addiction prevention display 004SG312 is displayed in the center of the screen. The addiction prevention display 004SG312 is composed of a heading display 004SG313 consisting of the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games that should be enjoyed in moderation," and a horizontally long rectangular heading frame display 004SG314 that forms the background of the heading display 004SG313.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG321 is displayed and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is displayed. The accident prevention display 004SG322 is composed of a first accident prevention display 004SG322A and a second accident prevention display 004SG322B.

The first accident prevention display 004SG322A is composed of an illustration display 004SG323A showing a situation where a player hits his head on the protruding part at the top of the gaming machine frame 3, a heading display 004SG324A consisting of the characters "Watch your head", a warning detail display 004SG325A consisting of the characters "The top protrudes. Be careful not to hit your head", a warning mark 004SG326A consisting of an "!" displayed within a triangular mark, and an attention mark display 004SG327A consisting of an "x" mark.

The second accident prevention display 004SG322B is composed of an illustration display 004SG323B showing a situation in which the player's fingers are caught in the gap between the stick controller 31A and the cabinet, a heading display 004SG324B consisting of the text "Watch out for pinched fingers", a warning detail display 004SG325B consisting of the text "The stick will move. Take care not to get your hands or fingers caught", a warning mark 004SG326B consisting of an "!" displayed within a triangular mark, and an attention mark display 004SG327B consisting of a "↓" mark.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the first scene (company name), the characters in the company slogan display 004SG302A are medium size and chromatic (blue) in color, the characters in the company logo display 004SG302B are large size and chromatic (blue) in color, and the company name background display 004SG301 is achromatic (white) in color.

In the fourth scene (warning 1), the text of the heading display 004SG313 is medium size and achromatic (white), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the warning background display 004SG311 is chromatic (light blue). In addition, the border of the heading frame display 004SG314 is achromatic (black).

The background of the text displayed in the heading display 004SG313 includes not only the warning background display 004SG311, which covers the entire display screen, but also the heading frame display 004SG314, which is provided in part of the display screen.

In the fourth scene (warning 2), the illustration display 004SG323A is "large" in size and achromatic (white) in color, the text of the heading display 004SG324A is "medium" in size and achromatic (white) in color, the text of the warning detail display 004SG325A is "small" in size and achromatic (white) in color, the warning mark 004SG326A is "medium" in size and chromatic (yellow) in color, the attention mark display 004SG327A is "small" in size and chromatic (red) in color, and the warning background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black) in color.

The "Caution Marks 004SG326A, 004SG326B" are marks that help make the heading text that draws the player's attention more noticeable, and the "Attention Mark Display 004SG327A, 004SG327B" are marks that help the illustration that shows the area the player should pay attention to. Unlike text, these are displayed as a single mark, so it is preferable that they are a chromatic color so that they stand out more than the achromatic heading text display.

The reserved memory number and small pattern are "small" in size and achromatic (black) in color.

As shown in Figures 33(A) and 34, when comparing the display mode of the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name) with the number of reserved memories and small patterns, the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B have a larger character size, use a greater number of display colors, and have higher saturation and brightness that make up the color tone than the number of reserved memories and small patterns, so the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more emphasized than the number of reserved memories and small patterns.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved memories and the small pattern are shown in an achromatic color (black), but they may be in a chromatic color. Even in this case, the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more emphasized than the number of reserved memories and the small pattern as long as they satisfy at least one of the following: a larger character size, a greater number of display colors, and higher saturation/brightness than the number of reserved memories and the small pattern.

Next, as shown in Figures 33 (B), (C) and 34, comparing the addiction prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) with the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG311 is a chromatic color (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 that forms the background of the heading display 004SG313 is a chromatic color (dark blue), while the warning background display 004SG321 is an achromatic color (black).

In this way, by using different background display colors for the text display of the warnings in Warning Part 1 and Warning Part 2, which are different, it is possible to increase the attention paid to different issues, such as preventing addiction and preventing physical accidents, when switching from Warning Part 1 to Warning Part 2, thereby resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Next, comparing the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name) with the addiction prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), the company name background display 004SG301 in the company name display 004SG302 is achromatic (white), while the caution background display 004SG311 in the addiction prevention display 004SG312 is chromatic (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the caution background display 004SG321 in the accident prevention display 004SG322 is achromatic (black).

In this way, the background display color of the text display is different between the first scene (company name) and the fourth scene (warning 1, warning 2), which is different. By using different background colors for the company name display and the warnings, it is possible to increase the sense of attention when they switch, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, in this embodiment, the background display color of the text display of the company name background display 004SG301, the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 are all different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the background display color of the text display of at least one of the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 is different from the background display color of the text display of the company name background display 004SG301.

(Comparison of lighting patterns in each scene)
Next, based on FIG. 28B, the light emission state of the lamp in each scene during the demo movie display will be compared with reference to FIG. 31 and FIG.

<Linkage with animated text display> In the first scene (company name), third scene (main title name of model, subtitle name of model), and fourth scene (warning 1), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in conjunction with the animated text display (fade-in display), whereas in the second scene (model introductions 1 and 2), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in conjunction with the animated character display, not in conjunction with the animated text display (fade-in display).

<Degree of emphasis> In the first scene (company name) and third scene (main model title name, subtitle model name), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated with a "high" degree of emphasis. In the second scene (model introductions 1-3), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated with a "medium" degree of emphasis. In the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated with a "low" degree of emphasis.

"Degree of emphasis" refers to the degree of emphasis in the light emission mode of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). For example, a flash (blinking), i.e., when the interval between color changes in the luminance data is short, will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a wave-like lighting, where the interval between color changes in the luminance data is long; a large number of lit lamps will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a small number of lit lamps; a large number of lit colors will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a small number of lit colors; a large proportion of chromatic colors will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a small proportion of chromatic colors; a rainbow-lit lamp will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a non-rainbow-lit lamp; and a high brightness will result in a higher degree of emphasis (highlighted mode) than a low brightness.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 119 and based on FIG. 28(B), the first scene (company name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with the text animation display, so the degree of emphasis is "high," the second scene (model introductions 1-3) has a green flash but is not linked to the text animation display, so the degree of emphasis is "medium," the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name) has a scene in which a white flash is used in conjunction with the text animation display, so the degree of emphasis is "high," and the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) is not linked to the text animation display, so the degree of emphasis is "low."

In other words, the degree of emphasis of the lamp is higher when the lighting mode is on for the company name than when it is warning, and also higher when the lighting mode is on for the title name than when it is warning. And because there are more lamp changes linked to animation displays for company names than for model titles, the lighting mode for company names is higher in emphasis than the lighting mode for model titles. Therefore, the relationship of lamp emphasis is company name > model title (main, sub) > warning.

In addition, since multiple panel lamps and frame lamps are provided at multiple locations, when comparing the degree of emphasis between the light emitted by a first lamp consisting of multiple lamps and the light emitted by a second lamp consisting of multiple lamps, it is sufficient to compare the light emission mode when the entire first lamp is averaged with the light emission mode when the entire second lamp is averaged, rather than comparing the degree of emphasis between one first lamp and one second lamp.

<Rainbow> In the "Model Subtitle Name" part (e.g., FIG. 32 (P)-(V)) of the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), the board lamp and frame lamp are illuminated in rainbow mode. The brightness data table (grandchild table described later) used at this time is the same as the rainbow brightness data table used in the step-up effect (see FIG. 26 (B)) and cut-in effect (see FIG. 27 (D)) described above (common table (XD___L-_RAINBOW_01) described later).

<Specific lighting> Only in certain frames (e.g., Fig. 32 (S) and (U)) of the model subtitle name in the third scene (title name), the board lamp and frame lamp are illuminated with a white flash (specific mode). The brightness data table (grandchild table described later) used at this time is a brightness data table for subtitle 1 and a brightness data table for subtitle 2, which are different from the brightness data table for the main title used in the model main title name, and a white flash (specific mode) is illuminated in conjunction with the animated character display of the character display.

As shown in FIG. 28B, in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introductions 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 29) different from the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is used, and in the second scene (model introduction 2-2), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introductions 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 29) common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is used in the first scene (company name). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (the grandchild table corresponding to the model introductions 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) includes brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), and does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

In this way, the demo movie display has several scenes where information is conveyed by displaying text, but since we want to convey the company name in particular, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, we can emphasize it in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

As shown in FIG. 28B, in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 29) is used, which is different from the brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to main title part), the brightness data table for subtitle 1, and the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts). In the second scene (model introduction 2-2), a brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see FIG. 29) that is common to the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the brightness data table for main title (grandchild table corresponding to main title part), the brightness data table for subtitle 1, and the brightness data table for subtitle 2 are used. The table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) includes brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the model main title name display 004SG520A and model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (model main title name, model subtitle name), and the brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3) does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), or the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

In this way, the demo movie display has several scenes where information is conveyed by text display, but since we want to convey the model name in particular, by using brightness data linked to the display animation, we can emphasize it in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The state of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) (see FIG. 29) is more emphasized (highlighted) than the state of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to attention 1 and attention 2 parts) (see FIG. 29), and the state of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the subtitle 1 brightness data table, and the subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) (see FIG. 29) is more emphasized (highlighted) than the state of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to attention 1 and attention 2 parts).

Specifically, the first scene (company name) has a scene where a white flash is used in conjunction with the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "high," the third scene (main title name of the model, subtitle name of the model) has a scene where a white flash is used in conjunction with the animated text display, so the emphasis level is "high," whereas the fourth scene (warnings 1 and 2) has a "low" emphasis level because it is not linked to the animated text display.

In this way, the demo movie display has multiple scenes that convey information through text display, but since it is desired to emphasize information such as company name information, model title, and warnings, each can be emphasized by emitting a dedicated light. In particular, by emphasizing the lighting conditions of the company name and model title display scenes compared to warning scenes, the company name and model title can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) are more emphasized than the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to attention 1 and attention 2 parts) and the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the subtitle 1 brightness data table, and the subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) in the modes of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the attention brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to attention 1 and attention 2 parts) in any of the following modes: (1) a mode with many flashes, (2) a mode with many colors lit, (3) a large number of light-emitting means used, and (4) a mode with high brightness, thereby emphasizing the company name and machine title, and as a result, favorable customer waiting control can be performed.

In addition, the appearance of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) is emphasized more than the appearance of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the subtitle 1 brightness data table, and the subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the subtitle 1 and 2 parts), which makes it possible to emphasize the company name more and clearly appeal to players which company the gaming machine is related to, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) using the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, 2 parts) while the demo movie is being displayed, and controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) using the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the step-up performance and cut-in performance) when a step-up performance (see FIG. 26(B)) or a cut-in performance (see FIG. 27(D)) is being executed. The rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, 2 parts) used while the demo movie is being displayed and the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the step-up performance and cut-in performance) used when a step-up performance (see FIG. 26(B)) or a cut-in performance (see FIG. 27(D)) is being executed are a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more vibrant, and the brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow is shared with the brightness data table used in response to specific effects executed during play (e.g., step-up effects and cut-in effects), which does not increase capacity and results in optimal customer waiting control.

The rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) after the end of play in the low base state (normal state), the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the title part, subtitle 1, and 2 parts) used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) after the end of play in the high base state (special state), and the rainbow brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the step-up effect and cut-in effect) used when a step-up effect (see FIG. 26(B)) (specific effect) that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) and a cut-in effect (see FIG. 27(D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) are executed are a common brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by changing the light emission pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more vibrant, and by sharing the brightness data table for changing the light emission pattern to rainbow with the brightness data table used for the specific effects that can be executed in the normal state and the special effects that can be executed in the special state, there is no need to increase capacity, and as a result, it is possible to perform optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the step-up effect (see FIG. 26(B)) (specific effect) that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) and the cut-in effect (see FIG. 27(D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) are effects that definitively notify that control will be entered into a jackpot gaming state, and the brightness data table (common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01)) used for effects that definitively indicate that control will be entered into a jackpot gaming state is also used for the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The brightness data table for subtitle 1 and the brightness data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) are brightness data tables that use multiple brightness data to illuminate the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in a lighting mode that is linked to the animation display of the model/subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C.

In this way, the main title name is displayed first, followed by the subtitle name, and the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed. Therefore, by illuminating the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) in conjunction with the display animation of the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in FIG. 29, the multiple luminance data constituting the company name luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) are luminance data configured so that the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means), the panel lamp, and the side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means) emit light, and the multiple luminance data constituting the introduction luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1, model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, model introduction 3-1, 3-2 parts) are luminance data configured so that the side lamp 9b and the panel lamp emit light and the main lamp 9a does not emit light.

In this way, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by displaying text. In the company name display scene, both the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) and the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means) are illuminated, and in the model introduction scene, the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means) are illuminated, but the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) is not illuminated. This makes it possible to relatively emphasize the first scene in which the company name is displayed, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

In the present embodiment, the first light-emitting means is a panel lamp and a side lamp 9b, and the second light-emitting means is a main lamp 9a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the frame lamps may be used as the second light-emitting means that does not emit light in the second scene, and at least one of the panel lamps may be used as the first light-emitting means.

Also, as a variant, the performance control CPU 120 may control the first light-emitting means (e.g., the panel lamp) in the model introduction part of the second scene using the brightness data table for introduction 1 corresponding to the model introduction 1 part (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part), control the first light-emitting means (e.g., the panel lamp) in the model introduction 2 part using the brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts), and control the second light-emitting means (e.g., the frame lamp) in the model introduction 1 part and the model introduction 2 part using one brightness data table (one grandchild table).

In this way, while the demo movie is being displayed, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed by displaying text, and in the company name display scene, both the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means emit light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, and in the model introduction part 1 and model introduction part 2, the first light-emitting means emits light in a dedicated light-emitting mode, but the second light-emitting means emits light in a common light-emitting mode, so that the company name display scene can be relatively emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 may control the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in the model introduction 1 part of the second scene using a model introduction 1 luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part) that is different from the company luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part), the model main title luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the model subtitle luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the subtitle 1 and 2 parts), the warning 1 luminance data table, and the warning 2 luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the warning 1 and 2 parts) and control the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in the model introduction 2 part of the second scene using the one luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the model introduction 1 part).

As mentioned above, there are multiple situations where information is conveyed by text displays, but since it is desirable to emphasize information such as company names, model titles, and warnings, each can be highlighted by emitting a dedicated light to highlight them in comparison with other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the execution period of the model introduction scene including model introduction part 1 and model introduction part 2 (30 sec) > execution period of the company name display scene (10 sec), and the execution period of the model introduction scene including model introduction part 1 and model introduction part 2 (30 sec) > execution period of the warning display scene (5 sec), and the company name text display and warning text display may be displayed at display timings other than when the demo movie is being displayed. In this way, by making it possible to highlight the model introduction scene and title name display scene, which are only displayed when the demo movie is being displayed, for a longer period, it is possible to achieve optimal customer waiting control.

It is also possible to display the company name text and warning text even when the demo movie is not being displayed. For example, the company name text and warning text may be displayed during the ending period after the big win round has ended, or the same display as that displayed during the demo movie may be displayed. In this case, the display time may be set shorter than during the demo movie in order to maintain the tempo of the big win and high base state.

(Light emission pattern of lamps corresponding to game status)
Next, the light emission modes of the lamps corresponding to the game states will be described with reference to Fig. 35 and Fig. 36. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing the light emission modes of the lamps corresponding to the game states. Fig. 36 (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement positions of the lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A).

As shown in FIG. 35, the panel lamp and frame lamp arranged on the pachinko gaming machine 1 are designed to emit light in different ways depending on the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, when an initialization notification is made following a cold start, when it is controlled to a low base state, when it is controlled to a high base state, when a demo movie display is being shown, and when an error notification, which will be described later, is being made.

Specifically, during the execution period of the initialization notification, the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e flash in "red."

In the low base state, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) is used, the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b are lit in a wave pattern with blue as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e is lit in white.

In the low probability high base state (time-saving state), the time-saving background brightness data table (lamp data table: background time-saving) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with "green" as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white." In addition, in the high probability high base state (probability change state), the probability change background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change) is used, and the board lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in waves with "purple" as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white." In the following, these time-saving background brightness data table and probability change background brightness data table are sometimes collectively referred to as the high base background brightness data table (or high B background brightness data table).

When the demo performance (demo movie display) is in progress, the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used, the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b change their light emission modes with "white" as the primary color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white."

When the error notification is in progress, the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a color corresponding to the state (low base state, high base state, demo performance), while the main lamp 9a flashes in red and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

The "primary color" refers to the color that forms the basis of the overall color scheme in each period, and may be, for example, the color that has the highest light emission time and occupies the highest light emission area (number of lamps) in each period, and may be a color other than the colors listed above. Also, a given hue may include multiple colors that differ in brightness, lightness, saturation, etc., and if the primary color is "blue," it may be a color similar to "blue."

For example, similar colors will be explained based on Figure 122. Colors have three attributes: hue (color tone), value (brightness, brightness), and saturation (vividness). "Similar colors" include: 1. combinations of colors that are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors) and have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness, value (brightness) and saturation (vividness)), 2. combinations of the same hue but different tones, and 3. combinations of colors that differ only in value or saturation.

To explain an example of "1. Combinations of adjacent colors (adjacent colors) with the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (luminance, brightness) and saturation (vividness))" above with reference to Figures 122 (A) and (B), if the three primary colors of light, red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F], are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel of a given number (24 colors in this case), each of the three colors will be dissimilar to one another. Colors with a hue difference within an angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on this hue wheel are "similar colors," and combinations are not limited to adjacent colors that are adjacent to each other on the hue wheel.

For example, if red (R) is the base color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side and 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side (total 60 degrees) are similar to red (R), if green (G) is the base color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees to the reddish purple (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (total 60 degrees) are similar to green (G), and if blue (B) is the base color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side and 30 degrees to the reddish purple (M) side (total 60 degrees) are similar to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, combinations of colors that have a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel can be considered "similar colors".

Furthermore, it is preferable that similar colors include combinations of colors that are included in warm colors, such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that give a warm feeling, and cool colors, such as blue and purple, which are chromatic colors that give a cold feeling, as well as combinations of colors that are included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors that are intermediate between warm and cool colors, such as green and purple.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), the board lamps include an attacca lamp 9c built into the special variable winning ball device 7 located at the lower right of the game board 2, a movable body lamp 9d built into the movable body 32 located at the top of the image display device 5, and a decorative lamp 9f built into the decorative body located on the left side of the image display device 5. Note that lamps provided on the game board 2 may include lamps other than those mentioned above (for example, lamps built into the winning device, etc.).

The frame lamps include a main lamp 9a provided on the top of the gaming machine frame 3, side lamps 9b provided on the left and right, and a button lamp 9e provided on the push button 31B. Note that the lamps provided on the gaming machine frame 3 may include lamps other than those mentioned above (for example, lamps built into the ball-hitting control handle 30 and speakers 8L and 8R).

The panel lamp, the attacca lamp 9c, is made up of multiple LEDs, the movable body lamp 9d is made up of multiple LEDs, the decorative lamp 9f is made up of multiple LEDs, the main lamp 9a is made up of multiple LEDs, the side lamp 9b is made up of multiple LEDs, and the button lamp 9e is made up of multiple LEDs.

Figure 36(B) is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the various lamps shown in Figure 36(A), and in the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, the schematic diagram shown in Figure 36(B) may be used.

(Start of customer waiting demo performance. Stop fluctuation version.)
Next, the flow from when the variable display is stopped to when the customer waiting demo performance starts will be described based on Figs. 37 to 42 and 123. Fig. 37, (A1) to (A8), is a diagram showing an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance is interposed after the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state ends. Fig. 38, (A4) to (A5), is a diagram showing the main part of Fig. 37. Fig. 39 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in the low base state. Fig. 40 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in the low base state. Fig. 41, (B1) to (B8), is a diagram showing an example of operation of the customer waiting demo performance in the high base state. Fig. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in the high base state. Fig. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in the high base state. Fig. 44 is a diagram showing an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance starts after the pachinko game machine is started by cold start (power-on with initialization). FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the flow of starting a customer waiting demo performance after a pachinko game machine is started by a cold start. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko game machine is started by a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. FIG. 47 is a timing chart showing the flow of starting a customer waiting demo performance after a pachinko game machine is started by a hot start in a low base state. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko game machine is started by a hot start in a high base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started. FIG. 49 is a timing chart showing the flow of starting a customer waiting demo performance after a pachinko game machine is started by a hot start in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo presentation is started when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 37 to 40.

As shown in Figures 37 and 39, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts in a low base state, if a preview effect or reach effect has been determined to be executed, these effects are executed (see Figure 37 (A1)), although not shown in particular. During the variable display, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are not displayed.

The board lamp and frame lamp start to light up in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e continues to light up in white based on the default brightness data table. Also, normal background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. When a preview or reach performance is executed, a brightness data table for the preview or reach performance (lamp data table corresponding to the preview or reach performance) is set, and light emission control and BGM output are performed in a manner appropriate to the performance.

Next, when the variable display ends and the losing combination of confirmed symbols (for example, "326") is displayed statically (see FIG. 37 (A2)), the CPU 103 sends a customer waiting demo designation command, and the performance control CPU 120 starts timing (120 seconds) the demo movie start waiting timer, entering the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Note that the output of the background music is stopped, but it may be set to fade out when a predetermined time has passed since the end of the variable display.

When 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started timing and the demo end conditions have not been met, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 37(A3)), and when it moves to the right to a specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 37(A4)).

After another 90 seconds have passed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S1 has been met, and the customer waiting demo performance starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) starts (see Figures 37 (A5) to (A8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and control of the light emission mode based on white is started based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

When starting the demo movie display in this way, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the losing confirmed patterns (decorative patterns) displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 38 (A4), during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen displays a combination of winning confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) frozen against the background of the first background display 004SG081. Also, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, before switching from the first background display 004SG081 to the demo movie display, a fade-out display of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the determined losing symbols (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the determined losing symbols (decorative symbols) gradually increases, the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) is switched to the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) switch from a blue wave illumination to a white-based illumination mode (see Figures 38 (A41) and (A42)). Then, after the transparency of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the losing confirmed patterns (decorative patterns) approaches 100% and the display screen goes white (see FIG. 38 (A42)), the demo movie display begins (see FIG. 38 (A5)).

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (the variable display stops display), and displays the demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends. Then, before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, it switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

Therefore, by using a gradual design in which the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the demo movie display starts, it is possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting everything at once, and to make the customer aware of the start of the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the demo movie display. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 that receives the extended command: BF01 starts controlling the emission of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 switches the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 39, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied, the fade-out display (switching display) of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern is started, and the display screen is whited out and then the display of the company name display 004SG302 is started. In other words, when the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while starting the switching control of the display content from the normal background display to the demo movie display including the fade-out display (switching display) of the normal background display, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied.

Therefore, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, and in particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see FIG. 37 (A5)) of the demo movie display starts after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed, so that the light emission control for the customer waiting demo of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) starts before the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, the lighting control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first without switching the display using the fade-out display as described above, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable (see Figures 38 (A31), (A32), and 39).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf for delaying the start of the demo movie display is set to about 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be changed in various ways. Also, although a fade display is performed as the switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be performed, or the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern may be maintained without performing a fade display or the like.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39, if 55 seconds have passed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo end condition being satisfied, the first demo movie display ends based on the determination that the demo performance end condition E1 has been satisfied. Then, the display screen displays the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the determined symbols that have not been selected (decorative symbols), as well as the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see FIG. 37 (A4)). Also, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table, and light emission control is performed based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e is controlled to emit light based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends due to the satisfaction of the demo performance end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated from the second time onwards until any of the demo performance end conditions E2 to E4 is satisfied. Note that from the second time onwards, the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), and together with the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern, animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is started, and the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see FIG. 123).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same animation display as the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 for the first time (see FIG. 37 (A3)).

In addition, when changing from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), as explained in FIG. 38, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

The performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the low base state ends (the variable display stops), displays a demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) using a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) during the first customer waiting period, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) using a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period, while controlling the illumination of the button lamp 9e using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light) that is different from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the first customer waiting period and the second customer waiting period.

In this way, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a constant state, it is possible to prevent this mistake, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.

In more detail, as described above, when using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit or blinked in conjunction with the display mode of the demo movie display. For example, if button lamp 9e is lit when an operation promotion display is displayed in a performance introduction scene that encourages the player to operate push button 31B, the player may misunderstand and perform an unnecessary operation, so button lamp 9e is set to a fixed mode.

Also, as shown in Figure 40, when the variable display of the second special pattern is started due to an irregular win or the like in a low base state, the flow from the variable display ending to the demo movie display starting is the same as when the variable display of the first special pattern is started in a low base state as shown in Figure 39, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
Next, an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo presentation when the gaming state is in a high base state will be described with reference to Figs.

As shown in Figures 41 and 42, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the high base state, if a preview effect or reach effect has been decided to be executed, these effects are executed (see Figure 41 (B1)), although not shown in particular. During the variable display, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 are not displayed.

The board lamp and frame lamp start to light up in purple (or green) waves based on the brightness data table for the high B background for the probability change (or time saving) (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time saving)), and the button lamp 9e continues to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lights up in white). Also, BGM for the high B background is output from speakers 8L and 8R. When a preview or reach performance is executed, a brightness data table for the preview or reach performance (lamp data table corresponding to the preview or reach performance) is set, and light emission control and BGM output are performed in a manner appropriate to the performance.

Next, when the variable display ends and the losing combination of confirmed symbols (for example, "326") is displayed statically (see FIG. 41 (B2)), the CPU 103 sends a customer waiting demo designation command, and the performance control CPU 120 starts timing (120 seconds) the demo movie start waiting timer, entering the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Note that the output of the background music is stopped, but it may be set to fade out when a predetermined time has passed since the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started timing and the demo end conditions have not been met, the menu guide display 004SG401 will be framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B3)), and when it moves to the right to a specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 will be displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 41 (B4)).

After another 90 seconds have passed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started without the demo end condition being met, the demo performance start condition S1 is determined to have been met, and the customer waiting demo performance starts, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) starts (see Figure 41 (B5) to (B8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and control of the light emission mode based on white is started based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

When starting the demo movie display in this way, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed win (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of winning confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In more detail, during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen displays a combination of winning symbols (decorative symbols) frozen on the background of the third background display 004SG083. Also, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are wavy lit in purple (or green) based on the high B background brightness data table for the probability change (or time reduction) (lamp data table: background time reduction, or lamp data table: background probability change).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is satisfied, before switching from the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) to the demo movie display, a fade-out display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of the determined symbols that have lost (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG084) and the combination of the determined symbols that have lost (decorative symbols) gradually increases, the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) is switched to the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are switched from a purple or green wave lighting to a white-based light emission mode (see Figures 38 (A41) and (A42)). Then, the transparency of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of the losing confirmed patterns (decorative patterns) approaches 100% and the display screen goes white, after which the demo movie display begins (see Figure 41 (B5)).

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state ends (the variable display stops), and displays the demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period ends. Then, before switching the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, it switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Therefore, by using a gradual design in which the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the demo movie display starts, it is possible to draw attention to the change rather than starting everything at once, and to make the customer aware of the start of the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the demo movie display. In response to this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120, which has received the extension command: BF01, starts controlling the emission of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display. On the other hand, after transmitting the extension command: BF01 corresponding to the demo movie display, the display control unit 123 switches the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 41, when a predetermined period of time tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the start condition S1 of the demo performance is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 begins fading out (switching display) the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, and after the display screen goes white, begins displaying the company name display 004SG302. In other words, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), while starting switching control to switch the display content from the high base background display to a demo movie display including a fade-out display (switching display) of the high base background display, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo start condition S1 was met.

Therefore, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, and in particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see FIG. 41 (B5)) of the demo movie display starts after the predetermined period tf and the switching display period have elapsed, so that the light emission control for the customer waiting demo of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) starts before the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, the lighting control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first without switching the display using the fade-out display as described above, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable (see Figures 38 (A31), (A32), and 42).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf is set to about 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be changed in various ways. Also, although a fade display is performed as the switching display, a scene change display other than a fade display may be performed, or the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern may be maintained without performing a fade display or the like.

Also, as shown in Figure 42, if 55 seconds have passed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance end condition E1 has been met, and the first demo movie display ends. Then, the display screen displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of the winning confirmed symbols (decorative symbols), as well as the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see Figure 37 (A4)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and light emission control is performed based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e is controlled to light emission based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

In this way, after the demo movie display ends due to the completion of the demo performance end condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated from the second time onwards until any of the demo performance end conditions E2 to E4 is completed. Note that from the second time onwards, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern are displayed based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), and the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light amount guide display 004SG402 is started along with the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, and the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see FIG. 123).

The animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 from the second time onwards is the same animation display as the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 for the first time (see FIG. 41 (B3)).

In addition, when changing from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state has ended (the variable display has stopped display), displays a demo movie display during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period has ended, and controls the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period, and displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state has ended (the variable display has stopped display). During this period, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is used to control the illumination of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), while during the first and second customer waiting periods, the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background guaranteed to change (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) and a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light) different from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) are used to control the illumination of the button lamp 9e.

In this way, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a constant state, this can be prevented, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

In addition, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a constant state in both the low base state and the high base state, it is possible to prevent confusion in both the low base state and the high base state, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) during the first customer waiting period using a luminance data table for the high-speed B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) during the first scene (e.g., first scene (company name) etc.) during the second customer waiting period using a company luminance data table corresponding to the first scene (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part), and controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) during the second scene (e.g., second scene (machine introductions 1 to 3) etc.) using a luminance data table for introductions 1 to 3 corresponding to the second scene (machine introductions 1, 2-1, The panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are controlled using a grandchild table corresponding to parts 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2, and in the first scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) different from the company brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) and the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 (grandchild tables corresponding to model introductions 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2), and in the second scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

In this way, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B, there is a possibility that the player may mistakenly believe that he or she is being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the state constant, it is possible to prevent this mistake, and as a result, it is possible to carry out optimal customer waiting control.

The default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) is a different brightness data table from the promotion effect brightness data table (lamp data table: button flashing white, lamp data table: button flashing red) used when a promotion effect (see FIG. 26(G)) that encourages the operation of the push button 31B is executed, and the brightness data constituting the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button lit white) has less change in brightness than the brightness data constituting the promotion effect brightness data table (lamp data table: button flashing white, lamp data table: button flashing red).

By doing this, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting) is composed of brightness data that makes the push button 31B less emphasized than when it is being prompted to operate, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, and as a result, it is possible to perform optimal customer waiting control.

The default brightness data table may also be configured with brightness data for turning off the button lamp 9e. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that he is being prompted to operate the push button 31B, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B is provided on the gaming machine frame 3, but is not managed by the same brightness data table as the other main lamps 9a and side lamps 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3. Instead, it is managed separately, which allows for an optimal design to be implemented to prevent the player from mistakingly believing that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39, in the low base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 37 (A2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Also, as shown in FIG. 42, in the high base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see FIG. 41 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while displaying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, by not displaying a guide immediately after the variable display ends, it is possible to prevent the player from being prompted to make unnecessary adjustments to the presentation, and since there is a possibility that the player may have left their seat once the demo movie display has ended, by prompting the player to make adjustments to the presentation immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in FIG. 43, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started due to an irregular win or the like in a high base state, the flow from the variable display ending to the start of the demo movie display is the same as when the variable display of the second special symbol is started in a high base state as shown in FIG. 42, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, in a low base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends due to an irregular win or the like, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 37 (A2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the display start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Also, as shown in Figure 43, in the high base state, after the variable display of the first special pattern has ended due to an irregular winning or the like, the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 41 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) starts to be displayed, while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, after the variable display of the first special pattern has ended in either the low base state or the high base state, or even after the variable display of the second special pattern has ended, by not displaying the guide display immediately after the variable display has ended, it is possible to prevent the player from being prompted to make unnecessary adjustments to the presentation, and since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat once the demo movie display has ended, by prompting the player to make adjustments to the presentation immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

<Cold start>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a cold start (power-on with initialization) and then starts a customer waiting demo performance will be described with reference to Figs. 44 and 45.

As shown in FIG. 44 (C1) and FIG. 45, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 starts on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds have passed from the start timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives a power-on designation command and a first game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the initialization display 004SG610 starts instead of the start preparation display 004SG600 (see FIG. 44 (C2)), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 is started as an initial operation control (not shown). In addition, the board lamp and the frame lamp start to flash red based on the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification), and the output of the initialization notification sound starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. Additionally, the demo movie start waiting timer starts timing (60 seconds), and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, when 10 seconds have passed since the power-on command and the first game state background command were received, the initialization process ends, the display of the initialization display 004SG610 ends, and the display of the first background display 004SG081 begins (see FIG. 44 (C3)). At this time, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are not displayed. In addition, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and the button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting). In addition, the output of background music from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped.

Next, if 30 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started timing without the demo end conditions being met, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 44 (C4)), and when it moves to the right to a specified position and is animated, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 44 (C5)).

After another 30 seconds have passed, and 60 seconds have passed since the demo movie start waiting timer started without the demo end condition being satisfied, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S2 has been satisfied, and the customer waiting demo performance starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) starts (see FIG. 44 (C6) to (C9)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission mode based on white starts based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to light in white based on the default brightness data table.

The subsequent flow is similar to that in the low base state shown in Figures 37 to 39, so a detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (low base state)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started will be described with reference to Figures 46 to 47.

As shown in FIG. 46 (D1) and FIG. 47, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by hot start in the low base state, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 starts on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When 3 seconds have passed from the start timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery designation command and the first game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) start to light up in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), the button lamp 9e starts to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the output of BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In addition, the demo movie start waiting timer starts timing (90 seconds), and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Then, 2 seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power recovery designation command and the first game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the first background display 004SG081 begins (see FIG. 46 (D2)), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 and the like is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have passed since the start of the demo movie start waiting timer without the demo end condition being met, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 46 (D3)), and when it moves to the right side to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 46 (D4)).

If another 60 seconds pass, and 90 seconds pass without the demo end condition being satisfied after the demo movie start waiting timer starts, the demo performance start condition S3 is determined to be satisfied, and the customer waiting demo performance starts, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) starts (see FIG. 46 (D5) to (D8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table, and control of the light emission mode based on white starts based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

The subsequent flow is similar to that in the low base state shown in Figures 37 to 39, so a detailed explanation of each will be omitted.

<Hot start (high base state)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then a customer waiting demo performance is started will be described with reference to Figures 48 to 49.

As shown in Figures 48 (E1) and 49, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with a hot start in a high base state, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 begins on the image display device 5 from the start timing. When three seconds have passed since the start timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery designation command and the second and third game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) start to light up in purple (or green) waves based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), the button lamp 9e starts to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the output of background music from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In addition, the demo movie start waiting timer starts timing (90 seconds), and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Then, two seconds after the performance control CPU 120 receives the power recovery designation command and the second and third game state background designation command from the CPU 103, the display of the start preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) begins (see FIG. 48 (E2)), and the confirmation operation of the movable body 32 and the like is started as initial operation control (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have passed since the start of the demo movie start waiting timer without the demo end condition being met, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 48 (E3)), and when it moves to the right side to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 48 (E4)).

If another 60 seconds pass, and 90 seconds pass without the demo end condition being satisfied after the demo movie start waiting timer starts, the demo performance start condition S3 is determined to be satisfied, and the customer waiting demo performance starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie display is displayed, and the second customer waiting period (demo performance period) starts (see FIG. 48 (E5) to (E8)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) switch from the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the control of the light emission mode based on white starts based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e continues to be lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting).

The subsequent flow is similar to that in the high base state shown in Figures 41 to 43, so detailed explanations of each will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 47 and 49, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then a hot start is performed, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the display of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), but displays the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figures 46 (D2) and 48 (E2)), and then displays a demo movie display. After the demo movie display has ended, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) start to be displayed, while the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 45, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then a cold start is performed, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed (see FIG. 44 (C3)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed, while displaying the first background display 004SG081.

In this way, the start-up situation before an amusement store opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization), and in either case, the amusement store staff can check the displays by checking the background display after powering on, checking the demo movie display, and checking the information display, improving the efficiency of the checks. Furthermore, when the background display is displayed when the amusement store opens and players are welcomed, the information display will be the background display, so that proper guidance can be given to adjustments to the presentation from the timing of the start of play, and a suitable gaming environment can be provided to players, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

In the present embodiment, after a hot start or cold start, the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed, followed by the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light guide display 004SG402, and then the demo movie display starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the demo movie display may start after the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed, without the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light guide display 004SG402 being displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 45 and 47, when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a low base state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light intensity guide display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed (see Figures 44 (C3) and 46 (D2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 starts to be displayed, while displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Also, as shown in FIG. 48, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 in the high base state and the power is then turned on, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), but displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see FIG. 48 (D2)), and then displays the demo movie display. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing when the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) starts to be displayed, while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, the start-up state before the gaming establishment opens can be either a low base state or a high base state, and in order to make it possible to check in the background which state the establishment was in, no information display is displayed to avoid getting in the way, and since it is highly likely that the state has already been confirmed if the background is subsequently displayed again, by displaying the information display from the timing at which the background display starts to be displayed, if the background display is displayed when the gaming establishment opens and players are welcomed, it will be the background display that displays the information display, so that proper guidance can be given to adjustments to the presentation from the timing of the start of play, and a suitable gaming environment can be provided to players, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

In addition, after the variable display is finished, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 are not displayed, and the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, and after a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402 are displayed in a specific animation (fade-in display), thereby changing the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). ), then a demo movie display is displayed, and after the display period of the demo movie display has elapsed, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402 are displayed in a common animation display (frame-in display) with the animation display (frame-in display) of the first menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402, so as to be superimposed on the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082).

In this way, by not displaying the information immediately after the variable display has ended, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promptings for adjustments to the presentation, and once the demo movie display has ended, by prompting the user to adjust the presentation immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display, it is possible to encourage the user to play in a suitable gaming environment, and further, by displaying the information immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display using the same animation display as when the information display is displayed after the variable display has ended, it is possible to appeal to the user that the information display has been displayed without incurring any costs, resulting in suitable customer waiting control.

In the present embodiment, a frame-in display is applied as an animation display of the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume/light level guide display 004SG402, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement direction, movement speed, display position, etc. are not limited to those described above. In addition, the animation display may be other types of animation display such as a fade-in display, a moving display, or an enlarged display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 47, FIG. 49 and FIG. 123, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed after the variable display has ended in the low base state, displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed after the variable display has ended in the high base state, displays a demo movie display when 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed after the power outage recovery command has been received based on the pachinko game machine 1 having been started in a hot start in the low base state, and displays a demo movie display when 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed after the power outage recovery command has been received based on the pachinko game machine 1 having been started in a hot start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is a period longer than 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5).

In this way, if the demo movie display were to be displayed immediately after the variable display ends, it is possible that the player has not yet changed, which would be annoying, so a longer time of tc1 and tc2 (120 seconds) is set. However, after a hot start, since it is the game store staff, not the players, who are present, a shorter time of tc4 and tc5 (90 seconds) is set, so that the game store staff can immediately check the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in FIG. 39, FIG. 42, FIG. 45 and FIG. 123, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have passed since the variable display ended in the low base state, displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have passed since the variable display ended in the high base state, displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started in a cold start in the low base state, and displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started in a cold start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is a period longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the variable display ends, there is a possibility that the player has not yet changed, which would be annoying, so a longer time, tc1 and tc2, = 120 seconds, is set, and since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first start method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement arcade, a shorter time, tc3, = 60 seconds, is set so that the demo movie display is displayed immediately, allowing the gaming arcade staff to immediately check the demo movie display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in Figures 45, 47, 49 and 123, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have passed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started up with a hot start in a low base state, displays a demo movie display when 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have passed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started up with a hot start in a high base state, displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since receiving a power-on command based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started up with a cold start in a low base state, and displays a demo movie display when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since receiving a power-on command based on the pachinko game machine 1 being started up with a cold start in a high base state. In this case, 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5) is a period longer than 60 seconds (second specific period tc3).

As such, since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement establishment, by having the demo movie display appear immediately, gaming establishment staff can immediately check the demo movie display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

39, 42 and 45, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed after the variable display has ended in the low base state, and displays the demo movie display again when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display has ended; in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed after the variable display has ended, and displays the demo movie display again when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display has ended; in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 displays a demo movie display when 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed after the variable display has ended, and displays the demo movie display again when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have elapsed after the demo movie display has ended; A demo movie display is displayed when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 was started up by a cold start, and when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have passed since the demo movie display ended, the demo movie display is displayed again, and when 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have passed since the power-on command was received based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 was started up by a cold start in a high base state, the demo movie display is displayed again when 30 seconds (predetermined period) have passed since the demo movie display ended. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is a period longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

In this way, if the demo movie display is displayed immediately after the variable display ends, there is a possibility that the player has not changed and it would be annoying, so a longer time of 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is set, and since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the first start method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to an amusement store, a shorter time of tc3 = 60 seconds is set so that the demo movie display is displayed immediately, allowing gaming store staff to immediately check the demo movie display and become more familiar with the introduced machine. Furthermore, in any of the situations where the variable display ends in a low base state, after the fluctuation in a high base state ends, and after a cold start, the demo movie display is displayed once, and the period until the demo movie display is displayed again is the same, so that the demo movie display can be displayed stably, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

Also, as shown in Figures 47 and 49, after being started by a hot start, a start-up preparation display 004SG600 is displayed to indicate that the device is starting up (see Figures 46 (D1) and 48 (E1)), and at the timing associated with displaying the display indicating that the device is starting up, the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are controlled using a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and at the timing associated with displaying the start-up preparation display 004SG600, the button lamp 9e is controlled using one default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

In this way, by illuminating the panel lamp and frame lamp using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before the background display is displayed, it is possible to check whether the panel lamp and frame lamp are normal at the start-up stage, and then seamlessly switch to the illumination mode for when customers are waiting, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(End of waiting demo performance. Time lapse version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance ends over time will be described with reference to Fig. 50 to Fig. 52. Fig. 50 (A) to (E) are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. Fig. 51 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. Fig. 52 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends over time in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo presentation ends over time when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 50 and 51.

As shown in Figures 50 and 51, in the low base state, if the first demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 was satisfied, ends when the end condition E1 is satisfied, that is, 55 seconds have passed since the demo movie display started, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) will begin. After that, if 30 seconds, which is the sixth time, have passed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is deemed to have been satisfied and the demo movie display will begin again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) will be repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demo movie display end.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), when the second part of the warning message for the fourth and final scene of the demo movie is displayed, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

When the end condition E1 for the first demo movie display is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) start to light up in blue waves (see Figure 50 (B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 was met, the 2nd part of the 4th scene's accident prevention display 004SG322 gradually changes to black and merges with the black background display 004SG321 for caution, starting a fade-out display (switching display) (see FIG. 50(C)). Then, the display screen goes black and blacks out, and the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern start to be displayed, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 50(D)), and when it moves to the right side to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 50(E)).

In other words, when the end condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and starts illumination control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while starting switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background display including fade-out display (switching display), but the display of fade-out display (switching display) as the normal background starts after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 is met (see Figures 50 (C) and 51).

In more detail, when the termination condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify normal background display. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display to the performance control CPU 120, and upon receiving the extension command: B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending the extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to normal background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display starts after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, and in particular, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern starts after the predetermined period tg and the switch display period have elapsed, so that the light emission control for the normal background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) starts before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the normal background display is started. This gradual design prevents a bad feeling when the demo display ends, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a customer waiting demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period ends after the variable display in the low base state ends, controls using a normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) during the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period in the high base state ends, switches from the customer waiting demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background luminance data table before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG081, and switches from the customer waiting demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: background normal) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the first background display 004SG081.

In this way, the control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the background display starts. This gradual design prevents the end of the demo movie display from leaving a bad feeling. Furthermore, the state of the lamps can be quickly notified to the player, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the satisfaction of any one of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402 start to be displayed a predetermined time after the background display is switched to the demo movie display, whereas when the demo movie display is ended based on the satisfaction of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402 start to be displayed when the demo movie display is switched to the background display.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo presentation ends over time when the gaming state is in a high base state will be described with reference to Figures 50 and 52.

As shown in Figures 50 and 52, in the high base state, if the first demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 was satisfied, ends when the end condition E1 is satisfied, that is, 55 seconds have passed since the demo movie display started, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) will begin. After that, if 30 seconds, which is the sixth time, have passed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is deemed to have been satisfied and the demo movie display will begin again. Thereafter, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) will be repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demo movie display end.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), when the second part of the warning message for the fourth and final scene of the demo movie is displayed, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

When the end condition E1 of the first demo movie display is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) start to light up in purple (or green) waves (see Figure 50 (B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 was met, the 4th scene's 2nd part accident prevention display 004SG322 gradually changes to black and merges with the black caution background display 004SG321, starting a fade-out display (switching display) (see FIG. 50(C)). Then, the display screen turns black and blacks out, and the 3rd background display 004SG083 (or 2nd background display 004SG082) and decorative pattern start to be displayed, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen (see FIG. 50(D)), and when it moves to the right side to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 50(E)).

In other words, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts the illumination control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while starting the switching control of the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) including the fade-out display (switching display) and the decorative pattern background display, but the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the high B music background starts after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E1 was satisfied (see Figures 50 (C) and 52).

In detail, when the end condition E1 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the background display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the background display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 that receives the extension command: B11D (or B121) starts the light emission control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the background display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. On the other hand, after the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display, it switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display starts after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, and in particular, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern starts after the predetermined period tg and the switch display period have elapsed, so that the light emission control of the high B music background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) starts before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to control the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the high B background display is started. This gradual design prevents the end of the demo display from leaving a bad feeling, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) using a customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period following the end of the variable display in the high base state, and controls them using a high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period in the high base state, and controls the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082). Before the display is switched to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time shortening)), and before the display is switched from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time shortening)).

In this way, the control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched on first, and then the background display starts. This gradual design prevents the end of the demo movie display from leaving a bad feeling. Furthermore, the state of the lamps can be quickly notified to the player, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, when the demo movie display is started based on the satisfaction of any one of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402 start to be displayed a predetermined time after the background display is switched to the demo movie display, whereas when the demo movie display is ended based on the satisfaction of the end condition E1, the menu guide display 004SG401 and the volume and light level guide display 004SG402 start to be displayed when the demo movie display is switched to the background display.

(End of waiting demo performance. Start winning version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance ends with a start winning will be described based on FIG. 53 to FIG. 58. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends with a start winning in a low base state, with (A) to (E). FIG. 54 is a diagram showing details of the display mode of FIG. 53, with (A) to (G). FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a low base state. FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a low base state. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second start winning in a high base state. FIG. 58 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first start winning in a high base state.

<Low base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo presentation ends with the first start winning when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 53 to 55.

As shown in Figures 53 to 55, in the low base state, if the demo movie display that is started by the satisfaction of any of the start conditions S1 to S6 ends based on the satisfaction of the end condition E2, that is, the occurrence of the first start winning (the start of the variable display of the first special symbol) that occurs during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbol begins.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the first start winning occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene is being displayed in the demo movie display, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins (see FIG. 53 (B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begins, and the variable display of the decorative pattern begins (see FIG. 53 (C) to (E)).

In other words, when the end condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and starts illumination control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while starting switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background (variable display) display and variable display of decorative patterns, but the normal background display and variable display of decorative patterns start at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) after the end condition E2 is met (see Figures 53 (C) and 55).

More specifically, when the termination condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. In response to this, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative pattern to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120 that receives the extension command: B10E starts the light emission control of the board lamp and the frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Meanwhile, after transmitting the extension command: B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display and the variable display of the decorative pattern after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 54(A), when the first start winning occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied while the introduction part 1 of the second scene is being displayed in the demo movie display, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins, while the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of the small symbols begins until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was satisfied (see FIG. 54(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative pattern begins, and the first reserved display 004SG101 is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U, followed by a shift display in which the first reserved display 004SG101 moves to the active display area 5F (see Figures 54 (C) and (D)).

As shown in Figures 54(C) to 54(E), the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C do not start scrolling and each character executes a change start action until the first reserved display 004SG101 displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F, that is, the shift display of the reserved display is completed, and the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C do not start scrolling, as shown in Figures 54(C) to 54(E). Change start actions include, for example, actions in which the character displayed in the character display section 004SG052 moves its face or body or changes its expression on the pedestal display section 004SG054 in a manner different from the scrolling display.

When the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start to scroll in the order of left, right, and center (see FIG. 52 (F)). When the scrolling display starts, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from low to medium to high speed, and the fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in the display speed, and at high speed the transmittance reaches approximately 90% (see FIG. 52 (G) and FIG. 55). Note that in the low base state (first performance mode), the appearance shown in FIG. 54 will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern starts.

As a result, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of the decorative patterns begin a predetermined period of time th after the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, so that the lighting control for the normal background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and switches to the scrolling display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative patterns.

In other words, before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the customer that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, so that the change in the light emission pattern is easily noticeable to the player, and the player can be notified immediately that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

As shown in FIG. 56, the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins due to an irregular win or the like in a low base state is the same as the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in a low base state as shown in FIG. 55, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

<High base state>
First, an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with the second start winning when the gaming state is in a high base state will be explained based on Figure 57, with reference to Figures 53 and 124.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the high base state, if the demo movie display that is started by the satisfaction of any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 ends based on the satisfaction of the end condition E2, that is, the occurrence of a second start winning (the start of the variable display of the second special pattern) that occurs during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative pattern begins.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is displayed, if the second start winning occurs and the end condition E2 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the purple (or green) wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) begins (see FIG. 53 (B). In FIG. 53 (B), blue wave lighting is performed). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was satisfied, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern begins, and the variable display of the decorative pattern begins (see FIG. 53 (C) to (E)).

In other words, when the end condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts the illumination control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while starting the switching control of the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern start at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 is satisfied (see FIG. 53 (C)).

More specifically, when the termination condition E2 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the variable display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the variable display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern to the performance control CPU 120, and upon receiving the extension command: B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the high B background brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern. On the other hand, after transmitting the extended command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of the decorative pattern after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 124(A), when the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, if the second start winning occurs and the end condition E2 is established, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) start to light up in purple (or green) waves, while the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of small symbols starts until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was established (see FIG. 124(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E2 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern begins, and the second reserved display 004SG102 is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U, and then a shift display is started in which the second reserved display 004SG102 moves to the active display area 5F (see FIG. 124 (C)).

In addition, as shown in Figures 124 (C) to 124 (D), the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C do not start scrolling until the second reserved display 004SG102 displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F, that is, until the shift display of the reserved display is completed, but in the high base state, the change start action of each character is not executed (see Figure 25 (B)).

When the shift display of the pending display is completed, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C start to scroll simultaneously on the left, right, and center (see Figure 124 (E)). When the scrolling display starts, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the fade-out display starts, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in the display speed, and at high speed the transmittance reaches approximately 90% (see Figures 124 (F) and (G)).

In addition, in the high base state (second presentation mode, third presentation mode), the appearance shown in FIG. 124 will be obtained regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started.

As a result, the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the scrolling display of the decorative patterns begin a predetermined period of time th after the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, so that the lighting control for the high B background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and switches to the scrolling display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative patterns.

In other words, when the first start condition is met while the demo movie display is being displayed in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, and when the second start condition is met while the demo movie display is being displayed in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e) to switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state.

In this way, in the high base state, by switching control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, in the low base state and high base state, by switching control of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify that the first or second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, so that the change in the light emission pattern is easily noticeable to the player, and the player can be notified immediately that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

As shown in FIG. 58, the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins due to an irregular win or the like in a high base state is the same as the flow in which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state as shown in FIG. 57, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) by switching them from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol when the first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, and controls them by switching them from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed variable (or lamp data table: background time shortened)) before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol when the second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed.

In this way, regardless of which start winning event occurs, by switching the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the user that a start winning event has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a scrolling display of the decorative pattern so that the transparency of the decorative pattern changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%) higher than the first value, and if a first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of the decorative pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%.

In this way, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to inform customers that a starting win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, when the first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays a scrolling display of the decorative pattern so that the transparency of the decorative pattern changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%) higher than the first value, when the first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed in the low base state, the CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of the decorative pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, and when the first or second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed in the high base state, the CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of the decorative pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%.

In this way, in both the low base state and the high base state, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to inform the customer that the first or second start winning has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, even if the variable display of the small symbols begins with the occurrence of a first start winning or a second start winning, the transparency does not change while the decorative symbols are performing a variable start action, so the display will switch from the demo movie display to a background display for the variable display of the decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from the first value.

In addition, if a first start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%, and if a second start winning occurs while the demo movie display is being displayed, the CPU 120 switches the display from the demo movie display to a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern before the transparency of the decorative pattern reaches 90%.

In this way, regardless of whether the first or second start winning occurs, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes high, it is possible to inform the customer that the start winning has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demo. Steering wheel operation version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance ends by steering operation will be described with reference to Fig. 59 to Fig. 60. Fig. 59 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display ends by steering operation in a low base state. Fig. 60 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends by steering operation in a low base state.

<Low base state>
An example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends by steering operation when the game state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 59 to 60. Note that, in the following, an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends by steering operation when the game state is in a low base state will be described, but an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends by steering operation when the game state is in a high base state will be omitted here because the example of operation is almost the same except that the background display and lamp data are changed to those for the high base.

As shown in Figures 59 to 60, in the low base state, if the demo movie display that is started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is satisfied is ended when the end condition E3 is satisfied, that is, based on steering wheel operation, the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begins.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the first part of the introduction to the second scene in the demo movie display is displayed, if a handle operation is detected and the end condition E3 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) starts (see FIG. 59(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E3 was satisfied, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern starts, and the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen, and when it moves to the right side to the specified position and is animated, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see FIG. 59(C)).

In other words, when the end condition E3 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and starts illumination control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while starting switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background (stopped pattern) display, but the normal background display and decorative pattern start at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) after the end condition E3 is met (see Figures 59 (C) and 60).

In more detail, when termination condition E3 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify normal background display. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display to the performance control CPU 120, and upon receiving the extension command: B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending the extension command: B10E corresponding to normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to normal background display after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

As a result, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begins a predetermined period of time th after the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, so that the light emission control for the normal background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the first background display 004SG081, the decorative pattern, and the guide display.

In other words, if the operation of the ball operating handle 30 is detected while the demo movie display is being shown, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display.

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly indicate that the ball-hitting operation handle 30 has been operated and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, so that the change in the light emission pattern is easily noticeable to the player, and the player can be notified immediately that the end condition E3 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

(End of waiting demo performance Menu operation version)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance is ended by menu operation will be described with reference to Fig. 61 to Fig. 62. Fig. 61 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of operation when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in a low base state. Fig. 62 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in a low base state. Fig. 63 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display is ended by menu operation in a high base state.

<Low base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with an operation to open the menu display when the gaming state is in a low base state will be described with reference to Figures 61 to 63.

As shown in Figures 61 and 62, in the low base state, when the demo movie display that was started by the satisfaction of any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 is ended by the satisfaction of the end condition E4, that is, based on the operation of opening the menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter also referred to as the menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begins, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of them. Note that the operation of opening the menu display 004SG410 is assumed to be the operation of the push button 31B while the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but it may also be another operation such as the stick controller 31A.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination pattern based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when a menu operation is detected while the first part of the introduction to the second scene is being displayed in the demo movie display, and the end condition E4 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave lighting of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) begins (see FIG. 61(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1=0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E4 was satisfied, the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begin to be displayed, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 (see FIG. 61(C)).

In other words, when the end condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and starts illumination control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), while starting switching control to switch the display content from demo movie display to normal background and menu display 004SG410, but the normal background display and menu display 004SG410 starts at least a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) after the end condition E4 is met (see Figures 61 (C) and 62).

In more detail, when the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background and menu display 004SG410. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120, and the performance control CPU 120, which has received the extended command: B10E, starts controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command: B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

As a result, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the menu display 004SG410 begins a predetermined period of time th after the lighting state of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has changed, so that the lighting control for the normal background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) starts before the demo movie display ends and changes to the display of the first background display 004SG081, the decorative pattern, and the menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the performance control CPU 120 detects an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 by using the push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, it switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display and menu guide display 004SG401.

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the customer that the demo movie display has ended because push button 31B has been operated to display menu guide display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, so that the change in the light emission pattern is easily noticeable to the player, and the player can be notified immediately that the end condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

<High base state>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with an operation to open the menu display when the gaming state is in a high base state will be described with reference to Figures 61 and 63.

As shown in Figures 61 and 63, in the high base state, when the demo movie display that was started by the satisfaction of any one of the start conditions S1 to S6 ends based on the satisfaction of the end condition E4, that is, the operation of opening the menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter also referred to as the menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (first background display 004SG081 in Figure 61) and the decorative pattern begins, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of them. Note that the operation of opening the menu display 004SG410 is the operation of the push button 31B while the menu guide display 004SG401 is displayed, but it may also be another operation such as the stick controller 31A.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), during the demo movie, the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based illumination mode based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and button lamp 9e is lit in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

For example, when the first introductory part of the second scene in the demo movie display is being displayed, if a menu operation is detected and termination condition E4 is satisfied, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is switched to the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in purple (or green) waves (blue in Figure 61 (B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E4 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern begins, the volume/light quantity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and further, the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see FIG. 61 (C)).

In other words, when the end condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts the illumination control of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e), while starting the switching control of the display content from the demo movie display to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), but the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 start at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the end condition E4 was met (see Figures 61 (C) and 63).

In detail, when the termination condition E4 is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. In response to this, the display control unit 123 sends an extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120, and upon receiving the extension command: B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. On the other hand, after the display control unit 123 transmits the extension command: B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 begins after a predetermined period of time th has elapsed since the lighting state of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has switched, so that it appears that lighting control for the high B background of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) has started before the demo movie display ends and switches to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the performance control CPU 120 detects an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 by using the push button 31B while the demo movie display is being displayed, it switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and controls the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and menu display 004SG410.

In this way, by switching the control of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly notify the customer that the demo movie display has ended because push button 31B has been operated to display menu guide display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5 on which the demo movie display is displayed, over a wider area than the display screen, so that the change in the light emission pattern is easily noticeable to the player, and the player can be notified immediately that the end condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) is applied as the menu luminance data table for the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a luminance data table with a different light emission pattern from the high B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) may be set as the menu luminance data table.

(End of customer waiting demo performance when the interruption conditions are met)
In this embodiment, when an interrupt condition is satisfied while displaying a demo movie display, that is, when any of end condition E2 (start-up winning), end condition E3 (handle operation), and end condition E4 (menu operation) is satisfied, or when end condition E1 (time passage) is satisfied, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the demo movie display to a normal background display or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out display or the like which is displayed as a switching display.

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing as a sudden change by inserting a switching display, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interruption condition is made to appear as a sudden change without an interrupting display. By contrasting these events, it is possible to highlight the fact that the display ended due to an interruption, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the demo movie display is displayed in the low base state, if an interruption condition is met, that is, if any of the end conditions E2 (start-up winning), E3 (handle operation), and E4 (menu operation) is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the demo movie display to the normal background display without displaying a fade-out display or the like that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (time lapse) is met, and when the demo movie display is displayed in the high base state, if an interruption condition is met, that is, if any of the end conditions E2 (start-up winning), E3 (handle operation), and E4 (menu operation) is met, the CPU 120 switches from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out display or the like that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (time lapse) is met.

In this way, the end of the demo movie display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing as a sudden change by inserting a switching display, and the end of the demo movie display due to an interruption condition is made to appear as a sudden change without an interrupting display. By contrasting these events, it is possible to highlight the fact that the display ended due to an interruption, resulting in ideal customer waiting control.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an interruption condition is met while the demo movie display is being displayed, that is, when any of the end conditions E2 (start winning), E3 (handle operation), E4 (menu operation) is met, or when the end condition E1 (time lapse) is met, the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) from the demo movie display without displaying a fade-out display or the like that is displayed as a switching display when the end condition E1 (time lapse) is met. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when any of the end conditions E2 to E4 are met while the demo movie display is being displayed, the menu display 004SG410 may be displayed as a background display without displaying a switching display.

(End of waiting demo performance. Error occurred.)
Next, a case where an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance will be described based on Fig. 64 to Fig. 67. Fig. 64 is a timing chart showing a normal operation example of the payout device when a prize is won, and Fig. 64 is a timing chart showing an error operation example of the payout device when a prize is won. Fig. 65 is a diagram showing an operation example when a ball out error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance. Fig. 66 is a diagram for explaining the priority layer. Fig. 67 is a diagram showing a flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance started in a low base state. Fig. 68 is a diagram showing a flow when an error occurs in the customer waiting demo performance started in a high base state.

First, we will explain the ball out error, which is one type of error. The ball out error occurs when the payout device 004SG031 is operated by the payout control unit, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 64(A), when the conditions for paying out prize balls are met due to the occurrence of a winning prize or the like, the payout device 004SG031 performs a payout operation (for example, the rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, five balls), and the game balls are paid out into the payout passage. When all five game balls are detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 after the payout operation has started, the CPU 103 terminates the payout process as it considers the payout to have been successful. Therefore, the display screen of the image display device 5 does not display an error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 65(B)), which consists of a mark and the text display "Ball out error", and the main lamp 9a does not flash an error, as described below.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), when a payout operation (e.g., rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) is performed by the payout device 004SG031 to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 5 balls) in response to a winning prize, the CPU 103 judges whether or not a period during which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 has not detected a game ball has continued for a first judgment period tl (e.g., tl = 5 seconds) in a state in which there are unpaid balls (e.g., a state in which the remaining 3 of the 5 game balls have not been detected). If it is judged that no game balls have been detected within this first judgment period tl, that is, that a period during which no game balls have been detected in a state in which there are unpaid balls has continued for the first judgment period tl, it determines that the payout was not performed normally, and continues to perform a payout operation to pay out 5 game balls and a retry operation to repeatedly perform a game ball detection judgment within the first judgment period tl until the number of unpaid balls (e.g., 5 balls) is detected.

If five game balls have not been detected even after the third retry operation has ended during this retry operation period, that is, if the period during which no game balls have been detected while there are unpaid balls continues for the second judgment period tm (e.g., 15 seconds, including the first judgment period tl), the CPU 103 determines that there may be a malfunction such as an insufficient supply of game balls to the payout device 004SG031, a malfunction of the payout device 004SG031, or balls clogging the payout passage, and sends an error designation command indicating that a ball out error has occurred and continues the retry operation.

Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the error designation command, switches the main lamp 9a to a flashing red light to notify an error, while the board lamp and side lamp 9b maintain their previous light emission control. Also, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error designation command, the display screen displays an error display 004SG700 (see FIG. 65 (B)) to notify an error.

In addition, after the CPU 103 transmits an error designation command indicating a ball out error, when the first game ball is detected by the retry operation, it transmits an error designation command to the performance control CPU 120 specifying that the ball out error has been cleared. In other words, even if there are two or more unpaid balls, when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the first judgment period tl or the second judgment period tm has elapsed since the first game ball was detected by the retry operation, the error designation command specifying the clearing of the ball out error is transmitted, so that the error notification can be terminated quickly without waiting until all unpaid balls are detected. In addition, when a predetermined period tk (e.g., tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the error clear designation command was received, the error display 004SG700 is erased from the display screen and the error notification is terminated.

If there are still unpaid balls remaining after sending an error designation command to clear the error, the retry operation will be started again, and if the number of unpaid game balls is not detected even after the third retry operation is restarted, an error designation command specifying a ball out error will be sent again, and the performance control CPU 120 will resume the error notification described above.

<Low base state>
Next, an example of operation when a bulb-out error that occurs during the variable display of the first special pattern that is started in a low base state continues even after the demo movie display has started will be described with reference to Figures 65 to 67.

As shown in Figures 65 to 67, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts in the low base state, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background (see Figure 65 (A)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp start to light up in blue waves based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e keeps lighting up in white based on the default brightness data table.

Next, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an error command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), but switches to red flashing illumination control for the main lamp 9a in order to set the error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a in the priority layer, as shown in FIG. 66 (see FIG. 65 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 66, the normal layer is basically set with a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp according to the state, while the priority layer, which has priority over the normal layer, is set with an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) when an error occurs as described above. The error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used in preference to the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer to output brightness data to the LED driver, causing the main lamp 9a to flash red. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the light emission control time using the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the error message 004SG700 is displayed in the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen.

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are displayed statically in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen, and when it moves to the right side to a specified position and is displayed as an animation, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see Figure 65 (D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red.

In addition, when the start condition S1 for displaying the demo movie is met, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the board lamp and side lamp 9b is switched to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission mode based on white begins. Note that even if the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red (see FIG. 65 (E)). After that, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the start condition S1 for displaying the demo movie is met, the demo movie display begins (see FIG. 65 (F)).

After that, when the bulb failure error is released at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer, and the main lamp 9a also starts light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see FIG. 65 (G)). At this time, since the light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, it is possible to start light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) from a predetermined point in time during the demo movie display. Also, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed after the bulb failure error is released, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 65 (G)).

Although not shown in detail, the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol initiated by an irregular win or the like in a low base state and continues after the demo movie display has started is similar to the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol initiated in a low base state and continues after the demo movie display has started, as shown in FIG. 65, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, if a bulb-out error (specific error) occurs during variable display, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb-out error, and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, it continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the second period, it continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by having the lamp continue to notify of specific errors that occur during play (for example, a bulb-out error) whether the background is being displayed or the demo movie is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of bulb-out errors, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb-out error, and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb-out error, and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by continuing to use the lamp to notify of specific errors that occur during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, whether the background is being displayed or the demo movie is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of bulb-out errors, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

<High base state>
Next, an example of operation when a bulb-out error that occurs during the variable display of the second special pattern that is started in a high base state continues even after the demo movie display has started will be explained based on Figure 68 and with reference to Figure 65.

As shown in Figure 68, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts in the high base state, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background (see Figure 65 (A)). In addition, the board lamp and frame lamp start to light up in purple (or green) waves based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e keeps lighting up in white based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives an error command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) based on the brightness data table for the high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), while for the main lamp 9a, as shown in FIG. 66, it switches to red flashing illumination control in order to set the error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a in the priority layer (see FIG. 65 (B)).

Here, as shown in FIG. 66, basically, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the board lamp and frame lamp is set in the normal layer according to the state, while the priority layer, which has priority over the normal layer, is set with a brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) when an error occurs as described above. Then, the main lamp 9a flashes red by outputting brightness data to the LED driver using the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) in preference to the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction), etc.) set in the normal layer. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the time of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction), etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the error message 004SG700 is displayed in the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen (see Figure 65 (C)).

After that, when the variable display ends and the decorative patterns are displayed statically in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guide display 004SG401 is framed in from the bottom left side of the display screen, and when it moves to the right side to a specified position and is displayed as an animation, the volume/light intensity guide display 004SG402 is displayed in the bottom left corner of the display screen (see Figure 65 (D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red.

When the demo movie display start condition S1 is met, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the board lamp and side lamp 9b is switched to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission mode based on white begins. Note that even if the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the main lamp 9a continue to flash red (see Figure 65 (E)). After that, the demo movie display starts when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was met (see Figure 65 (F)).

After that, when the bulb failure error is released at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) of the normal layer, and the main lamp 9a also starts light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see FIG. 65 (G)). At this time, since the light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, it is possible to start light emission control based on the customer waiting demo brightness data table customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) from a predetermined point in time during the demo movie display. Also, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed after the bulb failure error is released, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see FIG. 65 (G)).

Although not shown in detail, the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol initiated by an irregular win or the like in a high base state and continues after the demo movie display has started is similar to the flow when a bulb-out error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol initiated in a high base state and continues after the demo movie display has started, as shown in FIG. 68, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

In addition, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error, and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state, controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error, and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by having the lamp continue to notify of a bulb failure error that occurs during variable display in both the low base state and the high base state, even when the background is being displayed or the demo movie is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable bulb failure error notifications, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the performance control CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb-out error, and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb-out error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb-out error, and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and then, if the bulb-out error is not resolved during the second period, continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by continuing to use the lamp to notify of specific errors that occur during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, whether the background is being displayed or the demo movie is being displayed, it is possible to provide stable notification of bulb-out errors, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the customer waiting demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is different from the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the customer waiting demo luminance data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) is white, while the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb blown error has occurred based on the lighting conditions during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) is different from the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) is blue, while the color that accounts for the majority of the luminance data that makes up the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the lighting conditions during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, the brightness data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different predominant colors, and the brightness data constituting the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different predominant colors. Specifically, the predominant color in the brightness data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) is blue, while the predominant color in the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 35). In addition, the color that accounts for a large proportion of the brightness data that makes up the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) is green (for time reduction) or purple (for probability change), while the color that accounts for a large proportion of the brightness data that makes up the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time-saving)), it is possible to indicate that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display regardless of which background is being displayed, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability change), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that make up the majority of the colors are different between the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the brightness data for errors (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb blown error has occurred based on the lighting conditions during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error does not occur during background display, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that make up the majority of the colors are different between the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: variable background) to have different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the lighting conditions during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In the present embodiment, an example is given of a form in which red flashing light emission control is performed based on an error brightness data table set in the priority layer when an error is notified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and light emission control may be performed based on dedicated error brightness data (grandchild data) that causes a lamp dedicated to error notification to flash red when an error is notified.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an error is notified, the main lamp 9a of the frame lamps is used to control the light emission for error notification. However, since the error lamp is illuminated to attract the attention of game store staff, the main lamp 9a is placed at the highest point of the frame lamp where it will not be hidden by the player and is the easiest for game store staff to notice, but the side lamp 9b or other lamps may also be used.

In addition, if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time shortened)). and controls the side lamp 9b and the board lamp, and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that make up the majority are different between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that make up the majority are different between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and by configuring the main color of the brightness data to be different between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The brightness data constituting the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visually recognized by the player differs. Specifically, the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) has a white-based light emission behavior, whereas the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that a bulb blown error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the display of the demo movie, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb-out error does not occur while the background is being displayed, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and board lamp are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable), and if a bulb-out error occurs while the background is being displayed, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb-out error does not occur during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb-out error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the light-emitting operation patterns of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) visually recognized by the player are different between the brightness data constituting the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) lights up in blue waves, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) lights up in purple (or green) waves, while the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: guaranteed bonus background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the display of the demo movie, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The brightness data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission operation modes of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) seen by the player are different, and the brightness data constituting the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission operation modes of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) seen by the player are different. Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) lights up in blue waves, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) lights up in purple (or green) waves, and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see Figure 35).

In this way, the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), making it possible to suggest that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the demo movie display, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

In addition, if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state ends, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background variable (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state In this case, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb-out error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has ended, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b and board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb-out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the brightness data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light-emitting operation modes of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) visually recognized by the player are different, and the brightness data constituting the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light-emitting operation modes of the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) visually recognized by the player are different. Specifically, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) lights up in a blue wave, the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) lights up in a purple (or green) wave, and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) flashes red (see Figure 35).

In this way, the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), making it possible to suggest that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission mode during the demo movie display, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

The brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the brightness data table for the error (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission operation modes of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b that are visually recognized by the player are different. Specifically, in the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are lit in a white-based light emission mode, and in the brightness data table for the error (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b are lit in a mode according to the state (see FIG. 35).

In this way, by configuring the behavior of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that an error has occurred based on the lighting state during the display of the demo movie, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: guaranteed change background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured so that the light emission operation modes of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b that are visually recognized by the player are different. Specifically, in the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: guaranteed change background), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding the button lamp 9e) are lit in blue waves, green waves, or purple waves, and in the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b are lit in a manner according to the state (see Figure 35).

In this way, by configuring the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: time-saving background, lamp data table: guaranteed bonus background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb-out error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and panel lamp are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background guaranteed change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and if a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, When a bulb-out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state is completed, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and when a bulb-out error does not occur during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state is completed, the main lamp 9a and the side lamp 9b and the board lamp are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and when a bulb-out error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state is completed, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the light-emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b that are visually recognized by the player differ between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the light-emitting operation mode of the main lamp 9a and the board lamp and side lamp 9b that are visually recognized by the player differ between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variable (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), the board lamp and frame lamp (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave, in the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), they light up in a purple (or green) wave, and in the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the board lamp and side lamp 9b light up in a manner appropriate to the state (see Figure 35).

In this way, the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the movement of the board lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player is configured to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), making it possible to suggest that a bulb burnout error has occurred based on the light emission mode during background display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The above-mentioned light-emitting operation modes are light-emitting modes that allow the player to see some kind of movement, and include, for example, blinking: a mode in which the light is turned on and off alternately, and swaying (hazy): a mode in which the brightness changes (e.g., changing from RGB: 700 to RGB: 400), but turning on and off without a change in brightness is not included in the light-emitting operation modes. For example, in the case of swaying (hazy), it is preferable to make the brightness of the specific light-emitting means different from the previous brightness data on the assumption that the second brightness data is used after the first brightness data, such as setting the specific light-emitting means to the first brightness (RGB is 100) during the first brightness data x ms (or making the combination of the brightness of the first, second, and third colors the first combination), setting the specific light-emitting means to the second brightness (RGB is A00) during the second brightness data y ms (or making the combination of the brightness of the first, second, and third colors the second combination), etc.

In addition, when the conditions for dispensing game balls are met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball out error occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) at the timing related to the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detecting the first (first) game ball dispensed, regardless of whether the game balls dispensed to the dispensing device 004SG031 (dispensing section) exceed the number of game balls to be dispensed when a ball out error occurs during the second customer waiting period, or whether the game balls dispensed to the dispensing device 004SG031 do not exceed the number of game balls to be dispensed.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout device 004SG031, the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the demo movie display at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, so that the demo movie display can be made to look natural and the processing can be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, when the conditions for dispensing game balls are met, the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, and an unpaid game ball occurs, a ball out error occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background guaranteed change) at the timing related to the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detecting the first (first) game ball dispensed, regardless of whether the ball out error occurs during the first customer waiting period and game balls exceed the number of unpaid game balls distributed to the dispensing device 004SG031 (dispensing section) or game balls not exceeding the number of unpaid game balls distributed to the dispensing device 004SG031.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout device 004SG031, the light emission mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is switched to the light emission mode corresponding to the background display at the timing when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, so that the background display can be made to look natural and the processing can be standardized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, during the second waiting period, if the condition for paying out the game ball is met and the period during which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball continues for the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl), the brightness data table for waiting for customers (lamp data table: waiting for customers demo) is switched to the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) to control the board lamp and frame lamp, and when a bulb-out error occurs during the second waiting period, when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected the game ball, the brightness data table for error (lamp data table: error) is switched to the brightness data table for waiting for customers (lamp data table: waiting for customers demo) to control the board lamp and frame lamp.

In this way, when the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 is not detecting a ball, this may be due to a bulb blown error, but since there is also the possibility of a delayed ball, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is not immediately switched. Instead, when a gaming ball is detected, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to a lighting mode that corresponds to the demo movie display, allowing the demo movie display to be displayed without any sense of incongruity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In addition, during the first customer waiting period, if the condition for paying out the game ball is met and the period during which the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a game ball continues for the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl), the board lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) to the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and when a bulb-out error occurs during the first customer waiting period, the board lamp and frame lamp are controlled by switching from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: background normal, lamp data table: background time-saving, lamp data table: background probability variable) when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or the first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected the game ball.

In this way, when the gaming ball detection sensor 004SG032 is not detecting a ball, this may be due to a bulb failure error, but since there is also the possibility of a delayed ball, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is not immediately switched. Instead, when a gaming ball is detected, the lighting mode of the board lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to the lighting mode that corresponds to the background display, allowing the background display to look natural and resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Output mechanism to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data for turning on/blinking/extinguishing one or more of the multiple LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9 to the LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In the following, the control of turning on/blinking/extinguishing a lamp such as an LED by the performance control CPU 120 is also called lamp control. The LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the lamp control target, in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blink/extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a lamp data table that contains brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The lamp data table includes an error lamp data table that is used when an error occurs, an SP reach lamp data table that is used during a super reach, and a background lamp data table.

Furthermore, the background lamp data table includes a normal background lamp data table used in the normal state (normal background shown in FIG. 77), a fanfare background lamp data table used in the fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, a jackpot background lamp data table used during a round in the jackpot game state, an ending background lamp data table used in the ending state in which an ending effect that notifies the end of the jackpot game state is executed, a probability variable background lamp data table used in the probability variable state (probability variable background shown in FIG. 77), a time-saving background lamp data table used in the time-saving state (time-saving background shown in FIG. 77), and a customer waiting lamp data table used in the customer waiting state (customer waiting demo shown in FIG. 77).

The above-mentioned background lamp data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background lamp data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states the game is controlled to, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, probability change state, time-saving state, and waiting state. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background lamp data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background lamp data table to the LED driver. This allows each game effect lamp 9 to be lamp-controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error lamp data table, the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69, the priority is highest for the error lamp data table, followed by the SP reach lamp data table, and then the background lamp data table.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 outputs brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in the normal state and the effect develops into a super reach effect, it uses the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect in preference to the normal background lamp data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver. As a result, when the effect develops into a super reach effect while the game effect lamps 9 are controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background lamp data table, the game effect lamps 9 that do not have brightness data set based on the SP reach lamp data table are controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table, but the game effect lamps 9 that have brightness data set based on the SP reach lamp data table are controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach effect based on the SP reach lamp data table. During the period when the brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is being output to the LED driver, for lamps for which brightness data is set based on the SP Reach lamp data table, the brightness data based on the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver, and when the normal state is restored after the Super Reach performance ends, the brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table is output to the LED driver. Also, when a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered after the Super Reach performance ends, the brightness data based on the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver, and the lamps are controlled in a manner based on the fanfare background lamp data table for all lamps.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background lamp data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the performance progresses to a super reach performance, the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach performance is used preferentially over the background lamp data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background lamp data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach lamp data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table, but since the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach lamp data table, the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. After the Super Reach performance ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the brightness data that was being updated. Note that for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is not set, the performance control CPU 120 continues to output the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table to the LED driver.

Also, for example, when an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in the normal state or while outputting brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table during a super reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table, but for the lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error is used in preference to the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table, and brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the error lamp data table. As a result, for the lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error lamp data table. Furthermore, for lamps for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set during the period in which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is being output to the LED driver, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table is not output to the LED driver, and when the error is cleared and the game returns to the normal state or the game state during the super reach performance, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the time of lamp control corresponding to the normal state and lamp control corresponding to the super reach performance being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the normal background lamp data table corresponding to the normal state and the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach performance, but when an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error lamp data table corresponding to the error in preference to the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the time of lamp control using the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. In other words, even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error lamp data table, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table, but since the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table have a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error lamp data table, the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table are not output to the LED driver. After the error is released, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that was being updated. Note that for the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table is not set, the brightness data included in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table continues to be output to the LED driver.

[Lighting state of the game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, the lamps of each game effect lamp 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off", "almost off", "on", and "blinking" are used to refer to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As described above, the states of each game effect lamp 9 according to "on" and "blinking" are also referred to as "lighting states".

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has a very low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data is "000", the corresponding LED is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED is lit in white with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes a constant lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, a wave lighting state in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and a hazy lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." The brightness data is hexadecimal data that can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

The term "blinking" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is in a state other than the above-mentioned "off" or "on", and in which the brightness of each lamp when it is on alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "blinking" includes repeating on and off or almost off, and specifically, "blinking" includes switching over time between a case in which the brightness data is any of "2" to "F" and a case in which the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, there is a hazy lighting as a lighting state of the lamp, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing its brightness, whereas the blinking is a state in which all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly lit and off or almost off.

[Explanation of the game effect lamp]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using lamp data tables]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a lamp data table stored in the ROM 121 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 to light/blink/turn off through lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command sent from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one for each frame (33 ms) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying corresponding to each part, the display control unit 123 performs display control of the image display device 5 based on the image data (moving image data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extension command (for example, extension command BXXX (where "X" is any value (0 to F)) corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control it is performing, and transmits the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 123.

Figure 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. As shown in Figure 70, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs a specified display control, it sends an extension command (BXXX) for specifying the display control to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (XXX (parent)) corresponding to the specified display control.

The parent table stores information specifying which lamps (lighted or unlit) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are subject to lamp control, information specifying the child table to be referenced during lamp control corresponding to the lamps subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are subject to lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 72, side lamp 9b is specified as the target of lamp control. In addition, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX is specified corresponding to side lamp 9, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table. Note that for lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which no corresponding information is stored in the parent table (main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, button lamp 9e in FIG. 72), lamp control based on the information last set in the parent table will continue to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 70, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of a lamp specified in a parent table using a specified child table, for example, if 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 ms to time this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs the counter subtraction process 60,000 times to time 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until the maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is timed. In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 receives a new extension command after receiving an extension command and before the maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is timed, the performance control CPU 120 stops the lamp control being performed and performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the newly received extension command. Although it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control using the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). Even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it is possible to continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

In the child table, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for lamp control are stored in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the child table only stores information about lamps that are the subject of lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not the subject of lamp control.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 73, corresponding to side lamp 9b (XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX), the following are specified in the order in which lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_1 and this grandchild table is performed: execution time: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 and this grandchild table is performed: execution time: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_3 and this grandchild table is performed: execution time: 230 ms, grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 and this grandchild table is performed: execution time: 600,000 ms, in which lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 and this grandchild table is performed: Furthermore, for the game effect lamps 9 for which no corresponding information is stored in the child table (in FIG. 73, the main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), lamp control based on the information last set in the child table will continue.

As shown in FIG. 70, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified first, times the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified next, for all the specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in FIG. 73, for the side lamp 9b, first, lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 until 500 ms is timed, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 500 ms is timed, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 until 230 ms is timed, and then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 600,000 ms is timed. Although it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, the last grandchild table specified sets the maximum time for lamp control to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the performance display (performance scene), so that the currently running lamp control can be continued for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason.

In addition, in the child table, when the side lamp 9b is the target of lamp control, for example, as shown in FIG. 74, one grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 may be specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, or two grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 and XD___LWU_2_XXX_1 may be specified, not shown. Then, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the performance control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified as the grandchild tables corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to perform lamp control of the left side lamp 9b, and uses the other grandchild table to perform lamp control of the right side lamp 9b. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, common lamp control is performed for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, whereas when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b.

The grandchild table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, brightness data that is referenced during lamp control and information that specifies the execution time for lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the grandchild table only stores information about lamps that are the subject of lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not the subject of lamp control.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 74, the following data are stored for side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1): luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000; execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 100 ms; luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000; execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms; luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms are specified in the order in which lamp control using these brightness data is executed. Note that for lamps that do not have corresponding information stored among the game effect lamps 9 in the grandchild table (main lamp 9a, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, button lamp 9e in FIG. 74), lamp control based on the information in the grandchild table last set before is continued.

In the brightness data of the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1) in the grandchild tables shown in Figures 72 to 74, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b. , the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the ninth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b, and the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 11 indicate the RGB values of the eleventh lamp from the top of both side lamps 9b.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, when separate grandchild tables are specified for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, in the brightness data for the left side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_~), the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the left The data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits to the third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits to the third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits to the third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits to the sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the ninth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest digits to the third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top of the left side lamp 9b, and the values of the lowest digits to the third digits of the data corresponding to number 11 indicate the RGB values of the left side lamp 9 and in the brightness data for the right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_2_~), the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b, and the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the ninth lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b, and the lowest digits of the data corresponding to number 11 indicate the RGB values of the eleventh lamp from the top of the right-side side lamp 9b.

Although not shown, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LMAIN_~) that specifies the main lamp 9a, the values of the lowest digits from the first to third digits indicate the RGB values of the main lamp 9a. In the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LLOGO_~) that specifies the movable body lamp 9d, the values of the lowest digits from the fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d, the values of the lowest digits from the first to third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d, the values of the lowest digits from the fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d, and the values of the lowest digits from the first to third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the left of the movable body lamp 9d. In addition, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LSLMP_~) that specifies the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 5 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top of the decorative lamp 9f. In addition, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LATAK_~) that specifies the attacca lamp 9c, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the third lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the left of the attacca lamp 9c. In addition, in the brightness data of the grandchild table (XD___LPUSH_~) that specifies the button lamp 9e, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits indicate the RGB values of the button lamp 9e.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the subject of the lamp control. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. Specifically, the brightness data is divided into 16 levels of current value from 0 to F, and when the brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when the brightness data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element, when the brightness data of "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when the brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can emit light in various colors by passing a current corresponding to brightness data through each RGB element. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can also be lit in colors corresponding to each performance or character by emitting light based on brightness data. As an example, when data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. When data "F0F" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in reddish purple. When data "FF0" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in yellow.

As shown in FIG. 70, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, it performs the process of, for example, outputting the first specified brightness data to the LED driver, timing the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputting the next specified brightness data to the LED driver, for all specified brightness data, in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in FIG. 73, for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the following luminance data is output to the LED driver until 100 ms is first counted, and then the following luminance data is output to the LED driver until 120 ms is counted: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 The CPU 120 outputs 0x000 to the LED driver, and then outputs the following brightness data to the LED driver until 120 ms is clocked: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, and 0x5AA. The CPU 120 then outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, 0x5AA, and 0x5AA until 40 ms is clocked. The LED driver then passes a current corresponding to the received brightness data through the specified LED based on the received brightness data. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and performs lamp control based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while decrementing the timers at regular intervals (e.g., 10 ms intervals).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the figure. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. As shown in FIG. 71, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, 500 ms is specified as the time when the first lamp control is performed for the side lamp 9b, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 is specified, 500 ms is specified as the time when the second lamp control is performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified, 230 ms is specified as the time when the third lamp control is performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 is specified, and 600,000 ms is specified as the time when the fourth lamp control is performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, the luminance data (RGB data) for the side lamp 9b is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x499" at 100 ms intervals. For ease of explanation, the luminance data in the first 100 ms will be called data 1, the luminance data in the second 100 ms will be called data 2, the luminance data in the third 100 ms will be called data 3, and the luminance data in the fourth 100 ms will be called data 4.

When controlling lamps for the second grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, the performance control CPU 120 counts the specified 500 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until the count reaches 500 ms. However, if the count has not yet reached 500 ms after outputting data 1 through data 4, the brightness data is output again to the LED driver in order starting from the first data 1. When the count eventually reaches 500 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 specified by the child table.

When controlling lamps for the fourth specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, the performance control CPU 120 times the specified 600,000 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until the time reaches 600,000 ms. However, if the time has not yet reached 600,000 ms after outputting data 1 through data 4, the brightness data will again be output to the LED driver in order starting from the first data 1. When the time reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. At this time, because the child table does not have a next grandchild table specified, output of luminance data based on the grandchild table first specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 will begin. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the clock will not reach 600,000 ms, and if the next extension command is received from the display control unit 123 before the clock reaches 600,000 ms, output of luminance data based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table specified in the newly received extension command will begin.

As shown in the parent table in FIG. 72, the maximum time for lamp control by a child table is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in this parent table serves as a measure against malfunctions. That is, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables to control the lamps based on the performance control command from the main board 11, but even if some malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so it is possible to prevent different lamp controls from being performed one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Also, as in the child table shown in Figure 73, the execution time for lamp control by the last-specified grandchild table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The 10-minute data in such a child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again by the first-specified grandchild table of the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still remaining.

In addition, in the grandchild table, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that references the last specified brightness data. With this configuration, the 10-minute data in the brightness data serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again using the brightness data specified at the beginning of the grandchild table when the timer corresponding to the grandchild table has reached 0, due to the timer of the child table still remaining. In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, preventing the problem of continuous changes in the lamp lighting. Furthermore, by specifying brightness data spanning 600,000 ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, the problem of continuous changes in the lamp lighting can be more effectively prevented.

[Lamp data table used during non-play 1]
FIG. 77 shows a lamp data table used when not playing (only the white button flashing and the red button flashing are used during playing).

The background normal shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the normal background image, and the presentation control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the background normal when it receives the extended command: B10E transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the normal background image after power is restored (when controlled to the normal state), after the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the game state ends, after the end of the fluctuations in the normal state, after the end of the last game fluctuation in the time-saving state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the normal state), after the end of the demo movie in the normal state, and after the end of the menu display in the normal state.

The background time-saving shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the time-saving background image, and the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the normal background when it receives the extended command: B11D transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the time-saving background image after power is restored (when controlled to the time-saving state), after the end of fluctuations in the time-saving state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the time-saving state), after the end of the demo movie in the time-saving state, and after the end of the menu display in the time-saving state.

The background probability change shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the probability change background image, and the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 using the normal background when it receives the extended command: B121 sent in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the probability change background image after power is restored (if controlled to the probability change state), after the fluctuation in the probability change state ends, after the jackpot game state ends (if controlled to the probability change state), after the demo movie in the probability change state ends, and after the menu display in the probability change state ends.

The customer waiting demo shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table of the game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the customer waiting demo performance, and the performance control CPU 120 uses the customer waiting demo to control the lamps of the game effect lamps 9 when the conditions for starting the customer waiting demo performance are met and the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: BF01 transmitted in response to control to display an image corresponding to the customer waiting demo performance.

The button white light shown in FIG. 77 is the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e, which corresponds to non-playing states except during initialization notification, and the presentation control CPU 120 uses the button white light to control the play effect lamp 9 when it receives the extended command: B001 sent from the display control unit 123 after power is restored, after the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the play state has ended, and after the operation prompt presentation has ended.

The button flashing white shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompting effect, and when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extension command: B002 transmitted in conjunction with control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect of causing the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, the effect control CPU 120 uses the button flashing white to control the game effect lamp 9.

The button flashing red shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompting effect, and when the effect control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B003 transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect of causing the button lamp 9e to flash red during play, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 by flashing the button white.

The button lamp 9e is not specified in the lamp data table used except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompt presentation, and the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using the white button illumination except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompt presentation. Also, since the white button illumination, white flashing button, and red flashing button do not specify game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e, even if the presentation control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying the white button illumination, white flashing button, or red flashing button, the lamp control of the game effect lamps 9 other than the button lamp 9e is continued based on the previous lamp data table.

The initialization notification shown in FIG. 77 is a lamp data table corresponding to the initialization notification, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command: BFFF that is sent in conjunction with the display control unit 123 performing control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, the performance control CPU 120 uses initialization to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9.

The error shown in Figure 77 is the lamp data table of the main lamp 9a corresponding to an error notification, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command: BFF1 sent from the display control unit 123 in response to the occurrence of an error, it uses the error to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, since an error does not specify any game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying an error, it continues to perform lamp control based on the previous lamp data table for game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a.

[Lamp Data Table: Background Normal]
Figure 78 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: background normal used when the extension command: B10E is received, Figure 79 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: background normal, and Figures 80 and 81 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background normal.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B10E transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of a normal background image, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the normal background parent table based on the extended command: B10E. As shown in FIG. 78, the normal background parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: B10E, it performs lamp control of the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP specified by the normal background parent table.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP contains the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time, as shown in Figure 79.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO (Figure 80) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO is set with the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced, as shown in FIG. 80. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO is set with a blue-based brightness, and the main lamp 9a is lit in a state where the brightness changes with a blue base.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO until 600,000 ms have elapsed, and if 600,000 ms has elapsed, it sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command.

As shown in Figures 78 to 81, the normal background parent table has child tables set that also refer to the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacca lamps 9c, and these child tables also have grandchild tables, etc., that they refer to. These grandchild tables also have the brightness data, etc., that they refer to set in the order of execution. The performance control CPU 120 controls the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacca lamps 9c in the same manner as above, by referring to the child table specified by the parent table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the background normal child table references for the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c also has a blue-based brightness set, and the lighting state for the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c changes brightness with a blue base.

In addition, since the normal background parent table does not have a child table or grandchild table set for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Time Reduction]
Figure 82 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: background time reduction used when the extended command: B11D is received, Figure 83 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: background time reduction, and Figures 84 to 85 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background time reduction.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives the extended command: B11D transmitted in association with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the background image for time saving, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance specifies the parent table for the background time saving based on the extended command: B11D. As shown in Figs. 82 to 85, the parent table for the background time saving has child tables set to refer to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c, and these child tables have grandchild tables to refer to, and these grandchild tables have brightness data to refer to set in the order of execution. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c in the same procedure as for the normal background, referring to the child table specified by the parent table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the background time reduction child table references for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c is set to a brightness with a green base, and the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c are also lit in a way that changes brightness with a green base.

In addition, since no child or grandchild tables for button lamp 9e are set in the parent table for background time reduction, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table previously set (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Chance Variation]
Figure 86 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: background probability change used when the extended command: B121 is received, Figure 87 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: background probability change, and Figures 88 to 89 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background probability change.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives the extended command B121 transmitted in association with the display control unit 123 controlling the display of the background image for the probability change, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance specifies the parent table for the background probability change based on the extended command B121. As shown in Figs. 86 to 89, the parent table for the background probability change has child tables set to refer to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c, and these child tables have grandchild tables to refer to, and these grandchild tables have brightness data to refer to set in the order of execution. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c in the same procedure as for the normal background, referring to the child table specified by the parent table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the background probability change child table references for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c is set to a purple-based brightness, and the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c are also lit in a way that changes brightness with a purple base.

In addition, since the parent table of the background probability change does not have a child table or grandchild table set for the button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously (button lit white).

[Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo]
Figure 90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo used when the extended command: BF01 is received, Figure 91 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, and Figures 92 to 98 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01 sent when the display control unit performs display control of the customer waiting demo display performance, it specifies the parent table of the customer waiting demo based on the extended command: BF01. As shown in FIG. 90, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a for a maximum of 600,000 ms by referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it performs lamp control of the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO contains the grandchild tables and execution times of main lamp 9a in the order of reference, as shown in Figure 91.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92) that is set first in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes white when the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance starts.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 93 and 94) which is set second in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white for the period of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and the lighting state changes in accordance with the movement of the letters in the company name.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 9,500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, it controls the lamps by referring to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 114) which is set as the third in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. The common table is a grandchild table which is commonly referenced even when the parent table is different. As a result, the main lamp 9a is turned off during the periods of the Model Introduction 1, Model Introduction 2-1, Model Introduction 3-1, Model Introduction 2-2, Model Introduction 3-1, and Model Introduction 2-3 parts which make up the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance measures 30,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, it controls the lamps by referring to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 115), which is set as the fourth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table that is also used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes color to a rainbow color during the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92), which is set as the fifth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes white at the start of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (FIG. 115) which is set as the sixth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes color to a rainbow color over the duration of one subtitle part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92), which is set as the seventh grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a flashes white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (FIG. 115) which is set as the eighth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes color to a rainbow color over the period of the two subtitle parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 4,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 114), which is set as the ninth table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a will be turned off for 500 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 98), which is set as the 10th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up in white during the Attention 1 and Attention 2 parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 4000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 114) that is set as the 11th table in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a will be turned off for 500 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then receives an extension command (B10E, B11D or B121) sent when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as normal background, and switches to lamp control using the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains in an off state until a new extension command is received, and when a new extension command is received, it switches to a light emission mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in FIG. 90, the parent table of the customer waiting demo is set to perform lamp control for the side lamp 9b for a maximum of 600,000 ms by referencing the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it performs lamp control for the side lamp 9b by referencing the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer waiting demo.

In child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, the grandchild tables of side lamp 9b and the execution times are set in the order of reference, as shown in FIG. 91.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92) that is set first in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes white when the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance starts.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 93 and 94) which is the second grandchild table set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up in white for the period of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and the lighting state changes in accordance with the movement of the letters in the company name.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 9,500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02, it performs lamp control by referencing the third common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 114) in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03 (Figure 95), which is the fourth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of Model Introduction 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamps 9b change color in the following order according to the type of character that appears: green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, white.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 12,500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03, it performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 96), which is set as the fifth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of model introduction 2-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the light emission state changes in a predetermined pattern.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 97), which is set as the sixth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes green for the period of Model Introduction 3-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 96), which is set as the seventh grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of Model Introduction 2-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the lighting state changes in a predetermined pattern.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 97), which is set as the eighth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes green for the period of Model Introduction 3-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 1000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 96), which is set as the ninth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, during the period of Model Introduction 2-3, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white and the lighting state changes in a predetermined pattern.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 5000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 114) that is set as the 10th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b will be turned off for 500 ms.

Then, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it controls the lamps by referring to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 115) which is set as the 11th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table that is also used when displaying the title of the jackpot state. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes color to a rainbow color during the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92) which is set as the 12th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, at the start of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b flashes white.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 115) which is set as the 13th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes color to a rainbow color for the duration of one subtitle part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 measures 4500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 92) that is set as the 14th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b flashes white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01, it controls the lamps by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 115) which is set as the 15th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b changes color to a rainbow color over the period of the two subtitle parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 4,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 114), which is set as the 16th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF, it controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 98), which is set as the 17th grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamps 9b are lit in white during the Attention 1 and Attention 2 parts that make up the customer waiting demo performance.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed out 4000 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06, it performs lamp control by referencing the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 114) that is set as the 18th table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b will be turned off for 500 ms.

The performance control CPU 120 then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D or B121) sent when the display control unit 123 performs display control such as normal background, and switches to lamp control using the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command. As a result, the side lamp 9b continues to be turned off until a new extended command is received, and when a new extended command is received, it switches to a light emission mode based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figures 90 to 98, the parent table for the customer waiting demo has child tables set that also refer to the movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c, and these child tables have grandchild tables, etc., set in the order of execution to which they refer, and these grandchild tables have brightness data, etc., set in the order of execution to which they refer, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c in the same manner as above, by referring to the child table specified in the parent table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table.

As a result, after the start of the customer waiting demo performance, the movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c flash white for 500 ms at the start of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, light up in white for the period of the company name part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and the light emission mode changes in accordance with the movement of the letters of the company name, then turn off for 500 ms, and the light color changes in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white in accordance with the type of character that appears during the period of model introduction 1 that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, light up in white for the period of model introduction 2-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern, flashing green for the period of model introduction 3-1 that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, light up in white for the period of model introduction 2-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and the light emission mode changes in a predetermined pattern, flashing green for the period of model introduction 3-2 that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, and It lights up in white for the period of model introduction 2-3 that constitutes the performance, and the light emission state changes in a predetermined pattern, then it is turned off for 500 ms, the light emission color changes to rainbow colors for the period of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, it flashes white at the start of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the light emission color changes to rainbow colors for the period of the subtitle 1 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, it flashes white at the start of the subtitle 2 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the light emission color changes to rainbow colors for the period of the subtitle 2 part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, then it is turned off for 500 ms, it lights up in white for the periods of the attention call 1 and attention call 2 that constitute the customer waiting demo performance, then it is turned off for 500 ms, and it remains turned off until a new extended command is received, and when a new extended command is received, it switches to the light emission state based on the received extended command.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BF01, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table: customer waiting demo based on the extended command: BF01, so that the main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c change in light color and light pattern according to each part of the customer waiting demo performance.

In addition, since no child or grandchild tables for button lamp 9e are set in the parent table of the customer waiting demo, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table previously set (button white light).

In addition, in the Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo, grandchild tables are specified for the Company Name Part, Model Introduction 1 Part, Model Introduction 2-1, Model Introduction 3-1, Model Introduction 2-2, Model Introduction 3-2, Model Introduction 2-3, Main Title Part, Subtitle 1 Part, Subtitle 2 Part, and Warning Part for the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c, so that lamp control can be performed so that the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacca lamp 9c will emit light in a manner appropriate to each part.

In addition, for the Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo, for the main lamp 9a, a grandchild table is specified for each of the company name part, model introduction part, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and warning part, while for model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, and model introduction 2-3 that make up the model introduction part, one grandchild table is specified, so the overall amount of data can be reduced.

In addition, the Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo does not have a grandchild table for button lamp 9e, and for button lamp 9e, lamp control is performed based on one grandchild table from before the customer waiting demo, so the overall amount of data can be reduced.

In addition, for grandchild tables that control the lights to be turned off or illuminate in rainbow colors, the lamps are controlled using a common table that is also used by other parent tables, so the overall amount of data can be reduced. Grandchild tables that temporarily illuminate in white can also be controlled using a common table.

[Lamp Data Table: Button White Light]
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the Lamp Data Table: Button White Light used when the extension command: B001 is received, FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the Lamp Data Table: Button White Light, and FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the Lamp Data Table: Button White Light.

When the CPU 120 for controlling presentation receives an extended command: B001 sent from the display control unit 123 after power is restored, after the initialization notification accompanying the initialization of the game state is completed, or after the operation prompt presentation is completed, the CPU 120 for controlling presentation specifies the parent table for the button lighting white based on the extended command: B001. As shown in FIG. 99, the parent table for the button lighting white is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the CPU 120 for controlling presentation receives an extended command: B001, the CPU 120 for controlling presentation controls the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the button lighting white.

Child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 100.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU (Figure 101) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in FIG. 101, the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU is set with the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU is set to a brightness that emits white light, and the button lamp 9e lights up in white.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms has elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B002 or B003) that changes the lighting state of the button lamp 9e before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command.

In addition, since the parent table for the white button light does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacca lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table that was previously set.

[Lamp Data Table: Button flashing white]
Figure 102 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: button blinking white used when extended command: B002 is received, Figure 103 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: button blinking white, and Figure 104 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: button blinking white.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives an extended command: B002 transmitted in association with control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to an operation prompt presentation that causes the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation specifies a parent table for the button flashing white based on the extended command: B002. As shown in FIG. 102, the parent table for the button flashing white is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the extended command: B002, the CPU 120 controls the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the button flashing white.

Child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in FIG. 103.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU (Figure 104) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in FIG. 104, the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU is set with the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU is set to a brightness that emits white light and an off state, and the button lamp 9e flashes white.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU until 600,000 ms has elapsed. If 600,000 ms has elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) that changes the lighting state of the button lamp 9e before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command.

In addition, since the parent table for the white blinking button does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacca lamp 9c, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table that was previously set.

[Lamp Data Table: Button flashing red]
Figure 105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the Lamp Data Table: Red Flashing Button used when the extended command: B003 is received, Figure 106 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the Lamp Data Table: Red Flashing Button, and Figure 107 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the Lamp Data Table: Red Flashing Button.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the extended command: B003 transmitted in association with the control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the operation prompt presentation of making the button lamp 9e flash red during gameplay, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation specifies the parent table for the flashing red button based on the extended command: B003. As shown in FIG. 105, the parent table for the flashing red button is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the extended command: B003, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation controls the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the flashing red button.

Child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in FIG. 106.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU (Figure 107) set in the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in FIG. 107, the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU is set with the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU is set to a brightness of red light and an off state, and the button lamp 9e flashes red.

After the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU until 600,000 ms has elapsed. If 600,000 ms has elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extension command (B001) that changes the lighting state of the button lamp 9e before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extension command.

In addition, since the parent table for the red flashing button does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacca lamp 9c, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table that was previously set.

[Lamp Data Table: Initialization Notification]
Figure 108 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the lamp data table: initialization notification used when the extended command: BFFF is received, Figure 109 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the lamp data table: initialization notification, and Figure 110 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: initialization notification.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFFF transmitted in conjunction with the display control unit 123 performing control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the parent table of the initialization notification based on the extended command: BFFF. As shown in FIG. 108, the parent table of the initialization notification is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFFF, it performs lamp control of the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP specified by the parent table of the initialization notification.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP contains the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time, as shown in FIG. 109.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA (Figure 110) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in FIG. 110, the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA is set with the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA is set with a brightness that causes the lamp to emit red light, and the main lamp 9a lights up in red.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms has elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command.

As shown in Figures 108 to 110, the parent table for the initialization notification has child tables set up that also refer to the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, attacca lamps 9c, and button lamps 9e. These child tables also have grandchild tables etc. set up to refer to. These grandchild tables also have brightness data etc. set up in the order of execution to be referenced. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table specified by the parent table, the grandchild table specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table to control the side lamps 9b, movable body lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, attacca lamps 9c, and button lamps 9e in the same procedure as above.

The brightness data set in the grandchild table that the initialization notification child table references for the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e is also set to a brightness that causes the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e to light up in red.

[Lamp Data Table: Error]
Figure 111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error parent table used when the extension command: BFF1 is received, Figure 112 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error child table, and Figure 113 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the lamp data table: error grandchild table.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1 sent from the display control unit 123 due to the occurrence of an error, it specifies the error parent table based on the extended command: BFF1. As shown in FIG. 111, the error parent table is set to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command: BFF1, it performs lamp control of the main lamp 9a by referencing the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP specified by the error parent table.

Child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP contains the grandchild table of the main lamp 9a to be referenced and the execution time, as shown in FIG. 112.

The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR (Figure 113) set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in FIG. 113, the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR is set with the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced. The performance control CPU 120 then switches control based on the brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR for each execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR is set with the brightness of red light and an off state, and the main lamp 9a flashes red.

After the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, the performance control CPU 120 repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR until 600,000 ms have elapsed. If 600,000 ms has elapsed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000 ms has elapsed after the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP is specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table based on the newly received extended command.

In addition, since the error parent table does not have child or grandchild tables set for the side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table that was set previously.

[Common Table]
The common table is a grandchild table that is also referenced by child tables set in different parent tables, and as shown in Figures 114 to 118, it includes a common table (XD___L to _OFF) that turns off the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, a common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_01) that slowly changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e to rainbow colors, and a common table (XD___L to _RAINBOW_02) that quickly changes the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e to rainbow colors.

These common tables are provided for each of the in-lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacca lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e, and it is possible to control some of the game effect lamps 9 using the common table.

By providing a common table that can be referenced from child tables set in different parent tables to control lamps in this way, data volume can be reduced.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which a first presentation mode can be executed in a low base state, a second presentation mode can be executed in a low-probability high base state, and a third presentation mode can be executed in a high-probability high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of presentation modes may be executable in a low base state, three or more types of presentation modes may be executable in a high base state, or only one type of presentation mode may be executable.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a vertical scrolling display is performed in the first presentation mode, a rotating display is performed in the second presentation mode, and a vertical scrolling display is performed in the third presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are variable displayed in each presentation mode can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a big win game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state, a probability-varying state, a small win game state, etc. may also be applied as an advantageous state.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the normal state is a low-probability, low-base state, and the special state, which is more likely to execute a variable display than the normal state and has a shorter average variable display period, is a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state and the special state a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a high probability state (high probability high base state), and an example of applying the present invention to a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the time-saving state or the high probability state when a jackpot game ends is given; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to pachinko game machines that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, which is one of the cases when the variable display result does not match in a low probability state, or that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after the RAM is cleared (a cold start of the pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game is called time-saving state A, the time-saving state controlled based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or RAM clear (cold start of pachinko game machine 1) is called time-saving state B, and the time-saving state controlled based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result is not a miss in a low probability state is called time-saving state C.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the time-saving state C described above, multiple types of variable display results that can be won in the time-saving state C can be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed can be varied depending on the type of variable display result when the time-saving state C is won.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine was used as an example of a game machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, and assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

The following describes further the form for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention based on the examples.

[Form A1-1]
The gaming machine of form A1-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the specific performance is executed and after the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed (see FIGS. 157 to 160, 169, 170, 176, 187, and 192).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the types of background images are different before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even in effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed, different impressions can be suitably given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A1-2]
The gaming machine of form A1-2 is
Both a predetermined performance and a specific performance can be executed in one variable display,
When a specific performance is executed without a predetermined performance, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a specific performance is executed without a predetermined performance (see Figures 157 to 160).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A1-3]
The gaming machine of form A1-3 is
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image that is more advantageous than the first background image;
The first predetermined part can be executed while the first background image is displayed,
A second background image is displayed during the execution of the second predetermined part;
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background teasing effect different from the predetermined effect is executed,
When the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the second background image is displayed by the second background teasing effect (see FIG. 154).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether the second background image is displayed through the predetermined effect or the second background preview effect.

[Form A1-4-1]
The gaming machine of the form A1-4-1 is,
In one variable display, both a predetermined performance and a specific performance can be executed,
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
When a specific performance is performed before the specific performance is performed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific performance is not performed (see Figures 157 to 160).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by making the player expect that both the predetermined effect and the specific effect will be executed.

[Form A1-4-2]
The gaming machine of the form A1-4-2 is,
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
the background image includes a first background image before the decoration identification information reaches a reach state, a second background image before the decoration identification information reaches a reach state and which is more advantageous than the first background image, a third background image after the decoration identification information reaches a reach state, and a fourth background image after the decoration identification information reaches a reach state and which is more advantageous than the third background image,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed together with a second background image;
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed together with the fourth background image (see Figures 169, 170, 176, 187, and 192).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the relationship between the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and the background image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A1-4-3]
The gaming machine of the form A1-4-3 is,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the second background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized;
The fragment image in the specific performance is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a part of the fourth background image in a superimposed relationship (see FIG. 183, FIG. 184, FIG. 197).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second specified part and the specific performance can be improved.

[Form A1-4-4]
The gaming machine of the form A1-4-4 is,
The fragment image is capable of performing a rotational movement;
When the image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the second background image superimposed on the image fragment;
When the rotation operation causes the image fragment to be at the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the second background image that is superimposed on the image fragment (see FIGS. 207 and 213).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A1-4-5]
The gaming machine of form A1-4-5 is,
When a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a first angle, a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a second angle (see FIGS. 207 and 213 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A1-5]
The gaming machine of form A1-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction in common;
A fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a predetermined direction (see FIG. 208 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A1-6]
The gaming machine of form A1-6 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see FIG. 196).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form A1-7-1]
The gaming machine of the form A1-7-1 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction in common;
The period required for the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance to be hidden in the display area of the display means is the same (see FIG. 199 and FIG. 204 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form A1-7-2]
The gaming machine of form A1-7-2 is
The visibility of the fragment images that are displayed moving in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and the timing before the fragment images are hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 199 and 204).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A1-7-3]
The gaming machine of the form A1-7-3 is,
A fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a specific performance takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see FIG. 208).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form A1-8]
The gaming machine of form A1-8 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotational motion,
The number of rotational operations performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means is the same as the number of rotational operations performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means (see Figs. 207 and 213 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form A2-1]
The gaming machine of form A2-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
the display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when a transition is made from a first predetermined part to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific performance is displayed;
During a display period of the effect image, it is difficult to visually recognize the image fragments over a first period, and it is possible to visually recognize the image fragments over a second period after the first period has elapsed (see FIGS. 169, 170, 176, 187, and 192).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image, and the specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image, can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, the sense of incongruity felt when a fragment image is displayed by an effect image is reduced, allowing the predetermined effect and the specific effect to be executed preferably.

[Form A2-2]
The gaming machine of form A2-2 is
The length of the display period of the effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing are the same (see FIGS. 187 and 192 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form A2-3]
The gaming machine of form A2-3 is
The execution period of the first predetermined part is longer than the execution period of the second predetermined part,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see FIG. 187 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display of the fragment images can be started without creating an awkward feeling by using the effect image.

[Form A2-4]
The gaming machine of form A2-4 is
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 169, 170, and 176).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form A3-1]
The gaming machine of form A3-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner in which they change and move from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the fragment images (see FIGS. 172, 179, 189, 194, and 196).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the speed at which the fragment images are moved is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A3-2]
The gaming machine of form A3-2 is
In one variable display, a predetermined performance can be performed multiple times, while a specific performance can be performed once;
When the predetermined performance is executed multiple times, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined performance is executed once,
When a specific performance is executed once, there is a higher expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state than when a predetermined performance is executed multiple times (see Figures 157 to 160).
The gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A3-3]
The gaming machine of form A3-3 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific performance is displayed;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 172(C) and FIG. 179(C)).
The gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A3-4-1]
The gaming machine of the form A3-4-1 is
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner moving at a first speed over a first period from the start of display to a specific timing during the display period, and are displayed in a manner moving at a second speed over a second period from the specific timing to being hidden in the display area of the display means;
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 196 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A3-4-2]
The gaming machine of the form A3-4-2 is
An effect image can be displayed at the timing when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed,
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 194, 196, and 205).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can prevent the effect of a particular presentation from being reduced.

[Form A3-5]
The gaming machine of form A3-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotational motion,
the number of rotational actions performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational actions performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 213 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A4-1]
The gaming machine of form A4-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner that makes it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in an overlapping relationship,
The fragment image in a specific performance is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship (see FIGS. 172, 179, 183, 184, 189, 194, and 206).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the display manner of the fragment image differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A4-2]
The gaming machine of form A4-2 is
The specific effect is an effect including displaying a special image together with the fragment image,
In a specific performance, the fragment image and the special image are in a superimposed relationship,
A first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent form through which at least a part of the background image can be recognized;
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific effect is an image in a transparent form through which at least a part of the special image can be recognized,
The third fragment image among the multiple fragment images in the specific performance is a transparent image that allows recognition of both at least a part of the background image and at least a part of the special image (see FIG. 206 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the display mode of the fragment images for each performance, the performance effect of each performance can be enhanced.

[Form A4-3-1]
The gaming machine of form A4-3-1 is
The fragment images in certain effects can rotate.
When the first image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of a background image that is superimposed on the first image fragment;
When the rotation operation causes the first image fragment to be at the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the first image fragment (see FIGS. 207 and 213).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A4-3-2]
The gaming machine of form A4-3-2 is
In a specific performance, when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a first angle, a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a second angle (see FIG. 207 and FIG. 213 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A5-1]
The gaming machine of form A5-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction in common;
A fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a predetermined direction (see FIGS. 172, 179, 189, and 194).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed, and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, thereby allowing the player to be surprised at various times; furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment images move is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the period of time required for them to disappear differs, so that even effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed can give suitably different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A5-2]
The gaming machine of form A5-2 is
The visibility of the fragment image that moves in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and the timing before it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figs. 201 and 205).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A5-3]
The gaming machine of form A5-3 is
A fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a specific performance takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see FIG. 208).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference can be created between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, and interest can be increased by providing a variety of presentation methods.

[Form A5-4]
The gaming machine of form A5-4 is
All of the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden in a manner that they move toward the outside of the display area of the display means (for example, see FIG. 207(A) ),
A first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific performance is hidden in a manner of moving toward the outside of the display area of the display means,
A second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific performance, is hidden before moving outside the display area of the display means (for example, see FIG. 207(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the fragment images are displayed can be differentiated between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A6-1]
The gaming machine of form A6-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack form in response to a movement of the object image, a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from the first crack form to a second crack form in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which an object image is displayed, and in response to a movement of the object image, a plurality of fragment images are started to be displayed in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image of a first crack form is displayed in a predetermined effect until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed;
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part is executed or not executed,
The period from when the crack precursor image of the second crack type is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined effect is longer than the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed in the specific effect,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from when it is displayed until when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
In a specific performance, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from when it is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 173 to 175, 183, 184, 190, and 191).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed, as well as the display period of the fragment image, differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects in which fragment images are displayed similarly can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A6-2]
The gaming machine of form A6-2 is
The second predetermined part has a longer execution period than the first predetermined part (see Figures 183, 184, 189, and 194).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of a given presentation from decreasing due to a monotonous presentation structure.

[Form A6-3]
The gaming machine of form A6-3 is
When the second predetermined part is executed and then the third predetermined part is not executed, a fourth predetermined part can be executed in which a crack precursor image of the second crack form is continuously displayed for a period longer than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part (see FIG. 190).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably indicate that the third predetermined part will not be executed.

[Form A6-4-1]
The gaming machine of the form A6-4-1 is
The predetermined effect is an effect in which the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
a first pattern in which a predetermined effect is executed and the decoration identification information is in a reach state, and a second pattern in which the predetermined effect is not executed and the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
When the variable display is performed according to the first pattern, there is a higher expectation of control to an advantageous state than when the variable display is performed according to the second pattern (see FIG. 190).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of a predetermined performance, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form A6-4-2]
The gaming machine of form A6-4-2 is
In one variable display, both a predetermined performance and a specific performance can be executed,
The specific performance can be executed after the third predetermined part is executed,
When the third predetermined part is executed before the execution of the specific performance, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when it is not executed (see Figures 157 to 160).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the third specified part in the specified performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A6-5]
The gaming machine of form A6-5 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific performance is displayed;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 173(G) and FIG. 175(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A6-6]
The gaming machine of form A6-6 is
The predetermined effect is an effect in which the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
The decoration identification information in the reach state can be highlighted in the third predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the period during which the decoration identifying information in the reach state is highlighted is longer than the period during which the fragment images are displayed (see FIG. 174(I) to FIG. 174(K)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately indicate that a reach state has been reached.

[Form A6-7-1]
The gaming machine of form A6-7-1 is
A motion emphasis image can be displayed in the first predetermined part in accordance with a motion of the object image,
It is possible to display it in a display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
A motion-emphasized image is displayed at the same time as the display of the crack precursor image of the crack pattern starts (see FIG. 173(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the crack precursor image can be changed to a cracked state without creating an unnatural feeling.

[Form A6-7-2]
The gaming machine of form A6-7-2 is
A small fragment image can be displayed along with the motion-enhanced image;
The display period of the small fragment image is longer than the display period of the motion emphasis image (see FIG. 173(D) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately indicate that the crack precursor image has changed to a cracked state.

[Form A6-7-3]
The gaming machine of form A6-7-3 is
An effect image can be displayed in the second predetermined part in response to the action of the object image,
When displaying an effect image, the action emphasis image is not displayed (see FIG. 173(H) and FIG. 190).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference is provided between the first and second predetermined parts, and the predetermined presentation can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

[Form A6-7-4]
The gaming machine of the form A6-7-4 is
The period required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part to be hidden in the display area of the display means is different from the period required for the small fragment image in the third predetermined part to be hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 190).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently in the first and third specified parts, which can enhance interest.

[Form A6-8]
The gaming machine of form A6-8 is
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is an image in a transparent form through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in a specific performance is a non-transparent image that makes it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship (see Figures 183, 184, and 197).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the fragment images can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A6-9]
The gaming machine of form A6-9 is
the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout the display period of the fragment image,
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see FIG. 196).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form A6-10]
The gaming machine of form A6-10 is
The period required from when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed until when it is hidden in the display area of the display means is longer than the period required from when the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed until when it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 190 and 191).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference can be created between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, and interest can be increased by providing a variety of presentation methods.

[Form A7-1]
The gaming machine of form A7-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A motion detection means capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
A motion promotion effect can be executed to encourage the player to perform a motion on the motion detection means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The action prompting image can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
The action promotion effect is an effect in which an action promotion image is displayed over a valid action period, and when a player's action is detected, the display mode of the action promotion image is changed from the action promotion mode to the action completion mode,
When the action promotion image is changed from the action promotion state to the action completion state by the action promotion effect, a specific effect can be executed;
During at least a portion of the execution period of the specific performance, it is possible to visually recognize both the action prompting image of the action completion mode and the fragment image in the specific performance;
The display period of the fragment image in the specific performance is shorter than the display period of the action promotion image in the action promotion mode and longer than the display period of the action promotion image in the action completion mode (see FIGS. 169, 170, 179, 187, and 194).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and the specific effect displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times and further to prevent the interest of the specific effect from decreasing due to a monotonous presentation structure.

[Form A8-1]
The gaming machine of form A8-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed;
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the third predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed (see Figs. 169, 170, 172, 187, and 189).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the types of background images before and after the fragment images are displayed are different in common between the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A8-2]
The gaming machine of form A8-2 is
The crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state in the first predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 169, 170, 172, 187, and 189).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form A9-1]
The gaming machine of form A9-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when a transition is made from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at a second timing when a transition is made from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part;
During a display period of the effect image, it is difficult to visually recognize the image fragments over a first period, and it is possible to visually recognize the image fragments over a second period after the first period has elapsed (see FIGS. 169, 170, 172, 187, and 189).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects which display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and further, the strange feeling when the fragment image is displayed by the effect image can be reduced, so that the first and second predetermined effects can be executed preferably.

[Form A9-2]
The gaming machine of form A9-2 is
The crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state in the first predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack stage in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack stage in the third predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 169, 170, and 172).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form A10-1]
The gaming machine of form A10-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The image fragments in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that the image fragments move at a speed that changes from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the image fragments (see FIGS. 169, 170, 177, 178, 187, 193, and 196).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, because the speed at which the fragment images are moved is different in the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A10-2]
The gaming machine of form A10-2 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the third predetermined part transitions to a fourth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 169(G) and FIG. 177(H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A10-3-1]
The gaming machine of the form A10-3-1 is
the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner moving at a first speed over a first period from the start of display to a specific timing, and are displayed in a manner moving at a second speed over a second period from the specific timing to being hidden;
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 196 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the fragment images are displayed can be made different between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A10-3-2]
The gaming machine of form A10-3-2 is
When the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, an effect image can be displayed;
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 177 and 196 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can prevent the effect of a particular presentation from being reduced.

[Form A10-4]
The gaming machine of form A10-4 is
All of the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden from view by moving out of the display area of the display means (see FIG. 207(A) ),
a first fragment image among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is hidden in a manner of moving toward the outside of the display area of the display means;
A second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is made invisible before moving out of the display area of the display means (see FIG. 207(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently in the first predetermined presentation and the second specific presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A10-5]
The gaming machine of form A10-5 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized;
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 183, 184, and 197).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A10-6-1]
The gaming machine of the form A10-6-1 is,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction;
The fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see Figs. 199 and 200).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A10-6-2]
The gaming machine of the form A10-6-2 is
The visibility of the fragment images moving in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and before it is hidden (see FIGS. 199 and 200).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A10-7-1]
The gaming machine of the form A10-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are capable of rotating;
the number of rotational operations performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational operations performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 213 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A10-7-2]
The gaming machine of the form A10-7-2 is
When the image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the image fragment;
When the rotation operation causes the image fragment to be at the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image that is superimposed on the image fragment (see FIGS. 207 and 213).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A10-7-3]
The gaming machine of the form A10-7-3 is,
When the first fragment image is at a first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a second angle (see FIGS. 207 and 213 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form A10-8]
The gaming machine of form A10-8 is
In one variable display, both the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be executed,
The first predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
When the first predetermined performance is executed before the execution of the second predetermined performance, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the first predetermined performance is not executed (see Figures 157 to 160).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the first predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A10-9]
The gaming machine of form A10-9 is
The crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state in the first predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack state in the third predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 187 and 193).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form A11-1]
The gaming machine of form A11-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner that makes it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in an overlapping relationship,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is a transparent image through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 172, 169, 170, 189, and 187).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, because the display manner of the fragment images differs between the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A12-1]
The gaming machine of form A12-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner moving in a plurality of directions, at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction;
the fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed moving in a predetermined direction;
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see Figs. 169, 170, 177, 178, 187, and 193).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment images move is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the period of time required for them to disappear is different, so that even effects that similarly display fragment images can give different impressions and increase interest in the game.

[Form A13-1]
The gaming machine of form A13-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack form in response to a movement of the object image, a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from the first crack form to a second crack form in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined effect includes a fourth predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a third crack type in response to a movement of the object image, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image in response to a movement of the object image.
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and fourth predetermined parts have different execution periods,
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part is executed or not executed,
The period from the start of the second predetermined part to the transition to the third predetermined part is longer than the period from the start of the fourth predetermined part to the transition to the fifth predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from when it is displayed until when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
In the fifth predetermined part, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from when it is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 169, 170, 173, 174, 190, and 187).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment images are displayed, and the display period of the fragment images, are different between the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A13-2]
The gaming machine of form A13-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed in a first crack form according to the movement of the object image,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the third crack pre-stage state to the third crack state and displayed (see FIG. 173 and FIG. 169 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form A14-1]
The gaming machine of form A14-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
The second predetermined performance can be executed at a specific timing after the first predetermined performance is executed,
The first and third predetermined parts have the same execution period,
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part have the same length of the execution period,
When executing the second predetermined performance after the first predetermined performance, the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is made non-displayed in the display area of the display means, and then the third predetermined part is started (see Figs. 166, 167, and 185).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display a crack precursor image and a fragment image, can be executed consecutively, thereby continuously giving the player surprises, and further, since the third predetermined part starts after the fragment image in the second predetermined part has gone invisible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect caused by a new crack precursor image being displayed even when a fragment image is already being displayed.

[Form A14-2]
The gaming machine of form A14-2 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction;
The position where the display of the image fragment starts is different between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see FIGS. 166, 167, and 208).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form A14-3]
The gaming machine of form A14-3 is
The second and fourth predetermined parts are capable of displaying a special image together with the fragment image,
The special image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a first manner,
The special image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (see FIG. 166(F) and FIG. 167(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special image is displayed differently in the first and second predetermined effects, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form A14-4]
The gaming machine of form A14-4 is
The second and fourth predetermined parts have different lengths of the display period of the fragment images, but have the same length of the display period of the special image (see FIG. 185 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form A14-5]
The gaming machine of form A14-5 is
There is a first pattern in which the second predetermined performance is executed after the first predetermined performance is executed, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined performance is not executed after the first predetermined performance is executed,
The rate at which the game proceeds according to the first pattern is more advantageous than the rate at which the game proceeds according to the second pattern (see FIG. 151 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A14-6]
The gaming machine of form A14-2 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The image fragments in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that does not involve a change in speed throughout the display period of the image fragments (see FIG. 196 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the relevance between the first and second predetermined effects can be increased, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A14-7-1]
The gaming machine of the form A14-7-1 is,
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the third predetermined part transitions to a fourth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see Fig. 166(C), Fig. 167(C), Fig. 185).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance is increased, and the effects of both performances can be improved.

[Form A14-7-2]
The gaming machine of the form A14-7-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period (see FIG. 185 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance is increased, and the effects of both performances can be improved.

[Form A15-1]
The gaming machine of form A15-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified by the notification performance that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, a crack precursor image of a second crack form is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image are displayed;
the fragment image in the second predetermined part requires a first period of time until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
When the notification effect notifies the player that the game is not controlled to be in an advantageous state, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 169, 170, 182, 187, and 195(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise; furthermore, by displaying the crack precursor image together with a fragment image that takes a different amount of time to disappear than the fragment image in the predetermined effect, it is possible to notify the player that the game is not being properly controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form A15-2]
The gaming machine of form A15-2 is
The display period of the breakage precursor image when it is notified that the win state is not controlled is longer than the display period of the breakage precursor image in the first predetermined part (see FIG. 187 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to effectively indicate that control is not being exercised in an advantageous state.

[Form A15-3]
The gaming machine of form A15-3 is
a first fragment image having the largest display size among the plurality of fragment image in the second predetermined part;
a second fragment image having the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images when it is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
The display size of the first fragment image is larger than that of the second fragment image (see, for example, FIG. 170(J) and FIG. 182(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed differently, which can enhance interest.

[Form A15-4]
The gaming machine of form A15-4 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
When it is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, the fragment image is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a part of the background image that is superimposed thereon (see FIG. 197).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed differently, which can enhance interest.

[Form A15-5]
The gaming machine of form A15-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction (for example, see FIG. 199 and FIG. 201).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way the fragment images are displayed can be made relevant, enhancing interest.

[Form A15-6]
The gaming machine of form A15-6 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part is shifted to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the game is not controlled in an advantageous state;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 169(G) and FIG. 182(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be differentiated, which can enhance interest.

[Form A16-1]
The gaming machine of form A16-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When the notification effect notifies the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, a crack precursor image of a second crack mode can be displayed.
When the crack precursor image of the first crack type is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in a first light emitting pattern;
When the crack precursor image of the second crack form is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in a second light emitting pattern;
The light emission of the light emitting means in the first light emitting pattern continues until a second predetermined part is executed;
The light emission of the light emitting means according to the second light emission pattern continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the notification performance in which it is not controlled to the advantageous state ends (see FIG. 169, FIG. 170, FIG. 182, FIG. 187, FIG. 195(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, thereby giving the player a surprise, and further, by using the crack precursor image and a second light-emitting pattern that continues until a predetermined condition is met after the notification effect ends, it is possible to notify the player that the reel is not being properly controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form A17-1]
The gaming machine of form A17-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When the notification effect notifies the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, a crack precursor image of a second crack mode can be displayed.
The type of background image is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image is displayed in the second predetermined part (see FIGS. 169(A) to 169(F) and 170(I) to 170(K)).
The display mode of the background image is different before it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state by the notification effect, and when the fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state (see FIGS. 182(A), 182(B), 182(D), 187, and 195(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, thereby giving the player a surprise, and further, by using the crack precursor image and changing the display mode of the background image before it is notified whether or not the reel will be controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to notify the player that the reel will not be appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form A18-1]
The gaming machine of form A18-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, a fifth predetermined part that starts a first operation of the movable body, and a sixth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body ends after the fragment image becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figs. 169, 170, 172, 187, and 189).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects which display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, by displaying the crack precursor image and then operating the movable body to display the fragment image, it is possible to provide a powerful presentation.

[Form A18-2]
The gaming machine of form A18-2 is
The crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state in the first predetermined part,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 187 and 189).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be improved when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form A18-3-1]
The gaming machine of the form A18-3-1 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when the fifth predetermined part transitions to a sixth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 169(G) and FIG. 172(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be differentiated, which can enhance interest.

[Form A18-3-2]
The gaming machine of the form A18-3-2 is
The first action is an action in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
When the movable body is placed in the advanced position, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 172(C) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation.

[Form A18-3-3]
The gaming machine of the form A18-3-3 is
The period of the first movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 189 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form A18-4]
The gaming machine of form A18-4 is
A suggestion effect that suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body, which is different from the second predetermined effect, can be executed;
A movable body emphasizing image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a movable body emphasis image is displayed in association with the movement of the movable body in the suggestion performance, a movable body emphasis image is not displayed in association with the first movement of the movable body in the fifth predetermined part (see FIG. 189 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form A19-1]
The gaming machine of form A19-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type together with the first movement of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body ends before the fragment image becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figs. 169, 170, 180, 181, 187, and 195(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment image, can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and further, by operating the movable body to display the crack precursor image, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form A19-2]
The gaming machine of form A19-2 is
The crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state in the first predetermined part,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 187 and 195).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form A19-3-1]
The gaming machine of the form A19-3-1 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when the fourth predetermined part transitions to a fifth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 169(G) and FIG. 180(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A19-3-2]
The gaming machine of the form A19-3-2 is
The second action is an action in which the movable body moves from the advanced position toward the origin position,
When the second action is started, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 180(F) );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation.

[Form A19-3-3]
The gaming machine of the form A19-3-3 is
The period of the second movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second movement of the movable body (see FIG. 195 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form A19-4]
The gaming machine of form A19-4 is
A suggestion effect that suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body, which is different from the second predetermined effect, can be executed;
A movable body emphasizing image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a movable body emphasis image is displayed in association with the movement of the movable body in the suggestion performance, a movable body emphasis image is not displayed in association with the first movement of the movable body in the fourth predetermined part (see FIG. 195 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form A20-1]
The gaming machine of form A20-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image according to the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
The specific performance is a performance in which, in response to a first action of the movable body, a display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed;
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
In a specific performance, the movable body can execute a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body is started after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 169, 170, 176, 187, and 192).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect and the specific effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times. Furthermore, by operating the movable body to display the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form A20-2-1]
The gaming machine of the form A20-2-1 is
The first action is an action in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
When the first action is started, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 176(B) );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of a particular presentation.

[Form A20-2-2]
The gaming machine of the form A20-2-2 is
the effect image can be displayed over a display period including the first display period and the second display period;
The length of the first operation period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are substantially the same,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific performance is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 192 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the effect of the specific presentation.

[Form A20-3]
The gaming machine of form A20-3 is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body,
A movable body emphasizing image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a moving body emphasis image is displayed in association with the movement of the moving body in the suggestion performance, a moving body emphasis image is not displayed in association with the first movement of the moving body in the specific performance (see FIG. 192 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of a particular presentation from being reduced by the moving body emphasis image.

[Form A21-1]
The gaming machine of form A21-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
Even if a crack precursor image of the first crack form or the second crack form is displayed, the background image can be visually recognized together with the crack precursor image,
When the crack precursor image of the first crack aspect or the second crack aspect is not displayed, an image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than a predetermined display layer is displayed with a first visibility,
The background image when the crack precursor image of the first crack aspect is displayed is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility,
An image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than a predetermined display layer when a crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed is displayed with the second visibility over a predetermined range, and is displayed with the first visibility over a specific range different from the predetermined range (see FIGS. 169(E), (F), 171(C), 187, and 188).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display crack precursor images with different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at a variety of times; furthermore, since the visibility of the background image that can be viewed together with the crack precursor image varies depending on the type of crack pattern, even effects that display similar crack precursor images can give different impressions in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A21-2]
The gaming machine of form A21-2 is
The boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range can be displayed with a third visibility higher than the first visibility and the second visibility (see the enlarged view of FIG. 171(C) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form A21-3]
The gaming machine of form A21-3 is
A corresponding image corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
When the crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack mode, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed on a predetermined range and is not displayed superimposed on a specific range (see FIG. 171(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the corresponding image can be suitably displayed even during execution of the second predetermined performance.

[Form A21-4]
The gaming machine of form A21-4 is
The display period of the crack precursor image of the second crack form is longer than the display period of the crack precursor image of the first crack form (see FIG. 188 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the crack precursor image is displayed can be made different between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A22-1]
The gaming machine of form A22-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The visibility of the background image is different when the crack precursor image of the first crack aspect is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second crack aspect is displayed,
The crack precursor image of the second crack form has a longer display period than the crack precursor image of the first crack form,
There are multiple types of crack precursor images for the second crack type.
When a crack precursor image of the second type of the second crack mode is displayed, the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than when a crack precursor image of the first type of the second crack mode is displayed (see Figures 168 to 170, 186, and 187).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display crack precursor images with different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, the player will be drawn to the type of crack precursor image with the second crack pattern, so that even effects that display similar crack precursor images can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A22-2]
The gaming machine of form A22-2 is
When a crack precursor image of the first type of the second crack aspect is displayed, the visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer is different from that when a crack precursor image of the second type of the second crack aspect is displayed (see Figures 169 and 168).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the crack precursor image can be displayed differently, which can increase interest.

[Form A22-3]
The gaming machine of form A22-3 is
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can display an effect image of a specific color in common,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first predetermined performance and the second timing predetermined performance (see FIG. 169 and FIG. 168).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be differentiated, which can enhance interest.

[Form A23-1]
The gaming machine of form A23-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
A change effect can be executed to change the display mode of the corresponding image corresponding to the variable display,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A corresponding image corresponding to a variable display can be displayed in the special display layer;
The first crack precursor image can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The second crack precursor image can be displayed on a second predetermined display layer having a lower priority than the special display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a first crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a second crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases,
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease,
When the first predetermined performance is executed, the change performance is not executed,
When the second predetermined performance is executed, a change performance can be executed (see FIGS. 169 to 171, 187, 188, and 215).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect displaying the first cracking precursor image and the second predetermined effect displaying the second cracking precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby allowing the player to be surprised at a variety of times; furthermore, even in effects that similarly display a cracking precursor image, the presence or absence of a display layer or a change effect differs, thereby giving a suitably different impression and increasing interest in the game.

[Form A23-2-1]
The gaming machine of the form A23-2-1 is
The change effect is an effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed and the predetermined object image performs an action that affects a corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display;
The predetermined object image can be displayed on a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 215 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the change presentation can be executed without reducing the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation to a minimum.

[Form A23-2-2]
The gaming machine of the form A23-2-2 is
In response to the action of a predetermined object image, a change emphasis image can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in a display layer higher than the special display layer (see FIG. 215 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the change presentation can be preferably executed even during execution of the second predetermined presentation.

[Form A24-1]
The gaming machine of form A24-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
A first predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state can be executed,
A second predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state can be executed.
After the second predetermined performance is performed, a special performance can be performed.
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The display mode of the fragment image in the first predetermined performance and the display mode of the fragment image in the second predetermined performance are different,
The fragment image in the second predetermined performance includes an image in a suggestive state suggesting that a special performance will be executed,
The display period of the fragment image in the second predetermined performance is longer than the display period of the fragment image in the first predetermined performance (see FIG. 169, FIG. 187, FIG. 192, FIG. 216, FIG. 217).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, the display manner of the fragment images differs between the first and second predetermined effects, and it is possible to increase the correlation between the fragment images in the second predetermined effect and the effect executed thereafter, so that even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A24-2]
The gaming machine of form A24-2 is
There are two special effects: the first special effect and the second special effect.
When the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the first special effect is executed,
The suggestion mode includes a first suggestion mode suggesting that a first special performance will be executed and a second suggestion mode suggesting that a second special performance will be executed (see FIG. 216, FIG. 217, FIG. 218).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form A24-3-1]
The gaming machine of the form A24-3-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined performance includes a suggestive mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of a background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer can be seen,
The transparent fragment images are displayed more frequently than the suggestive fragment images (see FIG. 218 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form A24-3-2]
The gaming machine of the form A24-3-2 is
The fragment image is capable of performing a rotational movement;
In the second predetermined performance, the transparent fragment image has a larger rotation amount than the suggestive fragment image (see FIG. 218 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form A24-4]
The gaming machine of form A24-4 is
The second predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part,
In the first predetermined part, a plurality of fragment images in a suggestive mode are displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed;
In the second predetermined part, a single fragment image in a suggestive mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed (see FIG. 217 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form A25]
The gaming machine of form A25 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the pre-stage performance (FIG. 176(C)) can be executed.
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 204(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIG. 204(B2) to (B5)),
The execution period of the first stage performance is longer than the display period of the cracked image of the first mode (see FIG. 192 and FIG. 204 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the preliminary effects create a build-up to the crack, and the crack image of the first mode gives a sense of speed, thereby achieving a suitable crack pattern.

[Form A26]
The gaming machine of form A26 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the pre-stage performance (FIG. 176(C)) can be executed.
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 204(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIG. 204(B2) to (B5)),
The combined period during which the cracked image is displayed in the first mode and the period during which it is displayed in the second mode is longer than the execution period of the first stage performance (see FIG. 192 and FIG. 204).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the period during which the cracked image is in the first and second modes is made longer than the execution period of the first stage performance, thereby making the cracked pattern more memorable.

[Form A27]
The gaming machine of form A27 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image at least partially overlap each other,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than that of the cracked image,
During a display period of the effect image, it is difficult to visually recognize the cracked image over a first period, and the cracked image is visually recognized over a second period after the first period has elapsed;
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figures 185 to 195 and Figures 199 to 205).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image has a role of hiding the initial display portion of the cracked image, and while fulfilling this role, it prevents the effect image from being emphasized more than the cracked image.

[Form A28]
The gaming machine of form A28 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first aspect and then changing the cracked image from the first aspect to a second aspect,
The display means displays an effect image when displaying the cracked image of the first mode, and makes the effect image invisible at a timing before displaying the cracked image of the second mode (see FIGS. 185 to 195 and 199 to 205 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an unnatural feeling.

[Form A29]
The gaming machine of form A29 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 203(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIG. 203(B2) to (B5)),
The transmittance of the cracked image of the second aspect is different between the first timing and the second timing in the display period of the cracked image of the second aspect (see FIG. 191 and FIG. 203 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the dramatic effect when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form A30]
The gaming machine of form A30 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 199(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIG. 199(B2) to (B5)),
The specific performance is a performance including displaying a cracked image of the third mode (FIG. 203(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third mode to a fourth mode (FIG. 203(B2) to (B5)),
The transmittance of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image of the second aspect starts is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the cracked image of the fourth aspect starts (see FIGS. 187, 191, 199, 203, and 207(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed and when the cracked image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form A31]
The gaming machine of form A31 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed in a normal state, and includes displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 199(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIGS. 199(B2) to (B5)),
The specific effect is an effect that can be executed in a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state, and includes displaying a cracked image of a third mode (FIG. 203(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third mode to a fourth mode (FIG. 203(B2) to (B5)).
The transmittance of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image of the second aspect starts is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the cracked image of the fourth aspect starts (see FIGS. 154 to 156, 187, 191, 199, 203, and 207(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed and when the cracked image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form A32]
The gaming machine of form A32 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
A background image can be displayed on a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The light emission control means includes:
When the cracked image is displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is controlled using the specific brightness data table;
A specific brightness data table is used to control the light emission of the light-emitting means until a specific timing during the display period of the cracked image, and after the specific timing, a brightness data table corresponding to the background image is used to control the light emission of the light-emitting means (see FIGS. 185 to 187 and 190).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably control the light emission of the light emitting means when a broken image is displayed.

[Form A33]
The gaming machine of form A33 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image at least partially overlap each other,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see FIGS. 185 to 191 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the cracked image is displayed.

[Form A34]
The gaming machine of form A34 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
the sound output means, when a cracked image is displayed in the first pattern, outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 185), while, when a cracked image is displayed in the second pattern, does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 192);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form A35]
The gaming machine of form A35 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed in the first pattern (see FIG. 185), and outputs a sound notifying the player that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state when the cracked image is displayed in the second pattern (see FIG. 195).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions according to the gaming status.

[Form A36]
The gaming machine of form A36 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
the crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed at a timing before the crack image is displayed when the crack image is displayed in the first pattern;
the sound output means, when a cracked image is displayed in the first pattern, outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 185), while, when a cracked image is displayed in the second pattern, does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 192);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form A37]
The gaming machine of form A37 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The sound output means is
A predetermined sound can be output when the crack precursor image is displayed,
A specific sound can be output when a cracked image is displayed.
The specific sound output by the sound output means is a sound louder than the predetermined sound (see FIG. 212 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a contrast between when the crack precursor image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, and to favorably create an impression when the cracked image is displayed.

[Form A38]
The gaming machine of form A38 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
It is possible to display a cracking warning image in conjunction with the motion display of the object image,
The sound output means is
When the cracking precursor image is displayed, a sound corresponding to the object image can be output;
When a cracked image is displayed, a sound corresponding to the cracked image can be output (see FIG. 212).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a contrast between when the crack precursor image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, and to favorably create an impression when the cracked image is displayed.

[Form A39]
The gaming machine of form A39 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value, so that the motion speed of the fragment image of a first size in the first pattern is different from that of the fragment image of a second size smaller than the first size,
In the second pattern, the amount of variation is 0, so that the motion speed of the fragment image of the third size in the second pattern is the same as that of the fragment image of a fourth size smaller than the third size (see FIGS. 197 and 198 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first pattern is a cracking pattern in which the animation effect varies depending on the size, with small fragment images flying quickly and large fragment images being somewhat slower and falling quickly, and can be used when it is desired to show realistic movement, while the second pattern is a cracking pattern in which all fragments are affected by the animation in the same way regardless of size, flying and falling in the same way, allowing the appropriate cracking pattern to be selected depending on the scene.

[Form A40]
The gaming machine of form A40 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The image of the debris is displayed in a falling manner after the display starts,
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The speed at which the image fragments fall differs between the first and second patterns due to different gravity value settings (see FIGS. 197 and 198).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the parameter value and varying the speed at which the fragment images fall, a variety of patterns can be created, enhancing the dramatic effect.

[Form A41]
The gaming machine of form A41 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
Since the gravity direction is set differently between the first pattern and the second pattern, the moving direction of the fragment images when they are displayed is different (see FIGS. 197 and 198 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the parameter values and changing the direction in which the fragment images move, a variety of patterns can be created, enhancing the dramatic effect.

[Form A42]
The gaming machine of form A42 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display patterns of the fragment images include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern,
the first pattern includes a first parameter related to displaying the fragment image and a second parameter related to displaying the fragment image;
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern have a common value of the first parameter and different values of the second parameter (see FIGS. 197 and 198 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the value of the first parameter is fixed, creating common parts for the fragment images, while the value of the second parameter is varied to create a variety of patterns, thereby making it possible to create a stable and diverse display pattern for the fragment images.

[Form A43]
The gaming machine of form A43 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display patterns of the fragment images include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern,
the first pattern includes a first parameter related to displaying the fragment image and a second parameter related to displaying the fragment image;
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern and the second pattern have a common value of a first parameter and different values of a second parameter,
The second and third patterns have different values of the first parameter and have a common value of the second parameter (see FIGS. 197 and 198 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating common parts for the image fragments in each pattern while using different parameter values, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the image fragments.

[Form A44]
The gaming machine of form A44 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
before the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 154, 156, 169 to 171).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the cracked image is displayed in the normal state and when the cracked image is displayed in the special state, different impressions are given, which can increase interest.

[Form A45]
The gaming machine of form A45 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first aspect and then changing the cracked image from the first aspect to a second aspect,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state;
An effect image is displayed when the cracked image of the first mode is displayed, and the effect image is made non-displayed at a timing before the cracked image of the second mode is displayed (see FIGS. 154, 156, 169, and 170).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an unnatural feeling.

[Form A46]
The gaming machine of form A46 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The crack image displayed by the first pattern and the crack image displayed by the second pattern are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The moving speed of the cracked image displayed by the first pattern is different from that of the cracked image displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 154, 156, 169 to 171).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect during the special state can be enhanced by using a display pattern of the cracked images that does not disrupt the tempo of the special state.

[Form A47]
The gaming machine of form A47 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A crack image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The expectation level at which the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern is different from the expectation level at which the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 151, 153(C), 154, and 156).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the display pattern of the cracked image, so that the display pattern of the cracked image can draw attention.

[Form A48]
The gaming machine of form A48 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed on a predetermined display layer;
A second type of fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
a display period of the first type of fragment image and a display period of the second type of fragment image at least partially overlap each other;
The first type of fragment image is in a form in which a character is drawn,
The second type of fragment image is in a transparent state that allows recognition of at least a part of a background image displayed on a display layer lower than the specific display layer (see FIGS. 204 and 218 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images having different display modes, it is possible to provide a memorable presentation.

[Form A49]
The gaming machine of form A49 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed on a predetermined display layer;
A second type of fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
a display period of the first type of fragment image and a display period of the second type of fragment image at least partially overlap each other;
The first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image have different display modes,
The display period of the first type of image fragment is longer than the display period of the second type of image fragment (see FIGS. 204 and 218 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images having different display modes, it is possible to provide a memorable presentation.

[Form A50]
The gaming machine of form A50 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
The fragment images displayed in the first area, which is a display area where the movable body is not overlapped, are displayed in a larger amount than the fragment images displayed in the second area, which is a display area where the movable body is overlapped (see Figures 204 and 218).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragments can be displayed appropriately while the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means.

[Form A51]
The gaming machine of form A51 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
a first fragment image of the plurality of fragment images is displayed in a manner of moving from a first region, which is a display region in which the movable body is not overlapped, to a second region, which is a display region in which the movable body is overlapped;
A second image fragment of the plurality of image fragments is displayed in a manner that moves within the first area so as not to enter the second area (see FIGS. 204 and 218 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a fragment image that does not enter the area where the movable body overlaps allows the viewer to recognize that the object has broken, while a fragment image that passes through the area where the movable body overlaps provides a dynamic presentation.

[Form A52]
The gaming machine of form A52 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
Even after the movable body overlapping the display area of the display means is moved to a position where it is not overlapped with the display area, the fragment image continues to be displayed (see Figs. 204 and 218).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means, the image of the fragment can be displayed in an appropriate manner so that the image of the fragment is not overlooked.

[Form A53]
The gaming machine of form A53 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a first type of fragment image corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of second type fragment images when the crack precursor image is displayed;
The second type of fragment image takes a shorter period of time to become invisible in the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see FIGS. 173 and 174 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect of displaying the fragment images can be improved.

[Form A54]
The gaming machine of form A54 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character,
before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 169, 170, and 175).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the specific character appears in common in the display patterns of the multiple cracked images, the specific character attracts more attention.

[Form A55]
The gaming machine of form A55 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A specific character can be displayed on a third display layer having a lower priority than the second display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a fourth display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed when the specific character makes an action;
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed when the specific character makes an action,
The display means is
When the first type of cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character, and the effect image is made non-displayable at a predetermined timing after the first type of cracked image is displayed;
When the second type of cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character, and the effect image is made non-displayable at a specific timing after the second type of cracked image is displayed (see Figs. 169, 170, and 175).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an unnatural feeling.

[Form A56]
The gaming machine of form A56 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of fragment image is displayed in multiple images in response to an action of a specific character;
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of fragment image is displayed in multiples in response to an action of a specific character,
the first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that changes and moves from a first speed to a second speed over a display period of the first type of fragment image,
The second type of image fragments are displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed throughout the display period of the second type of image fragments (see FIGS. 169, 170, and 175).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the speed at which the fragment images move can be changed depending on the type of display pattern of the fragment images, thereby improving the dramatic effect.

[Form A57]
The gaming machine of form A57 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character,
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is different when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 169, 170, 173, and 174).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the expectation for the specific character is heightened, and interest is enhanced by drawing attention to the display pattern of the cracked image after the specific character is displayed.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 125 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided at the top left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small symbol, the error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the right-hit notification image that encourages the player to perform a right-hit operation, the time-saving remaining display that indicates the number of times the time-saving function is remaining, etc. may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer) the presentation images (object images) such as characters to prevent the presentation images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the small symbol, and the error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer) the presentation images to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the presentation images.

The small pattern is also called the fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable body 32 covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Also, the performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there are provided display areas (special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying reserved displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. The reserved displays and active displays are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided, but a first special pattern reserved memory display area in which a first reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special pattern is pending is displayed, and a second special pattern reserved memory display area in which a second reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special pattern is pending may be provided separately. In this embodiment, the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a reserved display corresponding to the first special pattern when the game state is in a normal state, and is a display area that displays a reserved display corresponding to the second special pattern when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state. Furthermore, the active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 126). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric device with a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 125, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 126), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 125). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 125), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided, and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. An attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also called "board lamps." The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are composed of LEDs (see FIG. 160). The various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 126).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 126).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 126. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The payout control board 006SG030 is connected to a payout device 006SG031 that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on receiving a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 006SG032 that is provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device 006SG031 pass, and it is possible to stop driving the payout device 006SG031 depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032.

The payout control board 006SG030 is also connected to a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls the launcher 006SG033, which can launch game balls onto the game board 2. A signal indicating whether the touch ring 006SG35 is being detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launcher 006SG033 are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

As shown in FIG. 127, the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, so the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image drawing area, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image drawing area, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 128, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as an image of layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern as an image of layer 2, a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as an image of layer 3, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a precursor image of cracking (glass plate image 006SG301, etc.) as described later as an image of layer 4, a glass plate image 006SG301A as an image to be cracked that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a fragment image 006S resulting from the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken as an image of layer 5. A layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging G302, a layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an action effect image described later as an image of layer 6, a layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a whiteout image 006SG303 described later as an image of layer 7, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an operation prompt image described later as an image of layer 8, a layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a variable display compatible display (reserved display and active display) as an image of layer 9, and a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a small pattern (fourth pattern), the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a right hit notification image as an image of layer 10. In addition, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

The glass plate image 006SG301 drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area is an image that makes the player realize that the display area of the image display device 5 has been cracked by the action of the character or movable object 32, and the glass plate image 006SG301A drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image that makes the player realize that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken. The broken piece image 006SG302 is an image in which a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is changed and displayed to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken by the action of the character or movable object 32.

The glass plate image 006SG301 is an image that is not displayed at the start timing (the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, which will be described later. The glass plate image 006SG301A is also an image (the image to be cracked) that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 at the start timing (the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, which will be described later.

Furthermore, as described below, the start timing of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect is such that the switching between the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not visible to the player due to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 with the crack displayed can be switched to the glass plate image 006SG301A without the player noticing, so it is possible to realize a crack (moving display of the fragment image 006SG302) that would not be expected from the crack displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301, and it is possible to make a strong impression of the cracking effect on the player.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in these layer 1 image drawing area to layer 10 image drawing area. Also, as shown in Figures 128 and 129, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to the lowest display priority, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Images drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area, images drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area, and images drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area. Also, if a layer 11 image drawing area is further placed in the VRAM area, images drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area.

That is, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image displayed at the lowest level in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area in the image display device 5. Furthermore, if a layer 11 image drawing area is further disposed in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area in the image display device 5. Also, while it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a layer 1-3 image drawing area may be provided instead of the layer 1 image drawing area. In this case, the layer 1-1 image drawing area can draw a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) described later, the layer 1-2 image drawing area can draw a chance background image (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), a normal reach background image, a super reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088), and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) described later, and the layer 1-3 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322), a large It is possible to draw a hit notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085), and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently on the display screen of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 127 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 127 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 130(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 130(B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 130(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that a cold start refers to a state in which the data is initialized when the power is turned on, without restoring the data before the power is turned on, and the gaming machine is in a state in which various processes can be executed. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that a hot start refers to a state in which the gaming machine is in a state in which various processes can be executed based on the backed-up data when the power is turned on. A hot start is also called a power-on without initialization, since no initialization is performed when the power is turned on. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor high probability control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but high probability control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state), and command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability control are performed (high probability high base state, high probability state). Note that the high probability high base state may simply be referred to as the "high probability state".

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "0" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, and the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden jackpot). Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, whether the random number value for judging the variation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other (normal reach)".

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 130(A) are just an example, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control is executed.

Figure 131 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. The content is the same as in Figure 4, so the explanation is omitted.

Figure 132 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table 22, when the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when the pachinko game rr is in a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state so that when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot game state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 133 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. Also, Figure 133 (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. The contents are similar to Figures 6 (A) and 6 (B), so the explanation is omitted.

134(A) and 134(B) show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) and when the time-saving state or the probability change state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is "miss" when the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and for the case where the variable display result is "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called the non-reach variation pattern (also called the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called the reach variation pattern (also called the "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the miss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: normal reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a super reach is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state), the following patterns are provided as super reach variation patterns: a pseudo consecutive performance including a temporary stop of the decorative symbol and a re-variable display is executed once during the variable display, and then the reach performance of the super reach α is executed via the normal reach, resulting in a miss or a jackpot (PA2-2, PB1-2); a variation pattern in which the reach performance of the super reach β is executed via the normal reach without executing the pseudo consecutive performance, resulting in a miss or a jackpot (PA2-3, PB1-3); and a variation pattern in which the reach performance of the super reach β is executed via the reach performance of the normal reach and the super reach α after the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, resulting in a miss or a jackpot (PA2-4, PB1-4). The reach performance of the super reach α in this embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach performance described later, and the reach performance of the super reach β corresponds to the strong S reach performance A and the strong S reach performance B described later.

When the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the super reach variation pattern includes a variation pattern (PA2-6, PB1-6) in which the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed via the normal reach, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-7) in which the reach effect of the super reach δ is executed via the normal reach, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot. In addition, the reach effect of the super reach γ in this embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach effect described later, and the reach effect of the super reach δ corresponds to the strong S reach effect A and the strong S reach effect B described later.

As shown in FIG. 134, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 135 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 135(A) to 135(D), when the game state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the reserved memory number (same type reserved memory number) of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one or less, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number MR3, if the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR3, and if the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table C and the value of the random number MR3. Also, when the game state is time-saving state or high probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table D and the value of the random number MR3. Then, as shown in FIG. 135(E) and FIG. 135(F), when the game state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number value MR3, and when the game state is time-saving state or high probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number value MR3.

For example, as shown in FIG. 135(A), when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once and then a normal reach results in a super reach α miss, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which a normal reach results in a super reach β miss, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice and then a normal reach and a super reach α results in a super reach β miss.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135(B), when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 700, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 701 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once and then the normal reach becomes a super reach α miss, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the normal reach becomes a super reach β miss, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice and then the normal reach and the super reach α become a super reach β miss.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135(C), when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once and then the normal reach becomes a super reach α miss, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the normal reach becomes a super reach β miss, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice and then the normal reach and the super reach α become a super reach β miss.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135 (D), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a short non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5), and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 551 to 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-6), If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5); if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach followed by a super reach gamma miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-6); if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach followed by a super reach delta miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-7).

Also, as shown in FIG. 135(E), when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) that results in a super reach α jackpot after one pseudo consecutive performance via a normal reach, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) that results in a super reach β jackpot after a normal reach, and if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) that results in a super reach β jackpot after two pseudo consecutive performances via a normal reach and a super reach α.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135(F), when jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5), if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) that results in a super reach γ jackpot via a normal reach, and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) that results in a super reach δ jackpot via a normal reach.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of multiple variable patterns for jackpots may be different depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, the player can pay attention to which variable display of the variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, which can increase the interest in the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 126 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 006SG150 as shown in FIG. 136 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 006SG150 shown in FIG. 136 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 006SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 006SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 006SG151C, a game control flag setting section 006SG152, a game control timer setting section 006SG153, a game control counter setting section 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 006SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151A stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151B stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 006SG151A associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the first start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 006SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 006SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 006SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in separate reserved memory units in association with the reserved number, the variable display based on the second reserved memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they were detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 006SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 006SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 006SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 126 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 126 is provided with a performance control data holding area 006SG190 as shown in FIG. 137(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 006SG190 shown in FIG. 137(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 006SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 006SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 006SG194A as shown in FIG. 137 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. The start winning time receiving command buffer 006SG194A also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), a pattern designation command, and a variable category command, are sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, reserved memory number notification command, pattern designation command, and variable category command separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A in this embodiment, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold memory display is set, and a continuous break effect flag that can identify whether or not the player is the target of the continuous break effect described below can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart hold memory and the second special chart hold memory.

In addition, in the hold display effect determination process described later, if the execution of the hold display effect is not determined, the hold display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the display pattern of the normal hold display, and if the execution of the hold display effect is determined, "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special form (e.g., square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display form is set. After the hold display effect determination process is executed, the hold display update process described later is executed, so that the active display and the hold display are displayed in a display form according to each hold display flag (e.g., if the hold display flag value is "0", a white circle (○), if the hold display flag value is "1", a square (◇), and if the hold display flag value is "2", a star (☆). In addition, the value of the continuous break effect flag is set in the continuous break effect setting process (see FIG. 150) described later.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the pattern designation command, and the variable category command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the pattern designation command, and the variable category command are stored in sequence in the storage areas corresponding to the last "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory or the second special symbol reserved memory.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A shown in FIG. 137(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entry after the reserved memory of the variable display that is to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 137(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations in the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 138 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

The game control main process shown in FIG. 138 is similar to the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

When the CPU 103 that has executed this game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 139. The game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 139 is similar to the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 12, so a description thereof will be omitted.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 139 as the special symbol process. The special symbol process shown in Fig. 140 is similar to the special symbol process shown in Fig. 13, so the description will be omitted.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 140. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (006SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (006SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) or not (006SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 006SGS102 is not the upper limit (006SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 006SGS101 (006SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 006SGS102 (006SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (006SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (006SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in 006SGS105 (006SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "2" (006SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 006SGS103 and 006SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 006SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 (006SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random numbers extracted in this way and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserved information at the top of the empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit (006SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 006SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (006SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 139 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step 006SGS112), and then performs settings for sending a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (006SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 139 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the process of 006SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is started. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball.

(Random value judgment process when winning)
FIG. 142(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step 006SGS112 of FIG. 141 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 006SG, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, a determination is made by a special symbol normal process described later as to whether or not the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) is controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In addition, in a variable pattern setting process described later, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of step 006SGS112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning hole begins, in other words, before it is decided whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on the result of this determination, the performance control CPU 120 or the like will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 142(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the probability variable flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 (step 006SGS121). When the probability variable flag is on, the CPU 103 identifies the probability variable state (high probability, high base state), when the probability variable flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving state (low probability, high base state), and when both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are off, the normal state (low probability base state).

Following the processing of step 006SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the special chart display result judgment extracted in step 006SGS109 of FIG. 141 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 006SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table selected by the processing of step 006SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 006SGS123; N), the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 006SGS128), is executed, and it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on or not, i.e., whether the current game state is either the time-saving state or the guaranteed bonus state (step 006SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 006SGS131).

In this embodiment, in addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, miss fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C are prepared in advance according to the number of reserved memories. As shown in FIG. 135, among these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, a determination value of 1 to 660 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern from the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C, a determination value of 1 to 700 and 1 to 750 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern from the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. On the other hand, in miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, a determination value of 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern from the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination.

For this reason, in step 006SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 142(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 006SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type is executed (step 006SGS133), i.e., the second symbol designation command in the case of a sure jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the case of a sure jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command in the case of a sure jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command in the case of a non-variable jackpot, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set according to the game state as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 006SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS138. In addition, in the processing of step 006SGS135, if the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the game state is a time-saving state or a sure jackpot state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is set.

In the processing of step 006SGS138, the variable category is determined according to the range of determination values that includes the random number value MR3, using each variable pattern determination table set in each step and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variable pattern (step 006SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 142(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that has a variable display mode of "non-reach" regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category that has a variable display mode of "super reach", and an "other" variable category that has a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), are provided, and it is sufficient to be able to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 006SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS132), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

(Special pattern normal processing)
Fig. 143 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Fig. 140 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in Fig. 143, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

In addition, the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and for example, the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry (step 006SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 006SGS148), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 132 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150). In addition, in this step 006SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of winning is low and the probability flag is off (in this embodiment, the probability is low and the probability is high), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the result of the special chart display falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result judgment table selected in step 006SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 006SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine whether the special game display result is a "jackpot", so that when the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is judged (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 133(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 006SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as a variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is to be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by setting, for example, a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, it is set to "2", and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, it is set to "3". After processing step 006SGS155, proceed to step 006SGS156.

Also, if step 006SGS150 determines that the result is a miss (step 006SGS150; N), step 006SGS156 is executed without executing steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in response to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determined jackpot type in the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being "miss", a special symbol showing the symbol "-", which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "variable jackpot A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "C-type jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the fixed special symbol. Note that these fixed special symbols are only examples, and other fixed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 006SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 140 as the variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 144, the CPU 103 selects a variable pattern determination table according to the state (step 006SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a miss, if the game state is in the normal state and the reserved memory number of the special pattern that executes the variable display is one, the miss variable pattern determination table A is selected, if the game state is in the normal state and the reserved memory number of the special pattern that executes the variable display is two, the miss variable pattern determination table B is selected, if the game state is in the normal state and the reserved memory number of the special pattern that executes the variable display is three, the miss variable pattern determination table C is selected, and if the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the miss variable pattern determination table D is selected. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is in the normal state, the jackpot variable pattern determination table A is selected, and if the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the jackpot variable pattern determination table B is selected.

Then, based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in a fluctuation random number buffer, the selected (set) fluctuation pattern determination table is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern as one of multiple types (step 006SGS162).

After the variation pattern is determined in step 006SGS162, settings are made to start the variation of the special patterns so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 006SGS163). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 006SGS163, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 006SGS164). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 in order to sequentially send the game state designation command, the first change start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 006SGS164, the special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS165). The special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special pattern in the special pattern game to the fixed special pattern, which is the variable display result (special pattern display result), being displayed stationary. Thereafter, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special pattern variation process (step 006SGS166), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS166, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 139 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 140 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol by turning on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S113 (step 006SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the big win flag is turned on (step 006SGS182).

When the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 006SGS182; Y), if the special probability flag or time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 006SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 006SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 006SGS187). The large prize opening count counter is also set to the number of times it has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or variable jackpot A, 5 times for variable jackpot B, and 2 times for variable jackpot C) (step 006SGS188). The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), it is determined in step 006SGS191 whether the time-saving flag is on or not (step 006SGS191). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0". If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS192; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving times, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS194). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off (step 006SGS195) to end the time-saving control, and then sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 006SGS195), and then proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the sending of a game state designation command is set according to the state of the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special symbol, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 006SGS197).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in S117 of FIG. 140 as a jackpot end processing.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 006SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag and time-saving flag are turned on (step 006SGS207, step 006SGS208). In addition, the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is set to be sent according to the type of jackpot (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting up the sending of a game state designation command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability variable flag and time-saving flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns, and the jackpot end processing is terminated (step 006SGS216).

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 147. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 147 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update processing (step S77), a demo performance control processing (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background display update processing (step S79) for updating the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, control can be executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the execution of a specific effect (for example, a background change effect or a reach effect, which will be described later) during the variable display or a change in the game state.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes a process for adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and a process for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 147 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 148, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a reserved display performance determination process that determines the display mode of the reserved display displayed in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F (step S160). In addition, a reserved display update process (step S161) that updates the display mode of the reserved display in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U and the display mode of the active display in the active display area 5F is executed. The reserved display update process is also a process for newly starting the display of the reserved display and the active display whose display mode has been newly determined in the reserved display performance determination process. After the reserved display update process is executed, for example, one of the processes in steps S170 to S175 as follows is selected and executed according to the value of the performance process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Hold display performance determination process)
Fig. 149 is a determination ratio of the display mode of the reserved display and active display in the reserved display performance shown in Fig. 148. In the reserved display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 006SGS194A shown in Fig. 137 (B) and identifies the presence or absence of an entry in which the reserved display flag is not set. If there is an entry in which the reserved display flag is not set, the variable display result is identified from the pattern designation command in the entry, and the variable category is identified from the variable category command in the entry, and based on these identified variable display results and variable category, the presence or absence of the reserved display performance and the performance pattern, i.e., the display mode of the reserved display and active display are determined.

For example, as shown in FIG. 149, when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the reserved display effect will not be executed, a 25% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern α, and a 70% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern β. Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the reserved display effect will not be executed, a 5% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern α, and a 0% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern β. Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is a 75% chance that the reserved display effect will not be executed, a 20% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern α, and a 5% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern β. In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, there is a 25% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in effect pattern α, and there is a 10% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in effect pattern β.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold display effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "0" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will not be executed, sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "1" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed with effect pattern α, and sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "2" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed with effect pattern β.

In this embodiment, as described above, after setting the pending display flag corresponding to each entry in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A to a value between 0 and 2, the performance control CPU 120 executes the pending display update process (step S61). When the pending display flag is set to a value of "0", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white circle (○), when the pending display flag is set to a value of "1", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white square (◇), and when the pending display flag is set to a value of "2", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white star (☆).

With these settings, when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A or a white star in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white circle, and when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white star in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A, so that the display mode of these pending displays and active displays, i.e., whether or not a pending display effect is executed and the effect pattern, can be used to draw the player's attention.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 150 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Fig. 148. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on or not (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 006SGS272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

In addition, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 006SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 006SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from among multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to even symbols as the stopping symbol. Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the system determines a combination of three mismatched symbols as the stopping symbols, or a combination that results in a miss such as "767" (a losing symbol) according to the variation pattern.

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After executing step 006SGS276, the performance control CPU 120 executes a continuous breaking performance setting process (step 006SGS277) for executing a continuous breaking performance during the variable display, a dialogue preview performance setting process (step 006SGS278) for executing a dialogue preview performance during the variable display, a background change performance setting process (step 006SGS279) for executing a background change performance during the variable display, a reach suggestion performance setting process (step 006SGS280) for executing a reach suggestion performance during the variable display, and a cut-in performance setting process (step 006SGS281) for executing a cut-in performance during the variable display.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS282), and starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 006SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous Breaking Effects Setting Processing)
151(A) is a flow chart showing the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 150. In the continuous break effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether the game state is normal or not (step 006SGS311). If the game state is normal (step 006SGS311; Y), the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A is referenced, and the presence or absence of an entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag ("0" or "1") is not set is identified (step 006SGS312), and it is judged whether or not there is an entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set (step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the continuous break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), proceed to step 006SGS318. If there is an entry with the value of the continuous break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), determine whether or not to execute the continuous break effect based on the designation command and variable category command stored in the entry (step 006SGS314). Note that in the normal state in this embodiment, the continuous break effect is an effect that suggests that the variable display result of the target variable display will be a jackpot by executing it over multiple variable displays on a variable display that has not yet been executed (see FIG. 154).

When the game state is normal, in step 006SGS314, as shown in FIG. 151(B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 20% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 80%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 80% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 20%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 60% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 40%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 50% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 50%.

When the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, in step 006SGS314, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous break effect 30% of the time, and determines to execute the continuous break effect 70% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous break effect 70% of the time, and determines to execute the continuous break effect 30% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a normal reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous break effect 50% of the time, and determines to execute the continuous break effect 50% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the continuous break effect 40% of the time, and determines to execute the continuous break effect 60% of the time. In this way, in this embodiment, the rate at which the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state when the continuous break effect is executed, i.e., the expectation of a jackpot, differs between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability change state.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute the continuous break effect in the processing of step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). If it has decided to execute the continuous break effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the continuous break effect flag for the entry to "1" and proceeds to step 006SGS318. If it has decided not to execute the continuous break effect (step 006SGS315; N), the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the continuous break effect flag for the entry to "0" and proceeds to step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1", that is, whether the execution of the consecutive break presentation has been decided (step 006SGS318). If there is no entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1" (step 006SGS318; N), the consecutive break presentation setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1" (step 006SGS318; Y), it further determines whether the entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1" corresponds to the variable display, that is, whether it is an entry stored in the storage area of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set to "1" is not an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; N), the execution setting of the first continuous break effect is performed in response to the fact that the variable display is not a target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS320). If the entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set to "1" is an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display is a variable display due to a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display due to a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), the continuous break effect setting process is terminated, and if the variable display is a variable display due to a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321; N), the execution setting of a second continuous break effect is performed in accordance with the variable display being a target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS322).

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is decided to execute a continuous break effect when the game state is normal, the first continuous break effect is executed in the variable display prior to the variable display that is the target of the continuous break effect. Then, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous break effect, if the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variable pattern, the second continuous break effect is not executed, whereas if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variable pattern, the second continuous break effect is executed.

If the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state (step 006SGS311; N), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the continuous break effect according to the variable display fluctuation pattern and ends the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the presentation control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the continuous break effect according to the variable display fluctuation pattern. At this time, if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous break effect is determined at the lowest rate, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous break effect is determined at the highest rate (execution rate of continuous break effect for each fluctuation pattern: super reach > normal reach > non-reach). Then, when it is decided to execute the consecutive break effect, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach, the variable display is set to execute the consecutive break effect (first consecutive break effect) once or twice, and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a normal reach or super reach, the variable display is set to execute the first consecutive break effect twice and the second consecutive break effect once after the two first consecutive break effects.

In other words, the continuous breaking effect during the time-saving state or the probability bonus state in this embodiment is an effect that can be executed multiple times within one variable display, and it is an effect that suggests a reach depending on the number of times it is executed.

(Dialogue preview performance setting process)
Fig. 152 (A) is a flow chart showing the dialogue preview performance setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in Fig. 150. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialogue preview performance setting process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of non-reach without shortening, normal reach, and super reach (step 006SGS331; N), the presence or absence of execution of the dialogue preview performance and the performance pattern are determined according to the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in FIG. 152(B), when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be executed at a rate of 70%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern A at a rate of 30%. Also, when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be executed at a rate of 60%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern A at a rate of 35%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern B at a rate of 5%. Also, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be executed at a rate of 40%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern A at a rate of 10%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern B at a rate of 20%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern C at a rate of 30%. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be performed at a rate of 10%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be performed in performance pattern A at a rate of 5%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be performed in performance pattern B at a rate of 10%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be performed in performance pattern C at a rate of 75%.

As shown in FIG. 152 (C), presentation pattern A is a presentation pattern in which the line "Chance?!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in a cracking performance executed as part of a line preview performance, presentation pattern B is a presentation pattern in which the line "Hot!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in a cracking performance executed as part of a line preview performance, and presentation pattern C is a presentation pattern in which the line "Super hot!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in a cracking performance executed as part of a line preview performance.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 152(B), when the dialogue preview performance is executed during variable display, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the dialogue preview performance is not executed (not executed). Furthermore, when the dialogue preview performance is executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set highest when the dialogue preview performance is executed in performance pattern C, and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set lowest when the dialogue preview performance is executed in performance pattern A (jackpot expectation depending on whether the dialogue preview performance is executed and the performance pattern: performance pattern C > performance pattern B > performance pattern A > not executed).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in FIG. 150 will be described. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7. If the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7, the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A is referenced.

When the game is in the normal state, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is no reserved memory for a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 153 (A), the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will not be executed with a probability of 60%, and the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will be executed with a failure pattern (if the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the background change effect A will be executed with a failure pattern, and the variable display A failure pattern of background change performance B is executed if the change pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4) is determined at a rate of 30%, and a change in the background image and an execution of a successful pattern of the background change performance (a successful pattern of background change performance A is executed if the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3, and an execution of a successful pattern of background change performance B is executed if the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, and PB1-4) is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, when the game state is in the time-saving state/probable bonus state, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot, in other words, if there is no reserved memory for a jackpot, it will decide not to change the background image and not to perform the background change effect 50% of the time, not to change the background image and to perform the background change effect in a failure pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, it will perform the background change effect in a failure pattern A) 45% of the time, and to perform the background image change and to perform the background change effect in a success pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, it will perform the background change effect in a success pattern A) 5% of the time.

In addition, when the game is in the normal state, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a reserved memory for a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 153 (A), the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will not be executed with a probability of 30%, and the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will be executed with a failure pattern (if the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the background change effect A will be executed with a failure pattern, and the variable display The execution of a change in the background image and a successful pattern of the background change performance (if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance A; if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance B) is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of a change in the background image and a successful pattern of the background change performance (if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance A; if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance B) is determined at a rate of 70%. Also, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability-changing state, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A stores a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is a reserved memory for a jackpot, the game determines not to change the background image and not to execute the background change effect at a rate of 20%, not to change the background image and to execute the background change effect in a failure pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, execute the background change effect in a failure pattern A) at a rate of 0%, and execute the background image change and execute the background change effect in a success pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, execute the background change effect in a success pattern A) at a rate of 80%. In this way, in this embodiment, the rate at which the game state is controlled to a jackpot when the background change effect is executed is different between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability-changing state, i.e., the probability of winning.

When it is decided to execute a background change effect using one of the effect patterns, an execution setting according to the effect pattern of the background change effect is made, and the background change effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to the execution setting. When it is decided to change the background image (when it is decided to execute a background change effect using a successful pattern), a setting for changing the background image is made. The background image change can be executed in the background display update processing (step S79) shown in FIG. 147.

(Reach suggestion performance setting process)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006SGS280) shown in Fig. 150 will be described. In the reach suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3. If the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3, it determines whether or not to execute the reach suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the reach suggestion effect according to the change pattern of the variable display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 153(B), when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the reach suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 80% of the time, and the reach suggestion effect is determined to be executed in a failure pattern 20% of the time. Also, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, the reach suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 30% of the time, and the reach suggestion effect is determined to be executed in a success pattern 70% of the time. In other words, in this embodiment, when the reach suggestion effect is executed, the reach (normal reach or super reach reach effect) is set to be executed at a higher rate than when the reach suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the reach suggestion effect is executed, the player is notified that the reach will not be reached because the reach suggestion effect is executed in a failure pattern, while the player is notified that the reach suggestion effect will be reached because the reach suggestion effect is executed in a success pattern.

When it is decided to execute one of the reach suggestion effect patterns, an execution setting is made according to the effect pattern of the reach suggestion effect, and the reach suggestion effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to the execution setting.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) shown in Fig. 150 will be described. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7. If the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7, it determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect according to the variable display result of the variable display.

For example, when the game state is normal, as shown in FIG. 153(C), if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in effect is determined not to be executed 65% of the time, the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern X 30% of the time, and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern Y 5% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern X 20% of the time, and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern Y 70% of the time.

That is, in this embodiment, when the cut-in effect is executed, it is set to be controlled to a jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed, it is set to be controlled to a jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is executed in effect pattern Y (whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the jackpot expectation of the effect pattern: effect pattern Y> effect pattern X> no cut-in effect). Also, when the game state is in the time-saving state/probability change state, if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 70%, the cut-in effect is executed in effect pattern X at a rate of 30%, and the cut-in effect is executed in effect pattern Y at a rate of 0%. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%, the cut-in effect is executed in effect pattern X at a rate of 15%, and the cut-in effect is executed in effect pattern Y at a rate of 75%. In this embodiment, the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state when a cut-in effect is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation rate, differs between the normal state and the time-saving/high probability state.

The cut-in effect in this embodiment is an effect that displays different images (for example, an image of the letters "Hot!!" or an image of the letters "Chance!") depending on the effect pattern, and the proportion of the effect that is controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on which image is displayed (which effect pattern is executed) (in this embodiment, effect pattern X is an effect pattern that displays an image of the letters "Chance!", and effect pattern Y is an effect pattern that displays an image of the letters "Hot!!").

When it is decided to execute a cut-in effect using one of the effect patterns, an execution setting corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is made, and the cut-in effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to the execution setting.

In the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is exemplified as an effect accompanied by a cracking effect (see Fig. 155 and Fig. 179), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect may have an effect pattern accompanied by a cracking effect and an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect. For example, the effect pattern Y with a high expectation of a jackpot may be an effect pattern accompanied by a cracking effect, and the effect pattern X with a low expectation of a jackpot may be an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect. Furthermore, when the effect pattern X is set as an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect in this way, when the effect pattern X of the cut-in effect is set as an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect, the display mode of the strip-shaped image displayed on the image display device 5 may be determined from a plurality of modes according to the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be determined in different proportions from blue, green, and red depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or not). In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is accompanied by a cracking effect, and when the cut-in effect is not accompanied by a cracking effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the image that is further displayed.

(Description of the production)
As described above, in this embodiment, at the start of the variable display, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the cut-in effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the cut-in effect, multiple effects can be executed during the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 154 and FIG. 155, when the game state is normal, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect can be executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 156, when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the background change effect A, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect can be executed. Note that the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect may be set as effects that cannot be executed in the normal state and can be executed only in the time-saving state or the probability change state. In this case, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect are executed according to the determination ratios of FIG. 151 (B) and FIG. 153 (C). In this way, different types of crack effects can be performed in the normal state, the time-saving state, and the special state.

As shown in Figures 154 to 156, the first continuous cracking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 as the image to be cracked, is cracked from the start timing of the variable display, and cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack has occurred breaks (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The first continuous cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Furthermore, while the first consecutive break effect is an effect that may be executed in a variable display prior to the variable display that is the pre-read target, in a time-saving state or a probability-change state, it is an effect that may be executed multiple times during the execution of one variable display, and depending on the number of times it is executed, it is also an effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

The second continuous cracking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked is executed from the start of the variable display, and cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurred is cracked (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The second continuous cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Furthermore, the second continuous cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display of the pre-read target.

The dialogue preview performance is a performance in which an operation promotion image urging the player to operate push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promotion performance, and then in response to the operation of push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking performance is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurred breaks (the broken area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The line preview effect is an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area subject to the crack effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the crack effect) and the other display areas, and one of the lines "Chance!", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!" is displayed in the cracked area (area subject to the crack effect), and the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the line displayed (the displayed line suggests the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (the expected probability of a jackpot)).

The background change performance A is a performance that may change the background image by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 and executing a crack performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. Note that the background change performance A may be executed in a successful pattern in which the character's action causes cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the background image to change as the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, or in a failed pattern in which the character does not appear and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break), so the background image does not change.

The background change effect B is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, thereby changing the background image. Background change performance B may be performed in a success pattern in which two stages of cracks appear on the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 to crack, changing the background image, or in a failure pattern (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) in which the first stage of cracks appears on the glass plate image 006SG301 but the second stage of cracks does not occur and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack, or in which the first and second stages of cracks appear on the glass plate image 006SG301 but the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack, so the background image does not change.

The pseudo consecutive performance is a performance in which, when the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a specific combination during execution of the variable display, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a crack performance is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in its entirety. In addition, in this embodiment, the pseudo consecutive performance is executed up to two times during one variable display, and the color of the pieces of the glass plate image 006SG301A broken in the first pseudo consecutive performance is different from the color of the pieces of the glass plate image 006SG301A broken in the second pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 134 and 135, the more times the pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the probability that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state). In other words, in the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment, it is possible to suggest to the player the probability that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (the probability of winning) depending on the color of the pieces of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the broken performance executed as part of the pseudo consecutive performance.

The reach suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the achievement of a reach during variable display, and may result in the achievement of a reach when a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. The reach suggestion effect may be executed in a successful pattern in which a reach is achieved by causing a crack to appear in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the action of a character, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 to break, or in a failed pattern in which a reach is not achieved because the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break) despite the crack occurring due to the action of a character.

The weak development effect is an effect in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and a glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, thereby informing the player of the transition to a Super Reach α reach effect if the game state is in a normal state, and informing the player of the transition to a Super Reach γ reach effect if the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability variable state. The weak development effect is also an effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken without any cracks being generated by the action of the character.

When the game state is in the normal state, the strong development effect A is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of the super reach β by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 after the reach effect of the super reach α, and executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32.When the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state, the strong development effect A is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of the super reach δ by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 after the reach effect of the normal reach, and executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32.

The strong development performance B is also a performance in which cracks occur without the action of a character, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. During the reach performance of Super Reach α, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking performance is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, thereby notifying the transition to the reach performance of Super Reach β. This is a performance in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without cracks occurring regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of a character.

The cut-in effect is an effect in which, after an operation prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the push button 31B, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked without any cracks occurring due to the movement of the movable body or the action of the character. In addition, the cut-in effect is an effect in which different cut-in images are displayed according to the effect pattern from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the cut-in image displayed (the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state (the expected probability of a jackpot) is suggested by the cut-in image displayed).

The result notification effect is an effect in which an operation prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect, urging the player to operate the push button 31B, and then in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, thereby notifying the player that the game has been controlled to a jackpot game state. The result notification effect may be executed in a success pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 after the movable body has been moved cracks, thereby notifying that the game is in a jackpot game state, or in a failure pattern in which the movable body does not move, the glass plate image 006SG301 does not crack, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), thereby notifying that the game is in a jackpot game state, i.e., that the variable display result is a miss. The result notification effect of this embodiment may be executed exceptionally in the variable display of PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach jackpot or non-reach miss variable patterns, when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state (see FIG. 160).

(Performance timing for each variation pattern)
Next, the rough execution timing and execution period of each variation pattern of the effects in this embodiment will be explained. First, the variable display when the game state is normal will be explained. As shown in Fig. 157 (A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-1, which is a variation pattern of no shortening and no reach loss, the first continuous break effect, the dialogue advance notice effect, the background change effect A, and the reach suggestion effect can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 157(B), when variable display is executed in PA1-2 and PA1-3, which are shortened non-reach missed variable patterns, the first consecutive break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in Figure 157 (C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-1 or PB1-1, which are the variable patterns for a normal reach jackpot or a normal reach miss, a short time after the start of the variable display, the dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and normal reach reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period.

As shown in FIG. 157(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-2 and PB1-2, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach α jackpot and the Super Reach α miss, the second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, the first pseudo consecutive effect, the normal reach reach effect, the weak development effect, and the Super Reach α reach effect can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach α reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the Super Reach α reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 158(A), when the variable display is executed in PA2-3 and PB1-3, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach β jackpot and the Super Reach β miss, the following can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display in the order of the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, the normal reach reach effect, the weak development effect, the Super Reach α reach effect, the strong development effect A, and the Super Reach β reach effect, without overlapping in the performance period. During the execution period of the Super Reach β reach effect, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β reach effect.

In particular, the characters displayed in the background change effect A begin to be displayed after the dialogue in the dialogue preview effect (the display of the cracked area of the display area of the image display device 5) has gone invisible, so a new crack effect will not occur when a new crack effect has already occurred, preventing the player's attention from being scattered across multiple crack effects, thereby preventing a decrease in the effectiveness of each crack effect.

As shown in FIG. 158(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-4 and PB1-4, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach β jackpot and the Super Reach β miss, the second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, first pseudo consecutive effect, second pseudo consecutive effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, Super Reach α reach effect, strong development effect B, and Super Reach β reach effect can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β reach effect, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β reach effect.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 157 to 159, the variable display in which the background change effect B is executed and the variable display in which the dialogue preview effect is executed are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change effect B and the dialogue preview effect may be executable effects during the same variable display. Furthermore, in this case where the background change effect B and the dialogue preview effect are executable effects during the same variable display, when the execution of the background change effect B is decided, the execution period of the background change effect B and the dialogue preview effect may not overlap. In this way, for example, it is possible to prevent the player who has executed the crack effect as the background change effect B from mistaking it for the crack effect to be executed as the dialogue preview effect while a crack is occurring as the background change effect B, that is, the player from mistaking it for the background image to be changed.

Next, we will explain the variable display when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state. As shown in Figures 159 (A) and 159 (B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, if it is decided to execute the continuous crack effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss and non-reach jackpot fluctuation patterns, the first continuous crack effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display, and if it is decided to execute the background change effect as a pre-reading targeting PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot fluctuation pattern, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

In addition, for the variable display of PB1-5, which is a variable pattern for a non-reach jackpot, a performance in which cracks gradually expand in the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display prior to the variable display as a pre-reading preview performance may be executed, and a performance in which a cracking performance is executed at the start of the variable display of PB1-5 and a jackpot pattern is displayed (a so-called instant win performance, special continuous cracking performance) may be executed. In addition, since this performance is an instant win performance, the moving speed of the fragments displayed as the cracking performance may be made faster than the fragments displayed as other cracking performances.

As shown in Figures 159 (C) and 159 (D), when variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, if it has been decided to execute a consecutive break effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss and non-reach jackpot fluctuation patterns, the first consecutive break effect can be executed twice individually from the start timing of the variable display, and when it has been decided to execute a background change effect as a pre-reading targeting PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot fluctuation pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 160(A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variable pattern, if it is subject to the consecutive break effect, when the execution of the background change effect has not been determined as a pre-read for PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot variable pattern, and when the variable display is executed in PB1-5, which is a non-reach jackpot variable pattern, the first consecutive break effect is executed three times individually from the start timing of the variable display, and then the result notification effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 160(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is a variable pattern for a normal reach miss, no effects are executed except for the variable display of the decorative pattern from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing, and only the reach effect of the normal reach is executed from the reach timing.

As shown in FIG. 160(C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-6, PB1-6, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach γ jackpot or the Super Reach γ miss, no effects are executed except for the variable display of the decorative pattern from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing, and from the reach timing, the normal reach reach effect, the weak development effect, and the Super Reach γ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach γ reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the Super Reach γ reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 160(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-7, PB1-7, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach δ jackpot or the Super Reach δ miss, the background change performance A can be executed during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing. In addition, from the reach timing, the normal reach reach performance, the strong development performance A, and the Super Reach δ reach performance can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach δ reach performance, the cut-in performance and the result notification performance are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach δ reach performance.

(Super Reach Alpha presentation flow)
Next, the flow of presentation in Super Reach α will be described with reference to Figures 161 to 163. Figure 161 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. Figure 162 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. Figure 163 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α.

As shown in FIG. 161 (A1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when the variable display of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach α starts, the first background image (for example, an image showing a daytime cityscape) is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started, the second continuous cracking performance starts. Specifically, when the second continuous cracking performance starts, a cracking precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in a cracked form by displaying a crack in a part of the cracking precursor image (see FIG. 161 (A2)), a part of the crack target image that replaces the cracking precursor image is cracked, and a cracking performance in which a plurality of fragment images scatter is executed. In addition, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed on the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance starts. After that, a character image (object image) is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image, and the type of character image displayed suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot (see FIG. 161 (A3)). After the second continuous crack performance ends, the variable display is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the second consecutive crack performance, the dialogue preview performance begins. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the dialogue preview performance begins, an operation prompting image that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed (see FIG. 161 (A4)). The operation prompting image is composed of a button image that resembles the push button 31B, a text image that reads "PRESS!!", an indicator image that indicates the valid operation period, and an effect image.

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation valid period ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in part of the crack precursor image, the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 161 (A5)), a part of the target image to be broken that replaces the crack precursor image breaks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the crack effect starts. After that, a text image saying "Chance!?" is displayed in a partially cracked area (specific range) of the target image to be broken that replaces the crack precursor image, and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot (see FIG. 161 (A6)). After the dialogue preview effect ends, the variable display is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the dialogue preview performance ended, the background change performance A starts. Specifically, after an effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 161 (A7)), if the appearance of a character has been determined, a character image (object image) is displayed (see FIG. 161 (A8)). Next, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed according to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character kicking), and after a crack is displayed in a cracked form by displaying a crack in a part of the crack precursor image (see FIG. 161 (A9)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance in which a plurality of fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 161 (A10)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image (for example, a special zone image showing a wilderness landscape) different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 161 (A11)). After background change performance A ends, the variable display will be performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect begins. Specifically, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 161 (A12)). Next, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in response to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a mallet), and a crack is displayed on the left side of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a first crack state (see FIG. 161 (A13)). Then, a crack is displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image in response to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a mallet), causing the crack precursor image to change from the first crack state to a second crack state (see FIG. 161 (A14)). Furthermore, in response to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C with a mallet) (see FIG. 161 (A15)), if a crack has been determined, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 161 (A16)).

In addition, after the cracking effect starts, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a specified period of time. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, decorative symbols of the same number are temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the N reach effect begins.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, the weak development effect starts. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 161 (A17)), a breakage precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the character image's action (for example, the character moves toward the front side of the display screen to punch the glass plate) (see FIG. 162 (A18)), and the entire area of the break target image that replaces the breakage precursor image is broken without any cracks being displayed in a part of the breakage precursor image, and a breakage effect is executed in which multiple fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 162 (A19)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage effect starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect A (for example, a bowling match between a friendly character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 162 (A20) to (A22)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance A starts. Specifically, after the development pattern with the word "development" displayed in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 162 (A23)), a cracking precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a performance position overlapping with the approximately center position of the display screen), and a cracking performance in which the entire area of the cracking target image replacing the cracking precursor image is cracked without any cracks being displayed in a part of the cracking precursor image, and multiple fragment images are scattered is executed (see FIG. 162 (A24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a reach title image is displayed and a strong S reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 162 (A25) to (A27)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the strong S reach performance, the cut-in performance begins. Specifically, an operation prompting image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the start of the strong S reach performance (see FIG. 162 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation effective period ends without the push button 31B being operated, a cracking precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a cracking performance is executed in which the entire area of the cracking target image that replaces the cracking precursor image is cracked without any cracks being displayed in a part of the cracking precursor image, and multiple fragment images are scattered. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance begins. After that, a text image that reads "Heat!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed text image suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot (see FIG. 162 (A29)). After the cut-in performance ends, the strong S reach performance is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cut-in effect ended, the result notification effect begins. Specifically, first, an image of an ally character delivering a final blow is displayed (see FIG. 163 (A30)), and then the ally character's movement is displayed in slow motion and the image is faded out (see FIG. 163 (A31)).

If the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an image of an ally character's attack hitting an enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 163 (A32)), and then a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a predetermined performance position between the origin position and the performance position), and a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a cracked form (for example, a form in which a crack appears downward from the movable body 32), and a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 163 (A33)).

Next, in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, a return-to-origin movement in which the movable body 32 rises from a predetermined performance position above the display screen to the origin position), the entire area of the target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 163 (A34)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance begins. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, the determined decorative patterns of the jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character. In addition, the background image is displayed as the fifth background image 006SG085 for a jackpot (e.g., a rainbow-style image), the movable lamp 9d is lit in a predetermined light color (e.g., rainbow), a predetermined sound effect is output, and it is announced that the jackpot game state has been controlled (see FIG. 163 (A35)), after which the background image returns to the first background image and the fixed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is displayed stationary (see FIG. 163 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss display result, an image of an enemy character's punch hitting an ally character is displayed (see FIG. 163 (A37)), and then a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed without the movable body 32 moving, and a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a cracked form (for example, a form in which a crack appears in the center of the display screen), and a gray image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 163 (A38)).

Next, after a white-out image (effect image) is displayed (see FIG. 163 (A39)), the transparency of the white-out image increases, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-jackpot combination is temporarily stopped, and it is announced that the friendly character has been defeated in a battle with the enemy character (FIG. 163 (A40)). In addition, after it is announced that the game state will not be controlled to a jackpot, the background image returns to the first background image, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-jackpot combination is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 163 (A41)).

(Super Reach β performance flow)
Next, the flow of the presentation in the super reach β will be described with reference to Figures 164 and 165. Figure 164 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in the super reach β. Figure 165 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 164 (B1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when the variable display of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach β starts, the first background image is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. When a predetermined time has passed since the variable display started, the background change performance B starts. Specifically, when the background change performance B starts, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack display area consisting of cracks including a small crack area is displayed at the bottom left of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked state (see FIG. 164 (B2)), and then the crack display area is displayed in two places on the right side of the crack precursor image, so that the crack state of the crack precursor image changes stepwise (see FIG. 164 (B3)), and if a crack is determined, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance in which multiple fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 164 (B4)). In addition, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 164 (B5)).

After the background change performance A ends, the variable display is executed again, and after a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 164 (B6)), a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, causing the variable display mode to become a reach mode (see FIG. 164 (B7)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect begins. Specifically, in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, a pseudo consecutive pattern with the word "NEXT" displayed, indicating that the re-variable display will begin, is displayed decelerating just before the stopped display position (see FIG. 164 (B8)).

Next, after the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 164 (B9)), a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 164 (B10)), and then, in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position above the display screen to the performance position overlapping with the approximate center position of the display screen), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance in which multiple fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 164 (B11)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack performance. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "x2" indicating the number of times of re-variable display is displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (see FIG. 164 (B12) to (B13)).

In addition, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive pattern passes through the stop display position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, and a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R is displayed, and a losing variable display result is displayed (see FIG. 164 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-consecutive performance of a triple pattern, the pseudo-consecutive performance with the word "NEXT" indicating the start of the pseudo-consecutive performance is decelerated and displayed in front of the stop display position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 164 (B14)). After the pseudo-consecutive performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 164 (B15)), a cracking prediction image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in part of the cracking prediction image, the cracking prediction image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 164 (B16)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the cracking prediction image is cracked according to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to the performance position overlapping with the approximately center position of the display screen), and a cracking performance in which a plurality of fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 164 (B17)). After the cracking effect starts, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a certain period of time. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "x3" is displayed, indicating the number of times the variable display can be resumed, and then the variable display resumes (see Figure 165 (B18)-(B19)).

After the variable display is resumed for the second time in the case of a pseudo consecutive performance of a two-row pattern, or for the third time in the case of a pseudo consecutive performance of a three-row pattern, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed temporarily stopped (see FIG. 165 (B20)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is displayed temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in an N reach (see FIG. 165 (B21)), and the N reach performance begins.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, the weak development effect starts. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 165 (B22)), a breakage precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 165 (B23)) in response to the character image's action (for example, the character moves toward the front side of the display screen to punch the glass plate), and a breakage effect is executed in which the entire area of the break target image that replaces the breakage precursor image breaks without displaying any cracks in a part of the breakage precursor image, and multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 165 (B24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage effect starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect (for example, a bowling match between a friendly character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 165 (B25) to (B26)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance B starts. Specifically, when the strong development performance B starts, a cracking premonition image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in part of the cracking premonition image, the cracking premonition image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 165 (B27)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the cracking premonition image is cracked, and a cracking performance in which multiple fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 165 (B28)). In addition, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a development pattern with the word "development" displayed in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C is temporarily displayed (see FIG. 165 (B29)), and then a reach title image is displayed, and the strong S reach performance B (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 165 (B30)). Furthermore, the Strong S reach performance B is an S reach performance with a higher expectation than the Strong S reach performance A. Also, because the Strong S reach performance B is an S reach performance with a higher expectation than the Strong S reach performance A, the cut-in performance described below is more likely to be executed in performance pattern Y. In other words, the Strong S reach performance B is a performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 described below is more likely to be displayed than the Strong S reach performance A.

Strong S Reach Performance B is almost the same as Strong S Reach Performance A of Super Reach α, except for the types of enemy characters, etc., so we will not go into detail about the flow up until the end of the variable display.

(Examples of various effects)
Next, examples of the operation of the cracking effects in various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to Figures 166 to 182.

In addition, the following explanation will explain an example of the expression used to indicate the display mode.

A "fade-out display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image increases over time, whereas a "fade-in display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image decreases over time.

An "animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (moving image display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame before, and visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transparency of the displayed image different from that of the image one frame before. In other words, an "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement, such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarged display", "reduced display", "frame-in display", and "frame-out display", but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display", in which the display mode, such as color tone, changes. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of animation display, and refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) in which the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous image, and the display mode does not change at all.

As shown in Figures 166 to 182, the decorative patterns (for low base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display section consisting of a circular number base section when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section, a character display section displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" on the number display section, an information display section consisting of a rectangular information base section when viewed from the front and information about the character (for example, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base section, and a roughly rectangular base display section displayed so as to surround the periphery of the number display section, character display section, and information display section (see Figure 125, etc.).

Although no detailed explanation will be given, when the game state is a high base state or in other presentation modes, decorative patterns with a display mode different from the decorative patterns for the low base state described above may be variably displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition, as an example of a variable display mode of the decorative patterns for the low base state, a vertical scrolling display from the top to the bottom of the display screen has been given, but other variable display modes may be used, or the variable display mode may differ depending on the game state or presentation mode.

The display area 5S provided in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern. The small pattern consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but it is not necessary that all the numbers of both patterns correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern may be numbers "1" to "5", which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" of the decorative pattern, or may be symbols or figures different from the numbers of the decorative pattern.

The special pattern pending memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending display 006SG101 (see FIG. 215) and the second pending display (not shown) corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen displays the active display 006SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed. Note that the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, the small pattern, the special pattern pending memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common in all performance modes.

<First consecutive break effect and second consecutive break effect>
Details of the operation example of the first and second consecutive break effects will be described with reference to Fig. 166 and Fig. 167. Fig. 166 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the first consecutive break effect. Fig. 167 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the second consecutive break effect.

As shown in FIG. 166 (A), when the game state is normal, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative patterns is executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R and the second continuous cracking performance is started, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility which is lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern stand out (see Figure 166 (B)). In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R and the second continuous cracking performance starts, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a cracking precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area that is higher than the sixth background image that is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability change state, and cracks are displayed to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state. In addition, the decorative symbols displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with the second visibility that is lower than the first visibility, so that the cracking state is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken (the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state), and a broken effect is executed in which a plurality of broken images 006SG302 larger than the small broken image 006SG302A scatter. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the broken effect starts (see FIG. 166 (C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As time passes, the transmittance gradually increases, making it possible to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 166 (D)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 166 (E)).

After that, in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, the character image 006SG305 and the background effect image 006SG314 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 166(F)), and then the glass plate image 006SG301A, the character image 006SG305, and the background effect image 006SG314 are hidden (see FIG. 166(G)). Here, the background effect image 006SG314 when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed is displayed with the second visibility in a predetermined range other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, and is displayed with the first visibility, which is higher than the second visibility, in the crack display area 006SG304 (specific range). In other words, the visibility differs between the non-cracked area and the part visible through the cracked area, making it easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 167, the second continuous breaking effect is almost the same as the first continuous breaking effect except for the type of character that appears, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Note that in this embodiment, the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect are illustrated as being almost the same in terms of their operation examples, but the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect may be different in terms of their operation examples.

For example, the first and second consecutive cracking performances may use the same cracking pattern D, and the manner in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions may be the same, but the position at which the fragment image 006SG302 begins to display when cracking begins may be different, for example, by displaying the crack on the right side in FIG. 166(B) and the crack on the left side in FIG. 167(B). In this way, it is possible to create a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the first and second consecutive cracking performances.

In addition, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack may be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may indicate whether the first or second continuous breaking effect will be executed. Also, the crack pattern may be different between the first and second continuous breaking effects. In particular, for the second continuous breaking effect, the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed may be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed in slow motion to increase attention to the variable display.

In addition, it is possible to output a character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous cracking effect, and a character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect, and either may be output together with the cracking sound when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voice may be output after the cracking sound has been output when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the cracking sound may be limited.

<Dialogue preview performance>
Details of an operation example of the dialogue preview performance will be described with reference to Fig. 168. Fig. 168 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 168(A), when the dialogue preview performance starts while the decorative pattern is being displayed variably in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, an operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081 (see FIG. 168(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the valid operation period ends without the push button 31B being operated, the operation prompting image 006SG310 is hidden and a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a precursor image of cracking in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked form. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently (see FIG. 168 (C)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a cracking effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see FIG. 168 (D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As time passes, the transmittance gradually increases, making it possible to see the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 (see FIG. 168 (E)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 168 (F)).

Thereafter, in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished, a text image 006SG306 indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, and a dialogue background image 006SG087 that serves as the background for the text image 006SG306 are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301A (see FIG. 168 (F)). Here, the dialogue background image 006SG087 and the text image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with the first visibility, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the area other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with the second visibility that is lower than the first visibility. In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the portion visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the serif background image 006SG087, and the text image 006SG306 are hidden (see FIG. 168 (H)).

168(C), for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the cracks (e.g., a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image can indicate which of the dialogue text images 006SG306, "Chance!?", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!", will be displayed. Also, the crack pattern can be made different depending on the type of dialogue text (such as the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302. In particular, when "Super Hot!" is displayed, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed in slow motion to increase the level of attention), and the position of the crack (e.g., the closer to the center the higher the expectation) or the range of the crack (e.g., the wider the range of the crack the higher the expectation) can be changed while using a common crack pattern. Additionally, it is possible to output a character voice corresponding to the type of character image 006SG305, and either may be output together with a crackling sound when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voice may be output after the crackling sound has been output when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the crackling sound may be limited.

<Background change effect A>
Details of an operation example of background change presentation A will be described with reference to Fig. 169 and Fig. 170. Fig. 169 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change presentation A. Fig. 170 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of background change presentation A.

As shown in Figure 169 (A), when the game state is normal, when background change performance A is initiated while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, an effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081 and is gradually enlarged (see Figures 169 (B) and (C)), after which the effect image 006SG320 is faded out and the character image 006SG305 is displayed (see Figure 169 (D)). Also, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, when the background change performance A starts while the decorative pattern is being displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the 6th background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability change state, and after gradually enlarging, the effect image 006SG320 is faded out and the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

The effect image 006SG320 displayed in FIG. 169(B) is a presentation that teases whether or not the character image 006SG305 will be displayed in FIG. 169(D). In the case of a successful pattern, the display moves to FIG. 169(C). In the case of an unsuccessful pattern, the display does not move to FIG. 169(C), and the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in a reduced size and then becomes hidden, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 will not be displayed.

Next, when the game is in the normal state, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and then, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking towards the front, cracks are displayed spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a pre-crack state (see Figure 169 (E)), after which the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a crack state (see Figure 169 (F)). In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility which is lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern stand out. Furthermore, when the game state is in a time-saving state/probable bonus state, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image, and then, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the front, cracks are displayed spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that after the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state, the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a crack state. In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, when the game state is in the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a cracking effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see FIG. 169 (G)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 169(H) and FIG. 170(I)). As the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 170(J)), and then the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 170(K)). In this way, a crack effect is executed when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, so that the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 can be made to look natural, and the background change can be made to look natural. In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken in its entirety, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area, in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, in a breaking effect that is executed. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breaking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transparency gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the seventh background image, which is a chance background image for the time-saving state/high probability state, increases. Then, when the transparency reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and then the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the sixth background image to the seventh background image, the change from the sixth background image to the seventh background image can be made to look natural, and the background change can be made to look natural.

In addition, for example, a third background image (not shown) that is more advantageous when displayed as a background image than the second background image 006SG082 may be displayed, and it may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed depending on the action mode of the character image 006SG305 (action such as punching or kicking). Also, it may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed by making it possible to display a character other than the character image 006SG305.

<Background change effect B>
Details of an operation example of the background change presentation B will be described with reference to Fig. 171. Fig. 171 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the background change presentation B.

As shown in FIG. 171(A), when background change performance B is started while the decorative pattern is being displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small cracked areas is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state (see FIG. 171(B)). After that, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, so that the crack state of the glass plate image 006SG301 changes stepwise (see FIG. 171(C)).

In this way, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked state, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, so that the cracked state is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Also, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 171(C), the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with the second visibility in areas other than each crack display area 006SG324, while being displayed with the first visibility, which is higher than the second visibility, in each crack display area 006SG324. In other words, since the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the part visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a cracking effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see FIG. 171 (D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 171(E)). Then, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 171(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 171(G)). In this way, by executing a crack effect when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 can be made to look natural, and the background change can be made to look natural.

Also, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks may be displayed in a portion corresponding to the cracks displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may suggest the expected degree of development of the performance. Specifically, when the display color of the effect image is blue, it is likely to end at the first stage (see FIG. 171(B)), and when the display color of the effect image is green, it is likely to end at the second stage (see FIG. 171(C)), and it is preferable that red is most likely to develop into a cracked performance compared to blue and green. Also, as shown in FIG. 188(B), when the effect image ends at the first stage in failure pattern 1, the transparency gradually increases and the display becomes invisible (fade-out display) 1500 ms after the start of the background change performance B, and as shown in FIG. 188(C), when the effect image ends at the second stage in failure pattern 2, the transparency gradually increases and the display becomes invisible 3000 ms after the start of the background change performance B.

In addition, while background change performance B is being executed, it is possible to restrict the change performance for the active display and pending display, which are images displayed in the layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, while not restricting the performance using images (such as mini character images) displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect of the cracking performance.

<Pseudo consecutive performance>
Details of an operation example of the pseudo consecutive performance will be described with reference to Fig. 172. Fig. 172 is a diagram showing details of a part of an operation example of the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in FIG. 172 (A), after the pseudo consecutive performance has started, when the pseudo consecutive pattern with the word "NEXT" displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, indicating that the re-variable display will start, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stopped display position, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and cracks are displayed radially from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently (see FIG. 172 (B)).

In addition, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to the performance position, and in response to this action, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 172 (C)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance begins (see Figure 172 (D)). Additionally, as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area.

The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see Figure 172 (E)). Then, when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends due to the transparency reaching 100%, an action effect image 006SG321 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area, in order to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (see Figures 172 (F) and (G)).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 has ended, the movable body 32 starts moving from the performance position toward the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see FIG. 172 (G)), and then stops at the performance position after all of the fragment images 006SG302 are no longer displayed, completing the return operation to the origin position (see FIG. 172 (H)).

The return operation of the movable body 32 from the performance position to the origin position may be started after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 has ended and then the display of the background effect image 006SG322 has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped and the re-variable display begins in the pseudo consecutive performance, but the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the first variable display may be blue, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the second variable display may be green, and the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the third variable display may be red, for example. Also, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be different, for example, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may become gradually larger each time the re-variable display is performed.

In this case, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of times the re-variable display is performed, but it is preferable that the crack pattern is common. In this way, by making the crack pattern common in gaming machines that perform a variety of crack effects, it is possible to accurately indicate that a pseudo consecutive performance has been performed. In addition, while the operation pattern of the movable body 32 is common between the first re-variable display, the second re-variable display, and the third re-variable display, the display mode of the crack pattern may be different between the first re-variable display, the second re-variable display, and the third re-variable display, for example, the size of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different, the number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed may be different, or the movement speed of the fragment images 006SG302 may be different.

<Reach suggestion effect>
Details of an operation example of the reach suggestion effect will be described with reference to Fig. 173 and Fig. 174. Fig. 173 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the reach suggestion effect. Fig. 174 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the reach suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 173(A), when the variable display of the decorative symbols is being executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, when the reach suggestion performance is started, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see FIG. 173(B)), and then the character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 173(C)). Next, in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image, and in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the left decorative symbol display area 5L with a mallet, a crack is displayed on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the first crack mode, and an action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIG. 173(D)).

Next, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a mallet, a crack appears on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to change to a second crack state, and an action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 173 (E)).

Furthermore, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the middle decoration pattern display area 5C with a mallet (see FIG. 173(F)), a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 173(G)), and then the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads to the periphery, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 173(H)).

Also, as shown in Figures 173 (D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Also, as shown in FIG. 173(H), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. Next, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern, the fragment image 006SG302, and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 174(I)). Then, the transmittance reaches 100%, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R are enlarged and highlighted (see FIG. 174(J)), after which the decorative patterns are reduced in size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 174(K)).

In the various effects that accompany the cracking effect in this embodiment, for example, as shown in the flow of Figures 174 (J) to 174 (K), the effect progresses after the fragment image 006SG302 is completely removed from the display area of the image display device 5 and becomes invisible during the cracking effect (for example, progressing from a reach suggestion effect that accompanies a cracking effect to a reach effect that does not accompany a cracking effect).

In addition, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack may be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may indicate the likelihood of a reach developing. Specifically, if the effect image has display modes of blue and red, it is sufficient if the effect image is displayed in red, making it more likely to result in a reach than when it is displayed in blue.

In the case of a failure pattern, after a white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the middle decoration pattern display area 5C with a mallet (see Figures 173 (G) and (H)), a character image 006SG305 looking disappointed is displayed in the area corresponding to the middle decoration pattern display area 5C, after which the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 are no longer displayed, the losing pattern stops, and the variable display ends.

＜Weak development performance＞
Details of an operation example of the weak development performance will be described with reference to Fig. 175. Fig. 175 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the weak development performance.

As shown in FIG. 175(A), regardless of whether the game state is normal or time-saving/probable bonus, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R becomes a reach state and the weak development effect starts, a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, and a character image 006SG305 is displayed in the approximate center of the layer 6 image drawing area above it (see FIG. 175(B)). After the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, it is displayed in slow motion while expanding as if it is moving toward the front of the display screen (see FIG. 175(C)). The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R move to the upper right corner of the display screen and are displayed in a reduced size.

Next, when the game state is normal, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked state, but the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect starts (see FIG. 175 (D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 increases (see FIG. 175(E)). After the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 175(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again (see FIG. 175(G)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the image 006SG088 for the weak S reach effect is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect (see FIG. 175(H)). In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked state, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a cracking effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 increases. When the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the weak S reach effect is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 184 and FIG. 197 described later, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development performance is non-transparent, but this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development performance is displayed in a transparent mode with transparency (for example, a transmittance of 70% or more) in FIG. 203 (B1) to (B3) described later, and then in FIG. 203 (B4) and (B5) it is displayed in a non-transparent mode with no transparency (for example, a transmittance of less than 10%). In other words, at the first timing corresponding to FIG. 203 (B3), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a transparent mode, and at the second timing corresponding to FIG. 203 (B4), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a non-transparent mode.

In this way, by executing the crack effect when the N reach effect progresses to the weak S reach effect, the change from the N reach effect image to the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 can be made to look natural, so the change in effect can be made to look natural.

<Strong Development Performance A>
Details of an operation example of the strong development effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 176. Fig. 176 is a diagram showing details of a part of an operation example of the strong development effect A.

As shown in FIG. 176(A), in the weak S reach performance, a development symbol with the word "Development" displayed is temporarily stopped and when the strong development performance A starts, the movable body 32 starts to fall from the origin position to the performance position, and when this falling action starts, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in approximately the center of the layer 7 image drawing area, and the movable body 32 falls (see FIG. 176(B)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance starts.

In addition, as a preliminary effect before the cracking effect, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and when the movable body 32 moves to the effect position, a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the weak S reach effect image 006SG088, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a cracking effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area (see FIG. 176 (C)).

The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and since the transmittance remains at 0% until the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 176 (C)). As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 176 (D)). Next, when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transparency becomes 100%, an action effect image 006SG325 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area, in order to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (see FIG. 176 (E)).

Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and the fragment image 006SG302 goes invisible, after which the movable body 32 starts moving from the performance position to the origin position (see FIG. 176 (F)). Then, the return operation to the origin position ends, and the reach title image 006SG326 is displayed, progressing to a strong S reach performance (see FIG. 176 (G)).

<Strong Development Performance B>
Details of an operation example of the strong development performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 177 and Fig. 178. Fig. 177 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the strong development performance B. Fig. 178 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the strong development performance B.

As shown in FIG. 177(A), when a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach performance and the strong development performance B starts, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the weak S reach performance image 006SG088, and cracks are displayed radially from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state (see FIG. 177(B)). In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the weak S reach performance image 006SG088 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, so that the cracked state is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 177(C)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 177(D)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 177(D), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 increases (see FIG. 177(E)). Next, the transmittance becomes 100%, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. After the decorative pattern in which the development pattern with the word "development" is displayed is temporarily stopped in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 177(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 177(G)).

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the Layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 177(H)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around and is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time, with the development pattern being hidden (see FIG. 178(I)). Then, as the transparency gradually increases over time, the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach performance increases (see FIGS. 178(J) and (K)).

In this way, by executing a cracking effect when progressing from a weak S reach effect to a strong S reach effect, it is possible to make it appear as if the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 has cracked and changed into the reach title image 006SG326, making the change in reach effect look natural.

<Cut-in effects>
Details of an operation example of a cut-in effect will be described with reference to Fig. 179. Fig. 179 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of a cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 179(A), when a cut-in effect starts a predetermined period of time after the start of the strong S reach effect, an operation prompting image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084 for the strong S reach effect (see FIG. 179(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated (or when the operation valid period ends without the push button 31B being operated), the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and a cracking effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. In addition, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed as if the button had been pressed by operation, and an operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, and is enlarged as time passes (see Figures 179 (C) and (D)).

In addition, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and when the display starts, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken piece image 006SG302 displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 179 (C)). Note that the operation prompt image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area higher than the whiteout image 006SG303, and therefore are displayed while maintaining the first visibility that is the same as the first visibility when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed.

As time passes, the transmittance gradually increases, making it possible to see the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 179(D)). Furthermore, the operation prompting image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are hidden, while the text image 006SG307 saying "Heat!!" is visible (see FIG. 179(E)). After the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 179(F)), the fragment image 006SG302 is no longer visible (see FIG. 179(G)).

In this embodiment, both cut-in effect patterns X and Y are described as effect patterns that include a cracking effect, but as a cut-in effect effect pattern, the effect pattern Y with a high probability of winning may be a chance effect pattern that includes a cracking effect, and the effect pattern X with a low probability of winning may be an effect pattern that does not include a cracking effect. In such a case, in the effect pattern that does not include a cracking effect, a band-shaped cut-in image (not shown) may be displayed on the fourth background image 006SG084.

＜Result notification (jackpot)＞
Details of the operation example of the result notification effect (jackpot) will be described with reference to Fig. 180 and Fig. 181. Fig. 180 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot. Fig. 181 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 180(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cut-in effect ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification effect begins. Then, the movement speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the image fades out in slow motion, after which a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 180(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an object image 006SG308 is displayed in which an attack from an ally character hits an enemy character (see FIG. 180 (C)), and then the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to a predetermined performance position, and in response to this falling motion, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the object image 006SG308, and cracks are displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 so as to spread downward from the movable body 32, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state. In addition, the object image 006SG308, which is displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently (see FIG. 180 (D)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then is hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 begins to be displayed in a position adjacent to the bottom of the movable body 32 in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 180(E)), and in response to the start of a return-to-origin operation in which the movable body 32 rises from a predetermined performance position to the origin position, the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads downward, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 180(F)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 180(F), when the return-to-origin operation of the movable body 32 is started and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and when the display starts, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see Figure 180 (G)).

Next, the transparency becomes 100%, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and the fifth background image 006SG085 and the fixed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination are displayed (see FIG. 180(H)), after which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 181(I)), and the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the fixed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is displayed in a static state (see FIG. 181(J)).

In addition, after the cracking effect starts in response to the start of the upward movement of the movable body 32 to return to the origin, the upward movement of the movable body 32 returning from the specified performance position to the origin position ends before the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 increases and the display of the fragment image 006SG302, which has become visible, ends (becomes invisible), so that it is possible to quickly notify the user that a jackpot has been hit.

<Result announcement (loss)>
Details of an operation example of the result notification effect (loss) will be described with reference to Fig. 182. Fig. 182 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 182(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cut-in effect ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification effect begins. Then, the movement speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the image fades out in slow motion, after which a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 182(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a miss-display result, the movable body 32 does not move and a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen in the layer 7 image drawing area for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 182(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301 and character image 006SG305 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area.

Then, in the layer 4 image drawing area above the character image 006SG305, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image, and cracks are displayed radially from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked form. The character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the gray background image 006SG313 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, causing the cracked form to be displayed prominently (see FIG. 182(D)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Thus, although the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the cracked state is maintained and no cracking effect is performed in which the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, which indicates that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked form, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again over the entire layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 182 (E)), and then the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed (see FIG. 182 (F)), after which the background image reverts to the first background image 006SG081 and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-jackpot combination is displayed stationary (see FIG. 182 (G)).

(Details of the performance)
Next, detailed explanations will be given for each of the effects that can be executed in this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 183, Fig. 185, Fig. 166, and Fig. 167, in the first and second continuous crack effects, first, a first stage crack is displayed for 500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (first stage crack display period). Next, when the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack comes, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Also, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the first and second continuous broken effects of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period of 400 ms from the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 600 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 viewable period.

Furthermore, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, second-stage cracks are displayed around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area for the broken effect) for 3000 ms (second-stage crack display period). Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first and second continuous broken effects are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the first and second continuous cracking effects, the cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period described above, and the cracking sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking (crack sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sound and cracking effect sound output are the same in the first and second continuous cracking effects, but in the first continuous cracking effect, a first character voice corresponding to the character in FIG. 166(E) is output together with the cracking effect sound, and in the second continuous cracking effect, a second character voice corresponding to the character in FIG. 167(E) is output together with the cracking effect sound. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first and second continuous cracking effects. Furthermore, the cracking sound is louder than the cracking sound and is easier for players to recognize, but the first character voice and the second character voice are output at an even louder volume than the cracking sound and have a longer output period than the cracking sound, making them easier for players to recognize than the cracking sound.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination is not primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and for the 800 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the timing of the end of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the breaking presentation by using the illumination data table for the breaking presentation (whiteout 800 ms). After the illumination in the manner corresponding to the breaking presentation ends, illumination is again performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) by using the normal background image illumination data table. The light emission data table for the cracked effect (whiteout 800 ms) is a data table for making the game effect lamp 9 emit white light at high brightness for 400 ms, which corresponds to the early period of the whiteout display, and for the 400 ms, which corresponds to the later period of the whiteout display, to emit white light alternately at high and low brightness.

As shown in Figures 183, 186 and 168, the dialogue preview performance begins with an operation promotion image being displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B (operation promotion performance execution period). When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation promotion performance or when the operation promotion performance execution period ends, a first stage crack is displayed for 500 ms from that timing (first stage crack display period). Next, when the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break arrives, a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, causing the fragment image 006SG302 to be displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the dialogue preview performance of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period of 400 ms from the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 600 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Furthermore, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, second-stage cracks are displayed for 5000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the area targeted by the broken effect). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the dialogue preview effect are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the dialogue preview performance, cracking sounds corresponding to the display of the cracks are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period of the first stage described above (crack sound output period), and cracking effect sounds corresponding to the cracking effect are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks (cracked effect sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sounds and cracking effect sounds output are the same in the dialogue preview performance and the first and second continuous cracking effects, and in the dialogue preview performance, after the cracking effect sound is output (when the cracking effect sound output period has elapsed), a dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of text image 006SG306 is output. This prevents the dialogue voice sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the cracking effect sound.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, the normal background image illumination data table is used until the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and illumination that does not mainly emit white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is performed, and for the 800 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken to the timing when the whiteout display latter period ends, the illumination data table for the broken effect (whiteout 800 ms) is used, and illumination that mainly emits white light in a manner corresponding to the broken effect is performed. After the illumination in the manner corresponding to the broken effect ends, the normal background image illumination data table is used again to emit illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081).

As shown in Figures 183, 187(A), 187(B), 169, and 170, the background change presentation A of the successful pattern begins with a pre-stage action in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and an image of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (pre-stage action period). From the end of the pre-stage action (character action), a crack is displayed for 2000 ms (crack display period).

As shown in FIG. 187(B), the 2000 ms crack display period is made up of a 1000 ms early crack display period and a 1000 ms late crack display period following the early crack display period. During the early crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's action is displayed for 100 ms from the start of the early crack display period, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed at that time is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see FIG. 170). Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the background change presentation A of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms that includes the late whiteout display period following the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as this is the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during background change presentation A in a successful pattern are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the background change performance A in the successful pattern, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the pre-crack display period described above (cracking sound output period), and a character voice corresponding to the character's action is output, and a cracking performance sound corresponding to the cracking performance is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 2500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (cracked performance sound output period). The cracking effect sound in the background change effect A is a sound exclusive to the background change effect A, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect of notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image. During the output period of 2500 ms, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect of notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image are output for 1000 ms, and then the sound effect of notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image is continuously output for 1500 ms. In addition, the output period of the cracking sound is set to 500 ms, but it may be set to 2000 ms corresponding to the crack display period, or a sound according to the progress of the cracking may be output for 2000 ms. In addition, the action effect sound is output for 100 ms corresponding to the action effect display period, overlapping with the cracking sound. The action effect sound is a sound that is output at a louder volume than the crackling sound, and the crackling sound is difficult to hear when the action effect sound is output, but because the output period of the action effect sound is shorter than that of the crackling sound, the crackling sound can be heard after the action effect sound is output.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the normal background image until the start timing of the crack display period, illumination is performed in a manner that does not mainly emit white light in accordance with the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and for the 2000 ms from the start timing of the crack display period to the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, illumination is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the crack by using the illumination data table for the crack display period that mainly causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light. Furthermore, for the 1000 ms from the timing of the cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is performed mainly in white light in accordance with the cracking presentation by using the illumination data table for the cracking presentation (whiteout 1000 ms). After the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cracking presentation, illumination is performed in a manner that does not mainly emit white light in accordance with the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) by using the illumination data table for the chance background image. The light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is a data table for making the game effect lamp 9 emit white light at high brightness for 500 ms corresponding to the early period of the whiteout display, and for making the game effect lamp 9 emit white light alternately at high brightness and low brightness for 500 ms corresponding to the late period of the whiteout display. Although an example in which a light emission data table for a normal background image is used in the early operation period has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light using a light emission data table for the early operation period that mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in FIG. 169(D). In this case, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in Fig. 169(D) until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, but after the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. In this way, a difference is created between before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, so that the presentation effect of the background change presentation A can be further enhanced. Both the light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) are light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed without a blinking pattern.

As shown in FIG. 187(C), in the background change performance A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-stage operation. In other words, in the background change performance A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed, so the cracking performance is not executed, and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 169(B) and (C), although a teasing performance is performed as to whether or not the character will be displayed, since neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the normal background image light emission data table is used as the light emission data table.

As shown in Figures 183, 188(A), and 171, the background change presentation B of the successful pattern first displays a first-stage crack for 3000 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (first-stage crack display period). During the first-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms from the start timing of the first-stage crack display period.

In addition, from the timing when 1500 ms have elapsed in the first-stage crack display period, second-stage cracks are displayed in a wider area of the display area of the image display device 5 than during the first-stage crack display period for 1500 ms (second-stage crack display period). Note that even during the second-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms from the start timing of the second-stage crack display period. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A during the first stage crack display period and the small fragment image 006SG302A during the second stage crack display period have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. 197, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image, but because the parameter value for "gravity" is the same, they are both displayed out of the frame downwards.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed at that time is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see FIG. 171). Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1250 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the background change presentation A of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 750 ms including the late whiteout display period following the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as this is the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change presentation B in the successful pattern are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the background change performance B in the successful pattern, a first stage crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the first stage crack display period (first stage crack sound output period), a second stage crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the second stage crack display period (second stage crack sound output period), and a crack performance sound corresponding to the crack performance is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 150 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks (crack performance sound output period). The cracking effect sound in the background change performance B is a sound exclusive to the background change performance B, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to a chance background image. During the output period of 1250 ms, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to a chance background image are output for 1000 ms, and then the sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to a chance background image is output continuously for 250 ms. The volume of the cracking in the background change performance B is the loudest for the cracking effect sound, and the volume of the first stage cracking sound and the second stage cracking sound may be the same, or the second stage cracking sound may be louder than the first stage cracking sound.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the normal background image until the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, illumination is not primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and for the 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the timing when the later period of the whiteout display ends, illumination is primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect by using the illumination data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms). After the end of illumination in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect, illumination is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) by using the illumination data table for the chance background image.

As shown in Figures 188 (B) and 188 (C), the background change presentation B in failure pattern 1 is a presentation pattern in which a first-stage crack is displayed for 1500 ms and a small fragment image corresponding to the first-stage crack is displayed for 200 ms, but a second-stage crack is not displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, while the background change presentation B in failure pattern 2 is a presentation pattern in which a first-stage crack is displayed for 3000 ms and a small fragment image is displayed for 200 ms, and a second-stage crack is displayed for 1500 ms from the timing when 1500 ms has elapsed during the first-stage crack display period and a small fragment image corresponding to the second-stage crack is displayed for 200 ms, but the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In these failure patterns, in background change performance B, the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, so the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed.

As shown in Figures 183, 189, and 172, the pseudo consecutive performance first temporarily stops the "left" decorative pattern, the "right" decorative pattern, and the "middle" decorative pattern in that order in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, from the timing when the pseudo consecutive pattern, which is the "middle" decorative pattern, stops, cracks are displayed for 1500 ms (crack display period). During the crack display period, the movable body 32 falls for 1500 ms as a pre-stage operation (movable body fall period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (1500 ms has passed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack. Note that the cracks during the crack display period of the pseudo consecutive performance and the cracks during the crack display period of the background change performance A are designed to appear differently. For example, the cracks in the background change effect A are displayed in such a way that the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 progress in stages over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period, whereas the cracks in the pseudo consecutive effects are displayed in such a way that the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks all at once.

Next, when the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (fragment image display period). Also, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (early whiteout display period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the later whiteout display period of 500 ms, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visibility period. In addition, the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 3000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the pseudo consecutive performance are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, for 3000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the speakers 8L and 8R output a breaking sound corresponding to the breaking effect (breaking sound output period). In addition, the breaking sound in the pseudo consecutive performance is a sound dedicated to the pseudo consecutive performance, and is a sound composed of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32. During the output period of 3000 ms, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 are output for 1000 ms, and then the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is output continuously for 2000 ms. After that, after the output period of the breaking sound ends, BGM corresponding to the normal background image or the chance background image is output, so that various sounds are output during the rising period of the movable body 32. Furthermore, from the end of the later whiteout display period, i.e., the end of the display of the fragment image 006G302, the movable body 32 rises to its initial position over a period of 3000 ms (movable body rise period).

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table until the start timing of the crack display, illumination is not primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and for the 2000 ms from the start timing of the crack display to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, illumination is primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the crack display by using the crack display illumination data table. And for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the crack display by using the crack effect illumination data table (whiteout 1000 ms). After the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect, the illumination is performed in the manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, by using the illumination data table for the pseudo consecutive performance corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, for 2000 ms. For example, when the first pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in green in response to the first pseudo consecutive performance, and when the second pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in red in response to the second pseudo consecutive performance. After the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the illumination data table for the normal background image or the illumination data table for the chance background image is used again to illuminate in the manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). Both the light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) are light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed without a blinking pattern.

As shown in Figures 187 and 189, the present embodiment illustrates an example in which the crack display period is different between background change performance A and pseudo consecutive performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the crack display period may be the same between background change performance A and pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in Figures 183, 190(A), 173 and 174, the reach indication performance for a successful pattern is as follows: first, as a pre-stage operation, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, an image acting on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and an image acting on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in sequence over a period of 10,000 ms (pre-stage operation period). During the first stage operation period, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 8000 ms (left crack display period), and further, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 4000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start of the right crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. 197, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image, but because the parameter value for "gravity" is the same, they are both displayed out of the frame in a downward direction.

When the previous operation period ends due to the character acting on the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 during the previous operation period, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that was displayed up until that time is updated to a normal reach background image corresponding to the reach performance of the normal reach. Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the reach suggestion performance of the successful pattern of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 1500 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Furthermore, from the end of the later whiteout display period, the decorative symbols are highlighted for 3000 ms to inform the player that a win has been reached, for example by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols (decorative symbol highlighting period).

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the reach suggestion performance in a successful pattern are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the reach suggestion performance in the successful pattern, a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the left crack display period described above (left crack sound output period) and a first character voice corresponding to the character's first action action is output, a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the right crack display period described above (right crack sound output period) and a second character voice corresponding to the character's second action action is output, and a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 2000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (crack effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in the reach suggestion effect (success pattern) is a sound dedicated to the reach suggestion effect, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect of highlighting the decorative pattern to inform the player that the reach has been reached by temporarily enlarging the decorative pattern, etc., and the sound effect of highlighting is output together with the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking for 1000 ms out of the output period of 3000 ms, and then the sound effect of highlighting is output continuously for 2000 ms. After that, after the output period of the cracking effect sound ends, the BGM corresponding to the normal reach background image is output. In addition, when an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output, and this sound effect is used both when the action effect is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the timing of the end of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination that mainly consists of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the breaking presentation by using the illumination data table for the breaking presentation (whiteout 1000 ms). After the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the breaking presentation, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image by using the normal reach background image illumination data table.

As shown in FIG. 190(B), the reach suggestion effect in the failure pattern is a preliminary operation in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, an image of the character acting on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and an image of the character acting on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C are displayed in sequence for 14,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the preliminary operation period, from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 12,000 ms (left crack display period), and further, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 8,000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start of the right crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment images 006SG302 in failure patterns are displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment images 006SG302 in success patterns, so the player cannot tell whether it is a success pattern or a failure pattern by looking at the speed at which the small fragment images 006SG302 scatter or the size and number of each small fragment image, so it is possible to favorably infer whether a normal reach will be executed or not.

In addition, in the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern, a left cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period described above (left cracking sound output period), and a right cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the right crack display period described above (right cracking sound output period). Furthermore, from the same timing as the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the reach suggestion performance of the success pattern (the timing when 10,000 has passed from the start of the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern), a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1000 ms (whiteout display period). The whiteout display period is a period during which other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are made invisible to the player by the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Furthermore, when an action effect corresponding to the character's action is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output, and this sound effect is used both when the action effect is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

In the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern, until the start timing of the whiteout display period, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) using the light emission data table for the normal background image or the chance background image, and then during the whiteout display period, light is emitted mainly in white in a manner corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 using the light emission data table for whiteout. Then, from the end timing of the whiteout display period, light is emitted mainly in white in a manner corresponding to the notification that the reach will not be reached (the reach suggestion performance is a failure pattern) using the light emission data table for failure notification. In addition, light emission in a manner corresponding to the notification that the reach will not be reached (the reach suggestion performance is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display stops. The light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms), the light emission data table for the whiteout, and the light emission data table for the failure notification are all light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the whiteout and the light emission data table for the failure notification is executed without a blinking pattern. Also, while the game effect lamp 9 is emitting light based on the light emission data table for the failure notification (until the variable display ends due to the stopping of the variable display), no effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 184, 191, and 175, the weak development presentation is first performed by displaying a character in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-stage operation, and displaying an image of the character acting on the center of the display area of the image display device 5 for 4000 ms (pre-stage operation period). Note that although the pre-stage operation period is set to 4000 ms, a separate pre-stage operation period (2000 ms) pattern may be set, and when indicating to the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot, it may be determined that the weak development presentation is executed more frequently using the pre-stage operation period (2000 ms) pattern than the pre-stage operation period (4000 ms) pattern.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the normal reach background image corresponding to the reach effect of the normal reach that had been displayed at that time is updated to a weak development effect background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the weak development effect, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, causing the display of the fragment image 006SG302 for 3500 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the weak development effect of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 3000 ms including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the weak development effect background image corresponding to the weak development effect that was displayed up until that time is updated to the Super Reach α background image corresponding to the reach effect of the Super Reach α.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the weak development effect are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (e.g., background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Although the fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development effect are not transparent, this is the final display mode of the fragment images 006SG302, and the fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development effect are displayed in a transparent mode with transparency (e.g., a transmittance of 70% or more) for 1500 ms from the start of display during the fragment image display period of 3500 ms, and then gradually change to a non-transparent mode with no transparency (e.g., a transmittance of 70% to 10%) for 1000 ms, and then are displayed in a non-transparent mode with no transparency (e.g., a transmittance of less than 10%) for 1000 ms.

In addition, in the weak development effect, a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks (cracked effect sound output period). In addition to the cracking effect sound, a weak development effect sound is also output for 3500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image cracks. Note that the cracking effect sound is louder than the weak development effect sound, making it easier for players to recognize.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the normal reach background image until the start timing of the previous stage operation, illumination is not primarily in white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image, and for the 4000 ms from the start timing of the previous stage operation to the timing of the breaking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, illumination is not primarily in white light in a manner corresponding to the weak development presentation by using the illumination data table for the weak development presentation, and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the breaking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is primarily in white light in a manner corresponding to the crack presentation by using the illumination data table for the crack presentation (whiteout 1000 ms), and for the 2500 ms from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the fragment image display period, illumination is again in a manner corresponding to the weak development presentation by using the illumination table for the weak development presentation. Furthermore, after the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect has ended, the light emission data table for the Super Reach α background image is used to emit light that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (Weak S Reach effect image 006SG088).

In the weak development performance of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the background image is updated from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. In this way, when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout illumination data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed from a timing before the fragment image display period ends (for example, 500 ms before the end), in which case the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 will start before the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed out of the frame.

As shown in Figures 184, 192, and 176, in the strong development performance A, first, as a preliminary operation, the moving body 32 falls for 1000 ms (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the moving body 32 is completed (1000 ms has passed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break.

Next, when the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) that has been displayed up until that point in time and corresponds to the Super Reach α reach performance is updated to the Strong Development Performance A background image (background effect image 006SG322) that corresponds to the Strong Development Performance A, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500 ms (fragment image display period).

After the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1500 ms from the timing of the falling of the movable body 32 to hide the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (whiteout display early period), a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the strong development performance A of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period 1500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 500 ms of the whiteout display late period following the whiteout display early period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance A are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

And when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the strong development performance A background image corresponding to the strong development performance A that was displayed at that time is updated to the Super Reach β background image corresponding to the reach performance of the Super Reach β. The movable body 32 that fell as the previous operation is placed at the falling position during the fragment image display period described above, and rises to the initial position of the movable body 32 for 1500 ms from the end timing of the fragment image display period (movable body rising period). Note that from the timing when the movable body 32 starts to rise (start timing of the movable body rising period), a sound corresponding to the strong development performance A (strong development performance A performance sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 2500 ms. Note that in the strong development performance A, unlike the weak development performance, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so you can enjoy the cracking performance unique to the strong development performance A. Also, in the strong development performance A, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the strong development performance A performance sound high.

In addition, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the Super Reach α background image illumination data table until the timing of the falling of the movable body 32, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach presentation image 006SG088), and by using the Strong Development Presentation A illumination data table for 2500 ms from the timing when the movable body 32 starts to fall to the timing when the fragment image display period ends, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the Strong Development Presentation A. In addition, from the timing when the movable body 32 starts to rise (the timing when the fragment image display period ends), illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) by using the Super Reach β background image illumination data table.

In the present embodiment, the strong development performance A shows an example in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as the early whiteout display period of 1500 ms from the timing of the falling of the movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the early whiteout display period of the strong development performance A may be a period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms or 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

As shown in Figures 184, 193, 177, and 178, in the strong development performance B, first, cracks are displayed for 1500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 without any movement of the movable body 32 or action of the character (crack display period). From the start timing of the crack display period, small fragment images 006SG302A, which are smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, are displayed for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment images 006SG302A in the strong development performance B and the small fragment images 006SG302A in the reach suggestion performance, etc. have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in Figure 197, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image.

When 1500 ms has passed and the crack display period has ended, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach performance that has been displayed up until that time is updated to Strong Development Performance B corresponding to the Strong Development Performance B. Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the strong development performance B of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 2500 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are displayed in slow motion after starting to be displayed at the normal moving speed, normal rotating speed, and normal falling speed.

And when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the strong development performance B background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the strong development performance B that was displayed at that time is updated to the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the reach performance of the Super Reach β. In addition, in the strong development performance B, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the start timing of the crack display period described above (crack sound output period), and a sound corresponding to the strong development performance B (strong development performance B performance sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end timing of the fragment image display period. In addition, in the strong development performance B, unlike the weak development performance, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is not output, so you can enjoy the cracking performance unique to the strong development performance B. Additionally, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output during strong development performance B. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the strong development performance B sound high.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image until the start timing of the crack display, illumination is not mainly in white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (image 006SG088 for weak S reach presentation), by using the illumination data table for the strong development presentation B for the 1500 ms from the start timing of the crack display to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, by using the illumination data table for the strong development presentation B, by using the illumination data table for the break presentation (whiteout 1000 ms) for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is mainly in white light in a manner corresponding to the break presentation, by using the illumination data table for the strong development presentation B, by using the illumination data table for the strong development presentation B for the 2000 ms from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the fragment image display period. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the strong development performance B has ended, illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach B background image.

In the strong development performance B of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the background image is updated from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. When the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image in this way, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout illumination data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. In this case, the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms) and the light emission data table for the whiteout are both light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the whiteout is executed without a blinking pattern. Also, although the crack display period for the strong development effect B is set to 1500 ms, the crack may be displayed for a period longer than 1500 ms until the crack timing. For example, the crack may be displayed so that the crack gradually expands at the first timing, second timing, and third timing between the start timing of the super reach α and the crack timing.

As shown in Figures 184, 194, and 179, the cut-in effect begins with an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B being displayed for 3000 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (operation prompting effect execution period). In particular, during the execution period of the operation prompting effect in this embodiment, the operation prompting image is displayed as a pre-operation state image in which the push button 31B is in a protruding state before being operated by the player (pre-operation state image display period).

When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation prompting effect, or when the execution period of the operation prompting effect ends, the timing is set as the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break until the timing for the end of the cut-in effect (for 5000 ms from the timing for the break), a suggestive image according to the effect pattern is displayed, and after a whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the cut-in performance of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. In addition, the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 5000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cut-in effect are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through the fragment images 006SG302. Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are displayed in slow motion after starting to be displayed at the normal moving speed, normal rotating speed, and normal falling speed.

Furthermore, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a post-operation state image, which is the state after the push button 31B is operated by the player, is displayed for 1000 ms (post-operation state image display period). Since the post-operation state image is an image that is displayed with priority over the whiteout image 006SG303, the player can view the operation state image for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

In addition, in a cut-in performance, a cut-in performance sound corresponding to the cut-in performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (cut-in performance sound output period). Note that, unlike weak development performances, the cut-in performance does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, so you can enjoy the breaking performance that is unique to cut-in performances. Also, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output in the cut-in performance, in which case the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the cut-in performance sound high.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the light emission data table for the Super Reach β background image until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light emission in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is performed, and by using the light emission data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000 ms) for 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the timing of the end of the whiteout display latter period, illumination that mainly consists of white light emission in a manner corresponding to the breaking effect is performed, and by using the light emission data table for the cut-in effect from the timing of the end of the whiteout display latter period to the timing of the end of the suggestive image display period, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light emission in a manner corresponding to the cut-in effect is performed. Note that, after the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cut-in effect, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light emission in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is performed again by using the light emission data table for the Super Reach β background image.

As shown in Figures 184, 195(A), 180, and 181, the result notification performance of the successful pattern begins with a preliminary operation in which the movable body 32 falls for 500 ms (movable fall resistance period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (500 ms has passed), a crack is displayed for 500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (crack display period). During this crack display period, from the start of the crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is displayed for 200 ms. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion performance, etc. have different parameter values of "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. 197, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (failure pattern) have different parameter values of "strength" and "repetition", so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image.

Next, when the timing arrives for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach performance or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the Super Reach β reach performance that had been displayed up until that point in time is updated to a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1,500 ms (fragment image display period). Although not specifically shown in FIG. 195(A), the jackpot notification background image is displayed for 10,000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) after 10,000 ms has elapsed (before the variable display of the variable display stops), and then is updated to the jackpot game background image according to the jackpot game status from the time when the variable display of the variable display stops.

After the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to hide the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the result notification performance of the successful pattern of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period 500 ms from the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 1000 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the result notification performance for successful patterns are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

The movable body 32 rises to its initial position over a period of 1,500 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (movable body rising period).

In addition, in the result notification performance in the success pattern, a jackpot confirmation sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (jackpot confirmation sound output period) to notify that a jackpot has been confirmed. Note that, unlike the weak development performance, the result notification performance (success pattern) does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, so that it is possible to conveniently notify that a jackpot has been confirmed. Also, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output in the result notification performance (success pattern), and in this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the jackpot confirmation sound high.

In addition, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the Super Reach α background image illumination data table or the Super Reach β background image illumination data table until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the timing of the end of the whiteout display latter period, illumination that mainly consists of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the breaking performance by using the illumination data table for the breaking performance (whiteout 1000 ms). Furthermore, after the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the breaking performance, illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the big win notification background image is performed by using the big win notification background image illumination data table. Furthermore, from the timing when the variable display stops, the light emission data table for jackpot play is used to emit mainly rainbow light in a manner that corresponds to the display of the jackpot play background image.

As shown in FIG. 195(B), in the result notification performance in the failure pattern, the movable body 32 does not fall, and no cracks are displayed due to the fall of the movable body 32. Instead, cracks are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5,500 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A in the success pattern breaks (crack display period). Also, from the start of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) or Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, is updated to a monochrome miss notification background image, which is an image indicating that the variable display result is a miss. The display of the miss notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, at which point it is updated to a color eye-catching image. The display period of the eye-catching image is, for example, 1000 ms, and after the display period of the eye-catching image ends, the display of the normal color background image (first background image 006SG081) starts, which is the same color as the eye-catching image. In other words, in the failure pattern result notification performance in this embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by displaying a monochrome failure notification background image, the eye-catching image, which is a color image, and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) are displayed.

In addition, in the result notification performance for the failure pattern, crack effect sounds corresponding to the cracks are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the crack display period described above (crack effect sound output period).

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start timing of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image illumination data table or the Super Reach β background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and from the start timing of the crack display period to the stop timing of the variable display, the loss notification background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that primarily consists of white light is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the loss notification background image. Furthermore, from the stop timing of the variable display, the normal background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Both the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) and the light emission data table for the miss notification background image are light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for whiteout is executed without a blinking pattern.

In the present embodiment, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are exemplified as starting to display the whiteout image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 in each effect may start to be displayed from a timing earlier than the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed).

(Speed of the pieces when the shattering effect is performed)
Next, an explanation will be given of the display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when a breaking effect is executed as the above-mentioned first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, or result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 196(A), among these effects, the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed when the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, and the break effect as the result notification effect are executed is displayed moving at a constant speed V1 (normal motion) throughout the fragment image display period, which includes the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 196 (B), the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed when a strong development performance B or a broken performance as a cut-in performance is executed is displayed moving at a speed V1 over the 1000 ms between the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, while during the fragment image display period after the late whiteout display period (2000 ms for strong development performance B and 1500 ms for a cut-in performance), it is displayed moving at a speed V0 (slow motion) which is slower than speed V1. In addition, in FIG. 196, the strong development performance B and the cut-in performance are shown as performances in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a speed V0, but as described below, in the background change performance B and the strong development performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 is also displayed moving at a speed V0, and when it is suggested to the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot, it is decided that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance B and the strong development performance A will be displayed moving at a speed V0 at a rate higher than the speed V1.

(Details of the cracking effect)
Next, details of the cracking effect will be described with reference to Fig. 197 and Fig. 198. Fig. 197 is a diagram showing cracking patterns in the cracking effect. Fig. 198 is a diagram showing display examples of each cracking pattern.

As shown in Figures 197 and 198, in the breaking effect executed in various effects, at a predetermined breaking timing, some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear to the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area, and the breaking image is animated to display a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A scattering in the layer 5 image drawing area. In other words, the breaking effect is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area changes to a fragment image 006SG302, so that the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state (fragment state). In this embodiment, the breaking is started by a sphere colliding with the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A from the rear.

The animation display of a glass plate breaking and scattering fragment images is actually composed of a number of still images (e.g., about 30 to 100 frames) according to the period during which the fragment images are displayed, but in Figure 198, five still images are extracted from the multiple still images that compose the animation display of the fragment images from the start to the end of the breaking performance and arranged in chronological order. Also, in Figure 198, the five frames of images for each breaking pattern are not five consecutive frames, and in reality, multiple frames of fragment images (not shown) are arranged between each frame.

There are various ways in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and multiple types of breaking patterns (e.g., breaking patterns A to G) are preset, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a breaking performance based on a preset breaking pattern according to the type of performance to be executed.

Specifically, breaking pattern A is a pattern that corresponds to the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, breaking pattern B is a pattern that corresponds to the background change effect B and the strong development effect B, breaking pattern C is a pattern that corresponds to the pseudo consecutive effect and the result notification effect (jackpot), breaking pattern D is a pattern that corresponds to the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect and the dialogue preview effect, breaking pattern E is a pattern that corresponds to the weak development effect, breaking pattern F is a pattern that corresponds to the strong development effect A, and breaking pattern G is a pattern that corresponds to the cut-in effect.

Each crack pattern A to G is a pattern that differs in at least one of the following items: "acting agent," "crack type," "crack range," and "fragment image display type." Note that the display period and display timing are as explained in Figures 183 and 184, so explanations will be omitted below.

"Action subject" refers to the subject of action on the glass plate image 006SG301A, with crack patterns A and E resulting in a crack effect in response to the movement of the "character," crack patterns C and F resulting in a crack effect in response to the movement of the "movable body," and crack patterns B and D resulting in a crack effect at a predetermined timing regardless of the action subject. "Crack mode" refers to whether the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a crack mode before it is broken, with crack patterns A to D resulting in a crack effect after the "crack mode" is displayed, and crack patterns E to G resulting in a crack effect without the "crack mode" being displayed. Note that "crack mode" includes multiple types of modes that differ in the display position on the display screen, the number of displays, the shape of the crack, etc. "Crack range" refers to the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, with crack patterns A to C and E to G representing the "whole" display screen, and crack pattern D representing "part." "Fragment image display mode" indicates whether fragment image 006SG302 is transparent or not, with part of fragment pattern B and fragment pattern E being "non-transparent" and the other fragment patterns being "transparent."

In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 are set to be illuminated with light (illumination) from the front side of the approximate center position of the display screen. Therefore, the "non-transparent" fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area, and the "transparent" fragment image 006SG302 does not reflect light at a first angle (for example, a large angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is 45 degrees to 90 degrees) and is therefore easy to transmit, making it easy to see the lower layer image drawing area, while at a second angle (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), it reflects light and is therefore difficult to transmit, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area (see FIG. 207). For example, among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and then, as the multiple fragment images 006SG302 move over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the first angle. Note that the type, intensity, color, top/bottom/left/right position, depth position, and other settings of this light can be changed in various ways, and light setting values may be changed depending on the crack pattern.

The multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks include multiple fragment images 006SG302 with different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, etc. Each fragment image 006SG302 moves in various directions while rotating at various speeds in various orientations during the display period from when the display starts to when it ends and becomes non-display. Specifically, some are displayed moving in the X-axis direction (left-right direction), some in the Y-axis direction (up-down direction), and some in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction), and some have different moving speeds, rotation speeds, rotation numbers, display periods, etc. The moving direction includes not only one of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis, but also multiple axial directions (e.g., XY-axis and XY-axis directions) of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis.

In other words, in addition to the above-mentioned "acting agent," "crack type," "crack range," and "fragment image display type," each of the crack patterns A to G is a pattern that differs in at least one of the display types of at least some of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 when they scatter, such as the shape, size, rotation speed, number of rotations, movement direction [X-axis (left-right direction), Y-axis (up-down direction), Z-axis (front-back direction)], movement speed, and display period.

Crack patterns A to G are animations of cracks created, for example, using the shutter function of a specific animation creation software, and the created crack patterns A to G have different values for at least some of the multiple parameters shown below.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in Figure 197, "gravity" allows you to set gravity and adjust the acceleration at which the scattered fragments gradually fall. Since it is gravity, it is not constant, but gradually accelerates downwards. "Gravity direction" allows you to set the direction in which gravity is applied, and you can specify up, down, left, and right directions based on 0 degrees (upward). "Gravity gradient" allows you to adjust gravity more in the Z-axis direction (front to back), and the value set with this parameter is combined with "gravity direction". All directions in 3D space, including front to back, up, down, left and right, can be specified. Note that values of "-90" and "90" are in the Z-axis direction, so "gravity direction" is essentially disabled. "Strength" allows you to adjust the momentum of the scattered fragments, and increasing the value will increase the speed at which the fragments fly off. "Variation" allows you to adjust the degree to which the size of the fragments affects the animation. Normally, in the real world, when the same physical impact is applied, it takes more energy to move a large, heavy object, so when the same impact is applied, small fragments move and rotate faster, and large, heavy fragments move slower. The difference in physical animation due to the size of the fragments can be adjusted from 0 to 100%. At 0%, size and weight are not taken into account, so small fragments and large fragments move the same without distinction. The default setting of 30% is considered to be a value close to the physical laws of nature. "Repetition" allows you to adjust the size of the fragments that break. Increasing the value will make each fragment smaller and increase the number of fragments. "Viscosity" allows you to set the resistance to the movement of the fragments. Increasing the value will speed up the time it takes for the movement and rotation to stop due to resistance. In addition, resistance is applied to gravity as if it were attached to a sticky substance, so the falling speed will also be slower. In other words, if the "viscosity" value is adjusted to a large value, the movement of the fragments will be in slow motion. Note that Figure 197 shows crack patterns B, E, and F as crack patterns in which the "viscosity" value has been adjusted to be greater than normal, but as described below, the "viscosity" value of crack pattern G has also been adjusted to be greater than normal.

The above parameters are just examples, and other parameters that can be set include "force", which indicates the force applied at the moment that causes the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, "position", which allows adjustment of the position in the X-axis and Y-axis directions in which the force is applied, "depth", which allows adjustment of the position of the force in the Z-axis direction (depth direction), "rotation speed", which allows setting the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, and "randomness", which allows setting the degree of randomness in the movement of each fragment image 006SG302.

Next, we will briefly explain the main characteristics of the movement (mainly the scattering pattern) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern.

For example, for crack patterns A, C to F, the "gravity direction" value is set to "180°", so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks, scatters around, and then falls downward naturally, whereas for crack patterns B and G, the "gravity direction" value is set to "0°", so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks, scatters around, and then is less likely to fall downward than crack patterns A, C to F.

In this way, the "gravity direction" setting is different between crack patterns A, C to F (first patterns) and crack patterns B, G (second patterns), and the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves when displayed is different, which is "180°" for crack patterns A, C to F. This allows for a variety of patterns to be created, which adds to the fun.

In addition, for crack patterns A, C to F, the "variation amount" value is set to "30%", so that small fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates quickly and large, heavy fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates slowly, while for crack patterns B and G, the "variation amount" value is set to "0%", so that small and large fragments of fragment image 006SG302 move and rotate in the same manner, and therefore these are crack patterns with a high degree of animation.

In other words, crack patterns A, C to F are affected by the animation differently depending on the size, with small fragment image 006SG302 flying quickly and large fragment image 006SG302 being a little slower and falling quickly, making them suitable for use when you want to show realistic movement, while crack patterns B and G are all affected by the animation in the same way, flying and falling in the same way regardless of size, allowing you to select the appropriate crack pattern depending on the scene.

In addition, the "gravity direction" setting is the same for crack patterns A and C (first patterns) and crack patterns D to F (second patterns), but the "gravity value" setting is different, which results in different speeds at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls. By varying the value of the parameter "gravity value" in this way and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, a variety of patterns can be created, which adds to the fun. More specifically, the numerical value is larger for crack patterns D to F, so the fragment image 006SG302 falls faster.

In addition, in the case of crack patterns A-C, E, and G, the value of "gravity gradient" is set to "0" or more, so that the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving in the X-axis and Y-axis directions while moving in the Z-axis direction, i.e., toward the front, while in the case of crack patterns D and F, the value of "gravity gradient" is set to "0", so that the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving only in the X-axis and Y-axis directions, without moving in the Z-axis direction. In addition, in the case of crack patterns A-C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving toward the front, the fragment image is displayed gradually expanding, so that it is emphasized that it is approaching the front. In particular, the value of "gravity gradient" is set to "90" for crack patterns B and G, so that the fragment image is displayed moving even further toward the front.

Furthermore, for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is common to crack pattern A (first pattern), crack pattern B (second pattern), and crack pattern C (third pattern), being "0", while the second parameter of "strength" is different, being "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for fragment image 006SG302, while varying the second parameter to create a variety of patterns, it is possible to create stable and diverse display patterns for fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, for example, crack pattern E (first pattern), crack pattern F (second pattern), and crack pattern G (third pattern) have a common first parameter of "gravity" of "0" for crack pattern E and a different second parameter of "strength" of "3" for crack pattern E and "5" for crack pattern F, whereas crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) have a common first parameter of "gravity" of "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, and a common second parameter of "strength" of "5". In this way, by creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302 in each pattern while being composed of different parameters, a stable and diverse display pattern for the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

In this embodiment, multiple types of breaking patterns A to G with different numerical values of various parameters are stored in advance, and an example is given of a form in which a breaking effect is executed based on the breaking pattern A to G corresponding to the type of effect to be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the type of effect to be executed by the effect control CPU 120 is determined based on the start of variable display, the numerical values of various parameters may be determined according to the determined type of effect and the expected probability of a jackpot, etc., and breaking animation data based on the determined numerical values may be created, and an animation display of a glass plate breaking may be displayed based on the created breaking animation data.

(Example of crack pattern display)
Next, the details of the display examples of the crack patterns A to G will be described with reference to Figs. 199 to 205. Fig. 199 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern A. Fig. 200 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern B. Fig. 201 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern C. Fig. 202 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern D. Fig. 203 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern E. Fig. 204 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern F. Fig. 205 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern G.

In each of Figures 199 to 205, (A1) to (A5) are display examples of crack patterns that display the whiteout image 006SG303, and (B1) to (B5) are display examples of crack patterns that correspond to (A1) to (A5) but do not display the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, these are figures that compare the case where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the case where it is not displayed at the start of the cracking effect. Specifically, in (A1) in each figure, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is set to 0%, and the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3), until the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is 100% in (A4).

As shown in (B1) to (B5) of Figures 199 to 205, in the animation display of a glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, in the frame where the breaking begins (for example, (B1)), the breaking is set up so that an impact (force) is applied to the glass plate image 006SG301A at approximately the center thereof as if a sphere were colliding from behind, thereby causing the glass plate image 006SG301A to start shattering from the fragment image 006SG302 located approximately near the center of the glass plate image 006SG301A, but the many surrounding fragment images 006SG302 have not yet started to shatter. In other words, when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed across the entire display screen in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the time of the breakage, begins to change into a broken state, a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed so as to fill up almost the entire display screen, making it almost impossible to see the images displayed in the display layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302.

Therefore, as shown in (B1), when the cracking effect starts, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill almost the entire display screen over several frames, changes to a cracked state and a large number of broken images 006SG302 are displayed, making it difficult to see the image that was displayed before the cracking effect started. In particular, it is fine when the cracking effect starts after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked state, as in crack patterns A to D, but when the cracking effect starts suddenly without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, as in crack patterns E to G, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill the display screen, suddenly changes to a cracked state and a large number of broken images 006SG302 are displayed, as if wiping out the image that was displayed before the cracking effect started, which may give the player an unnatural impression.

Therefore, at the beginning of the cracking, as shown in the early whiteout display period of (A1), by displaying a whiteout image 006SG303 in the display layer 7 image drawing area above the fragment image 006SG302 and hiding many of the fragment images 006SG302, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Also, as shown in the later period of the whiteout display in (A2) and (A3), by gradually increasing the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 by fading it out rather than suddenly hiding it, the fragmented image 006SG302 becomes visible after it has spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery to a certain extent, so that the fragmented image 006SG302 breaking and scattering can be made to look natural and unnatural.

As shown in Figure 199, in crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 199 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 199 (B2)), then falls downward and is displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 199 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 200, in crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 200 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 move in normal motion to spread radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 200 (B2)). Since they are unlikely to fall downward, they move radially from the center in slow motion and are displayed out of the frame from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see Figures 200 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 201, in crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 201 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 201 (B2)), then falls downward and is displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 201 (B3) to (B5)).

In this embodiment, a common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as the background image when the pseudo consecutive performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, or cut-in performance is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not specifically shown, for example, a background image with a different display mode according to the type of performance may be displayed.

As shown in Figure 202, in crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 202 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 scatters radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) or the Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 202 (B2)), then falls downward and is displayed mainly out of the frame from the bottom edge (see Figures 202 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Fig. 203, in the crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Fig. 203 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) with normal motion movement (see Fig. 203 (B2)), then falls downward with slow motion movement and is displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figs. 203 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value in the crack pattern E is adjusted to "0.4", which corresponds to Figs. 203 (B3) to (B5), and more specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value corresponding to Figs. 203 (B1) and (B2) is adjusted to "0.1". Also, in Fig. 203 (B1), the movable body 32 is not shown in order to make it easier to see when the glass plate image 006SG301A begins to break. Also, the fragment image 006SG302 in the break pattern E is displayed moving in slow motion from Fig. 203 (B3), and since it takes time to frame out, the fragment image 006SG302 may be whited out while it is moving in slow motion so as not to disrupt the tempo of the performance progression, and a super reach α performance may be performed.

As shown in Fig. 204, in crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Fig. 204 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 move in normal motion and scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) or Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Fig. 204 (B2)), then fall downward in slow motion and are displayed out of the frame mainly from the bottom side (see Figs. 204 (B3) to (B5)). Also, the small fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate quickly and therefore fall and are displayed out of the frame first, whereas the large, heavy fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate quickly and therefore are displayed out of the frame later than the small fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, if a cracking effect occurs during a strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern in the upper right corner of the display screen for the reach mode may be made invisible for a moment, and then displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in that cracking effect becomes invisible. In this way, displays that are not closely related to the cracking effect can be eliminated as much as possible, and the effect of the cracking effect can be enhanced. In addition, if a cracking effect occurs during the execution of other reach effects such as a weak S reach effect, not limited to a strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern for the reach mode may be made invisible for a moment, and then displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in that cracking effect becomes invisible.

As shown in Fig. 205, in the crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Fig. 205 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) with normal motion movement (see Fig. 205 (B2)). Since it is difficult to fall downward, it moves radially from the center in slow motion and is displayed out of the frame from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see Figs. 205 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value in the crack pattern G is adjusted to "0.1", which is the value corresponding to Figs. 205 (B1) and (B2), and more specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value corresponding to Figs. 205 (B3) to (B5) is adjusted to "0.4".

(Details of the debris image)
Next, details of the fragment images will be described with reference to Fig. 206 and Fig. 207. Fig. 206 shows (A) a fragment image displayed in a pseudo consecutive performance, and (B) a fragment image displayed in a cut-in performance. Fig. 207 shows (A) a fragment image displayed in a background change performance A, and (B) a fragment image displayed in a strong development performance B. Note that the fragment images shown with dotted lines in Fig. 207 indicate that they are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 206(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo consecutive performance is a non-transparent image (e.g., 0% transparency) that makes it difficult to recognize at least a portion of the overlapping background effect image 006SG322, while as shown in FIG. 206(B), the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is a transparent image (e.g., 100% transparency) that makes it possible to recognize at least a portion of the overlapping background effect image 006SG322 and text image 006SG307. This gives a suitably different impression even in a performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 206(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is a transparent image (the background is visible) through which at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 can be recognized, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the characters are visible) through which at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 (special image) can be recognized, and the third fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the background and characters are visible) through which both at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 can be recognized. By varying the display mode of the fragment images for each effect, the effect of each effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 207(A), all of the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A are hidden by moving downward toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen of the image display device 5 and being displayed as a frame-out display, while as shown in FIG. 207(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 among the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is hidden by moving up, down, left, and right toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen and being displayed as a frame-out display, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby creating a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, which can increase interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 207(A), when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a first angle (for example, a large angle where the incident angle of the light irradiated on the glass surface is between 45 degrees and 90 degrees, such as an angle where the flat surface faces the front side), it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a second angle smaller than the first angle (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the light irradiated on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as an angle where the end surface faces the front side), it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 207(A), when a first fragment image among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, a second fragment image is at a second angle, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Effects of each form)
[Form A1-1]
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, when the special symbols and decorative symbols are variably displayed and a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot is derived as a result of the variably displayed special symbols and decorative symbols, it is possible to control the game to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes an image display device 5 for displaying images, and a performance control CPU 120 which is a control means for executing the first consecutive break performance, the second consecutive break performance, the dialogue notice performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo consecutive performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, the cut-in performance, the result notification performance, and the like, which are performances that suggest that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state during the variably displayed state. Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 127 to 129, the pachinko game machine 1 has layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing areas for drawing images with different display priorities in the VRAM area in the display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, the VRAM area may include a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern as an image of layer 2, a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as an image of layer 3, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an image of a precursor to cracking (such as glass plate image 006SG301) as an image of layer 4, a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 5, a layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 7 image of a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 5, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 9 image of a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 6, and a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 11 image of a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 7. It has a layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an action effect image as an image, a layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a whiteout image 006SG303 as an image of layer 7, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an operation prompt image as an image of layer 8, a layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a variable display compatible display (reserved display and active display) as an image of layer 9, and a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a small pattern (fourth pattern), the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a right hit notification image as an image of layer 10. In addition, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

In addition, except when a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is the image with a higher display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. an image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and an image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Also, although it has been described that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, there may be a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a layer 1-3 image drawing area instead of the layer 1 image drawing area. In this case, the layer 1-1 image drawing area can draw a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image), the layer 1-2 image drawing area can draw a chance background image (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), a normal reach background image, a super reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088), and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and the layer 1-3 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-4 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG423), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-5 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG524), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-6 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG525), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-7 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG526), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-8 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG527), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-9 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG528), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-10 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG529), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-11 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG529), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-12 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG529), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-13 image drawing area can draw a background effect image It is possible to draw an image (fifth background image 006SG085), and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area.

Here, as shown in Figures 157 to 160, background change performance A and strong development performance A are performances that can be executed at different times. Also, as shown in Figure 187, background change performance A has a crack display period in which a crack is displayed by the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a fragment image display period in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. As shown in Figure 192, strong development performance A is a performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked by the movement of the movable body 32 in a period shorter than the background change performance, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Furthermore, the background change performance A is a performance in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is different before a crack appears in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, and the strong development performance A is a performance in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is different before the strong development performance A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A begins. In other words, in this embodiment, the background change performance A, which displays cracks and fragment images 006SG302 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the strong development performance A, in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed without any cracks appearing in the glass plate image 006SG301, can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, because the types of background images displayed before and after the fragment image 006SG302 are different in both the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, even though the performance also displays the fragment image 006SG302, different impressions can be given to the player in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A1-2]
In addition, when background change presentation A and strong development presentation A can be executed during variable display 1, the probability of being controlled to a big win game state may be higher when background change presentation A is not executed and strong development presentation A is executed than when background change presentation A is executed and strong development presentation A is executed (for example, see Figures 157 to 160). By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of background change presentation A and strong development presentation A, and to increase interest.

[Form A1-3]
In addition, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case where the background image changes via the background change performance A, a case where the background image changes via a chance background teasing performance different from the background change performance A may be provided (FIG. 154). Also, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the background change performance A, the probability of being controlled to the big win game state may be higher than when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the chance background teasing performance. In this way, it is possible to draw attention to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed via the background change performance A or the chance background teasing performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A1-4-1]
In addition, when background change presentation A and strong development presentation A can be executed during variable display of 1, the probability of being controlled to a big win game state may be higher when background change presentation A is executed before strong development presentation A than when background change presentation A is not executed before strong development presentation A (for example, see Figs. 157 to 160). By doing so, it is possible to increase interest by making players look forward to both background change presentation A and strong development presentation A being executed during variable display of 1.

[Form A1-4-2]
187 and 192, during the variable display, the background change effect A is an effect executed before the reach timing of the decorative symbol, and the strong development effect A is an effect executed after the reach timing of the decorative symbol. Also, the images displayed as background images in the display area of the image display device 5 include a normal background image (first background image 006SG081), a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) suggesting that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot before the reach, a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) indicating that the reach effect of the super reach α is being executed, and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) indicating that the reach effect of the super reach β is being executed. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is an image displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A is an image displayed together with the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), so that the player can be drawn to the relationship between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A1-4-3]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 183 and 184, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A has transparency, and therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize at least a part of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302. Meanwhile, since the background image displayed in the strong development performance A has no transparency, it is impossible for the player to recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302. Therefore, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the performance effect of the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form A1-4-4]
213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a first angle by the rotation, the player can recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302, whereas when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a second angle by the rotation, the player may have difficulty recognizing at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form A1-4-5]
213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, when a first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, a second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form A1-5]
208, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it moves in a plurality of directions including the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the Z-axis direction may take a longer time to become invisible in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the X-axis direction. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form A1-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance A are both displayed moving without any change in speed from the start to the end of the display, so that in the background change performance A and strong development performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally and without any awkwardness.

[Form A1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see Figures 199 and 204), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A take a common period of time before becoming invisible on the display screen, which increases the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, thereby enhancing the performance effects of both.

[Form A1-7-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when the display starts and before it is hidden on the display screen (see Figs. 199 and 204). Specifically, it is difficult to see when the display starts and easy to see before it is hidden, which can enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A1-7-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) takes a longer time to disappear from the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) in background change performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form A1-8]
213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated in the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, the number of rotations from when the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be the same as the number of rotations from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development performance A is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the relevance between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A is increased, and the performance effects of both can be improved.

[Form A2-1]
187 and 192, in both the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts. The display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in these background change performance A and strong development performance A is composed of an early whiteout display period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303, and a late whiteout display period in which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, since the background change performance A and the strong development performance A can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings, and in addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed by the whiteout image 006SG303, and to execute these background change performance A and strong development performance preferably.

[Form A2-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 187 and 192, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the background change performance A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 1000 ms, whereas the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the strong development performance A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 2500 ms. Therefore, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 enhances the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, and since the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, the performance effects of both the background change performance A and the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form A2-3]
187, the crack display period may be longer than the fragment image display period in the background change performance A, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. In this way, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started without any awkwardness due to the whiteout image 006SG303.

[Form A2-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 169 and 176, the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A, and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are images displayed in the same manner, so that the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner, can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the performance effects of both.

[Form A3-1]
189 and 194, the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance of this embodiment are different in execution timing in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed moving at a speed V1 regardless of the progress of the performance, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance changes speed from speed V1 to a slow speed V0 according to the progress of the performance, so that even if the performance also displays the fragment image 006SG302, it is possible to give the player a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form A3-2]
Also, as shown in Figures 157 to 160, in the case where the pseudo consecutive performance can be performed multiple times in one variable display while the cut-in performance can be performed only once, the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed multiple times than when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed only once, and the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the cut-in performance is performed once than when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed multiple times. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, and to increase interest.

[Form A3-3]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo consecutive performance changes from a cracked state to a broken state (glass plate image 006SG301A) and in the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is displayed, a whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the first timing, and is displayed over the entire display screen at the second timing (see Fig. 172 (C) and Fig. 179 (C)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, and the interest can be increased.

[Form A3-4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragment image 006SG302 in a cut-in performance is displayed and moves at a speed V1 during the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and from the timing when the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, it is displayed and moves at a speed V0 which is slower than the speed V1, thereby enhancing the performance effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance.

[Form A3-4-2]
Also, in a case where a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed when a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a cut-in effect as shown in Fig. 194, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 may overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at a speed V1, but may not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at a speed V0, as shown in Fig. 196. In this way, it is possible to prevent the effect of the cut-in effect from being reduced.

[Form A3-5]
213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance are made rotatable, the number of rotational operations performed from when a first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotational operations performed from when a second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form A4-1]
189 and 194, the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance of this embodiment are different in execution timing during variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during variable display. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 183 and 184, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the pseudo consecutive performance are not transparent, so that the player cannot see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the cut-in performance are transparent, so that the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Therefore, even if the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the same way in the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, the player can be given a different impression and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form A4-2]
The first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is a transparent image through which at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 can be recognized, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image through which at least a part of the character image 006SG307 can be recognized, and the third fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is a transparent image through which both at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a part of the character image 006SG307 can be recognized (see FIG. 206). By thus varying the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each performance, the performance effect of each performance can be enhanced.

[Form A4-3-1]
213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance are made rotatable, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a first angle, it may be possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the first fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a second angle, it may be difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form A4-3-2]
213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is made rotatable, when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle in the cut-in effect. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form A5-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 189 and 194, the pseudo-consecutive effects and cut-in effects of this embodiment have different execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, with regard to these pseudo consecutive performances and cut-in performances, the cut-in performance is a performance in which the display of multiple fragment images 006SG302 begins in a period shorter than the crack display period from when a crack appears in the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo consecutive performance to when a fragment image 006SG302 imitating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance and the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance are commonly displayed in a manner moving in multiple directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction (see FIG. 208), and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a manner moving in the Z-axis direction may take a longer period to become hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a manner moving in the X-axis direction.

[Form A5-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when the display starts and before it is hidden on the display screen (see Figs. 201 and 205). Specifically, it is difficult to see when the display starts and easy to see before it is hidden, which can enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A5-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) takes a longer time to disappear from the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) in background change performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form A5-4]
It is preferable that all of the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance are hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen (for example, see FIG. 207(A)), and the first fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302 different from the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen (for example, see FIG. 207(B)). In this way, the way in which the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be made different between the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A6-1]
Also, as shown in Fig. 190 and Fig. 191, the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect in this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, for these reach suggestion effects and weak development effects, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be longer than the previous operation period in the weak development effect, and the length of the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect and the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be different (see Fig. 190 and Fig. 191). By doing so, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, it is possible to give a different impression and increase interest in the game.

[Form A6-2]
In addition, in the reach suggestion effect, the right crack display period may be longer than the period until the right crack display period starts in the left crack display period (see FIG. 190). In this way, it is possible to prevent the interest of the reach suggestion effect from decreasing due to a monotonous presentation configuration.

[Form A6-3]
In addition, the reach suggestion effect in this embodiment can be executed in a success pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks after a crack is displayed, or in a failure pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break because the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed after a crack is displayed. When the reach suggestion effect is executed in a failure pattern, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L as the right crack display period for 6000 ms, which is longer than the 2000 ms display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 when the reach suggestion effect is executed in a success pattern, so that it is possible to suitably show the player that the reach suggestion effect is not executed in the success pattern, i.e., that the glass plate image 006SG301A will not break.

[Form A6-4-1]
In addition, while the reach suggestion effect is an effect that notifies the player that a reach will occur when it is executed in a successful pattern, it is an effect that suggests that a reach will not occur when it is executed in a failed pattern, that is, that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is lower than in the case of a reach. Therefore, the player can pay attention to whether or not the reach suggestion effect is executed and whether or not it is executed in a successful pattern, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A6-4-2]
Also, as shown in Fig. 157 to Fig. 160, in the case where both the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect can be executed during the variable display of 1, the weak development effect can be executed after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect starts, and the proportion of the game being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect starts before the weak development effect is executed than when it is not. By doing so, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect can be focused on, and interest can be increased.

[Form A6-5]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the reach suggestion performance changes from a cracked state to a broken state, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development performance is displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the first timing, and is displayed over the entire display screen at the second timing (see Fig. 173 (G) and Fig. 175 (D)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the reach suggestion performance and the weak development performance, and interest can be enhanced.

[Form A6-6]
In the reach suggestion performance, it is possible to highlight the decorative symbols in the reach state, and by making the period during which the decorative symbols in the reach state are highlighted during the fragment image display period longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 174 (I) to 174 (K)), it is possible to appropriately indicate that the reach state has been reached.

[Form A6-7-1]
In the reach suggestion performance, in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305, an action effect image 006SG323 can be displayed in a layer 6 image drawing area higher than the fragment image 006SG302, and by displaying the action effect image 006SG323 at the timing when the display of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 starts (see Figure 173 (D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed to a cracked state without any sense of incongruity.

[Form A6-7-2]
Also, as shown in FIG. 190, in the reach suggestion presentation, depending on the action of the character, the timing at which a crack appears in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, and the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed for a longer period of time than the action effect image 006SG323 from the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby effectively indicating to the player that a crack has appeared in the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form A6-7-3]
190, in the reach suggestion effect, when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts, but when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the action effect image 006SG323 is not displayed. Therefore, depending on the action of the character, when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the presentation mode of the reach suggestion effect is made different, and it is possible to prevent the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form A6-7-4]
Also, as shown in FIG. 190, in the reach suggestion effect, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period during which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (small fragment image display period), so that a difference can be made in the presentation mode of the reach suggestion effect between when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when a character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby preventing the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form A6-8]
Also, as shown in Figures 183 and 184, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as reach suggestion effects have transparency, so the player can see the background image through these fragment images 006SG302, whereas the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as weak development effects do not have transparency, so the player cannot see at least a part of the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. Therefore, a difference can be made in the display mode of the fragment images 006SG302 between reach suggestion effects and weak development effects, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A6-9]
Also, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect are both displayed moving without changing in speed from the start timing to the end timing of the display, so that these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed naturally in the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect.

[Form A6-10]
In addition, the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be longer than the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect (see Figs. 190 and 191). In this way, the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect can be differentiated, and the interest can be increased by the diverse presentation.

[Form A7-1]
187 and 194, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 194, when the cut-in effect is executed, first, a pre-operation image of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promotion effect, and the cut-in effect is executed when the push button 31B is operated by the player or when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and during the display period of the white-out image 006SG303, the post-operation image of the push button 31B is displayed in priority to the white-out image 006SG303. Here, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is 2500 ms, the display period of the pre-operation image of push button 31B is 3000 ms, and the display period of the post-operation image of push button 31B is 1000 ms, the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance (cut-in image display period) is shorter than the display period of the pre-operation image of push button 31B (pre-operation image display period) and longer than the display period of the post-operation image of push button 31B (post-operation image display period), so it is possible to prevent the cut-in performance from becoming monotonous and reducing the interest of the cut-in performance.

[Form A8-1]
As shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 189, the background change effect A and the pseudo consecutive effect in this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. The background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, the pseudo consecutive effect may be an effect in which the combination of decorative symbols displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a random combination, but after the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination according to the pseudo consecutive effect). In this way, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, a different impression can be given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form A8-2]
187 and 189, in the case where a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the first-stage crack is changed to a second-stage crack and can be displayed, the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the background change performance A and the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the pseudo consecutive performance may be different. By doing so, the performance effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be improved.

[Form A9-1]
187 and 189, the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the period during which cracks are displayed in the background change performance A (crack display period) is 2000 ms, while the period during which cracks are displayed in the pseudo consecutive performance (crack display period) is 1500 ms, so the lengths are different. In both the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of these whiteout images 006SG303 is composed of an early whiteout display period during which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303, and a late whiteout display period during which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. Therefore, the whiteout image 006SG303 reduces the sense of incongruity felt when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the background change performance A and pseudo consecutive performance can be executed preferably.

[Form A9-2]
187 and 189, in the case where a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the first-stage crack is changed to a second-stage crack and can be displayed, the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the background change performance A and the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the pseudo consecutive performance may be different. By doing so, the performance effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be improved.

[Form A10-1]
187 and 193, the background change performance A and the strong development performance B of this embodiment are different in execution timing during variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is displayed moving without changing the speed from the start of display to the end of display, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed moving at a speed V1 from the start of display to the end of display of the whiteout image 006SG303, and is displayed moving at a speed V0 slower than the speed V1 during the transition, so that even if the performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is similar, a different impression can be suitably given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form A10-2]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from a cracked state to a broken state in the background change performance A and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development performance B, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see Fig. 169 (G) and Fig. 177 (H)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, and interest can be enhanced.

[Form A10-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed and moved at a speed V0 is longer than the period during which it is displayed and moved at a speed V1, so that there is a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A10-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed and moved at a speed V1 is the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and since the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at a speed V0, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect of the strong development performance B.

[Form A10-4]
All of the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A are hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen (see FIG. 207(A)), and the first fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302 different from the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen (see FIG. 207(B)). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed differently between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, which can increase interest.

[Form A10-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 183 and 184, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are both images with transparency, so that the performance effect can be enhanced when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) in common (see Figs. 199 and 200), and it is preferable that the period required for the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A to become invisible on the display screen is the same for the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B. In this way, the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B is increased, and the performance effects of both can be improved.

[Form A10-6-2]
It is preferable that the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction), differs between when the display starts and when it is hidden on the display screen (see Figs. 199 and 200). Specifically, the visibility is difficult when the display starts and easy before it is hidden, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A10-7-1]
213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are rotated, the number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form A10-7-2]
213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a first angle by the rotation, it may be possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a second angle by the rotation, it may be difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form A10-7-3]
213, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are rotated, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 may be at the second angle. In this way, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at the second angle.

[Form A10-8]
157 to 160, when both background change presentation A and strong development presentation B can be executed during variable display of 1, the background change presentation can be executed before the reach and the strong development presentation B can be executed after the reach, and the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the background change presentation A is executed before the strong development presentation B is executed than when it is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the background change presentation A and increase interest.

[Form A10-9]
187 and 193, in the case where the first stage cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then changed to second stage cracks for display, the length of the period during which the first stage cracks change to second stage cracks in the background change performance A and the length of the period during which the first stage cracks change to second stage cracks in the pseudo consecutive performance may be different. By doing so, the performance effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be improved.

[Form A11-1]
187 and 189, the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 183, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is not transparent, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is transparent, so that even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, a different impression can be given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form A12-1]
187 and 193, the background change performance A and the strong development performance B of this embodiment are different in execution timing during variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during variable display. Furthermore, the length of the crack display period in the background change performance A and the crack display period in the strong development performance B may be made different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B may be displayed in a manner in which they move in at least a plurality of directions, namely, the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, so that the fragment image 006SG302 moved and displayed in the Z-axis direction takes a longer period to become invisible in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 moved and displayed in the Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 moved and displayed in the Z-axis direction in the strong development performance B takes a longer period to become invisible in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 moved and displayed in the Z-axis direction in the background change performance A. By doing this, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, a different impression can be given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A13-1]
187 and 190, the background change performance A and the reach suggestion performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion performance is 4000 ms, while the crack display period in the background change performance A is 2000 ms, and the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion performance is 1500 ms, while the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is 20000 ms. Therefore, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, different impressions can be given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form A13-2]
In the first specified part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in the first crack state in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth specified part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed from the third pre-crack state to the third crack state and displayed (see Figures 173 and 169), thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the crack state.

[Form A14-1]
In addition, the first and second consecutive cracking effects of this embodiment shown in FIG. 185 are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the second consecutive cracking effect can be executed at a timing after the first consecutive cracking effect, and the first and second consecutive cracking effects have the same length of the crack display period and the same length of the fragment image display period. When the second consecutive cracking effect is executed after the execution of the first consecutive cracking effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive cracking effect is temporarily hidden, and then the crack display period of the second cracking effect begins. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of ...

[Form A14-2]
208, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect may be displayed in a manner in which they move in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, and further, the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts may be different between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect. In this way, the way in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be made different between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A14-3]
In both the first and second consecutive breaking performances, a character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302. The character image 006SG305 in the first consecutive breaking performance is displayed in a first manner (e.g., a Jam character image) and the character image 006SG305 in the second consecutive breaking performance is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (e.g., a MuMu character image) (see Figures 166 (F) and 167 (F)). This allows for a difference in the way the special image is displayed between the first and second predetermined performances, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form A14-4]
185, the length of the fragment image display period is different from that of the first and second cracking effects, while the length of the display period of the character image 006SG305 displayed as a result of the first and second cracking effects may be the same. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed differently in the first and second cracking effects, which increases the interest.

[Form A14-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 151, in this embodiment, there are a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, and a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is not executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed. Since the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed than when the second continuous breaking effect is not executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second continuous breaking effect and increase interest.

[Form A14-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 196, the fragment images 006SG302 in the first and second consecutive breaking effects are both displayed moving without changing speed from the display start timing to the display end timing, thereby enhancing the correlation between the first and second consecutive breaking effects and increasing interest.

[Form A14-7-1]
185, a white out image 006SG303 may be displayed in common from the start timing of displaying the fragment image 006SG302, and the display pattern of the white out image 006SG303 displayed in the first consecutive cracking effect and the white out image 006SG303 displayed in the second consecutive cracking effect may be the same. In this way, the relevance between the first consecutive cracking effect and the second consecutive cracking effect is increased, and the effects of both effects can be improved.

[Form A14-7-2]
In addition, since the length of the display period (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) of the whiteout image 006SG303 is the same for the first and second consecutive breaking effects shown in FIG. 185, the correlation between the first and second consecutive breaking effects is strengthened, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form A15-1]
187 and 195, the background change effect A and the result notification effect in this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as a result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5. And, since the time required for the broken piece image 006SG302 in the background change effect A to disappear and the time required for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear in the result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state to disappear are different, the player can be appropriately notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state.

[Form A15-2]
Also, as shown in FIG. 187, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change presentation A takes 2500 ms to disappear, and in the result notification presentation when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, it takes 5500 ms for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear, so that the player can be properly notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state.

[Form A15-3]
Among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A, there is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size, and among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the result notification performance (miss), there is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size, and it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) has a larger display size than the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) (for example, see FIG. 170(J) and FIG. 182(D)). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed differently, which can increase interest.

[Form A15-4]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image it is superimposed on to be recognized, and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result announcement performance (miss) is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image it is superimposed on to be recognized (see Figure 197), thereby creating a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and increasing interest.

[Form A15-5]
It is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (miss) are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., Z-axis direction) in common (see, for example, Figs. 199 and 201). By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed in a related manner, which enhances interest.

[Form A15-6]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A changes from a cracked state to a broken state (display of the glass plate image 006SG301A) and in the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the result notification performance (miss), a whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed over the entire display screen in the first timing, and may be displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery in the second timing (see FIG. 169(G) and FIG. 182(C)). In this way, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change performance A and the result notification performance (miss), thereby increasing interest.

[Form A16-1]
As shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 195, the background change performance A and the result notification performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. In addition, during the crack display period in the background change performance A, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A, and during the crack display period in the result notification performance of the failure pattern, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the result notification performance of the failure pattern. Furthermore, the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A may continue until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started, while the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the result notification performance of the failure pattern may continue until a predetermined condition such as the stop of the variable display after the result notification performance of the failure pattern is finished or the start of the next variable display is satisfied. In this way, the player can be notified that the game is not appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form A17-1]
When the result notification effect notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a second cracked form, and the type of background image differs between before the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form in the background change effect A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the broken effect (see Figures 169 (A) to 169 (F), 170 (I), and 170 (K)), and the display form of the background image differs between before the result notification effect notifies whether the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state or not and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed when it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figures 182 (A) to 182 (B), and 182 (D)).

In this way, it is possible to execute background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state, which can give a surprise to the player, and further, by using the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and changing the display mode of the background image before it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, it is possible to notify the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state appropriately.

[Form A18-1]
The background change performance A includes a first predetermined part displaying a character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 in a first cracked state in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a third predetermined part displaying a plurality of broken pieces images 006SG302 imitating at least a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. The pseudo consecutive performance includes a fourth predetermined part displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second cracked state, and a fourth predetermined part displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second cracked state in response to the movement of the movable body 32 starting to fall. This presentation includes a fifth specified part which begins with a fifth action and a sixth specified part which displays a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 which imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the execution timing is different between the background change presentation A and the pseudo consecutive presentation. In the pseudo consecutive presentation breaking presentation, the movable body 32 begins a second action which is different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body 32 ends after the fragment image 006SG302 becomes non-display on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see Figures 169, 170 and 172).

By doing this, the background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken piece image 006SG302, and the pseudo consecutive effect can be executed at different times, so it is possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, by displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and then operating the movable body 32 to display the broken piece image 006SG302, it is possible to provide a powerful effect.

[Form A18-2]
In addition, for the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance shown in Fig. 187 and Fig. 189, after the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack may be changed to the second stage crack and displayed. In this case, the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack may be different in length from the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo consecutive performance until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack. In this way, the performance effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack mode can be improved.

[Form A18-3-1]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A changes from a cracked state to a broken state, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see FIG. 169(G) and FIG. 172(C)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form A18-3-2]
The first action is a falling action in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the performance position, and when the movable body 32 is placed at the performance position, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 172(C)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form A18-3-3]
Also, as shown in FIG. 189, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the movable body falling period is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period). Here, the fragment image display period may be longer than the movable body falling period. In this way, the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be improved.

[Form A18-4]
Also, as an effect different from the pseudo consecutive performance shown in FIG. 189, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the movable body 32 is controlled to a jackpot game state by operating the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. When the movable body suggestion effect is executed in this way, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body operates as a pseudo consecutive performance, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. In this way, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form A19-1]
As shown in Fig. 187 and Fig. 195, the background change effect A and the result notification effect in this embodiment are effects that are executed at different times during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 195, the result notification effect of the successful pattern is an effect in which cracks are displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, and then the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the rise of the movable body 32 begins during the fragment image display period, and the rise ends before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 to display cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form A19-2]
In addition, for the background change performance A and the result notification performance shown in Fig. 187 and Fig. 195, after a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first-stage crack may be changed to a second-stage crack and displayed. In this case, the length of the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack may be different from the length of the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the result notification performance until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack. In this way, the performance effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form can be improved.

[Form A19-3-1]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A changes from a cracked state to a broken state, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the result notification performance (jackpot) is displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see Fig. 169 (G) and Fig. 180 (E)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the result notification performance (jackpot), thereby increasing interest.

[Form A19-3-2]
The second action is an action of moving the movable body 32 from the performance position toward the origin position, and when the second action starts, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 180(F)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form A19-3-3]
Furthermore, with regard to the result notification display shown in FIG. 195, the movable body rising period is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and the fragment image display period is longer than the movable body rising period, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the result notification display.

[Form A19-4]
Also, as a different effect from the result notification effect shown in FIG. 195, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state by moving the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. When the movable body suggestion effect is executed in this way, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body 32 operates as a result notification effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. In this way, it is possible to prevent the effect of the result notification effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form A20-1]
187 and 192, the background change performance A and the strong development performance A of this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the strong development performance A is a performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in response to the fall of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is shorter than the fragment image display period in the background change performance A. Furthermore, in the strong development performance A, the movable body 32 can rise toward the upper position of the image display device 5, which is the origin position, after the fall, and the movable body 32 starts to rise after the fragment image display period ends, so that a powerful performance can be provided.

[Form A20-2-1]
The first action is an action in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the performance position, and when the first action starts, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 176(B)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form A20-2-2]
As shown in FIG. 192, in the strong development performance A, a whiteout early display period and a whiteout late display period are provided. Here, the length of the whiteout early display and the falling period of the movable body 32 (movable body falling period) may be approximately the same, and the fragment image display period may be longer than the movable body falling period. In this way, the performance effect of the strong development performance can be enhanced.

[Form A20-3]
Also, as a different effect from the strong development effect A shown in FIG. 192, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the movable body 32 is controlled to a jackpot game state by operating the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. When the movable body suggestion effect is executed in this way, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body 32 operates as the strong development effect A, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the strong development effect A from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form A21-1]
In background change performance A and background change performance B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the background image can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked state, the images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, are displayed with the first visibility, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state in background change performance A, the first background image 006SG301 is displayed with the first visibility. 6SG081 is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility, and images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the specified display layer when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state in background change performance B, are displayed with the second visibility over a specified range, and are displayed with the first visibility over a specific range different from the specified range (for example, the crack display area 006SG324) (see Figures 169 (E) and (F) and Figure 171 (C)).

By doing this, background change performance A and background change performance B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 in different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image that can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the type of crack pattern, even performances that display the glass plate image 006SG301 in the same way can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A21-2]
The boundary between the specified range and the specific range can be displayed with a third visibility that is higher than the first visibility and the second visibility (see enlarged view of Figure 171 (C)), thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the background change presentation B.

[Form A21-3]
In the layer 9 image drawing area, which has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to display a first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and an active display 006SG103 (corresponding image), which are compatible with variable display, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed in a specified range and not superimposed in a specific range (see Figure 171 (C)), so that the corresponding image can be displayed preferably even while the background change performance B is being executed.

[Form A21-4]
188, the second-stage crack display period may be longer than the first-stage crack display period. In this way, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed differently between the background change performance A and the background change performance B, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form A22-1]
As shown in Fig. 186 and Fig. 187, the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. The crack display period in the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance may have different visibility of the background image. Furthermore, the crack display period in the dialogue preview performance may be longer than the crack display period in the background change performance A, and multiple types of crack modes may be provided in the dialogue preview performance (see Fig. 169 and Fig. 168), so that the proportion of the game being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type of second crack mode is displayed than when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type of second crack mode is displayed. By doing this, the player will pay attention to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the dialogue preview performance, and even in a performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a different impression can be given in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A22-2]
When the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type having the second crack form is displayed, the visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer is different from that when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type having the second crack form is displayed (see Figs. 169 and 168). In this way, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a different way, which can enhance interest.

[Form A22-3]
A whiteout image 006SG303 of a specific color can be displayed in common for the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance, and it is preferable that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 be different between the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance (see, for example, Figs. 169 and 168). In this way, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be differentiated to enhance interest.

[Form A23-1]
The image display device 5 is capable of displaying a corresponding image (e.g., the first hold display 006SG101 (the second hold display) or the active display 006SG103) corresponding to a variable display in a special display layer (e.g., a layer 9 image drawing area), is capable of displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 in a first predetermined display layer (e.g., a layer 9-1 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the special display layer, and is capable of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second predetermined display layer (e.g., a layer 4 image drawing area) having a lower priority than the special display layer, Special information (e.g., small patterns) related to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) which has a higher priority than the layer, and when a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the first specified display layer in background change performance A, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases, and when a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the second specified display layer in background change performance B, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease, and when background change performance A is executed, a change performance is not executed, and when background change performance B is executed, a change performance can be executed (see FIG. 215).

By doing this, background change performance A and background change performance B can be executed at different times, which allows the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, even in the same performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the display layer and whether or not the change performance is executed differ, so that different impressions can be given in an appropriate manner, which can increase interest in the game.

[Form A23-2-1]
The change effect is an effect in which a character image 006SG305 is displayed and the character image 006SG305 performs an action that acts on the corresponding image to change the display mode of the corresponding image, and the character image 006SG305 can be displayed in a display layer (e.g., layer 3 image drawing area) that has a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 215). In this way, the change effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the background change effect B to a minimum.

[Form A23-2-2]
In response to the operation of character image 006SG305, a change emphasis image (e.g., effect image 006SG330) can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in a display layer higher than the special display layer (see FIG. 215), so that the change performance can be executed preferably even while the background change performance B is being executed.

[Form A24-1]
The display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A includes an image of a suggestive mode (e.g., fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N) that suggests that a strong S reach performance (special performance) will be executed, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A (see Figures 169, 216, and 217).

By doing this, background change performance A and strong development performance A can be executed at different times, which allows the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, the display manner of the fragment image 006SG302 differs between background change performance A and strong development performance A, and the correlation between the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development performance A and the performance executed thereafter can be increased, so that even performances in which the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form A24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (e.g., strong S reach effect J, N) and a second special effect (e.g., strong S reach effect A, B), and when the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the first special effect is executed, and the suggestive mode includes a first suggestive mode suggesting that the first special effect will be executed and a second suggestive mode suggesting that the second special effect will be executed (see Fig. 216, Fig. 217, Fig. 218). By doing so, it is possible to increase the attention level to the fragment image 006SG302 (e.g., fragment image 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N) in the strong development effect A.

[Form A24-3-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A includes a suggestive mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer is visible, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent mode is displayed more than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestive mode (see FIG. 218). In this way, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A can be increased.

[Form A24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, and in the strong development performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent state preferably rotates more than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestive state (see FIG. 218). By doing so, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A can be increased.

[Form A24-4]
The strong development performance A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part, in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a suggestive mode are displayed and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the first predetermined part, and in which a single fragment image 006SG302 in a suggestive mode is displayed and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the second predetermined part (see FIG. 217). In this way, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A can be increased.

[Form A25]
In addition, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 194 is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is made invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is made transparent, and further, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is ended, thereby making it visible. The period during which the operation prompting effect is executed before the cut-in effect is longer than the early whiteout display period during which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is invisible in the cut-in effect, so that the operation prompting effect builds up to the broken effect, and a sense of speed is created during the fragment image display period, thereby realizing an ideal broken pattern.

[Form A26]
194, the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is made invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is made transparent, and further, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is terminated, so that the glass plate image 006SG301A can be made visible. The fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the operation prompting effect execution period. In this way, the crack pattern can be impressed.

[Form A27]
As shown in Fig. 185 to Fig. 195, in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, at least a part of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is a period shorter than the fragment image display period. In addition, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is composed of a whiteout display early period and a whiteout display late period. In addition, the whiteout display late period may be a period longer than the whiteout display early period. In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 conceals the beginning of cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, while preventing the whiteout image 006SG303 from being emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form A28]
As shown in FIG. 185 to FIG. 195, in the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 starts to crack, and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed is hidden from the player by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303. Here, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be hidden on the condition that a predetermined time has passed since the start of display and the fragment image 006SG302 has moved sufficiently, so that the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable due to the start of display of the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form A29]
185 to 195, in the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 in the early whiteout display period and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed are hidden from the player by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303, and the fragment image 006SG302 can be seen by the player in the later whiteout display period in which the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is increased. Therefore, in the later whiteout display period, the effect of the fragment image 006SG302 that has been moved and displayed after a sufficient amount of time has passed since the start of display can be enhanced.

[Form A30]
In the background change performance A and the weak development performance shown in Fig. 187 and Fig. 191, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts from the execution timing of the crack performance, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be moved. Here, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the whiteout display later period in the background change performance A and the whiteout display later period in the weak development performance. In this way, the performance effect of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the weak development performance can be improved.

[Form A31]
In addition, in the background change performance A and the weak development performance shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 191, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts from the execution timing of the crack performance, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be moved. Here, the background change performance A may be a performance that can be executed when the game state is in the normal state, and the weak development performance may be a performance that can be executed when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state. Furthermore, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the whiteout display later period in the background change performance A and the whiteout display later period in the weak development performance. In this way, the performance effect of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the weak development performance can be improved.

[Form A32]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 185 to 195, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 using a light emission data table for the break effect over the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and from the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 using a light emission data table corresponding to the background image of each effect, so that the light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 when the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks can be performed appropriately.

[Form A33]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 185 to 195, in the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap at least partially, and the speakers 8L, 8R output the breaking effect sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 from the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form A34]
As shown in FIG. 185 to FIG. 195, the performance patterns (crack patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the crack performance in the first continuous crack performance, the second continuous crack performance, the dialogue notice performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo consecutive performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, the cut-in performance, and the result notification performance include a first pattern in which the glass plate breaks after a crack is displayed, and a second pattern in which the glass plate breaks without a crack being displayed. Here, whether or not a sound corresponding to the crack performance (a sound corresponding to the fragment image 006SG302 being displayed) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R may differ depending on whether or not the crack performance is performed in the first pattern and in the second pattern. In this way, it is possible to provide different impression patterns in each crack performance.

[Form A35]
As shown in FIG. 185 to FIG. 195, the performance patterns (the cracking patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the cracking performance in the first continuous cracking performance, the second continuous cracking performance, the dialogue notice performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo consecutive performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, the cut-in performance, and the result notification performance include a first pattern in which the glass plate breaks after a crack is displayed, and a second pattern in which the glass plate breaks without being displayed. Here, when the cracking performance of the result notification performance of the successful pattern can be actually executed in the second pattern, a sound corresponding to being controlled to a jackpot game state may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the cracking performance of the result notification performance of the successful pattern. In this way, it is possible to provide a pattern of the cracking performance with a different impression depending on the state.

[Form A36]
As shown in Figures 185 to 195, the presentation patterns of the cracking effects (cracked patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks. Here, when the breaking effect is executed in the above-mentioned first pattern, a breaking effect sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in response to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are images replacing the glass plate image 006SG301, whereas when the breaking effect is executed in the above-mentioned second pattern, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301, is not displayed, and the breaking effect sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in response to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, it is possible to provide breaking patterns with different impressions.

[Form A37]
185 to 195, for the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a sound effect (cracked sound effect) corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be output at a volume louder than the sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. In this way, the difference between when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is made clear, and the cracking pattern is impressed.

[Form A38]
As shown in Fig. 212, as the cracking effect in the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a character voice can be output from the speakers 8L, 8R as a sound corresponding to the displayed character, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a cracking effect sound can be output from the speakers 8L, 8R as a sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, a difference is created between when a crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the cracking pattern is impressed.

[Form A39]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns B and G). In the first pattern, the amount of fluctuation is a specific value (e.g., "30%), so that the movement speed of a first-sized fragment image 006SG302 in the first pattern is different from that of a second-sized fragment image 006SG302 smaller than the first size. In the second pattern, the amount of fluctuation is 0 (e.g., "0%), so that the movement speed of a third-sized fragment image 006SG302 in the second pattern is the same as that of a fourth-sized fragment image 006SG302 smaller than the third size (see Figures 197 and 198).

In this way, the first pattern is affected by the animation differently depending on the size, with small fragment images 006SG302 flying quickly and large fragment images 006SG302 flying slightly slower and falling quickly, making it possible to use this cracking pattern when you want to show realistic movement, while the second pattern is affected by the animation in the same way for all fragments regardless of size, causing them to fly and fall in the same way, making it possible to select the appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene.

[Form A40]
The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in such a manner that it gradually falls after the display starts, and there are a first pattern (e.g., broken patterns A and C) and a second pattern (e.g., broken patterns D to F) as display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302, and by setting different gravity values between the first pattern and the second pattern, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls differs (see Figs. 197 and 198). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, a variety of patterns can be constructed, which increases interest.

[Form A41]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., broken patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., broken patterns B, G), and the direction of gravity is set differently between the first and second patterns, so that the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves when displayed is different (see Figs. 197 and 198). In this way, by changing the parameters and changing the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves, a variety of patterns can be constructed, improving interest.

[Form A42]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern B), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern C), and for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is "0" common to the fragment pattern A, the crack pattern B, and the crack pattern C, and the second parameter of "strength" is different, being "5" for the fragment pattern A, "3" for the fragment pattern B, and "7" for the fragment pattern C (see Figs. 197 and 198). In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302 while varying the second parameter to construct a variety of patterns, a stable and diverse display pattern for the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

[Form A43]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., a crack pattern E), a second pattern (e.g., a crack pattern F), and a third pattern (e.g., a crack pattern G). For example, the first parameter of "gravity" of the crack pattern E (first pattern) and the second pattern of "strength" of the crack pattern E (second pattern) are common to the crack pattern E (first pattern) and the crack pattern F (second pattern), and the second parameter of "strength" of the crack pattern F (second pattern) and the crack pattern G (third pattern) are common to the crack pattern E (second pattern) and the crack pattern F (third pattern), and the first parameter of "gravity" of the crack pattern E (second pattern) is common to the crack pattern F (second pattern) and the crack pattern F (third pattern), and the second parameter of "strength" of the crack pattern F (second pattern) is common to the crack pattern E (second pattern) and the crack pattern F (third pattern) (see FIG. 197 and FIG. 198). In this way, by creating a common part for the fragment image 006SG302 while being configured with different parameters, a stable and diverse display pattern of the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

[Form A44]
As the display pattern of the cracked image (e.g., the fragment image 006SG302), there are a first pattern (e.g., the cracked pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., the cracked pattern A). The cracked image by the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state, and the cracked image by the second pattern can be displayed in a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, a probability change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state. Before the cracked image by the first pattern is displayed, and after the cracked image by the first pattern is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different. Before the cracked image by the second pattern is displayed, and after the cracked image by the second pattern is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different (e.g., see FIG. 169 and FIG. 170). By doing so, when the cracked patterns A to G are used in the normal state and when the cracked patterns A to G are used in the special state, different impressions are given, and interest can be enhanced.

[Form A45]
The background change performance A is a performance including changing a cracked image (e.g., a fragment image 006SG302) to a second mode after displaying the cracked image in a first mode, and the image display device 5 displays an effect image (e.g., a whiteout image 006SG303) when displaying the cracked image in the first mode in both the normal state and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, a probability-changing state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, and makes the effect image non-displayable at the timing before displaying the cracked image in the second mode (e.g., see Figs. 169 and 170). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display part of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an awkward feeling.

[Form A46]
As shown in Figures 185 to 195, the presentation patterns of the cracking effects (cracked patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks. Here, the first pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect may be displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction in common. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect may move at different speeds. In this way, the effect of the performance during the time-saving state or the probability-changing state can be enhanced by a cracking pattern that does not disrupt the tempo of the time-saving state or the probability-changing state.

[Form A47]
As shown in Figures 185 to 195, the presentation patterns of the cracking effects (cracked patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks. Here, the first pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, and the proportion of the state controlled to the big win game state may be made different when the first pattern of the cracking effect is executed and when the second pattern of the cracking effect is executed. By doing so, the proportion of the state controlled to the big win game state differs depending on the cracking pattern, so that the cracking pattern can be more noticeable.

[Form A48]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer, and special information regarding variable display (e.g., small patterns) can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer, the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 at least partially overlap, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is in a state in which a character is drawn, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is in a transparent state in which at least a portion of a background image displayed in a display layer lower than the specific display layer can be recognized (see FIG. 218). In this way, the display periods of two types of fragment images 006SG302 having different display modes can be overlapped to provide a memorable effect.

[Form A49]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer, and a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer. In the image drawing area, special information (e.g., small patterns) related to the variable display can be displayed, the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 at least partially overlap, the display modes of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are different, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 218 ). In this way, the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 having different display modes are displayed in an overlapping manner, thereby providing a memorable presentation.

[Form A50]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information (e.g., small patterns) related to variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer, the movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area where the movable body 32 does not overlap, are displayed in a larger amount than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2 where the movable body 32 overlaps (see FIG. 218). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed appropriately while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Form A51]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., a layer 5-1 image drawing area or a layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information regarding variable display (e.g., small patterns) can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., a layer 10 image drawing area) which has a higher priority than the specific display layer, the movable body 32 can perform an operation of being superimposed on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, a first fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner moving from a first display area L1 where the movable body 32 is not overlapped to a second display area L2 where the movable body 32 is overlapped, and a second fragment image 006SG302 of the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner of moving in the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2 (see FIG. 218). In this manner, the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the area where the movable body 32 overlaps allows the viewer to recognize that the object has broken, while a fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the area where the movable body 32 overlaps can be provided to provide a dynamic presentation.

[Form A52]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information (e.g., small patterns) related to variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer, the movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the fragment image 006SG302 continues to be displayed even after the movable body 32 superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 moves to a position where it is not superimposed on the display screen (see FIG. 218). In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed suitably while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the fragment image 006SG302 is not overlooked.

[Form A53]
In the reach suggestion performance, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the image display device 5 can display a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302A), and the second type fragment images 006SG302 take a shorter time to disappear from the display screen than the first type fragment images 006SG302 (see Figs. 173 and 174). In this way, the performance effect of the performance using the crack pattern A can be improved.

[Form A54]
As the display pattern of the broken image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), there are a first pattern (for example, a broken pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, a broken pattern E). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. Before the first type of broken image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different from that after the first type of broken image is displayed by the first pattern, and before the second type of broken image is displayed by the second pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different from that after the second type of broken image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIG. 169, FIG. 170, FIG. 173 to FIG. 175). In this way, a specific character (for example, the character image 006SG305) appears in common to a plurality of crack patterns, so that the degree of attention to the specific character is increased.

[Form A55]
There are a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern E) as display patterns of a broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. When displaying a broken image according to the first pattern, the image display device 5 displays a When a cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern, the effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of the character image 006SG305, and the effect image (e.g., the whiteout image 006SG303) is made non-displayable at a specific timing after the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figs. 169, 170, 173 to 175). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the fragment image 006SG302, thereby preventing the fragment image 006SG302 from giving an uncomfortable feeling.

[Form A56]
There are a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern E) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) as display patterns of a broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of broken images of a first type are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of broken images of a second type are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The first type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner in which it moves at a speed that changes from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302. The second type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner in which it moves without any change in speed over the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 173, 174, 169, and 170). By doing this, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves can be changed depending on the type of crack pattern, enhancing the presentation effect.

[Form A57]
As the display pattern of the broken image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), there are a first pattern (for example, a broken pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, a broken pattern E). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. When a broken image is displayed by the first pattern, the expectation level controlled to the big win state is different from when a broken image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIG. 169, FIG. 170, FIG. 173, FIG. 174). In this way, the expectation for the character image 006SG305 is increased, and interest is increased by focusing on the type of the broken pattern after the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

(Variation 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the speed of the fragment image 006SG302 after the whiteout display pre-period of each effect is all constant (V1 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, result notification effect, and V0 for the strong development effect B and cut-in effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a first variant example, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the crack effects of the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may have different progression speeds (display speeds) in the left-right direction (also referred to as the X-axis direction), up-down direction (also referred to as the Y-axis direction) and forward direction (Z-axis direction) toward the player in the display area of the image display device 5.
The degrees may be different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 208(A), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the fragment effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect may include a fragment image 006SG302A moving at a speed Vx1 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction, a fragment image 006SG302B moving at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction, and a fragment image 006SG302C moving at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed Vz1 in the Z-axis direction, as well as a fragment image 006SG302 moving in two of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and a fragment image 006SG302 moving in three directions.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 208(B), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effects of the strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and cut-in effect may include fragment images 006SG302A moving in the X-axis direction at a speed of Vx2, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction, fragment images 006SG302B moving in the X-axis direction at a speed of 0, Vy2 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction, and fragment images 006SG302C moving in the X-axis direction at a speed of 0, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and Vz2 in the Z-axis direction, as well as fragment images 006SG302 moving in two of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment images 006SG302 moving in three directions.

Note that moving the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means that the fragment image 006SG302 is enlarged and displayed, so the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the Z-axis direction is also referred to as the enlargement display speed.

Comparing fragment image 006SG302A, which progresses only in the X-axis direction, fragment image 006SG302B, which progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and fragment image 006SG302C, which progresses only in the Z-axis direction in each performance, as shown in FIG. 208(C), in this variant example 1, fragment image 006SG302C is simply enlarged and displayed toward the player, unlike fragment image 006SG302A and fragment image 006SG302B, and therefore the period from the start of display to the end of display is set longer than fragment image 006SG302A and fragment image 006SG302B. In other words, in the cracking effect of each effect, the enlarged fragment image 006SG302C is displayed, which creates a sense of three-dimensionality for the player, and the fragment image 006SG302A continues to create a sense of three-dimensionality even after the display of fragment image 006SG302B has ended, enhancing the presentation effect when fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 208 (D), the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect are set as effect group X, and the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, and the cut-in effect are set as effect group Y, and when comparing the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the breaking effect of effect group X with the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the breaking effect of effect group Y, in this modified example 1, the progression speed Vz1 in the Z-axis direction of the fragment image 006SG302C in effect group X is set to be faster than the progression speed Vz2 in the Z-axis direction of the fragment image 006SG302C in effect group Y (Vz1 > Vz2), etc., so that the period from the start of display to the end of display of the fragment image 006SG302C in effect group Y is set to be longer than that of the fragment image 006SG302C in effect group X. Therefore, in this variant example 1, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect can be executed at different times as background change effect A and strong development effect B, so that the player can be surprised by drawing attention to these effects at various times, and furthermore, because the period required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear differs between the effects included in effect group X and the effects included in effect group Y, even when the same break effect is executed and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, different impressions can be given to the player depending on the effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in this variant example 1, the effects included in effect group Y are set to have a longer period of time required for the fragment image 006SG302C to become hidden than the effects included in effect group X, so that when a cracked effect is executed as an effect included in effect group Y, the effect of the display of the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced compared to when a cracked effect is executed as an effect included in effect group X.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the fragment images 006SG302 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are illustrated as fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed and move toward the player (enlarged display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed and move toward the player (enlarged display) may change in visibility by being enlarged from the display start timing to the display end timing. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be further enhanced.

In addition, in this modified example 1, in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that progresses only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction, as shown in Figure 208 (C), the fragment image 006SG302C progresses from the start of display Although an example has been given in which the period from the start of display to the end of display is set longer than for fragment image 006SG302A or fragment image 006SG302B, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period from the start of display to the end of display of fragment image 006SG302C, which progresses only in the Z-axis direction in a specific performance (for example, a cut-in performance), may be longer than the period from the start of display to the end of display of fragment images 006SG302A and B, which move only in the X-axis direction or Y-axis direction in a predetermined performance (for example, a pseudo-consecutive performance) that is different from the specific performance. In this way, the display mode of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the specific performance and the predetermined performance (cut-in performance and pseudo-consecutive performance in the above example) can be made different, thereby increasing the interest of these specific performances and predetermined performances.

In addition, in the above embodiment and this modified example 1, in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and these fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by moving the display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, the pseudo consecutive effect and the background change effect A) may be displayed. As for the images 006SG302, all of the fragment images 006SG302 are made invisible by moving them completely outside the display area of the image display device 5, and as for the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a specific effect (for example, strong development effect B or cut-in effect), some of the fragment images 006SG302 may be made invisible by moving them completely outside the display area of the image display device 5, while other fragment images 006SG302 may be made invisible while moving outside the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, a difference can be made in the display mode of the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a specific effect and a specific effect, increasing the interest of these specific effects and the predetermined effects.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as each of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect is moved in multiple directions along the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive break effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the second consecutive break effect may start from different positions. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed differently between the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect, which can increase interest.

(Variation 2)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301A is broken to display multiple fragment images 006SG302 as the broken effect of each effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the broken effect of each effect may differ depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 209(A), the early whiteout display period from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the time when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed is set to a length L1, and the late whiteout display period, which is a period following the early whiteout display period and in which the whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than that in the early whiteout display period, is displayed, is set to a length L2 (L2>L1).

The fragment image display period is composed of a first fragment image display period of length L3 (L3>L1+L2), which is a period from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and is longer than the combined period of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, and a second fragment image display period of length L4 (L3+L4>L1+L2), which is a period continuous with the first fragment image display period.

Here, as shown in FIG. 209 (B), during the second fragment image display period, a greater number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed than during the first fragment image display period, thereby increasing the gaming interest of the broken effect. Furthermore, in this modified example 2, during the first fragment image display period, the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303 during the period that overlaps with the early whiteout display period, while during the period that overlaps with the late whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. Since the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is longer than the total length (L1 + L2) of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, during the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is made invisible to the player, which prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable about the broken effect due to the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, and during the late whiteout display period, the whiteout image 006SG303 is emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302, which prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the broken effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the crack effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect have transparency, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the crack effects of the pseudo consecutive effects and the weak development effect do not have transparency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the crack effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effects, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect may all have transparency, or may not all have transparency.

(Variation 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 210 as a modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the fragmentation effects of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect changes according to the progress of the effect (in this modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be 0 at the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, T1 (T1>0) at the timing when the whiteout display period ends, T2 (T2>T1) at the timing when the whiteout display later period ends, and T3 (T3>T2) at the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. By doing so, for example, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is sufficiently scattered over the display area of the image display device 5 just before the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends.

In particular, in this modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, so the player can easily see the image displayed as the result of the broken effect through the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents a decrease in the effect of the effect from being caused by the image displayed as the result of the broken effect being blocked by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this modification example 3, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect has an increased transparency as the effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect may have a decreased transparency as the effect progresses.

(Variation 4)
Furthermore, in the modified example 3, as the breaking effects of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the form in which the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases with the passage of time from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 4, as shown in FIG. 211 (A) and FIG. 211 (B), The transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on whether the displayed effect is a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, or a result notification effect, and even if it is the same effect, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on the game status (Figure 211 shows an example of the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 in a background change effect A and a weak development effect).

As shown in FIG. 211, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks as a broken effect and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, the whiteout display period ends and the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player. Here, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the background change effect A's cracked effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the weak development effect's cracked effect have different transmittances when visible to the player, so even if both effects involve the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, it is possible to create differences in the content of the effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect when the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the background change effect A's cracked effect, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the weak development effect's cracked effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 211, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as the background change effect A when executed in the normal state with the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as the weak development effect when executed in the time-saving state or the probability change state, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as the background change effect A when executed in the normal state and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as the weak development effect when executed in the time-saving state or the probability change state are 02 have different transmittances when visible to the player, so even if both have effects in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, it is possible to create differences in the content of the effects, and this can enhance the effect of the effects when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a break effect of the background change effect A in the normal state, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a break effect of the weak development effect in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state.

(Variation 5)
In the above embodiment, as a result of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance, a cracking performance is executed as a performance within the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance, a sound (for example, a character voice) corresponding to the displayed character may be output. In this way, it is possible to add a difference between when a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 212 as a modified example 5, in the case where a character voice corresponding to the character is output when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 as the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance, the character voice and the cracking sound may be output at the same volume (Vol 1 in the example of FIG. 212) so that at least a part of the output period of the character voice and the output period of the cracking sound overlap.

In addition, in this variant 5, as shown in FIG. 212, the cracking sound output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed may be output at a louder volume (Vol 2 in the example of FIG. 212) than the cracking sound output when a crack is displayed. By doing this, it is possible to add contrast to the cracking effect when a crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and furthermore, the player can be impressed that the cracking effect is executed as the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, i.e., that these background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect have been executed in a successful pattern, and the cracking pattern of these cracking effects.

(Variation 6)
In the above embodiment, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is moved and displayed until the end of the display as the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the breaking effect of these effects may be displayed in a rotating manner in addition to being moved during the period from the start of display to the end of display. Furthermore, the number of rotations of the fragment image 006SG302 from the start of display to the end of display may differ depending on which effect is executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 213 as variant example 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the fragmentation effect of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the dialogue preview effect rotates R3 times from the start of display to the end of display, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the fragmentation effect of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A rotates R2 times (R3>2) from the start of display to the end of display, which is less than R3, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the fragmentation effect of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect rotates R1 times (R2>R1) from the start of display to the end of display, which is less than R2.

In this way, in this variant example 6, even if the timing that may be executed during the variable display is different, by having the same number of rotations from the start of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of display, the correlation within each combination of effects is increased, such as the combination of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, and the dialogue preview effect, the combination of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A, and the combination of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect, and the like, thereby enhancing the presentation effect within these combinations of effects.

Also, as mentioned above, in this variant 6, the number of rotations from the start of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of display varies depending on which type of break effect it is, and in particular, for example, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a pseudo consecutive break effect has a greater number of rotations from the start of displaying to the end of display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cut-in break effect, so that it is possible to increase the variety of break effects executed as the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, and the effect of the performance when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

In addition, in this modified example 6, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are rotated, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the rotation of the fragment images 006SG302, when these fragment images 006SG302 reach a first rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment images 006SG302, and when these fragment images 006SG302 reach a second rotation angle, the player can not see at least a part of the background image through the fragment images 006SG302. By doing so, the effect of the presentation when these fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be enhanced. Furthermore, in the case where the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the rotation angle of the fragment image 006SG302 as described above, rather than rotating all of the fragment images 006SG302 in synchronization, at least some of the fragment images 006SG302 may be rotated at an angle different from that of the other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when one fragment image 006SG302 is rotated at the first rotation angle, some of the other fragment images 006SG302 are rotated at the second rotation angle, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

(Variation 7)
In addition, as the pseudo consecutive performance of the above embodiment, a crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5, and then a crack performance is executed according to the movement of the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 7, as shown in Fig. 214 (A), the pseudo consecutive performance may be such that a crack is displayed as a crack display period after a pre-operation period in which a character acts on a glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the movable body 32 falls. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 214 (B), the crack display period may be composed of a crack pre-display period and a crack post-display period, as in the background change performance A of the above embodiment, so that the crack is displayed in two stages and then the crack performance is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 214(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo consecutive performance may be made different from the pre-crack display period in the background change performance A of the above embodiment. By doing this, even though the background change performance A of the above embodiment and the pseudo consecutive performance of this modification 7 both have two stages of cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301, by making the period until the second stage of cracks is displayed different between the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance, it is possible to increase the number of performance patterns until the crack performance is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect when cracks appear in the glass plate image 006SG301.

Furthermore, in this modified example 7, the pseudo consecutive performance is exemplified as a performance in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the action of the character or the movement of the movable body 32 operates, as in the background change performance A in the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach suggestion performance may be a performance in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the action of the character or the movement of the movable body 32 operates, as in the background change performance A in the above embodiment. Even in this case, the crack display period in the reach suggestion performance may be composed of a crack preliminary display period and a crack final display period, and the length of the crack preliminary display period in the reach suggestion performance may be different from the crack preliminary display period of the background change performance A in the above embodiment. By doing this, even though the background change performance A of the above embodiment and the reach suggestion performance of this variant example 7 both have two stages of cracks appearing in the glass plate image 006SG301, by differentiating the period until the second stage of cracks appears in the background change performance A and the reach suggestion performance, it is possible to increase the number of performance patterns until the cracking performance is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect when cracks appear in the glass plate image 006SG301.

(Variation 8)
In the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A as crack precursor images are displayed in a layer 4 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image and the glass plate image 006SG301A as an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed not only in the layer 4 image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, but also in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U.

For example, in this modified example 8, as shown in Figs. 215 (A1) to (A5), in background change performance A, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U. Also, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking action toward the front, cracks are displayed to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that after the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state (see Fig. 215 (A2)), when the crack gradually spreads radially and changes to a crack state, a part of the crack can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U (see Fig. 215 (A3)).

When a part of the crack is displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U in this way, if the first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or the active display 006SG103 is displayed, there is a risk that the visibility of the first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or the active display 006SG103 will decrease. Therefore, in this case, the execution of the active change effect in which the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes is restricted, so the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 215 (B1) to (B5), in the background change performance B, as described in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U. Also, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 appearing in the upper right corner of the screen, a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small cracked areas is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Fig. 215 (B1)), and then, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 starting to descend, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, causing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 to change stepwise (see Fig. 215 (B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area, which is lower than the active display area 5F and the special drawing reserved memory display area 5U, even if the crack extends and is displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special drawing reserved memory display area 5U, the crack will not be displayed so as to be superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special drawing reserved memory display area 5U.

In addition, even if the character image 006SG305 is displayed moving across the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, the effect image 006SG330 may be displayed in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U without the character image 006SG305 being displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U (see FIG. 215 (B3)). After that, the active change performance is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see FIG. 215 (B4)).

In this way, the background change effect A, which may reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, restricts the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103 by overlapping with the active change effect (action effect by the changed character) in the execution period, while in the background change effect B, which does not reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, active change effects that change the display mode of the active display 006SG103 can be executed. Even if the effect similarly displays a crack precursor image, the difference is in the display layer and whether or not the active change effect is executed, so that it is possible to give a different impression and increase interest in the game. The target of the change effect may be the first reserved display 006SG101 or the second reserved display.

In addition, in background change performance A, a part of the crack is displayed so as to overlap with the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, reducing the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U. However, if the display state of the reserved display or active display changes in such a situation, it becomes difficult to tell whether the change has occurred due to the change performance or the crack state, which causes distrust among the player. Therefore, it is preferable to be able to execute the change performance in background change performance B, in which the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is not reduced even when the crack state occurs.

In addition, in this variant 8, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state in the background change performance A, the execution of the active change performance is restricted, but for example, after that, the crack performance is executed, the fragment image 006SG302 scatters, and the whiteout image 006SG303 becomes invisible, and then the active change performance can be executed, that is, it may be executed at a timing different from the original execution timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation or during a reach). Also, the active change performance may be executed in a simplified form (for example, a mode in which a changed character is not displayed and the active display mode is casually changed at the timing of FIG. 215 (A3)). In this way, by performing the change performance during a period that does not overlap with the period in which the active display is difficult to see due to the crack performance, the performance effects of both the crack performance and the change performance can be enhanced.

(Variation 9)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which when a strong development effect A is executed, it is determined that the effect will develop into a strong S reach effect A; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect may include fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc., in a suggestive manner that suggests that one of multiple types of strong S reach effects A, B, J, N with different degrees of expectation will be executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 216 (A) to (F), when a crack effect is executed in the strong development effect A, and after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends and before the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends and becomes invisible, a fragment image 006SG342M indicating that a strong S reach effect A or a strong S reach effect B will be executed, a fragment image 006SG342J indicating that a strong S reach effect J will be executed, a fragment image 006SG342N indicating that a strong S reach effect N will be executed, and multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see Figure 216 (G)).

Then, among the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, when the fragment image 006SG342M is displayed singly while the other fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N are hidden and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent state are displayed, a notification is issued that a Strong S Reach performance A or a Strong S Reach performance B will be executed (see Figs. 217 (A1), (A2), and (A2')), and when the fragment image 006SG342J is displayed singly while the other fragment images 006SG3 If fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342N are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that a strong S reach effect J will be executed (see Figs. 217 (B1) and (B2)), and if a single fragment image 006SG342N is displayed but the other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that a strong S reach effect N will be executed (see Figs. 217 (C1) and (C2)).

By doing this, it is possible to increase the correlation between the fragment image in the strong development performance A and the strong S reach performance that is executed afterwards, so that even if the performance also displays the fragment image 006SG302, it gives a suitably different impression and increases interest in the game.

In this modified example, the type of strong S reach performance to be executed is suggested by non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, which display the faces of the types of characters that appear in various strong S reach performances; however, the suggested form is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways as long as the fragment image is in a form that can identify the type of strong S reach performance to be executed. For example, the fragment image may display related information such as the reach title name or background image that can identify the type of strong S reach performance.

The type that has been decided to be executed is indicated by displaying one of the multiple fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N while the others are not displayed, but it may be indicated by, for example, displaying one of the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N larger, in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Also, the strong S reach performance may be executed ultimately while two or more fragment images are displayed.

(Variation 10)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in one layer 5 image drawing area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the images may be displayed in two or more layer image drawing areas.

For example, in this modified example 10, as shown in FIG. 218, of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the breaking pattern F used in the strong development performance A, the large fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a transparent manner in the layer 5-1 image drawing area, and the small fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a non-transparent manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area that is higher than the layer 5-1 image drawing area. In this case, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as a break precursor image is displayed in both the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area at the time of breakage. Note that one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has the face of a character corresponding to the type of strong S reach performance depicted, as explained in modified example 9.

In this way, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has a character drawn on it, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area has a transparent aspect that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 5-2 image drawing area. In this way, the display periods of two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display aspects are overlapped to provide a memorable presentation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 218(B), the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area are composed of a first display area L1 that does not overlap the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, and a second display area L2 that is surrounded by a two-dot chain line indicating the movable body 32. When the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 has a larger display amount than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed preferably while the movable body 32 overlaps with the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, a first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves from the first display area L1 to enter the second display area L2, while a second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves through the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. In this way, a dynamic presentation can be provided by providing a fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the first display area L1 while allowing the viewer to recognize that the image has been broken by the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the second display area L2.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301 that imitates a glass plate is applied as an example of a crack precursor image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a crack precursor image that imitates an object other than glass, such as a panel, door, or rock, may also be applied. In addition, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, it may be displayed with a transmittance of 100% or less than 100%. In addition, the crack precursor image may be displayed in multiple layer image drawing areas so that the crack presentation can be performed individually.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as an example of a fragment image, a glass fragment image 006SG302 that imitates a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image that imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a fragment image that imitates an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed in part. In addition, although the fragment image is displayed on a display layer higher than the crack precursor image, it may be displayed on a display layer lower than the crack precursor image.

In addition, in the above embodiment, cracking patterns A to G were set as the cracking patterns in the cracking effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a cracking effect based on a cracking pattern of a type other than the above.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a cracking effect can be executed during the execution of an effect such as a preview effect that indicates the expected probability of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking effect may be executed separately from other effects other than the preview effect. In this case, the expected probability of a jackpot may be made different depending on the type of cracking pattern, so that the cracking effect may be executed as one of the preview effects, or may be executed as a change effect when the performance stage, performance mode, or game state changes.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as the crack precursor image is cracked when some kind of impact (force) is applied from behind to approximately the center of the image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack may be initiated when some kind of impact (force) is applied from the front to a specified position on the crack precursor image. The force may also be applied to multiple points on the crack precursor image at a specified timing or at multiple timings.

In addition, in the above embodiment, depending on the type of preview performance, there is an example in which the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changes to a cracked state and then the cracking starts, and there is also an example in which the cracking starts suddenly without changing to a cracked state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the type of preview performance, all cracking performances may start after the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changes to a cracked state, or all cracking performances may start suddenly without changing to a cracked state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the object images (characters, etc.), decorative patterns, and background images displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and are displayed with the second visibility lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the various images displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed with the first visibility without reducing the visibility, and the cracks may be displayed so as to stand out, for example, by displaying a colored effect image or the like in the part representing the crack.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the character image 006SG305 is mainly used as an example of an object image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of character may be a type other than the above. Also, various changes can be made to the object image, such as a person, an object such as an iron ball or a rock, or a target, instead of a character.

In the above embodiment, the cracking effect is exemplified in the following cases: the cracking effect starts according to the movement of the object image, the cracking effect starts according to the movement of the movable body 32, and the cracking effect starts regardless of the movement of the object image or the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In all the effects, the cracking effect may start according to the movement of the object image, or in all the effects, the cracking effect may start according to the movement of the movable body 32, or in all the effects, the cracking effect may start regardless of the movement of the object image or the movable body 32. In addition, the movable body 32 as a logo role object is applied as an example of a movable body, but a board-side movable body provided in another location on the game board 2 may be applied, or a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 other than the game board 2 may be applied. Furthermore, the cracking effect may start according to the movement of a movable body such as the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the cracking of the cracking effect starts, a whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% is displayed as an effect image on a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 in the period immediately after the start of the cracking effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to display the whiteout image 006SG303 at the start of the cracking effect to make it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which the fragment image 006SG302 is made difficult to see at the start of the cracking effect by displaying a whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% in a display layer above the glass plate image 006SG301, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased at the start of the cracking effect, in other words, the fragment image 006SG302 may be faded in to make it difficult to see at the start of the cracking effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying a crack is drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area as an image that will actually break (change into a fragment image 006SG302). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to draw and place a glass plate image 006SG301 in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a fragment image 006SG302 as an image of the glass plate image 006SG301 broken in the layer 5 image drawing area, without drawing and placing the glass plate image 006SG301A.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying in the cracked state may be different from the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying in the cracked state. For example, by making the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying in the cracked state higher than the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying in the cracked state (making the glass plate image 006SG301 a non-transparent image), the timing at which the cracks are displayed and the timing at which the cracking effect is executed can be made easier to understand than in the above embodiment.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to a cracked state in the layer 5 image drawing area is started at the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked state in the layer 4 image drawing area is made invisible, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display times of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked state and the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to a cracked state may at least partially overlap.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked state is exemplified as a crack precursor image in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack precursor image may be an image other than the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state, so long as it is an image that suggests that the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 will crack.

In addition, in the above embodiment, examples of the breaking effects of the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect are given in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick (see Figure 169), a hammer (see Figure 173), a punch (see Figure 175), etc., thereby breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a form in which the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 to break these background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect, in addition to or instead of the kick, hammer, punch, etc. described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be broken by the action of a slash with a sword or the like. In particular, as background change effects in this embodiment, in addition to background change effect A in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick to break the glass plate image 006SG301A (breaking due to the impact of the kick), and background change effect B in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks without the action of the character or the movable body 32 (see FIG. 154), background change effect C in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a sword to break the glass plate image 006SG301A (breaking due to a sword slash) can be executed, as described above, and the proportion of the big win game state may be varied depending on whether the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 or the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. In this way, it is possible to increase the number of glass plate 006SG301A breaking effect patterns that can be executed as a breaking effect, and to further increase the player's attention to the breaking effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, in the first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was exemplified in which a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible not to display the whiteout image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 (the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A starts breaking). This increases the sense of speed from when the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed until the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, providing a powerful and memorable effect of the breakage.

Furthermore, when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed as a cracked effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 itself may be displayed as cracked. By doing this, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 when the cracked effect is executed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change performance A or background change performance B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change performance A or background change performance B. In particular, if a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change performance A or background change performance B in this way, a part of the background image that was displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until just before the execution of the cracking effect may be displayed in the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, in the above embodiment, examples have been given of forms in which the breaking effects can be executed as a first consecutive breaking effect, a second consecutive breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute the breaking effects as effects other than these first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect. For example, during the variable display, after it has been notified that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage for the player (for example, a non-variable jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot game state of variable jackpot C with two rounds), or in the jackpot game state after the variable display ends, a promotion effect may be executed to notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state with a high advantage for the player (for example, a jackpot game state of variable jackpot A with 10 rounds that is controlled to a variable state after the jackpot game ends), or after it has been notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state during the variable display, a crack effect may be executed as a revival effect to notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when executing the cracking effects as the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the character or the movable body 32 acts, the crack is displayed, and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as these cracking effects, there may be cases where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked without the character or the movable body 32 acting or the crack being displayed. In this way, the execution of the cracking effect can give the player a sense of surprise, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are exemplified as being formed by breaking the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and these breaking effects may also be formed by breaking images other than the glass plate image 006SG301 or the glass plate image 006SG301A (for example, the operation prompting image 006SG310 for the dialogue preview effect or the cut-in effect).

In addition, in the above embodiment, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was exemplified in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and at least a part of the background image are temporarily made invisible to the player by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 as an image above the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a break effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed as an image between the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as the background change effect A and the breaking effect of the reach suggestion effect, a form in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back side to the front side of the display area of the image display device 5 was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as these breaking effects, the image of the character may be drawn and positioned in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figures 127 and 128), so that the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front side to the back side of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a normal flat image in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of a break effect in an effect that suggests that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, such as the strong development effect and the cut-in effect, the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed as a 3D image that can be viewed stereoscopically. In this way, when the strong development effect and the cut-in effect are executed, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as the break effect can make the player realize that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cracking effects of the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be made different between the cracking effects in effects such as the strong development effect and the cut-in effect, which, by being executed, suggest that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, and the cracking effects in effects other than these strong development effect and cut-in effect. By doing this, for example, the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a strong development effect or a cut-in effect can be made slower than the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a first consecutive crack effect, a second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, or a result notification effect, so that when a strong development effect or a cut-in effect is being executed, the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 can make the player recognize that there is a high probability that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 183 and FIG. 184, the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are shown with a transparent fragment image 006SG302, while the pseudo consecutive and weak development effects are shown with a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different between the cracking effect in the effect that suggests that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, such as the strong development effect and the cut-in effect, and the cracking effect in the effect other than these strong development effect and the cut-in effect. In this way, the presence or absence of transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the execution of the cracking effect allows the player to recognize whether the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is high or not.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, and assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a jackpot game state in which game balls can enter the jackpot winning port and more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the start winning port or the general winning port 10 is considered to be an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state or a probability-change state may be considered to be an advantageous state as long as it is a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for game balls to enter the winning port than in a normal state or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot game state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. A gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general gaming machine.

The form for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be further explained below based on the examples. Note that in the following examples, the "variable display" of special symbols and decorative symbols may be referred to as "variable display" or simply "variable."

[Form B1]
The gaming machine of form B1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the state is changed to the completion state, and the change is executed over the specified period to display the reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 290 to 292
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "advantageous state" corresponds to the "jackpot gaming state" in this embodiment.
The "game control means" corresponds to the "CPU 103" in this embodiment.
The "performance execution means" corresponds to the "performance control CPU 120" in this embodiment,
The "reserved memory means" corresponds to the "first special symbol buffer 001SG151" and the "second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.
The "predetermined number" corresponds to "the number of first special chart reserved memories and the number of second special chart reserved memories being four" in this embodiment,
The "start mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
The "completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation" in this embodiment,
The "midway state" corresponds to the "suspended display displayed as the image of the second to nineteenth frames of the appearance animation" in this embodiment,
The "Pending Shift" corresponds to the "Shift Animation" in this embodiment.
The "specific period" corresponds to the "330 ms, which is the display execution period of the shift animation" in this embodiment.
The "predetermined period" corresponds to the "660 ms, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation" in this embodiment.
The "pending display position" corresponds to the "pending memory display area 5U" in this embodiment.

[Form B2]
The gaming machine of form B2 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294

[Form B3]
The gaming machine of form B3 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300

[Form B4]
The gaming machine of form B4 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period of time;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count is shorter than the predetermined period and when a new pending memory is stored not immediately before the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the display is in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 302
In addition, in this embodiment,
"Just before the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "the timing less than 33 ms before the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends."
"Immediately after the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "a timing less than 33 ms after the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 ends."

[Form B5]
The gaming machine of form B5 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states in a stepwise manner and then to the completion state is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion state to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, since the reserved display of the newly stored reserved memory during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, it is not necessary to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, even if the timing is such that the new display of the reserved display overlaps with the reserved display already displayed, the display area used for the gradual change of the new reserved display is larger, so the player can recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 274, Figure 290 to Figure 292

[Form B6]
The gaming machine of form B6 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period of time;
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states in a stepwise manner and then to the completion state is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion state to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, since the reserved display of the newly stored reserved memory during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, it is not necessary to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, even if the timing is such that the new display of the reserved display overlaps with the reserved display already displayed, the display area used for displaying the new reserved display is larger, so the player can recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Fig. 274, Fig. 290, Fig. 291, Fig. 293, Fig. 294

[Form B7]
The gaming machine of form B7 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states in a stepwise manner and then to the completion state is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion state to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, since the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period when the reserved display position moves from the start of the variable display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the player can see the gradual change, and even if the reserved display newly displayed overlaps the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number when the reserved display already displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number moves, the newly displayed reserved display has a larger display area to be used, so the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, even if the timing is such that the newly displayed reserved display overlaps the reserved display already displayed, the display area to be used for displaying the new reserved display is larger, so the player can recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 274, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300

[Form B8]
The gaming machine of form B8 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period of time;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count is shorter than the predetermined period and when a new pending memory is stored not immediately before the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the display is in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, the reserved display is displayed in the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display from the completion state,
A display area used for changing the hold display from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states in a stepwise manner and then to the completion state is larger than a display area used for displaying the hold display during a period from when the hold display is displayed in the completion state to when the hold shift start timing is reached.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display is finished, the reserved memories are not stored until the next variable display is started, so the gradual change for the new reserved memories is not executed, and the player can focus on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the reserved display newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the movement destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if the reserved display that has already been displayed at the predetermined number is superimposed on the reserved display that is newly displayed at the predetermined number when the reserved display that has already been displayed moves, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is wider, so the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, even if the timing is such that the new display of the reserved display is superimposed on the reserved display that is already displayed, the display area used for the gradual change of the new reserved display is wider, so the player can recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 274, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 302

[Form B9]
The gaming machine of form B9 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
When the reserved memory is stored, a winning performance can be executed,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
The winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period; and when the reserved memory number N-hour variable display ends and a new reserved memory is stored before the specific period has elapsed from the reserved shift start timing.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, since the reserved display of the newly stored reserved memory during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, it is not necessary to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, since the winning performance can be executed regardless of whether the gradual change is changed to the completed state, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 290 to 292, Figure 310
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "prize winning effect" corresponds to the "prize winning flash effect."

[Form B10]
The gaming machine of form B10 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
When the reserved memory is stored, a winning performance can be executed,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period of time;
The winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display starts; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display starts; and when a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the reserved memory number N-hour variable display ends and the next variable display starts.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, since the reserved display of the newly stored reserved memory during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, it is not necessary to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, since the winning performance can be executed regardless of whether the gradual change is changed to the completed state, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 310

[Form B11]
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
When the reserved memory is stored, a winning performance can be executed,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new hold memory is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
The winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number N-hour variable display when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number 0-hour variable display when the period until the reserved memory number 0-hour variable display ends is longer than the predetermined period; and when a new reserved memory is stored during execution of the reserved memory number 0-hour variable display when the period until the reserved memory number 0-hour variable display ends is shorter than the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, since the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period in which the reserved display position moves from the start of the variable display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the player can see the gradual change, and even if the reserved display newly displayed at the Nth number position overlaps when the reserved display already displayed at the Nth number position moves, the newly displayed reserved display uses a larger display area, making it easier to see the newly displayed reserved display and preventing misidentification. Furthermore, since the winning performance can be executed regardless of whether or not the gradual change changes to a completed state, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300, Figure 310

[Form B12]
The gaming machine of form B12 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is one state before the completion state,
When the reserved memory is stored, a winning performance can be executed,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When a new hold memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the situation of the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period of time;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing the change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count is shorter than the predetermined period and when a new pending memory is stored not immediately before the end of the variable display at 0 hours of the pending memory count, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0 is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the display is in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display,
When the pending memory number N-hour variable display is being executed, a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is longer than the predetermined period; when the pending memory number N-hour variable display is being executed, a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started; when the pending memory number N-hour variable display is being executed, a new pending memory is stored when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started; when the pending memory number N-hour variable display has ended and a new pending memory has been stored immediately after the next variable display has started; and when the pending memory number 0-hour variable display is being executed. In this case, the winning performance can be executed in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display ends is longer than the predetermined period; when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display ends is shorter than the predetermined period during execution of the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display and the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display is not immediately before the end of the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display; when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display ends is shorter than the predetermined period during execution of the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display and the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display is immediately before the end of the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display; and when a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the reserved memory number at 0 o'clock variable display ends.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display is finished, the reserved memory is not stored until the next variable display is started, so the gradual change for the new reserved memory is not executed, and the player can focus on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the reserved display newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the movement destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completion state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if the reserved display newly displayed at the predetermined number overlaps when the reserved display already displayed at the predetermined number moves, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is wider, so the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, since the winning performance can be executed regardless of whether or not the gradual change is changed to the completion state, the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 302, Figure 310

[Form B13]
The gaming machine of form B13 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode one mode before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is one mode before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the normal start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of normal intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the normal completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode is reached, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the start timing of the reserved shift and the specified period has elapsed, the normal reserved display is displayed by starting the normal reserved display in the normal start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the normal start state to the plurality of normal intermediate states, and then changing to the normal completion state over the specified period, and displaying the normal reserved display;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the start timing of the reserved shift and the specified period has elapsed, the special reserved display is displayed by starting the special reserved display in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the specified period, thereby displaying the special reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the state immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, since the reserved display of the newly stored reserved memory during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, it is not necessary to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, even when the special reserved display is displayed, the rules of the change of the gradual display to the normal completion state or the special completion state and the execution or non-execution of the change are applied in the same way as when the normal reserved display is displayed, so that the reserved memory can be more easily recognized by the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 287, Figure 290 to Figure 292
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "normal hold display" corresponds to the "white hold display due to the decision not to execute the hold change performance" in this embodiment,
The "special hold display" corresponds to the "blue and red hold display due to the decision to execute the hold change performance" in this embodiment,
The "normal start mode" corresponds to the "white hold display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation when the non-execution of the hold change performance is decided" in this embodiment.
The "normal completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation due to the decision not to execute the hold change performance" in this embodiment,
The "normal midway state" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the second to nineteenth frames of the appearance animation due to the decision not to execute the hold change performance" in this embodiment,
The "special start mode" corresponds to the "blue or red hold display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation when the execution of the hold change performance is decided" in this embodiment,
The "special completion mode" in this embodiment corresponds to the "blue or red pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation when the execution of the pending change performance is decided"
The "special intermediate mode" in this embodiment corresponds to "the blue or red hold display that is displayed as the image from the second frame to the nineteenth frame of the appearance animation when it is decided not to execute the hold change performance."

[Form B14]
The gaming machine of form B14 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode one mode before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is one mode before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the normal start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of normal intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the normal completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the specified period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the next variable display is to be started in the normal start mode, the normal hold display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special start mode is in the situation, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special hold display is displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the normal reserved display is displayed by starting the normal reserved display in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal reserved display;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the special reserved display is displayed by starting the special reserved display in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the state immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, for reserved memories stored at the same timing as the start of the variable display, the reserved display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. Furthermore, even when a special reserved display is displayed, the rules of the change of the gradual display to the normal completed state or the special completed state and the execution or non-execution of the change are applied in the same way as when a normal reserved display is displayed, so that the reserved memory can be more easily recognized by the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 287, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294

[Form B15]
The gaming machine of form B15 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is one mode before the normal completion mode;
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is one mode before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the normal start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of normal intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the normal completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode is reached, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is started in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the normal start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode, and the normal reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the special start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changed to the special completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the special reserved display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed, the normal pending display is started in the normal start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the normal pending display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed, the special pending display is started in the special start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the special start mode to a special intermediate mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the special intermediate mode different from the special pre-completion mode is reached, the special pending display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period when the reserved display position moves from the start of the variable display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completion state, and the player can see the gradual change. Also, even if the reserved display that has already been displayed at the Nth position moves and the reserved display newly displayed at the Nth position overlaps, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is larger, so the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, even when a special reserved display is displayed, the rules for the change of the gradual display to the normal completion state or the special completion state and the execution or non-execution of the change are applied in the same way as when a normal reserved display is displayed, so that the reserved memory is easier for the player to recognize.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 287, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300

[Form B16]
The gaming machine of form B16 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, one of a plurality of types of reserved displays including a normal reserved display and a special reserved display having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal reserved display can be displayed;
When the hold memory is stored, the normal hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a normal start mode, a normal completion mode, and a plurality of normal intermediate modes including a normal pre-completion mode which is a mode one mode before the normal completion mode,
When the reserved memory is stored, the special reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a special start mode, a special completion mode, and a plurality of special intermediate modes including a special pre-completion mode which is one mode before the special completion mode,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the variable display of the reserved memory number N, which is a variable display in a situation where the reserved memory number N, which is less than the predetermined number, is stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the normal start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of normal intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the normal completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the special start mode is changed stepwise to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special hold display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, the display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the specified period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the special start mode to a special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special midway mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the normal hold display is displayed, the normal hold display is started in the normal start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the next variable display is to be started in the normal start mode, the normal hold display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal hold display is displayed;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new hold memory is stored and the special hold display is displayed, the special hold display is started in the special start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the special start mode is in the situation, the special hold display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special hold display is displayed;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the normal reserved display is displayed by starting the normal reserved display in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the normal start mode to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changing to the normal completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the normal reserved display;
When the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the special reserved display is displayed by starting the special reserved display in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, gradually changing the special start mode to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changing to the special completion mode over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the special reserved display;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is started in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the normal start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of normal intermediate modes, and then changed to the normal completion mode, and the normal reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the special start mode is gradually changed to the plurality of special intermediate modes, and then changed to the special completion mode, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the special reserved display;
When the period until the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of pending memories is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of pending memories is not immediately in advance, if a new pending memory is stored and the normal pending display is displayed, the normal pending display is started in the normal start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the normal start mode to a normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the normal midway mode different from the normal pre-completion mode is reached, the normal pending display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of pending memories is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of pending memories is not immediately in advance, if a new pending memory is stored and the special pending display is displayed, the special pending display is started in the special start mode at the pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the special start mode to a special intermediate mode different from the special pre-completion mode, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes when the special intermediate mode different from the special pre-completion mode, the special pending display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is immediate, if a new reserved memory is stored and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is started in the normal start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start occurs in the normal start mode, the normal reserved display is changed to the normal completion mode based on the timing and the normal reserved display is displayed;
When the period until the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the 0-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is immediate, if a new reserved memory is stored and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is started in the special start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start occurs in the special start mode, the special reserved display is changed to the special completion mode based on the timing and the special reserved display is displayed;
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display and the normal reserved display is displayed, the normal reserved display is displayed from the normal completion mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display,
When a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, and the special reserved display is displayed, the special reserved display is displayed from the special completion mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display is finished, the reserved memories are not stored until the next variable display is started, so that the gradual change for the new reserved memories is not executed, and the player can focus on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the reserved display newly stored during the specific period in which the reserved display position moves from the start of the variable display is displayed at the display position of the move destination from the beginning, so that the gradual change does not need to be changed to a completion state, and the player can see the gradual change. In addition, even if the reserved display that has already been displayed at the predetermined number is moved and the reserved display newly displayed at the predetermined number is overlapped, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is wider, so that the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. Furthermore, even when a special reserved display is displayed, the rules of the change of the gradual display to the normal completion state or the special completion state and the execution or non-execution of the change are applied in the same way as when a normal reserved display is displayed, so that the player can more easily recognize the reserved memory.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 287, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 302

[Form B17]
The gaming machine of form B17 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode;
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of types of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode intermediate states including a first mode pre-completion state which is one state before the first mode completion state,
When the hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode intermediate states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the first mode start state, and then the first mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then the first mode completion state is changed to the first mode completion state, over the predetermined period.
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the second mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then the second mode completion state is changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode reserved display;
When in the first mode and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at a hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode hold display is displayed;
When in the second mode and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing, and the second mode hold display is displayed;
When the first mode is in progress, the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories ends, and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then changed to the first mode completion state, over the specific period, to display the first mode reserved display,
In the second mode, when the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the second mode reserved display is displayed at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number by starting the second mode reserved display in the second mode start state, gradually changing the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then changing to the second mode completion state over the specified period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, for the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position, the reserved display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, so that the gradual change does not need to be changed to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if the mode of the presentation is different, the rules related to the change of the gradual display to the completed state are applied in the same way, so that the reserved memory can be more easily recognized by the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 290 to 292, Figure 310
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "first mode" corresponds to the "presentation mode A" in this embodiment.
The "second mode" corresponds to the "presentation mode B" in this embodiment.
The "first mode reserved display" corresponds to the "cube reserved display in the performance mode A" in this embodiment.
The "second mode reserved display" corresponds to the "regular octahedron reserved display in the performance mode B" in this embodiment,
The "first mode start mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in the presentation mode A" in this embodiment,
The "first mode completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation in the presentation mode A" in this embodiment,
The "second mode midway state" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the image of the second to nineteenth frames of the appearance animation in the presentation mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode start mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in the presentation mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode completion mode" corresponds to the "hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation in the performance mode B" in this embodiment,
The "second mode midway state" corresponds to the "pending display displayed as images from the second frame to the nineteenth frame of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" in this embodiment.

[Form B18]
The gaming machine of form B18 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode;
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode intermediate states including a first mode pre-completion state which is one state before the first mode completion state,
When the hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode intermediate states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the first mode start state, and then the first mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then the first mode completion state is changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the second mode start state, and then the second mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then the second mode completion state is changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display;
In the first mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is to be started in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing, and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
In the second mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is to be started in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
In the first mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the first mode start state, the first mode reserved display is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
In the second mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is displayed in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the second mode start state, the display is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
In the first mode, when the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states and then changed to the first mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
In the second mode, when the variable display at the time of the Nth reserved memory is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states and then changed to the second mode completion state, and the change is executed over the predetermined period to display the second mode reserved display.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, for the reserved memory newly stored at the same timing as the start of the variable display, the reserved display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to the completed state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if the mode of the presentation is different, the rules related to the change of the gradual display to the completed state are applied in the same way, so that the reserved memory can be more easily recognized by the player.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 310

[Form B19]
The gaming machine of form B19 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode;
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of types of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode intermediate states including a first mode pre-completion state which is one state before the first mode completion state,
When the hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode intermediate states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the first mode start state, and then the first mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then the first mode completion state is changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the second mode start state, and then the second mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then the second mode completion state is changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display;
When in the first mode and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period, in the case where a new hold memory is stored and the first mode hold display is displayed, the first mode hold display is started in the first mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing, and the first mode hold display is displayed;
When in the second mode and the period until the start of the next variable display is shorter than the predetermined period, in the case where a new hold memory is stored and the second mode hold display is displayed, the second mode hold display is started in the second mode start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing, and the second mode hold display is displayed;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states and then changed to the first mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states and then changed to the second mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display;
when in the first mode and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new pending memory is stored and the first mode pending display is displayed, the first mode pending display is started in the first mode start state at a pending display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode pending display is displayed;
When in the second mode and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at a reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, the reserved memory newly stored during the specific period when the reserved display position moves from the start of the variable display is displayed at the display position of the destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completed state, and the player can see the gradual change, and even if the reserved display newly displayed at the Nth position overlaps when the reserved display already displayed at the Nth position moves, the newly displayed reserved display uses a larger display area, making it easier to see the newly displayed reserved display and preventing misidentification. Also, even if the presentation mode is different, the same rules regarding the change of the gradual display to the completed state are applied, so the reserved memory is easier for the player to recognize.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300, Figure 310

[Form B20]
The gaming machine of form B20 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A reservation storage means,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to execute effects corresponding to a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode;
When the hold memory is stored, a plurality of hold displays including a first mode hold display corresponding to the first mode and a second mode hold display corresponding to the second mode can be displayed;
When a hold memory is stored during the first mode, the first mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a first mode start state, a first mode completion state, and a plurality of first mode intermediate states including a first mode pre-completion state which is one state before the first mode completion state,
When the hold memory is stored during the second mode, the second mode hold display can be displayed by gradually changing a second mode start state, a second mode completion state, and a plurality of second mode intermediate states including a second mode pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the second mode completion state,
The reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory already stored during the variable display can be moved from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the first mode start state, and then the first mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of first mode intermediate states, and then the first mode completion state is changed to the first mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number in the second mode start state, and then the second mode start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of second mode intermediate states, and then the second mode completion state is changed to the second mode completion state, and this change is executed over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display;
In the first mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is to be started in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing, and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
In the second mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is to be started in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
In the first mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is displayed in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the first mode start state, the first mode reserved display is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
In the second mode, when the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the next variable display is started, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is displayed in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes in the second mode start state, the display is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
In the first mode, when the variable display of the number of reserved memories N ends and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display starts, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states and then changed to the first mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
In the second mode, when the variable display at the time of the Nth reserved memory is ended and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the next variable display is started, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states and then changed to the second mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display;
During execution of the reserved memory number 0 time variable display, which is a variable display in a situation where reserved memory is not stored,
When the first mode is in progress and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the first mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the first mode start state to the plurality of first mode intermediate states and then changed to the first mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the first mode reserved display;
When the second mode is in progress and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and the second mode reserved display is changed stepwise from the second mode start state to the plurality of second mode intermediate states and then changed to the second mode completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the second mode reserved display;
during the first mode, when the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is not immediately preceding, when a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at a reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the first mode start state to a first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the first mode midway state different from the first mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
during the second mode, when the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is not immediately preceding, when a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start state at a reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and is changed from the second mode start state to a second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display comes in a situation in which the second mode midway state different from the second mode pre-completion state, the state is changed to the second mode completion state based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
When in the first mode and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored and the first mode reserved display is displayed, the first mode reserved display is started in the first mode start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the next variable display to start comes when the first mode is in the first mode start state, the display is changed to the first mode completion state based on the timing and the first mode reserved display is displayed;
When in the second mode and the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is about to end, if a new reserved memory is stored and the second mode reserved display is displayed, the second mode reserved display is started in the second mode start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display, and when the timing for the start of the next variable display occurs in the second mode start mode, the display is changed to the second mode completion mode based on the timing and the second mode reserved display is displayed;
When the first mode is in progress and a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0, the first mode reserved display is displayed at a reserved display position corresponding to the next variable display of the variable display of the number of reserved memories at 0, from the first mode completion state;
In the second mode, when a new reserved memory is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, the second mode reserved display is displayed from the second mode completion state.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit, even if a predetermined variable display is finished, the reserved memory is not stored until the next variable display is started, so the gradual change for the new reserved memory is not executed, and the player can focus on the variable display result of the finished variable display, and the reserved display newly stored during the specific period from the start of the variable display to the movement of the reserved display position is displayed at the display position of the movement destination from the beginning, so there is no need to change the gradual change to a completion state, and the gradual change can be shown to the player. In addition, even if the reserved display that has already been displayed at the predetermined number is moved and the reserved display newly displayed at the predetermined number is overlapped, the display area used by the newly displayed reserved display is wider, so the newly displayed reserved display is easy to see and misrecognition can be prevented. In addition, even if the mode of the performance is different, the rules related to the change to the completion state of the gradual display are applied in the same way, so the reserved memory is easier for the player to recognize.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 302, Figure 310

[Form B21]
The gaming machine of form B21 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area when the game medium passes through the starting area, and thereafter, when the memory of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In particular, in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process. At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 257, Figure 290 to Figure 292
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "performance control means" corresponds to the "performance control CPU 120" in this embodiment.
The "storage means" corresponds to the "RAM 102, particularly the game control data storage area 001SG150" in this embodiment.
The "specific identification information" corresponds to the "eight LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B" in this embodiment,
The "game control means side light emitting means" corresponds to the "LEDs constituting the special chart unit 201, particularly the LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B" in this embodiment, and the "performance control means side light emitting means" corresponds to the "LEDs constituting the first sub-hold indicator 151A and the second sub-hold indicator 151B" in this embodiment.
The "variable display memory area" corresponds to the "entry (storage area) of the reserved number "0" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A or the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.
The "first reserved memory area" corresponds to the "entry (storage area) of reserved numbers "1 to 4" in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.
The "starting area" corresponds to the "first starting winning port (winning ball device 6A) and the "second starting winning port (variable winning ball device 6B)" in this embodiment.

[Form B22]
The gaming machine of form B22 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area when the game medium passes through the starting area, and thereafter, when the memory of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. Also, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In particular, in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 257, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294

[Form B23]
The gaming machine of form B23 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area when the game medium passes through the starting area, and thereafter, when the memory of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero, the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero.
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the variable display of the next specific identification information to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In particular, in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process. At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 257, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300

[Form B24]
The gaming machine of form B24 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area when the game medium passes through the starting area, and thereafter, when the memory of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area,
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is ended and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the variable display of the specific identification information is executed in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is not immediately before being ended, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately before the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information next to the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In particular, in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process. At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 257, Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 302

[Form B25]
The gaming machine of form B25 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a start area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
when the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means includes:
when the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than a predetermined period and when it is shorter, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by executing the control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the granting of game value, first, a stable game environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 290 to 292, 306, and 307
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "display means" corresponds to the "image display device 5" in this embodiment.
The "reserved ball count display" corresponds to the "reserved display displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U" in this embodiment.

[Form B26]
The gaming machine of the form B26 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a start area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
when the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means includes:
when the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than a predetermined period and when it is shorter, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing between immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first and then making the display of the number of reserved balls on the display means visible, the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by executing the control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the granting of game value, first, a stable game environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 306, Figure 307

[Form B27]
The gaming machine of the form B27 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a start area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
when the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means includes:
when the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero, the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero.
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the variable display of the next specific identification information to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first, and then making the reserved ball count display on the display means visible, the reserved memory number can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300, Figure 306, Figure 307

[Form B28]
The gaming machine of form B28 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a start area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
when the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The performance control means includes:
when the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the state of the reserved ball count display becomes a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is ended and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the variable display of the specific identification information is executed in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is not immediately before being ended, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately before the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information next to the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. In addition, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means visible first, and then making the reserved ball count display on the display means visible, the reserved memory number can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 302, Figure 306, Figure 307

[Form B29]
The gaming machine of form B29 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When a variable display of the specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means;
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial state to when the state becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in an intermediate state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to a completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of a change to a completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than a predetermined period or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the state immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, by executing the variable display of the specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to make the player recognize by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to the passage of the game medium through the starting area, and among them, by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the initial state until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figures 290 to 292, Figure 303
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "game control means side light emitting means" in this embodiment is the "LED constituting the special symbol unit 201, in particular the LED constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B."
The "initial state" corresponds to the "state in which the first LED among the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B is lit" in this embodiment.
The "final state" corresponds to the "state in which the eighth LED among the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B is lit" in this embodiment.
The "specific display" corresponds to the "active display" in this embodiment.

[Form B30]
The gaming machine of form B30 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When a variable display of the specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means;
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial state to when the state becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is terminated and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored during the variable display until the start of the next variable display is still in the middle state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs when the period until the start of the next variable display is longer than a predetermined period and when it is shorter, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by distinguishing immediately before and immediately after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. In addition, by executing the variable display of the specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the performance control means side, it is possible to make the player recognize by multiple means that the variable display has started in response to the passage of the game medium through the starting area, and among them, by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display from the initial state until the variable display of the specific identification information becomes the final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 303

[Form B31]
The gaming machine of the form B31 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When a variable display of the specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means;
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial state to when the state becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero, the reserved memory number is zero when the reserved memory number is zero.
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of pending memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the variable display of the next specific identification information to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by distinguishing whether or not the change to the completed state occurs depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be suitably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if there is no predetermined period until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered even when the number of reserved memories is 0, and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. Furthermore, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means side, it is possible to allow multiple means to recognize that the variable display has started in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between the time when the variable display of the specific identification information reaches its initial state and the time when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 299, Figure 300, Figure 303

[Form B32]
The gaming machine of form B32 is
A gaming machine that can variably display specific identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, and a plurality of reserved storage areas up to a predetermined number;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
The performance control means includes:
When a variable display of the specific identification information is executed, a specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed on the display means;
In a situation where information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through a start area, the display of the specific indication is started during the period from when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial state to when the state becomes the final state,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is not being executed, when information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved storage area, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is the state immediately before the completion state,
When the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the reserved memory area can be moved from the reserved display position that has been displayed for a specific period from the reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the variable display of the next specific identification information is started to a reserved display position that corresponds to the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information,
When the reserved memory area stores information regarding the variable display of N specific identification information less than the predetermined number, the reserved memory number N time variable display is executed,
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is longer than a predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the hold display is changed stepwise from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
If information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored when the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is not the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the hold display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the period until the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information is shorter than the predetermined period and is the period immediately before the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start mode at the hold display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and when the timing comes for the start of the variable display of the next specific identification information in the start mode, the hold display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and displayed;
When the variable display of the reserved memory number N is ended and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the variable display of the next specific identification information is started, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, and the reserved display is displayed by executing this change over the predetermined period of time;
When the reserved memory number is 0 and the variable display of the specific identification information is executed in a situation where the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is longer than the predetermined period, if information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the hold display is started in the start state at the hold display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and the hold display is changed in stages from the start state to the plurality of intermediate states and then changed to the completion state over the predetermined period, thereby displaying the hold display;
When the period until the end of the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and when the variable display when the pending memory count is 0 is not immediately before being ended, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored, the pending display is started in the start state at the pending display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, the pending display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed,
When the period until the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 is shorter than the predetermined period and information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately before the end of the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0, the reserved display is started in the start mode at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the next specific identification information, and when the variable display of the next specific identification information is to be started in the start mode, the reserved display is changed to the completion mode based on the timing and the reserved display is displayed;
When information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information is stored immediately after the end of the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0, the reserved display is displayed from the completion state at the reserved display position corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information next to the variable display of the reserved memory number at 0.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the reserved memory stored from the variable display to the start of the next variable display is still in the in-progress state at the start of the variable display, it is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position performed thereafter is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented. In addition, by separating the presence or absence of the change to the completed state depending on whether the period until the start of the next variable display is longer or shorter than a predetermined period, the number of reserved memories and the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, by separating the change immediately before and after the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored can be more preferably shown to the player. Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, if the timing at which a new reserved memory is stored does not have a predetermined period of grace until the start of the next variable display, the gradual change when a new reserved memory is stored is changed to the completed state, so that the movement of the reserved display position is not hindered and the misconception of the number of reserved memories can be prevented even when the number of reserved memories is 0. Furthermore, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means side, it is possible to allow multiple means to recognize that the variable display has started in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between the time when the variable display of the specific identification information reaches its initial state and the time when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 290, Figure 291, Figure 293, Figure 294, Figure 299 to Figure 303

[Form B33]
The gaming machine of the form B33 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on the execution of the variable display of the specific identification information,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on the fact that the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a starting area, the light emitting means on the game control means changes to a state corresponding to the execution of the variable display of specific identification information before the light emitting means on the performance control means changes to a state corresponding to the execution of the variable display of specific identification information.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the light-emitting means on the game control means side visible first, and then making the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side visible, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable display of specific identification information is being performed using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 303
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "multiple reserved memory areas including the first reserved memory area" correspond to the "first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" in this embodiment.

[Form B34]
The gaming machine of form B34 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of a specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area when the game medium passes through the starting area, and thereafter, when the memory of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is changed to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, particularly in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 257

[Form B35]
The gaming machine of the form B35 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of a specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
The performance control means includes:
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side is set to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area based on moving the storage of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area to the variable display memory area,
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of specific identification information, even if the game medium passes through the starting area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side is not changed to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, but is maintained in a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, particularly in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information regarding the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At that time, by changing the state of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side from a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 1 to a state in which the reserved memory number indicates 0, the reserved memory number momentarily changes to a state in which it indicates 1, which prevents the display state from becoming cumbersome and giving the player a sense of discomfort, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 301, Figure 303

[Form B36]
The gaming machine of the form B36 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to display on the display means a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
When information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area, it is possible to display the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to the fact that information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area,
When information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, it is possible to display the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and thereafter, when the variable display of a specific identification information corresponding to the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is completed, the information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area,
The performance control means includes:
when the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the gaming medium passes through the starting area, the method executes control to display the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then to display the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved memory area based on moving the storage of information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area to the variable display memory area,
When the storage means does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, even if the gaming medium passes through the starting area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the reserved ball count display is not displayed in a manner corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved storage area, and the display of the reserved ball count display is maintained in a manner corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information not being stored in the reserved storage area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, particularly in a situation where the variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, in the processing of the game control means, information relating to the variable display of new specific identification information due to passing through the starting area is stored in the memory area in which information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, and then the information is moved to the variable display memory area by a shifting process.At that time, the reserved ball count display of the display means is changed from a display in which the reserved memory number is 1 to a display in which the reserved memory number is 0, so that for just a moment the reserved memory number is displayed as 1, which prevents the reserved ball count display from becoming cumbersome and causing the player to feel uncomfortable, and as a result, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 318

[Form B37]
The gaming machine of the form B37 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information when the gaming medium passes through the starting area,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
when information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the first reserved memory area, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the performance control means changes the state of the light emitting means on the game control means to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then changes the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means to a state corresponding to information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means on the game control means side is made visible first, and then the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side is made visible, so that the number of reserved memories can be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 299, Figure 300

[Form B38]
The gaming machine of the form B38 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a reserved ball count display indicating the number of pieces of information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the storage means,
When information regarding a variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, the game control means can change the state of the light emitting means on the game control means to a state corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of a specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, the presentation control means is capable of displaying the reserved ball count display in a manner corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through a start area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is set to a state corresponding to the information related to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area,
When the variable display memory area stores information relating to the variable display of specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information relating to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the performance control means changes the state of the light emitting means on the game control means to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area, and then changes the state of the reserved ball count display to a state corresponding to information relating to the variable display of specific identification information being stored in the first reserved memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means on the game control means side is made visible first, and then the number of reserved balls displayed on the display means is made visible, allowing the number of reserved memories to be recognized using multiple means, and in particular, by first executing control of the game control means that controls the game, such as the awarding of game value, a stable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 306, Figure 307

[Form B39]
The gaming machine of the form B39 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
the performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a specific display when information regarding a variable display of the specific identification information is stored;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
said performance control means, when the game medium passes through a start area in a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in said storage means, starts displaying said specific indication during a period from when the state of said light emitting means on said game control means side becomes said initial state to when it becomes said final state;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then starting the specific display on the presentation control means side, it is possible to allow multiple means to recognize that the variable display has started in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the display of the specific display corresponding to the variable display between the time when the variable display of the specific identification information reaches its initial state and the time when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 303

[Form B40]
The gaming machine of form B40 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
the game control means is capable of switching the state of the game control means side light emitting means from an initial state to a final state when executing the variable display of the specific identification information, and is capable of executing the switching a plurality of times;
the performance control means is capable of causing the display means to display a variable display of the decorative identification information in response to the variable display of the specific identification information;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
the presentation control means starts the variable display of the decorative identification information during a period from when the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side becomes the initial state to when the light emitting means becomes the final state when the game medium passes through a start area in a situation where information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in the storage means;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by executing a variable display of specific identification information and then executing a variable display of decorative identification information, it is possible to allow the player to recognize by multiple means that the variable display has begun in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area.In particular, by starting the variable display of decorative identification information between the time when the variable display of specific identification information reaches its initial state and the time when it reaches its final state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only the variable display of specific identification information is being executed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 304, Figure 305

[Form B41]
The gaming machine of form B41 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
When the variable display of the specific identification information is executed, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side can be switched from an initial state to a final state, and the switching can be executed multiple times;
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored, the display means can be caused to display the specific display,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
said performance control means, when the game medium passes through a start area in a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in said storage means, starts displaying said specific display during a period from when the state of said performance control means side light emitting means becomes said initial state to when it becomes said final state;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side and then displaying a specific display, it is possible for multiple means to recognize that a variable display has begun in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting to display a specific display between the time when the display mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side becomes the initial mode and the time when it becomes the final mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only a switching of the mode of the light-emitting means on the presentation control means side is being performed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.

[Form B42]
The gaming machine of form B42 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
When the variable display of the specific identification information is executed, the state of the light emitting means on the performance control means side can be switched from an initial state to a final state, and the switching can be executed multiple times;
The display means can display a variable display of the decorative identification information in response to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
said performance control means, when the game medium passes through a starting area in a situation where information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is not stored in said storage means, starts the variable display of said decorative identification information during the period from when the state of said performance control means side light emitting means becomes said initial state to when it becomes said final state;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by switching the mode of the light-emitting means on the performance control means side and then variable displaying the decorative identification information, it is possible for multiple means to recognize that the variable display has begun in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, and by starting the variable display of the decorative identification information between the time when the display mode of the light-emitting means on the performance control means side becomes the initial mode and the time when it becomes the final mode, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling as if only switching of the mode of the light-emitting means on the performance control means side is being performed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 304, Figure 305

[Form B43]
The gaming machine of form B43 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
When information related to the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, an image corresponding to the specific display is moved from a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display a special number of times according to the switching period;
when the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information on the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is terminated, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a specific number of times less than the special number of times in accordance with the switching period to terminate the display of the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating an impression of a moving image that moves an image corresponding to a specific display executed in response to the start of a variable display, rather than a moving image that switches a special number of times with an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area that is executed in response to the end of the variable display, it is possible to create an impression of the gaming medium passing through the starting area, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 270, Figure 299 to Figure 302
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "switching period" corresponds to the "image update period of 33 ms" in this embodiment.
The "special number of times" corresponds to "10 times (shift animation corresponding number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of the shift animation (10 frames)" in this embodiment,
The "specific number of times" corresponds to "five times (number of times corresponding to the end animation) corresponding to the number of frames (five frames) of the end animation" in this embodiment.

[Form B44]
The gaming machine of form B44 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
in a state in which information relating to a variable display of a specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to a variable display of a specific identification information is not stored in the reserved memory area, when a game medium passes through the starting area, an image corresponding to the specific indication is switched a predetermined number of times in accordance with the switching period, and the image corresponding to the specific indication is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area;
when the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the information on the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the variable display memory area is terminated, an image corresponding to the specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area is switched a specific number of times less than the predetermined number of times in accordance with the switching period, and the display of the image corresponding to the specific display is terminated.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating a moving image by switching a predetermined number of times an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area in response to the gaming medium passing through the starting area, rather than a moving image by switching a specific number of times an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area in response to the end of the variable display, it is possible to create a strong impression of the gaming medium passing through the starting area, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 270, Figure 290, Figure 291
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "predetermined number of times" corresponds to "20 times (number of times corresponding to the number of frames of the appearing animation)" in this embodiment.

[Form B45]
The gaming machine of the form B45 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
in a situation where information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area and information relating to the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through the starting area, an image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times in accordance with the switching cycle to display the image corresponding to the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area; and when information relating to the variable display of specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display area, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a predetermined number of times less than the predetermined number in accordance with the switching cycle to move and display the image corresponding to the specific display from the display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating a video by switching an image corresponding to a specific display a predetermined number of times at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area executed in response to the gaming medium passing through the start area, rather than a moving image that moves an image corresponding to a specific display executed in response to the start of a variable display, it is possible to create an impression of the gaming medium passing through the start area, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawing: Figure 270

[Form B46]
The gaming machine of the form B46 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, an image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display N times (N≧30) according to the switching period as one period,
when information relating to a variable display of a specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display area, an image corresponding to the specific display is moved and displayed from a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display a number of times less than N times in accordance with the switching period;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since a player has many opportunities to view a moving image in which an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area is displayed N times, a smooth moving image can be created by increasing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, and since a player has few opportunities to view a moving image in which an image corresponding to a specific display executed in response to the start of a variable display is moved, a sense of speed can be conveyed while conveying the movement by reducing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 270 and modified examples

[Form B47]
The gaming machine of the form B47 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, an image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display N times (N≧30) according to the switching period as one period,
when variable display of specific identification information is not being executed and information regarding variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, when a game medium passes through a start area, an image corresponding to the specific indication is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved storage area by switching the image corresponding to the specific indication a number of times less than N times in accordance with the switching period;
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the technician has many opportunities to view the moving image, which has N times of images corresponding to a specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the first pending memory area, by increasing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, a smooth moving image can be produced.Since the technician has few opportunities to view the moving image, which is generated by switching images corresponding to a specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the first pending memory area in response to the game medium passing through the starting area, by reducing the number of switches according to the switching cycle, a sense of speed can be created while conveying that a new specific display is being displayed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 270 and modified examples

[Form B48]
The gaming machine of the form B48 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed,
When the variable display of the specific identification information is completed, if information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, the variable display of the next specific identification information can be executed;
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area, an image corresponding to the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area by switching the image corresponding to the specific display N times (N≧30) according to the switching period as one period,
when the variable display of the specific identification information is terminated, the image corresponding to the specific display is switched a number of times less than N times in accordance with the switching period, thereby terminating the display of the image corresponding to the specific display displayed at the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since a player has many opportunities to view a moving image in which an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the first pending memory area is displayed N times, a smooth moving image can be created by increasing the number of switches according to the switching cycle.Since a player has few opportunities to view a moving image resulting from switching of an image corresponding to a specific display displayed at a display position corresponding to the variable display area in response to the end of the variable display, a reduced number of switches according to the switching cycle can convey the end while creating a sense of speed, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 270 and modified examples

[Form B49]
The gaming machine of the form B49 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means,
The performance control means is capable of performing control to cause the display means to display a specific display when information regarding a variable display of the specific identification information is stored,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
When the variable display memory area stores information related to the variable display of the specific identification information and the first reserved memory area does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information related to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved memory area;
The performance control means includes:
When information regarding the variable display of specific identification information is not stored in the storage means, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the game medium passed through the starting area, the display of the specific indication is displayed in a manner with low transparency at the display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved memory area is moved to the variable display memory area, thereby moving the specific indication displayed at the display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area to the display position corresponding to the variable display memory area,
when information regarding a variable display of specific identification information is stored in the variable display memory area, after the predetermined period of time from when the game medium has passed through the starting area, the specific display is started to be displayed in a high-transparency manner at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and then, the specific display is displayed by executing an appearance animation that changes the high-transparency manner to a low-transparency manner.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in a situation where a variable display is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the display mode of the specific display is made to have a low transmittance and is easy to recognize in order to quickly communicate that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area, and in a situation where there is no reserved memory but the variable display is being executed, attention is also being paid to the variable display, so in order to prevent a sudden display making it difficult to understand that a specific display has been made, the display is made gradually, so that the passage of the gaming medium through the starting area can be communicated using an appearance animation, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 272, Figure 273, Figure 276, Figure 277, Figure 283

[Form B50]
The gaming machine of form B50 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a demonstration display,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
When the storage means does not store information related to the variable display of the specific identification information, the demonstration display can be displayed.
when the game medium passes through the starting area while the demonstration display is being displayed, the display of the demonstration display is terminated, and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and a moving animation is started in the next switching cycle in which the specific display is displayed, for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by clearing the demonstration display and temporarily displaying the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and then moving it to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area, it is possible to easily communicate that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area during the demonstration display, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 304, Figure 305
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "demonstration display" corresponds to the "demonstration display performance" in this embodiment.

[Form B51]
The gaming machine of the form B51 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means;
A storage means, and the performance control means
It is possible to display moving images by switching the images according to a switching cycle.
It is possible to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display guidance displays regarding the performance settings,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a first storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the first reserved storage area, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information stored in the first reserved storage area is moved to the variable display storage area;
The performance control means includes:
When the storage means does not store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information, the guidance display can be displayed,
when the game medium passes through the starting area while the guidance display is being displayed, the display of the guidance display is terminated, and the specific display is displayed at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and a moving animation is started in the next switching cycle in which the specific display is displayed, for moving the specific display to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by clearing the guidance display and temporarily displaying the specific display at a display position corresponding to the first reserved memory area, and then moving it to a display position corresponding to the variable display memory area, it is possible to easily communicate that the gaming medium has passed through the starting area while the guidance display is being displayed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 308, Figure 309
In addition, in this embodiment,
The "guidance display" corresponds to the "menu guide display" in this embodiment.

[Form B52]
The gaming machine of the form B52 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
the storage means has a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information on the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, as an area for storing information on the variable display of the specific identification information;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
When the game control means is executing the variable display of the specific identification information and the game medium passes through the starting area, the game control means stores information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information in the reserved memory area, transmits a specific command corresponding to the stored information to the performance control means, and then executes a process of updating the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side;
The performance control means executes a process of updating the mode of the performance control means side light emitting means based on the received specific command.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the game control means first sends a specific command to the presentation control means, and then performs processing to update the state of the game control means side light-emitting means which is controlled by the game control means itself, thereby making it possible to prevent too much of a gap between changes in the state of the game control means side light-emitting means even when changes are made sequentially, thereby providing a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 260, Figure 290 to Figure 294
In this embodiment, the "specific command" corresponds to the "pending memory count notification command" in this embodiment.

[Form B53]
The gaming machine of the form B53 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means, and a performance control means side light emitting means controlled by the performance control means,
the storage means has a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information on the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area, as an area for storing information on the variable display of the specific identification information;
The game control means is capable of changing the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side based on information on the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The performance control means is capable of changing the state of the performance control means side light emitting means based on information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information being stored in the reserved memory area,
The game control means includes:
When the game medium passes through a start area while the variable display of the specific identification information is being executed, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information is stored in the reserved memory area, and then, based on the start of the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the passage, information relating to the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the passage is moved to the variable display memory area, a specific command corresponding to the movement is transmitted to the performance control means, and a process of updating the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is executed;
The performance control means executes a process of updating the mode of the performance control means side light emitting means based on the received specific command.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the game control means first sends a specific command to the presentation control means, and then performs a process to update the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side which is controlled by the game control means itself, so that even when changes in the state of the light-emitting means on the game control means side corresponding to a reduction in the number of reserved memories are made sequentially, it is possible to prevent a period of time from being too long, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable gaming environment.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 260, Figure 290 to Figure 294
In this embodiment, the "specific command" corresponds to the "pending memory count notification command" in this embodiment.

[Form B54]
The gaming machine of the form B54 is
A gaming machine that variably displays specific identification information,
A game control means;
A main status indicator light;
A storage means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
The plurality of light emitting means include a game control means side light emitting means controlled by the game control means,
The storage means includes:
It is possible to store information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information when the gaming medium passes through the starting area,
a plurality of storage areas including a variable display storage area and a plurality of reserved storage areas including a first reserved storage area which is an area for storing information related to the variable display of the specific identification information subsequent to the variable display storage area;
The game control means includes:
When executing the variable display of the specific identification information, the mode of the light emitting means on the game control means side is updated;
If the storage means does not store information related to the variable display of specific identification information, when the game medium passes through the starting area, information related to the variable display of specific identification information is stored in the storage means based on the passing, and then a variable display period setting process is performed to set a variable display period of the variable display of specific identification information based on the passing, and then the state of the light emitting means on the game control means side is updated, and then a subtraction process is started to subtract the variable display period of the specific identification information set in the variable display period setting process.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light-emitting means on the game control means side is first set to a mode that indicates the execution of a variable display, and then the variable display period is subtracted, so that the variable display period can be subtracted while showing the player that a variable display is being performed, and as a result, a suitable gaming environment can be provided.
Corresponding drawings: Figure 260, Figure 290 to Figure 294

(Correspondence between the present invention and this embodiment)
In this embodiment, the "jackpot game state" corresponds to the "advantageous state" of the present invention, the "CPU 103" corresponds to the "game control means" of the present invention, the "performance control CPU 120" corresponds to the "performance execution means" of the present invention, the "first special symbol buffer 001SG151" and the "second special symbol buffer 001SG151B" correspond to the "reserved memory means" of the present invention, the "number of first special symbol reserved memories and the number of second special symbol reserved memories being four" corresponds to the "predetermined number" of the present invention, and the "reserved display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation" corresponds to the "start mode" of the present invention. Furthermore, the ``hold display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation'' corresponds to the ``completion mode'' of the present invention, the ``hold display displayed as the 2nd frame image of the appearance animation to the 19th frame image of the appearance animation'' corresponds to the ``intermediate mode'' of the present invention, the ``shift animation'' corresponds to the ``hold shift'' of the present invention, the ``330 ms which is the display execution period of the shift animation'' corresponds to the ``specific period'' of the present invention, and the ``660 ms which is the display execution period of the appearance animation'' corresponds to the ``predetermined period'' of the present invention.

In addition, "the timing less than 33 ms before the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "immediately before the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" in this invention, and "the timing less than 33 ms after the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" corresponds to "immediately after the variable display when the number of reserved memories is 0 ends" in this invention.

In addition, the "flash effect when winning" corresponds to the "winning effect" of this invention.

In addition, a "white hold display caused by a decision not to execute a hold change performance" corresponds to the "normal hold display" of the present invention, a "blue and red hold displays caused by a decision to execute a hold change performance" corresponds to the "special hold display" of the present invention, a "white hold display displayed as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation caused by a decision not to execute a hold change performance" corresponds to the "normal start mode" of the present invention, a "hold display displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the first frame of the shift animation caused by a decision not to execute a hold change performance" corresponds to the "normal completion mode" of the present invention, and a "hold display displayed from the second frame of the appearance animation caused by a decision not to execute a hold change performance" corresponds to the "normal completion mode" of the present invention. The "pending display displayed as the 19th frame image" corresponds to the "normal midway mode" of the present invention, the "blue or red pending display displayed as the 1st frame image of the appearance animation when it is decided to execute a pending change performance" corresponds to the "special start mode" of the present invention, the "blue or red pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the 1st frame image of the shift animation when it is decided to execute a pending change performance" corresponds to the "special completion mode" of the present invention, and the "blue or red pending display displayed as the 2nd to 19th frame images of the appearance animation when it is decided not to execute a pending change performance" corresponds to the "special midway mode" of the present invention.

In addition, "presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode" of the present invention, "presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode" of the present invention, the "cube pending display in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode pending display" of the present invention, the "regular octahedron pending display in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode pending display" of the present invention, the "pending display displayed as the first frame image of the appearance animation in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode start mode" of the present invention, the "pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the first frame image of the shift animation in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode completion mode" of the present invention, and the "pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation and the first frame image of the shift animation in presentation mode A" corresponds to the "first mode completion mode" of the present invention. "The hold display displayed as the image of the 2nd to 19th frames of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode midway mode" of the present invention, "the hold display displayed as the image of the 1st frame of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode start mode" of the present invention, "the hold display displayed as the image of the 20th frame of the appearance animation and the image of the 1st frame of the shift animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode completion mode" of the present invention, and "the hold display displayed as the image of the 2nd to 19th frames of the appearance animation in presentation mode B" corresponds to the "second mode midway mode" of the present invention.

In addition, the "performance control CPU 120" corresponds to the "performance control means" of the present invention, the "RAM 102, particularly the game control data holding area 001SG150" corresponds to the "storage means" of the present invention, the "eight LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B" correspond to the "specific identification information" of the present invention, the "LEDs constituting the special pattern unit 201, particularly the LEDs constituting the first hold display device 25A and the second hold display device 25B" correspond to the "game control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, and the "LEDs constituting the first sub-hold display device 151A and the second sub-hold display device 151B" correspond to the "specific identification information" of the present invention. ED" corresponds to the "performance control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, the "entry (storage area) of reserved number "0" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" corresponds to the "variable display memory area" of the present invention, the "entry (storage area) of reserved numbers "1-4" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" corresponds to the "first reserved memory area" of the present invention, and the "first start winning port (winning ball device 6A) and the second start winning port (variable winning ball device 6B)" correspond to the "start area" of the present invention.

In addition, the "image display device 5" corresponds to the "display means" of the present invention, and the "reserved display displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U" corresponds to the "reserved ball count display" of the present invention.

In addition, "the LEDs constituting the special pattern unit 201, particularly the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B" correspond to the "game control means side light emitting means" of the present invention, "the state in which the first LED among the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is lit" corresponds to the "initial state" of the present invention, "the state in which the eighth LED among the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is lit" corresponds to the "final state" of the present invention, and "active display" corresponds to the "specific display" of the present invention.

In addition, the "first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B" correspond to the "multiple reserved memory areas including the first reserved memory area" of the present invention.

In addition, the "image update period of 33 ms" corresponds to the "switching period" of the present invention, the "10 times (shift animation corresponding number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of the shift animation (10 frames)" corresponds to the "special number of times" of the present invention, the "5 times (end animation corresponding number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of the end animation (5 frames)" corresponds to the "specific number of times" of the present invention, and the "20 times (appearance animation corresponding number of times) corresponding to the number of frames of the appearance animation (20 frames)" corresponds to the "predetermined number of times" of the present invention.

In addition, the "demo display effect" corresponds to the "demonstration display" of the present invention, the "menu guidance display" corresponds to the "guidance display" of the present invention, and the "pending memory count notification command" corresponds to the "specific command" of the present invention.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 219 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

A special symbol unit 201 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 219). As shown in FIG. 236 (A), the special symbol unit 201 is composed of a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B, a first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, a normal symbol display device 20, a normal reserve indicator 25C, a round number indicator 26, a win indicator light 27, a right hit indicator light 28, and a status indicator light 29.

(Special pattern display device)
The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of eight LEDs, and the second special symbol display device 4B is also composed of eight LEDs. Each of the eight LEDs is called specific identification information (special symbol). A group of eight LEDs is called multiple types of specific identification information (multiple types of special symbols). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are devices that variably display multiple types of special symbols when a winning entry occurs in the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole (when the starting condition is met), and indicate a "jackpot" or a "loss" when the combination of special symbols (combination of the eight LEDs being lit or turned off) becomes a combination that is predetermined by the pachinko game machine 1.

(Variable display of special symbols)
The "variable display" of the special symbols indicates the period until the special symbol combination appears by turning on and off the eight LEDs according to a predetermined rule. Note that the variable display may also be expressed as a fluctuating display or a fluctuating.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." In addition, a special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays special patterns.

(Reserved indicator)
The first reserved indicator 25A and the second reserved indicator 25B are each composed of two LEDs. The first reserved indicator 25A displays the first reserved memory number by the number of LEDs lit and the lighting state, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number by the number of LEDs lit and the lighting state. For example, the first reserved indicator 25A and the second reserved indicator 25B indicate that the number of reserved memories is one by lighting only the first LED, indicate that the number of reserved memories is two by lighting the first and second LEDs, indicate that the number of reserved memories is three by blinking the first LED while lighting the second LED, and indicate that the number of reserved memories is four by blinking both the first LED and the second LED.

(Normal pattern display)
The normal symbol display 20 is composed of four LEDs, and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

The regular game reserve indicator 25C is composed of, for example, two LEDs, and displays the regular game reserve memory number, which is the number of regular games that are reserved for execution, by the number of lit LEDs and the lighting state. For example, the regular game reserve indicator 25C indicates that the regular game reserve memory number is 1 by lighting only the first LED, indicates that the regular game reserve memory number is 2 by lighting the first and second LEDs, indicates that the regular game reserve memory number is 3 by blinking the first LED while lighting the second LED, and indicates that the regular game reserve memory number is 4 by blinking both the first and second LEDs.

(Round number indicator)
The round number indicator 26 is composed of five LEDs, and the combination of these LEDs being on and off indicates the number of rounds in a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later. The win indicator light 27, the right-hit indicator light 28, and the status indicator light 29 are each one LED. The win indicator light 27 is an LED that is lit during a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later, the right-hit indicator light 28 is an LED that is lit during a time-saving state, a probability variable state, and a jackpot gaming state, which will be described later, and the status indicator lights are LEDs that are lit during a time-saving state and a probability variable state, which will be described later.

(Image display device)
As shown in Fig. 219, an image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there are provided display areas (holding memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding to a variable display. In this embodiment, a hold memory display area 5U common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided, but a first special pattern hold memory display area in which a first hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special pattern is pending is displayed, and a second special pattern hold memory display area in which a second hold display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special pattern is pending may be provided separately. In this embodiment, the hold memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the first special pattern when the game state is in a normal state, and is a display area that displays a hold display corresponding to the second special pattern when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state. Furthermore, the active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state.

(Winning ball device)
A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started. Note that the winning ball device 6A in this embodiment is positioned so that game balls shot by the player that flow down the area to the left of the image display device 5 (left game area) can win a prize.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 220). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric device having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 219, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), normal winning openings 10 are provided that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the normal winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 220), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the normal prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the normal winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning into the start port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning. In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged so that, among the game balls shot by the player, game balls that flow down the area to the right of the image display device 5 (right game area) can win, and game balls that flow down the area to the left of the image display device 5 (left game area) cannot win or have difficulty winning.

(Passing gate)
A passing gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a regular game is executed.

(Outlet)
In addition to the above configuration, a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the game balls and a number of obstacle nails are provided on the surface of the game board 2. At the bottom of the game area, an outlet is provided to take in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

(Other production equipment)
Speakers 8L, 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the gaming board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 219), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided, and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. An attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also called "board lamps". The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are composed of LEDs (see FIG. 220). The various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the play area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 220).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 220).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variable display time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuating time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the efficiency of fluctuation of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability variable state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed to make the probability of the display result being a "jackpot" higher than in the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, since it is a state in which the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation is improved and a "jackpot" is more likely to occur. The details will be described later, but the probability variable state in this embodiment is a game state in which the average special symbol variable display time is shorter than in the time-saving state.

In other words, the normal state in this embodiment is a game state in which the first special symbol is variably displayed by the player mainly shooting the game ball toward the game area on the left side of the image display device 5 (left game area), and the time-saving state and the probability change state in this embodiment are game states in which the second special symbol is variably displayed by the player mainly shooting the game ball toward the game area on the right side of the image display device 5 (right game area). Also, the jackpot game state in this embodiment is a game state in which the player mainly shoots the game ball toward the game area on the right side of the image display device 5 (right game area) to make the game ball enter the jackpot opening, thereby obtaining the payout of many prize balls.

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The normal state in this embodiment is a game state in which the player shoots the game ball mainly toward the left game area, allowing the game ball to win in the first start winning slot, but making it difficult or impossible for the game ball to win in the second start winning slot. The time-saving state and probability-change state in this embodiment are game states in which the player shoots the game ball mainly toward the right game area, allowing the game ball to win in the second start winning slot, but making it difficult or impossible for the game ball to win in the first start winning slot.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 220 and Fig. 221. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a serial communication circuit 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes an input port 105a to which various signals from, for example, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the normal winning port switch 24, and a magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, proximity sensor, and frame proximity sensor (not shown) for detecting errors are input via a switch circuit 110, and an output port 105b to which signals for controlling (driving) the solenoids 81, 82 and the various displays, display devices, and indicator lights that make up the special chart unit 201 are output (transmitted) via an output circuit 111.

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the normal winning port switch 24, and transmits them to the input port 105a. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

In this embodiment, the gate switch 21 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the first start port switch 22A is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the first start entry port, the second start port switch 22B is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the second start entry port, the count switch 23 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the large entry port, and the normal entry port switch 24 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has entered the normal entry port 10.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (such as a signal to turn on solenoid 81 or solenoid 82) from the output circuit 111 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The serial communication circuit 106 communicates serially with the CPU (performance control CPU 120 in the case of the performance control board 12) of each control board (for example, a payout control board or performance control board 12, not shown) in a data format using full duplex, asynchronous and standard NRZ (non-return zero) coding. The serial communication circuit 106 includes a transmitting section that transmits various data (for example, a payout signal (a prize ball number command) or a performance control command) to the microcomputer of each control board, and a receiving section that receives various data (for example, a prize ball ACK command) from the microcomputer of each control board.

In addition, an external RAM 107 for temporarily storing data to be processed by the game control microcomputer 100 is also provided on the main board 11 in this embodiment. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the main board 11 is also connected to a setting key switch for switching the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 to a setting value setting state in which the setting value can be set, a setting changeover switch that functions as a touch switch for changing the setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) described later in the setting value setting state, a door/frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3, and a display monitor that can display the base value of this pachinko game machine. The setting key switch, setting changeover switch, and display monitor are provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 so that they cannot be operated by the player.

A payout control board (not shown) is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. The payout control board is connected to a payout device that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on receiving a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device pass, and it is possible to stop driving the payout device depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor.

The payout control board is also connected to a handle sensor for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board controls a launching device capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. A signal indicating whether the touch ring has been detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device are also input from the payout control board to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a performance based on a detection signal (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and which appropriately indicates the content of the operation) from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B. In addition, a vibration motor 36 is provided in the push button 31B. The vibration motor 36 is connected to the performance control board 12, and can be driven by receiving a drive signal from the performance control CPU 120. In other words, the push button 31B in this embodiment may vibrate when the vibration motor 36 is driven.

Furthermore, a performance display unit 202 is provided at the lower right position of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 236(C), the performance display unit 202 is composed of a first performance indicator light 152A and a second performance indicator light 152B, a first sub-hold indicator 151A and a second sub-hold indicator 151B, and a right hit lamp 153.

The first performance indicator light 152A is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of the first special symbol is in progress, and the second performance indicator light 152B is a display device that allows the player to recognize that the variable display of the second special symbol is in progress. Each of these is composed of one LED.

The first sub-reserved indicator 151A is an indicator for making it possible to specify the number of reserved first special charts, and the second sub-reserved indicator 151B is an indicator for making it possible to specify the number of reserved second special charts. Each of these is composed of two LEDs, and the number of reserved first special charts or the number of reserved second special charts can be displayed depending on the number of LEDs that are lit and the lighting state of these LEDs. For example, the first sub-reserved indicator 151A or the second sub-reserved indicator 151B indicates that the number of reserved special charts is one by lighting only the first LED, indicates that the number of reserved special charts is two by lighting the first and second LEDs, indicates that the number of reserved special charts is three by flashing the first LED while lighting the second LED, and indicates that the number of reserved special charts is four by flashing both the first and second LEDs.

The right hit lamp 153 is a single LED that lights up during the time-saving state, the special state, and the jackpot game state.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

As shown in FIG. 222, the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, so the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image drawing area, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image drawing area, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 223, the VRAM area includes an active display image drawing area for drawing and arranging an active display in the active display area 5F and a first reserved display that moves as a shift animation from the reserved memory display area 5U toward the active display area 5F, a first reserved display image drawing area for drawing and arranging a first reserved display according to the game status in the reserved memory display area 5U and a second reserved display that moves as a shift animation toward the display position of the first reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U, a second hold display image drawing area for drawing and arranging a hold display according to the game status in the hold memory display area 5U and a third hold display that moves as a shift animation toward the display position of the second hold display in the hold memory display area 5U; a third hold display image drawing area for drawing and arranging a third hold display according to the game status in the hold memory display area 5U and a fourth hold display that moves as a shift animation toward the display position of the third hold display in the hold memory display area 5U; and a fourth hold display image drawing area for drawing and arranging a fourth hold display according to the game status in the hold memory display area 5U.

In this embodiment, in addition to the images drawn and arranged in the active display image drawing area and the first pending display image drawing area to the fourth pending display image drawing area, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing images drawn and arranged in the background image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image and the decorative pattern image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern image. Also, as shown in FIG. 223, in the active display image drawing area and the first pending display image drawing area to the fourth pending display image drawing area, the display priority of the image drawn in the active display image drawing area is set to the highest, the image drawn in the first pending display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the active display image drawing area, the image drawn in the second pending display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the first pending display image drawing area, the image drawn in the third pending display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the second pending display image drawing area, and the image drawn in the fourth pending display image drawing area is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the third pending display image drawing area.

In other words, of the images related to the hold display and active display, the image displayed in the display position of the fourth hold display is the image displayed at the lowest level, the image displayed in the display position of the third hold display and the image of the fourth hold display moving toward the display position of the third hold display are images displayed in a higher level (priority display) than the image displayed in the display position of the fourth hold display, and the image displayed in the display position of the second hold display and the image of the third hold display moving toward the display position of the second hold display are images displayed in a higher level (priority display) than the image displayed in the display position of the third hold display and the image of the fourth hold display moving toward the display position of the third hold display. The image displayed in the display position of the first hold display and the image of the second hold display moving toward the display position of the first hold display are images displayed (priority displayed) above the image displayed in the display position of the second hold display and the image of the third hold display moving toward the display position of the second hold display, and the image displayed in the display position of the active display (active display area 5F) and the image of the first hold display moving toward the display position of the active display are images displayed (priority displayed) above the image displayed in the display position of the first hold display and the image of the second hold display moving toward the display position of the first hold display.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently on the display screen of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 224 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 224 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 224(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start specification that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start specification that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern specification command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 224(B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type the jackpot type will be if the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 224(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change of the decorative pattern in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state), and command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, probability variable state). Furthermore, the high probability, high base state may simply be called the "high probability state."

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "0" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first special chart reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first special chart reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second special chart reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second special chart reserved memory number so that the number of reserved special charts can be specified. The first special chart reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port winning designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second special chart reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port winning designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and the second special chart reserved memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special chart game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the reserved memory number decreases).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (prize-winning judgment result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning judgment result. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern designation command that indicates the result of the winning judgment as to whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden probability win). Command C6XXH is a miss presentation pattern command that indicates the result of the winning judgment as to whether the winning judgment result will be a reach in the losing variable display (whether a reach presentation will be executed) and which type of reach will be executed (whether a normal reach reach presentation or a super reach reach presentation will be executed).

Instead of the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and the second special chart reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command that notifies the total reserved memory number may be sent. In other words, the total reserved memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total reserved memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 224(A) are just an example, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning port, a gate passage notification command for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control is executed, etc. may be provided.

Figure 225 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 225, on the main board 11 side, the following numerical data are controlled to be countable: random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, random number value MR3 for determining the miss performance, random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern, random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, random number value MR6 for determining the normal chart display result, and random number value MR7 for determining the initial value of the random number values MR1 and MR6 mentioned above. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR7. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR7 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter other than the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 described below.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining a miss effect is a random number value used to determine in advance whether a reach will occur in a variable display where the variable display is a miss, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example. The random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern is a random number value used to determine in advance whether a normal reach will occur or a super reach will occur when a variable display where the variable display is a miss becomes a reach, and the type of super reach that will be executed, and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR5 for determining the change pattern is a random number value used to determine the change pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR6 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and can take a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR7 for determining the initial value is a random number value used to determine the initial value of the random number value MR1 and the random number value MR7 described above, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example.

Figure 225 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table 22, when the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state so that when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot game state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 227 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. Also, Figure 227 (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. The contents are the same as Figures 6 (A) and 6 (B), so the explanation is omitted.

Figure 228 shows an example of the configuration of a miss performance judgment table stored in ROM 101. The miss performance judgment table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced when it is determined that the special chart display result is a "miss", to determine whether the miss performance should be non-reach or reach, in other words, whether or not to execute a reach performance in the variable display, based on the random number value MR3 for miss performance judgment. For example, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 85, the miss performance is determined to be non-reach (reach performance is not executed), and if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 86 to 100, the miss performance is determined to be reach (reach performance is executed).

Figures 229 (A) to 229 (C) show an example of the configuration of a variation pattern type determination table stored in ROM 101. The variation pattern type determination table is a table for determining whether the reach (variation pattern type) to be executed will be a normal reach, a super reach α, a super reach β, or a super reach γ when the miss performance determination table determines that the miss performance is a reach (executing a reach performance). In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table to be selected varies depending on the game state.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 229 (A) to 229 (C), when the gaming state is normal (low probability low base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table A and the value of the random number value MR4, when the gaming state is time-saving (low probability high base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table B and the value of the random number value MR4, and when the gaming state is high probability state (high probability high base state), the fluctuation pattern type is determined based on the fluctuation pattern type determination table C and the value of the random number value MR4. In addition, determining the type of variation pattern to be normal reach means determining that a normal reach reach effect will be executed during the variable display and result in a miss, determining the type of variation pattern to be super reach α means determining that a super reach α reach effect will be executed during the variable display and result in a miss, determining the type of variation pattern to be super reach β means determining that a super reach β reach effect will be executed during the variable display and result in a miss, and determining the type of variation pattern to be super reach γ means determining that a super reach γ reach effect will be executed during the variable display and result in a miss.

For example, as shown in FIG. 229(A), when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 80, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be normal reach, if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 81 to 95, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be super reach α, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 96 to 100, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be super reach β. Also, as shown in FIG. 229(B), when the game state is time-saving state (low probability high base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 80, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be normal reach, and if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 81 to 100, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be super reach γ. Also, as shown in FIG. 229(C), when the game state is probability variable state (high probability high base state), if the value of the random number MR4 is within the range of 1 to 100, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be normal reach.

Figures 230 (A) to 230 (C) show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), the time-saving state (low probability high base state), or the probability change state (high probability high base state), and when the variable display result is "miss", a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and for the case where the variable display result is "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called the non-reach variation pattern (also called the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called the reach variation pattern (also called the "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the miss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: normal reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a super reach is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state), as shown in FIG. 230 (A), there are a variation pattern (PA1-1) in which the special chart variable display time is 12,000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA1-2) in which the special chart variable display time is 5,750 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA1-3) in which the special chart variable display time is 3,750 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA2-1A) in which the special chart variable display time is 25,000 ms and the result is a normal reach miss, and a variation pattern (PA2-2A) in which the special chart variable display time is 25,000 ms and the result is a decorative pattern during the variable display. A variation pattern (PA2-1B) in which a pseudo consecutive performance including a temporary stop and a re-variable display is executed once, followed by a miss to a normal reach; a variation pattern (PA2-2A) in which the special chart variable display time is 60,000 ms, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once, followed by a miss to a super reach α via a normal reach; a variation pattern (PA2-2B) in which the special chart variable display time is 65,000 ms, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, followed by a miss to a super reach α via a normal reach; a variation pattern (PA2-3) in which the special chart variable display time is 70,000 ms, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, followed by a miss to a super reach α via a normal reach. A variation pattern (PA2-3A) in which the special chart variable display time is 75,000 ms, and after three pseudo consecutive performances, a normal reach is followed by a super reach β miss (PA2-3B); a variation pattern (PB1-1A) in which the special chart variable display time is 20,000 ms and a normal reach jackpot is reached after a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once (PB1-1B); a variation pattern (PB1-1B) in which the special chart variable display time is 60,000 ms, and after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed, a normal reach is followed by a super reach There are variation patterns (PB1-2A) where the special chart variable display time is 65,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, the normal reach results in a Super Reach α jackpot (PB1-2B), where the special chart variable display time is 70,000 ms, and after two pseudo consecutive performances, the normal reach results in a Super Reach β jackpot (PB1-3A), and where the special chart variable display time is 75,000 ms, and after three pseudo consecutive performances, the normal reach results in a Super Reach β jackpot (PB1-3B).

In addition, when the game state is in the time-saving state (low probability high base state), as shown in FIG. 230 (B), there are a variation pattern (PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is 7000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA1-5) in which the special chart variable display time is 2000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA2-4A) in which the special chart variable display time is 10000 ms and the result is a normal reach miss after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed (PA2-4B), a variation pattern (PA2-5A) in which the special chart variable display time is 30000 ms and the result is a super reach γ miss after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed via a normal reach, and a variation pattern (PA2-5B) in which the special chart variable display time is 35000 ms and the result is a non-reach miss after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed. There are variation patterns (PA2-5B) in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, followed by a normal reach and a miss on the Super Reach γ; a variation pattern (PB1-4A) in which the special chart variable display time is 10,000 ms and results in a normal reach jackpot; a variation pattern (PB1-4B) in which the special chart variable display time is 15,000 ms and results in a normal reach jackpot after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed; a variation pattern (PB1-5A) in which the special chart variable display time is 30,000 ms and results in a super reach γ jackpot after one pseudo consecutive performance is executed via a normal reach; and a variation pattern (PB1-5B) in which the special chart variable display time is 35,000 ms and results in a super reach γ jackpot after two pseudo consecutive performances are executed via a normal reach.

Furthermore, when the game state is a probability state (high probability high base state), as shown in FIG. 230(C), there are provided a variation pattern (PA1-6) in which the special chart variable display time is 3000 ms and results in a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA1-7) in which the special chart variable display time is 500 ms and results in a non-reach miss, a variation pattern (PA2-6) in which the special chart variable display time is 5000 ms and results in a normal reach miss, and a variation pattern (PB1-6) in which the special chart variable display time is 5000 ms and results in a normal reach jackpot.

In this embodiment, the expectation of a jackpot, where the variable display result is a "jackpot", is set to be higher in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-reach, so that in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variable display time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Furthermore, when the game state is in the normal state, the expectation of a jackpot, where the variable display result is a "jackpot", is set to be higher for Super Reach β than for Super Reach α.

In addition, in this embodiment, these fluctuation patterns are determined using the random number value MR5 for judging the fluctuation pattern, as well as the random number value MR3 for judging a miss performance and the random number value MR4 for judging the type of fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined using two or less random number values including the random number value MR5 for judging the fluctuation pattern, or may be determined using four or less random number values including the random number value MR5 for judging the fluctuation pattern.

Figures 231 to 234 are explanatory diagrams of the method of determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, the miss performance, the variation pattern type, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 231 (A) to 231 (F), when the game state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the miss effect is a non-reach and the number of reserved memories of the special pattern that executes the variable display (number of reserved memories of the same type) is one or less, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table A and the value of the random number value MR5, if the miss effect is a non-reach and the number of reserved memories of the special pattern that executes the variable display is two, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table B and the value of the random number value MR5, if the miss effect is a non-reach and the number of reserved memories of the special pattern that executes the variable display is three, , the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C and the value of the random number MR5, if the miss performance is a reach and the fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D and the value of the random number MR5, if the miss performance is a reach and the fluctuation pattern type is a super reach α, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table E and the value of the random number MR5, and if the miss performance is a reach and the fluctuation pattern type is a super reach β, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F and the value of the random number MR5.

Also, as shown in Figures 232 (A) to 232 (D), when the game state is the time-saving state (low probability high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the miss effect is not a reach and the reserved memory number (same type reserved memory number) of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one or less, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table G and the value of the random number value MR5, if the miss effect is not a reach and the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two or more, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table H and the value of the random number value MR5, if the miss effect is a reach and the variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table I and the value of the random number value MR5, and if the miss effect is a reach and the variation pattern type is a super reach γ, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table J and the value of the random number value MR5.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 233 (A) to 233 (C), when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the miss effect is a non-reach and the reserved memory number (same type reserved memory number) of the special pattern that executes the variable display is one or less, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table K and the value of the random number value MR5, if the miss effect is a non-reach and the reserved memory number (same type reserved memory number) of the special pattern that executes the variable display is two or more, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table L and the value of the random number value MR5, and if the miss effect is a reach and the variable pattern type is a normal reach, the variable pattern is determined based on the miss variable pattern determination table M and the value of the random number value MR5.

As shown in Figures 234(A) to 234(C), when the game state is normal (low probability low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number value MR5, when the game state is time-saving state (low probability high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number value MR5, and when the game state is high probability state (high probability high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C and the value of the random number value MR5.

For example, as shown in Figures 231 (A) to 231 (F), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). When miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2). When miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3). When miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1A). If the value of MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1B); if the miss fluctuation pattern determination table E is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2A); if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-2B); if the miss fluctuation pattern determination table F is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3A); if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 901 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-3B).

Also, as shown in Figures 232 (A) to 232 (D), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table G is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4); when miss fluctuation pattern determination table H is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-5); when miss fluctuation pattern determination table I is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 920, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-4A), and if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 921 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-4B), and if the miss fluctuation pattern determination table J is selected, if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 950, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach gamma miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5A), and if the value of the random number value MR5 is within the range of 951 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach gamma miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5B).

Also, as shown in Figures 233 (A) to 233 (C), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table K is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-6); when miss fluctuation pattern determination table L is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-7); and when miss fluctuation pattern determination table M is selected, if the value of random number value MR5 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-6).

Also, as shown in FIG. 234(A), when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1A), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 31 to 80, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1B), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 81 to 170, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern. If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 171 to 320, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2B), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 321 to 600, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3A), and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 601 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 234(B), when jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 90, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4A), if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 91 to 280, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4B), if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 281 to 580, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach gamma jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5A), and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 581 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the super reach gamma jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 234(C), when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-6).

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of multiple variable patterns for jackpots may be different depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, the player can pay attention to which variable display of the variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, which can increase the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 235, the normal state in this embodiment is a game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display per time (jackpot probability) is lower than the probability variable state, and is also a game state in which the average special symbol variable display time is the longest among the normal state, the time-saving state, and the probability variable state. Also, the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display per time (jackpot probability) is lower than the probability variable state, and is a game state in which the average special symbol variable display time is shorter than the normal state and longer than the probability variable state among the normal state, the time-saving state, and the probability variable state. In this embodiment, the special probability state is a gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, and the rate at which the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display per time (the probability of a jackpot) is higher than in the normal state or the time-saving state, and is the gaming state in which the average variable display time of the special symbol is the shortest among the normal state, the time-saving state, and the special probability state.

Here, the variable display of the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 236(B), the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided with eight LEDs as described above, and these LEDs form the special symbols. In the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the LEDs to be lit are switched one by one every time 40 ms has elapsed, and the first LED starts to light again when 40 ms has elapsed since the eighth LED started to light. In other words, in this embodiment, the process in which the LEDs to be lit change in order from the first to the second, the third, ... the eighth is defined as one cycle, and the variable display of the special symbols is performed by repeatedly cyclically lighting these LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 236(D), the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B each have one LED, and these LEDs form the sub-patterns. In the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B, the LEDs are switched on and off every 60 ms. In other words, in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, one cycle is when the LED is turned on for 240 ms and turned off for 240 ms, and the cyclical lighting of these LEDs is repeatedly executed to execute the variable display of the sub-patterns.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 220 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 001SG150 as shown in FIG. 237 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 001SG150 shown in FIG. 237 includes a first special symbol buffer 001SG151A, a second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, a regular symbol reserve memory unit 001SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 001SG152, a game control timer setting unit 001SG153, a game control counter setting unit 001SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 001SG155.

The first special symbol buffer 001SG151A stores the pending data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started but in which a start winning (first start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, in the order of winning.

The second special symbol buffer 001SG151B stores the pending data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that have not yet started but in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, in the order of winning.

As an example, the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the first start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the miss performance, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The second special pattern buffer 001SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of miss performance, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The numerical data for reserved number 0 in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A and the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B is data corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern being executed, and the numerical data for reserved numbers 1 to 4 is data (reserved data) corresponding to the variable display of special patterns that have not yet been executed.

The reserved data stored in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special symbol game using the first special symbol or a special symbol game using the second special symbol is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in separate reserved memory units in association with the reserved number, the variable display based on the second reserved memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 001SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 001SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they were detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR6 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The numerical data for reserved number 0 in the regular pattern reserved memory unit 001SG151C is data corresponding to the variable display of the regular pattern currently being executed, and the numerical data for reserved numbers 1 to 4 is data (reserved data) corresponding to the variable display of regular patterns that have not yet been executed.

The game control flag setting unit 001SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 001SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 001SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 001SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 001SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 001SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is provided with a random number buffer 001SG155A for determining the special chart display result, which temporarily stores the value of the random number value MR1, a random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the type of big win, which temporarily stores the value of the random number value MR2, a random number buffer 001SG155C for determining the type of miss performance, which temporarily stores the value of the random number value MR3, a random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, which temporarily stores the value of the random number value MR4, and a random number buffer 001SG155E for determining the fluctuation pattern, which temporarily stores the value of the random number value MR5.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 220 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

Figure 238 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation of the input port 105a. As shown in Figure 238, in input port 0, a signal from the count switch 23 is input to bit 1, a discharge port switch (not shown) is input to bit 2, a specific area switch is input to bit 3, and a normal winning port switch 24 is input to bit 6. In input port 1, an out confirmation switch signal 1 is input to bit 2, an out confirmation switch signal 2 is input to bit 3, a magnet sensor signal is input to bit 5, and a frame radio wave sensor signal is input to bit 7. In input port 2, a board proximity sensor error signal is input to bit 2, a frame proximity sensor error signal is input to bit 3, a setting key switch is input to bit 4, a touch switch is input to bit 5, a door/frame opening switch is input to bit 6, and a signal from the clear switch is input to bit 7. In input port 3, a signal from the first start port switch 22A is input to bit 1, a second start port switch 22B is input to bit 2, and a signal from the gate switch 21 is input to bit 3. In addition, a power supply confirmation signal is input to bit 6, and a prize ball control signal RX0 is input to bit 7.

Figure 239 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation for output port 105b. As shown in Figure 239, in output port DG1, bits 1 to 8 output signals to each LED that constitutes the first special symbol. In output port DG2, bits 1 to 8 output signals to each LED that constitutes the second special symbol.

In addition, in the output port DG3, a signal is output from bit 1 to the start gate winning memory number indicator lamp 2 in the first special pattern (the second LED among the LEDs that make up the first reserve display 25A), from bit 2 to the start gate winning memory number indicator lamp 2 in the second special pattern (the second LED among the LEDs that make up the second reserve display 25B), from bit 3 to the gate pass memory number indicator lamp 2 (the second LED among the LEDs that make up the normal pattern display 20), from bit 4 to the start gate winning memory number indicator lamp 1 in the first special pattern (the first LED among the LEDs that make up the first reserve display 25A), from bit 5 to the start gate winning memory number indicator lamp 1 in the second special pattern (the first LED among the LEDs that make up the second reserve display 25B), and from bit 6 to the gate pass memory number indicator lamp 1 (the first LED among the LEDs that make up the normal pattern display 20). Then, in the output port DG4, signals are output from bits 1 to 4 to each LED that makes up the normal pattern.

In addition, in output port DG5, bits 0 to 4 output signals to the LEDs that make up the round count indicator 26, bit 5 outputs a signal to the LED that makes up the win indicator light 27, bit 6 outputs a signal to the LED that makes up the right hit indicator light 28, and bit 7 outputs a signal to the LED that makes up the status indicator light 29.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 220 is provided with a performance control data holding area 001SG190 as shown in FIG. 240(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 001SG190 shown in FIG. 240(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 001SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 001SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 001SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 001SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 001SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 001SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 001SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 001SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 001SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 001SG194A as shown in FIG. 240 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 001SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 001SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special chart being variably displayed. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 001SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special chart being variably displayed. When a start win occurs in the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first special pattern reserved memory number notification command or second special pattern reserved memory number notification command), a pattern designation command, and a miss performance pattern command, are sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 001SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, reserved memory number notification command, pattern designation command, and miss performance pattern command separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A in this embodiment, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a pending display flag, in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, and a winning flash effect flag, in which a flag value indicating whether or not the winning flash effect described below is set, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart pending memory and the second special chart pending memory.

When the execution of the hold change effect is not determined in the hold change effect determination process described below, the hold display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal hold display display pattern, and when the execution of the hold change effect is determined, "1" (blue) or "2" (red) is set, which corresponds to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (e.g., blue or red) different from the normal display mode. After the hold change effect determination process is executed, the hold appearance animation process, dwell animation process, shift animation process, etc. described below are further executed, so that the active display and hold display are displayed in a display mode corresponding to each hold display flag (for example, if the hold display flag value is "0", the shape is white according to the game status, if the hold display flag value is "1", the shape is blue according to the game status, and if the hold display flag value is "2", the shape is red according to the game status).

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 001SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 001SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the pattern designation command, and the miss performance pattern command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the pattern designation command, and the miss performance pattern command are stored in sequence in the storage areas corresponding to the last "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory or the second special symbol reserved memory.

The commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 240(B) are deleted from the entry (entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that has just ended each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, and the contents stored in the entry (entry with buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is to start and the contents stored in the entry after the reserved memory of the variable display that is to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory ends in the storage state shown in FIG. 240(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

In this embodiment, when the game state is normal, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in buffer number "1-0", and a reserved display is displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U based on the data stored in buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4". Also, when the game state is time-saving or high probability, an active display is displayed in the active display area 5F based on the data stored in buffer number "2-0", and a reserved display is displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U based on the data stored in buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4".

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations in the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 241 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 241, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), it is determined whether the setting value confirmation condition is met based on whether the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the state of the setting key switch, etc. (step S4). If the setting value confirmation condition is met (step S4; Yes), the currently set setting value is displayed on the display monitor as a setting value confirmation process (step S5).

After the setting value confirmation process is executed, or if the setting value confirmation condition is not met (step S4; No), a recovery process (step S6) is executed, followed by a random number circuit setting process (step S12). The recovery process of step S8 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), it is determined whether the setting value setting condition is met based on whether the gaming machine frame 3 is open or not, the state of the setting key switch, etc. (step S7). If the setting value setting condition is met (step S7; Yes), a setting value setting process is executed (step S8). In the setting value setting process of this embodiment, for example, the setting value that is set by operating the touch switch and the setting key switch can be set.

After the set value setting process is executed, or if the set value setting condition is not satisfied (step S7; No), a determination is made as to whether the set value confirmation condition is satisfied and the set value confirmation process is executed (steps 9 and 10) in the same manner as in steps S4 and S5. After the set value confirmation process is executed, or if the set value confirmation condition is not satisfied (step 9; No), an initialization process (step S11) is executed, and then a random number circuit setting process (step S12) is executed.

The initialization process in step S11 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S12), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S13), and permits the interrupt (step S14). After that, the process enters into a loop. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at a predetermined time (e.g., every 4 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

After executing this game control main process, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of Fig. 242. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 242 starts, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the normal winning port switch 24, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, a timer subtraction process (step S22) is executed to subtract various timer values related to the game (for example, the values of the normal symbol process timer, the start port 2 or more winning error invalid timer, the security information timer, the information output extension timer, and the illegal winning notification invalid timer), and then a start port 2 abnormal winning monitoring process (step S23) is executed to monitor whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred in the second start winning port, and a winning designation command based on the game ball having won in various winning ports and an error command indicating the abnormal winning based on the occurrence of the abnormal winning are sent to the performance control board 12. By executing a prize winning notification process (step S24) to notify the occurrence of a magnet error, a magnet error notification process (step S25) to notify the occurrence of a magnet error, a radio wave error notification process (step S26) to notify the occurrence of a radio wave error, a switch error notification process (step S27) and a switch abnormality error notification process (step S28) to check for breaks or loose wiring in various switches, and a discharged ball error notification process (step S29) to notify of a discharged ball error, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary depending on the diagnosis results. After this, a random number update process (step S30) for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR6 for determining the normal symbol display result, an initial value determination random number update process (step S31) for updating the random number value MR7 for determining the initial value of the random number value MR1 or the random number value MR6, a special symbol process process (step S32) for performing variable display of the special symbol and control to the jackpot game state, a normal symbol process process (step S33) for performing variable display of the normal symbol, a role solenoid control process (step S34) for controlling the solenoids 81 and 82 as the opening control of the large prize winning port in the jackpot game state and the opening control of the second start prize winning port in response to a normal prize winning, and solenoid control process (step S35) for controlling the solenoids 81 and 82 as the opening control of the large prize winning port in the jackpot game state and the opening control of the second start prize winning port in response to a normal prize winning. 34), an information output process (step S35) that outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, a prize ball process (step S36) for awarding prize balls according to winnings in each winning slot, a display process (step S37) that sets data for turning on the LEDs that constitute the first reserve display 25A, the second reserve display 25B, and the normal reserve display 25C, and a test terminal process (step S38) that outputs a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. 8), an output process (step S39) for outputting contents related to the connection signal in the RAM area of output port 0 and contents related to the solenoid to the output port, a special symbol display control process (step S40) for setting special symbol display control data for performing variable display of special symbols according to the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data, a normal symbol display control process (step S41) for setting normal symbol display control data for performing variable display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data, a command set with information indicating an error state of the gaming machine, etc., in order to display an error state of the gaming machine, etc. to the performance control board 12 (step S42), a display control process (step S43) that controls the lighting of the LEDs that make up the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal symbol display device 20, the normal hold indicator 25C, etc. based on the data set in the output buffer, a setting key confirmation process (step S44) that confirms the state of the setting key switch, and a performance display monitor control process (step S45) that displays the base value, etc. on the display monitor provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and then allows an interrupt (step S46), and ends the game control timer interrupt process.

(Switch processing)
Next, the switch processing (step S21) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. In this embodiment, when the on state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is indeed on, and processing corresponding to the switch on is started. FIG. 243 is an explanatory diagram showing each 2-byte buffer formed in the RAM 102 used in the switch processing. The previous port buffer is a buffer in which the previous (for example, 4 ms ago) switch on/off determination result is stored. The port buffer is a buffer in which the contents of the port 3 input this time are stored. The switch on buffer is a buffer in which the corresponding bit is set to 1 when the switch on is detected, and the corresponding bit is set to 0 when the switch off is detected.

Figure 244 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch process in step S21. In the switch process, the CPU 103 first inputs data input to input port 3 (step S51) and sets the input data in the port buffer (step S52).

Next, the initial value of the wait counter formed in RAM 102 is set (step 53), and the value of the wait counter is decremented by 1 until the value of the wait counter becomes 0 (steps S54, S55).

When the wait counter value becomes 0, data from input port 3 is input again (step S56), and a logical AND is taken for each bit between the input data and the data set in the port buffer (step S57). The result of the logical AND is then set in the port buffer (step S58). Through the processing of steps S53 to S58, only bits that are "1" both times, out of the two input data input from input port 0 with a time interval of approximately [initial value of wait counter x (processing time of steps S104 and S105)], become "1" in the port buffer. In other words, if the switch detection signal remains on for a predetermined period of [initial value of wait counter x (processing time of steps S54 and S55)], the corresponding bit in the port buffer becomes "1".

The CPU 103 then performs an exclusive OR operation on each bit between the data previously set in the port buffer and the data currently set in the port buffer (step S59). In the result of the exclusive OR operation, the bit corresponding to the switch whose previous (e.g., 4 ms ago) switch on/off determination result and the switch whose current on/off determination result are different becomes "1". The CPU 103 then performs a logical AND operation on each bit between the result of the exclusive OR operation and the data currently set in the port buffer (step S60). As a result, of the bits corresponding to the switches whose previous on/off determination result and the switch whose current on/off determination result are different (by the exclusive OR operation result), only the bit corresponding to the switch whose current on/off determination result is determined to be on (by the logical AND operation) remains as "1".

Then, the CPU 103 sets the result of the logical AND operation in step S60 in the switch-on buffer (step S61), and sets the contents of the port buffer in which the result of the operation in step S108 is set in the previous port buffer (step S62).

By the above process, among the switches that have been continuously in the on state for a predetermined period of time, the bit corresponding to the switch whose previous on/off determination result (e.g., 4 ms ago) was off, i.e., the switch that changed from the off state to the on state, is set to "1" in the switch-on buffer.

(Random number update process)
Next, the random number update process (step S30) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number update process. In the random number update process, the CPU 103 first identifies the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display (the value of the random number value MR1) (step 71), and determines whether the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display has reached the maximum value (step S72). If the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display has not reached the maximum value (step S72; N), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display is incremented by +1 and the process proceeds to step S75 (step S73). If the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display has reached the maximum value (step S72; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display is set to the minimum value of 1 and the process proceeds to step S75 (step S74).

In step S75, the CPU 103 compares the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display with the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display (step S75). Then, it is determined whether the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display are the same value (step S76). If the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display are the same value (step S76; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display, that is, the random number value MR7 value, which is a random number for determining the initial value of the random number value MR1 for determining the result of the special drawing display, is extracted (step S77), and the extracted random number value MR7 value is set in the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display (step S78), and the extracted random number value MR7 value is stored as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display (step S79).

After execution of step S79, or if the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display is not the same as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the special drawing display (step S76; N), the CPU 103 identifies the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display (the value of the random number value MR6) (step 80) and determines whether the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display has reached its maximum value (step S81). If the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display has not reached its maximum value (step S81; N), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display is incremented by +1 and the process proceeds to step S84 (step S82); if the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display has reached its maximum value (step S81; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal drawing display is set to the minimum value of 1 and the process proceeds to step S84 (step S83).

In step S84, the CPU 103 compares the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display with the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display (step S84). Then, it is determined whether the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display are the same value (step S85). If the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display and the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display are the same value (step S85; Y), the value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display, that is, the random number value MR7 value, which is a random number for determining the initial value of the random number value MR6 for determining the result of the normal map display, is extracted (step S86), the extracted random number value MR7 value is set to the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display (step S87), and the extracted random number value MR7 value is stored as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display (step S88), and the random number update process is terminated. Furthermore, if the current value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display is not the same as the initial value of the random number counter for determining the result of the normal map display (step S85; N), the random number update process ends without executing steps S86 to S88.

In this embodiment, the random number value MR1 for determining the special map display result and the random number value MR6 for determining the normal map display result both take values between 1 and 65536, so in the above step S74, the value of the random number counter for determining the special map display result is set to 1, and in the above step S83, the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result is set to 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of values that the random number value MR1 for determining the special map display result and the random number value MR6 for determining the normal map display result can be set to 0 to 65535, and in the above step S74, the value of the random number counter for determining the special map display result can be set to 0, and in the above step S83, the value of the random number counter for determining the normal map display result can be set to 0.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 246 is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step S32 shown in Fig. 242 as a special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first judges whether or not a game ball has entered either the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole, that is, whether or not a start winning has occurred, by referring to the input port 3 shown in Fig. 238 (step S100). If a game ball has entered either the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole (step S100; Y), a start hole switch passing process is executed (step S101).

In the start port switch passing process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of RAM 102, and update the reserved memory count. When a start winning occurs, a random number value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the fluctuation pattern, and stored as the reserved information. In addition, a process may be executed to predict the display result and the fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random number value. In addition, when the reserved information and the reserved memory count are stored, a performance control command is sent to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory count, and the predictive judgment.

After executing the start gate switch passing process in step S101, or if a game ball has not entered either the first start gate or the second start gate (step S100; N), the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S116 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each process of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S116), a process is performed to send a performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special symbol processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a determined special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed in priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

In addition, in the normal processing of special symbols, a process (variation pattern setting) is also performed in which the variation pattern is determined to be one of several types using a random number value for determining the variation pattern, based on the result of a pre-determination of whether or not the displayed result is a "jackpot."

The variable pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (variable special display time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "1". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern variable display time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change has reached the special pattern variable display time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "2", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol stop process includes a process for setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and if the display result is a "miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process of the large prize opening in step S113 is executed when the value of the special prize process flag is "3". This pre-opening process of the large prize opening includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the large prize opening is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the large prize opening to be in the open state and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special prize process flag is updated to "4" and the pre-opening process of the large prize opening is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This post-jackpot opening process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached the set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "4", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start switch passing process)
FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing the start port switch passing process (S101) shown in FIG. 246. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start port switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A (001SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (001SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) or not (001SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first special symbol reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first special symbol reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 001SGS102 is not the upper limit (001SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is set to "0" (001SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 001SGS101 (001SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 001SGS102 (001SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (001SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (001SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (001SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by reading the second special symbol reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second special symbol reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154. When the second special symbol reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in 001SGS105 (001SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 001SG155 is set to "2" (001SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 001SGS103 and 001SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (001SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the first reserved special symbol memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved special symbol memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved special symbol memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is established. In addition, the second reserved special symbol memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (001SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 001SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, a random number value MR3 for determining the miss performance, a random number value MR4 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and a random number value MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 001SG154, and uses the extracted random number value MR1 as the special chart display result judgment. The extracted random number MR2 is stored in the fixed random number buffer 001SG155A, the extracted random number MR2 is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the type of big win, the extracted random number MR3 is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155C for determining the miss performance, the extracted random number MR4 is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the extracted random number MR5 is stored in the random number buffer 001SG155E for determining the fluctuation pattern (001SGS109 to 001SGS118).

The CPU 103 also sets the transfer destinations of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A and the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B from the start port buffer value and the reserved memory count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (001SGS119). Then, the CPU 103 transfers the random numbers MR1 to MR5 stored in the special symbol display result determination random number buffer 001SG155A, the jackpot type determination random number buffer 001SG155B, the miss performance determination random number buffer 001SG155C, the fluctuation pattern type determination random number buffer 001SG155D, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number buffer 001SG155E to the transfer destinations set in step 001SGS19 (001SGS120).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a miss performance, the random number value MR4 for determining the type of variation pattern, and the random number value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 001SGS109 to 001SGS120, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display results of the special symbol or decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time, and stores it as reserved information (reserved memory).

In other words, in the start port switch passing processing of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 311 (A), the CPU 103 extracts the values of random number values MR1 to MR5 based on the occurrence of a winning entry into the first start port, and temporarily stores these extracted random number values MR1 to MR5 in the random number buffer 001SG155A for determining the special chart display result, the random number buffer 001SG155B for determining the jackpot type, the random number buffer 001SG155C for determining the miss performance, the random number buffer 001SG155D for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and the random number buffer 001SG155E for determining the fluctuation pattern, all within the game control buffer setting unit 001SGS155. Then, as shown in FIG. 311(B), the CPU 103 transfers the random number values MR1 to MR5 stored in the special pattern display result determination random number buffer 001SG155A, the jackpot type determination random number buffer 001SG155B, the miss performance determination random number buffer 001SG155C, the fluctuation pattern type determination random number buffer 001SG155D, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number buffer 001SG155E to the top of the empty entries among the entries with reserved numbers "1" to "4" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A, and stores them as reserved memory.

In the example of Figure 311, the storage and transfer of the random number values MR1 to MR5 when a win occurs in the first starting port is explained, but when a win occurs in the second starting port, the random number values MR1 to MR5 stored in the special symbol display result determination random number buffer 001SG155A, the jackpot type determination random number buffer 001SG155B, the miss performance determination random number buffer 001SG155C, the fluctuation pattern type determination random number buffer 001SG155D, and the fluctuation pattern determination random number buffer 001SG155E are simply transferred to the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B, so the explanation will be omitted.

In FIG. 247, the CPU 103 executes the winning performance process (001SGS122), and then transmits the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (001SGS123), for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "0" (001SGS124). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (001SGS124; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (001SGS126), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (001SGS124; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (001SGS125), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid game ball start winning, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed.

(Winning performance processing)
FIG. 248(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step 001SGS122 of FIG. 247 as a winning performance process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, a determination is made by a normal special symbol process described later as to whether or not the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) is controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In addition, in a variable pattern setting process described later, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning performance process of step 001SGS112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning hole begins, in other words, before it is decided whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot" and which of the variable display modes of the decorative patterns will result in a miss performance pattern, and based on the result of this determination, the performance control CPU 120 or the like will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning performance process shown in FIG. 248(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example by checking the state of the time-saving flag or the probability of winning flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 001SG152 (step 001SGS131). In the process of step 001SGS131, for example, it is sufficient to identify whether the set value is set to a normal value (for example, "1"). Also, if an abnormal value is set as the set value, a process may be executed to output a command to the outside, indicating that the abnormal value has been set.

Following the processing of step 001SGS131, the CPU 103 selects and sets a special chart display result judgment table (step 001SGS132). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment extracted in step 001SGS109 of FIG. 247 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 001SGS133). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table selected by the processing of step 001SGS132 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to determine whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 001SGS133 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 001SGS133; N), the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss", is transmitted (step 001SGS134), and the miss performance determination table shown in FIG. 228 is selected (step 001SGS135). Then, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for miss performance determination extracted in step 001SGS113 in FIG. 247 is within the non-reach determination range (step 001SGS136). If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 is within the non-reach judgment range (step 001SGS136; Y), a miss presentation pattern designation command corresponding to the non-reach (see FIG. 248 (B)) is sent and the winning presentation processing is terminated (step 001SGS144); if the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 is outside the non-reach judgment range (step 001SGS136; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability flag is set, that is, whether or not the game state is a high probability state (high probability high base state) (step 001SGS137).

If the probability variable flag is set (step 001SGS137; Y), the process proceeds to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS141) by setting the fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 229 (C), and if the probability variable flag is not set (step 001SGS137; N), the process further determines whether the time-saving flag is set or not, that is, whether the game state is a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or not (step 001SGS138). If the time-saving flag is not set (step 001SGS138; N), the process proceeds to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS139) by setting the fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 229 (A), and
If the time-saving flag is set (step 001SGS138; Y), the fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 229 (B) is set and the process proceeds to step 001SGS142 (step 001SGS140).

In step 001SGS142, the CPU 103 determines the miss presentation pattern based on the variation pattern type determination table set in any of steps 001SGS139 to 001SGS141 and the numerical data of the random number value MR4 (step 001SGS42). If the numerical data of the random number value MR4 is within the range of the determination value for normal reach, it transmits a miss presentation pattern command corresponding to normal reach, and if the numerical data of the random number value MR4 is within the range of the determination value for super reach α, super reach β, or super reach γ, it transmits a miss presentation pattern command corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 248 (B)) to the presentation control board 12, and ends the winning presentation processing (step 001SGS143).

In addition, if the numerical data of the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range in step 001SGS133 (step 001SGS133; Y), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the numerical data of the random number value MR2 and the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 227(A) (step 001SGS145), and transmits a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type to the performance control board 12, and ends the winning performance processing (step 001SGS146).

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 249 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 246 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 249, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (step 001SGS151). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 001SGS151, it is sufficient to read the second special symbol reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the number of reserved second special charts is other than "0" in step 001SGS151 (step 001SGS151; N), the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 001SGS153), and then the process proceeds to step 001SGS157.

On the other hand, if the second special pattern reserved memory count is "0" (step 001SGS151; Y), it is further determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory count is "0" (step 001SGS154). The first special pattern reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the processing of step 001SGS154, it is sufficient to read out the first special pattern reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and determine whether the read value is "0".

When the number of reserved first special charts is other than "0" in step 001SGS154 (step 001SGS154; N), the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 001SGS156), and then the process proceeds to step 001SGS157. As a result, the special chart game using the second special chart is started in priority over the special chart game using the first special chart.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

In the processing of step 001SGS157, the count value of the number of reserved special charts corresponding to the variable special chart designation buffer value is decremented by 1. For example, if the variable special chart designation buffer value is "1", the count value of the number of reserved first special charts is decremented by 1, and if the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the count value of the number of reserved first special charts is decremented by 1.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol determination process (step 001SGS158) to determine whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, and a fluctuation pattern setting process (step 001SGS159) to determine the fluctuation pattern, and then updates the special symbol process flag value to a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process and ends the normal special symbol processing (step 001SGS160).

If the number of reserved first special symbols is 0 in step 001SGS154 (step 001SGS154; Y), the CPU 103 executes settings and sends commands (e.g., a demo display performance designation command) to execute a demo display performance and ends the normal special symbol processing (step 001SGS161). If the CPU 103 executes settings and sends commands to execute a demo display performance in step 001SGS61, the variable display of the special symbols is in a state in which it is possible to execute the variable display of the special symbols, but the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are 0, so the machine enters a customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbols is not executed.

(Special pattern determination process)
Fig. 250 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol determination process shown in Fig. 249. In the special symbol determination process, the CPU 103 first executes a special symbol buffer shift process (step 001SGS171). The special symbol buffer shift process, for example, as shown in Fig. 251, determines whether the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", that is, whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 001SGS181).

If the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1" (step 001SGS181; Y), the entry contents of reserved number "1" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A shown in FIG. 237 are overwritten with the entry contents of reserved number "0" (step 001SGS182). Furthermore, the contents of the entry with reserved number "2" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "1" (step 001SGS183), the contents of the entry with reserved number "3" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "2" (step 001SGS184), the contents of the entry with reserved number "4" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "3" (step 001SGS185), and the contents of the entry with reserved number "4" in the first special pattern buffer 001SG151A are cleared (step 001SGS186).

In this way, by executing the processing of steps 001SGS182 to 00SGS186, the upper entry of the reserved memory in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A is shifted.

Then, a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command corresponding to the number of entries in which the numerical data of random numbers MR1 to MR5 are stored in the first special symbol buffer 001SG151A is sent to the performance control board 12, and the special symbol buffer shift process is terminated (step 001SGS187).

On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2" (step 001SGS181; N), the entry contents of reserved number "1" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B shown in FIG. 237 are overwritten with the entry contents of reserved number "0" (step 001SGS188). Furthermore, the contents of the entry with reserved number "2" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "1" (step 001SGS189), the contents of the entry with reserved number "3" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "2" (step 001SGS190), the contents of the entry with reserved number "4" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are overwritten with the contents of the entry with reserved number "3" (step 001SGS191), and the contents of the entry with reserved number "4" in the second special pattern buffer 001SG151B are cleared (step 001SGS192).

In this way, by executing the processing of steps 001SGS188 to 00SGS192, the upper entry of the reserved memory is shifted in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B.

Then, a second special symbol reserved memory count notification command corresponding to the number of entries in which the numerical data of the random number values MR1 to MR5 are stored in the second special symbol buffer 001SG151B is sent to the performance control board 12, and the special symbol buffer shift process is terminated (step 001SGS193).

In other words, in the special symbol buffer shift process in this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 312(A) to 312(E) and Figs. 313(A) to 313(F), the CPU 103 performs a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reservation number "1" to the entry with reservation number "0" regardless of the number of reserved memories stored in the special symbol buffer (first special symbol buffer 001SG151A in the example shown in Figs. 312 and 313). Next, the CPU 103 sequentially performs a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reservation number "2" to the entry with reservation number "1", a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reservation number "3" to the entry with reservation number "2", and a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reservation number "4" to the entry with reservation number "3".

As shown in FIG. 313(E), if the special pattern buffer process is executed when the number of reserved memories is four, executing the process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4" to the entry with reserved number "3" will result in the same data being present in the entry with reserved number "3" and the entry with reserved number "4" (the data of the entry with reserved number "4" before the special pattern buffer process was executed is stored in both the entry with reserved number "3" and the entry with reserved number "4"). For this reason, in the special pattern buffer process of this embodiment, the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4" are erased (cleared) at the end, thereby reducing the number of reserved memories.

Furthermore, in the special pattern buffer shift process in this embodiment, when the number of reserved memories is four, a situation will arise in which the same data exists in the entry with reserved number "3" and the entry with reserved number "4" as shown in Figure 313 (E), so it is necessary to execute a process to erase the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4". However, as shown in Figure 312, when the number of reserved memories is three or less, there is no need to execute a process to erase the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4". However, if the processing content of the special pattern buffer shift process were to be different depending on the number of reserved memories stored, the amount of data required to execute the special pattern buffer shift process would increase. Therefore, in this embodiment, common processing is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories stored (a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "2" to the entry with reserved number "1", a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "3" to the entry with reserved number "2", a process of copying the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4" to the entry with reserved number "3", and a process of erasing the memory contents of the entry with reserved number "4"), thereby suppressing the increase in the amount of data required to execute the special pattern buffer shift process.

Returning to the special symbol determination process of FIG. 250, the CPU 103 reads out the random number values MR1 to MR5 from the entry of reserved number "0" in the special symbol buffer according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 001SGS172). Then, the CPU 103 identifies the set value (step 001SGS173), selects a display result determination table according to the set value (step 001SGS174), and determines whether the read random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value in the selected display result determination table (step 001SGS175). In addition, in the process of step 00SGS175, if the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, it is determined whether the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value in the normal state or the time-saving state, and if the game state is the probability variable state, it is determined whether the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination value in the probability variable state.

If the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of the large value judgment value, the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot, and the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 001SGS176). At this time, the jackpot type judgment table shown in FIG. 227(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of several types (step 001SGS177). By referring to the jackpot type judgment table set in this way, it is determined which of several types the jackpot type will be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type judgment read out matches with the judgment value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type judgment table (step 001SGS178).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 001SGS178, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by setting, for example, a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 001SGS179). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, the value can be set to "0", if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, the value can be set to "2", and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, the value can be set to "3".

Also, after execution of step 001SGS179 or in step 001SGS175, if the value of the random number MR1 is not within the range of the jackpot determination value, that is, if it is determined to be a "miss" (step 001SGS175; N), the CPU 103 sets a confirmed special pattern in response to the pre-determination result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot game state, and ends the special pattern determination process (step 001SGS180). In the process of step 001SGS180, for example, in response to the pre-determination result that the special pattern display result is a "miss", it is determined to light up the two upper and lower LEDs arranged at the left end of the LEDs constituting the special pattern display device, and in response to the pre-determination result that the special pattern display result is a "jackpot", it is determined to light up the eight LEDs constituting the special pattern display device in different combinations according to the jackpot type (excluding the above-mentioned miss combination).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 001SGS159 of FIG. 249 as the variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 252, the CPU 103 first judges whether the variable display result is a big win or not (step 001SGS201). If the variable display result is not a big win, that is, a miss (step 001SGS201; N), the miss performance judgment table shown in FIG. 228 is selected (step 001SGS202a), and the miss performance (presence or absence of reach performance) is determined based on the random number value MR3 read in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 250 and the selected miss performance judgment table (step 001SGS202b). Then, it is judged whether or not reach performance is executed (step 001SGS202c).

If a reach effect is not executed as the miss effect, that is, if a non-reach fluctuation pattern is selected (step 001SGS202c; N), proceed to step 001SGS202f. If a reach effect is executed as the miss effect, that is, if a normal reach or super reach fluctuation pattern is selected (step 001SGS202c; Y), select a fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIG. 229) according to the game state (step 001SGS202d). For example, if the game state is the normal state, select fluctuation pattern type determination table A; if the game state is the time-saving state, select fluctuation pattern type determination table B; and if the game state is the probability variable state, select fluctuation pattern type determination table C.

Then, the type of fluctuation pattern (the reach effect to be executed) is determined based on the random number value MR4 read in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 250 and the selected fluctuation pattern type determination table, and the process proceeds to step 001SGS202f (step 001SGS202e).

In step 001SGS202f, the CPU 103 selects a loss fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figures 231 to 233) according to the game status, number of reserved memories, etc., in addition to the loss performance and fluctuation pattern type described above, and proceeds to step 001SGS203 (step 001SGS202f).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a jackpot (step 001SGS201; Y), the variable display result determination table for a jackpot (see FIG. 234) corresponding to the game status is selected and the process proceeds to step 001SGS203.

Then, in the processing of step 001SGS203, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR5 read in step 001SGS172 of FIG. 250 and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.

After the variation pattern is determined in step 001SGS203, settings are made to start the variation of the special patterns so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 001SGS204). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 001SGS204, various commands are sent when the special symbol starts to change (step 001SGS205). For example, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends a game state designation command, a first variable display start designation, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sequentially sends a game state designation command, a second variable display start designation, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, and a second special symbol reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 001SGS205, the special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the variable pattern, is set, and the variable pattern setting process is terminated (step 001SGS206). The special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special pattern in the special pattern game to the fixed special pattern, which is the variable display result (special pattern display result), being displayed stationary.

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 253 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Fig. 246 as the special symbol variation process. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 decrements the variable display time timer value by 1 (step 001SGS207) and judges whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 001SGS208a). If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 001SGS208a; N), the special symbol variation process is terminated, and if the variable display time timer has timed out (step 001SGS208a; Y), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process and the special symbol variation process is terminated (step 001SGS08b).

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S112 of FIG. 246 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol by turning on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S113 (step 001SGS211). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, a symbol determination command is sent to the performance control board 12 (step 001SGS212). Then, it is determined whether the big win flag is turned on (step 001SGS213).

When the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 001SGS213; Y), if the special probability flag or the time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and the time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 001SGS214), and transmits to the performance control board 12 one of the following commands depending on the type of jackpot stored: jackpot start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), jackpot start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), jackpot start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or jackpot start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) (step 001SGS215).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 001SGS216).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 001SGS217). The number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 001SGS218). The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-opening process for the jackpot opening (step S113), and the special symbol stopping process is terminated (step 001SGS219).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 001SGS213; N), in step 001SGS220, it is determined whether or not the time-saving flag is on (step 001SGS220). If the time-saving flag is off (step 001SGS220; N), the process proceeds to step 001SGS25. If the time-saving flag is on (step 001SGS220; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter is "0" (step 001SGS221). If the value of the time-saving count counter is "0" (step 001SGS221; Y), the process proceeds to step 001SGS225.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 001SGS221; N), that is, if the time-saving count is still remaining and the base state is high, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 001SGS222). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" (step 001SGS223), and if it is not "0" (step 001SGS223; N), the process proceeds to step 001SGS225. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 001SGS223; Y), the time-saving flag is cleared to the OFF state in order to end the time-saving control, and the process proceeds to step 001SGS225 (step 001SGS224).

In step 001SGS225, a game state designation command is sent according to the state of the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special symbol, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 001SGS226).

(Jackpot end processing)
Figure 255 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S116 of Figure 246 as a jackpot end processing.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 001SGS231). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 001SGS231; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 001SGS232), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 001SGS231; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 001SGS233). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 001SGS234). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 001SGS234; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 001SGS235).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 001SGS235; N), the variable jackpot flag and time-saving flag are turned on (step 001SGS237, step 001SGS238). In addition, the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 001SGS239), and the process proceeds to step 001SGS242.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 001SGS235; Y), steps 001SGS240 and 001SGS241 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 001SGS242.

In step 001SGS242, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 001SGS243). Then, after sending a game state designation command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON state of the probability change flag and time-saving flag (step 001SGS244), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special pattern, and the jackpot end processing is terminated (step 001SGS245).

(Display Processing)
Fig. 256 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S37 of Fig. 242 as the display process. In the display process, the CPU 103 first specifies the start port buffer value and the special chart process flag value (step 001SGS251, step 001SGS252). In addition, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the second special chart reserved memory count value, that is, the first special chart reserved chrysanthemum number and the second special chart reserved memory number are specified (step 001SGS253). Then, the lighting data of the LEDs in the first reserved indicator 25A and the second reserved indicator 25B are set according to the specified contents.

For example, as shown in FIG. 257(A), when the start port buffer value is 1, the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 0, the special pattern process flag value is 0, and the number of first special pattern reserved memories is 1, even if the LED of the first reserved display 25A is lit in a manner corresponding to the number of reserved memories being 1, the LED will be turned off when the variable display based on the reserved memory is started at the next interruption (all LEDs constituting the first reserved display 25A will be turned off), so data is set so that the LED of the first reserved display 25A is not lit, and when the special pattern process flag value is 0 to 6 and the number of first special pattern reserved memories is 2 to 4, even if the variable display based on the first first special pattern reserved memory is started at the next interruption, one of the LEDs constituting the first reserved display 25A will be lit, so data is set so that the LED of the first reserved display 25A is lit in a manner corresponding to the total number of reserved memories.

Also, as shown in FIG. 257(B), when the start port buffer value is 1 and the number of reserved second special patterns is 1 or more, the variable display of the second special pattern is executed with priority, so data is set to light up the LED of the first reserved display 25A in a manner according to the total number of reserved patterns, regardless of the special pattern process flag value and the number of reserved first special patterns.

Also, as shown in FIG. 257(C), when the start port buffer value is 2, if the special pattern process flag value is 0 and the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 1, even if the LED of the second reserved display 25B is lit in a manner corresponding to the number of reserved memories being 1, the LED will be turned off when the variable display based on the reserved memory is started at the next interruption (all LEDs constituting the second reserved display 25B will be turned off), so data is set so that the LED of the second reserved display 25B is not lit, and if the special pattern process flag value is 0 to 6 and the number of second special pattern reserved memories is 2 to 4, even if the variable display based on the first second special pattern reserved memory is started at the next interruption, one of the LEDs constituting the second reserved display 25B will be lit, so data is set so that the LED of the second reserved display 25B is lit in a manner corresponding to the total number of reserved memories.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the lighting data of the LED on the regular map reserve display 25C according to the number of regular map reserves stored (step 001SGS255).

To set the data for turning on the LEDs of the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general hold indicator 25C, the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on is set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off is set to "0" in the output port DG3 shown in FIG. 239.

The CPU 103 further identifies the game state, and if the identified game state is a jackpot game state, further identifies the jackpot type (step 001SGS256). Then, depending on the identified game state and jackpot type, it sets the lighting data of each LED in the round number indicator 26, the win indicator light 27, the right hit indicator light 28, and the status indicator light 29, and ends the display process (step 001SGS257).

To set the data for turning on the LEDs of the round number indicator 26, the winning indicator 27, the right hit indicator 28, and the status indicator 29, the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on is set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off is set to "0" in the output port DG5 shown in FIG. 239.

(Special symbol display control process)
FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S40 of FIG. 242 as the special symbol display control process. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 1 or not, that is, whether any special symbol is being variably displayed (step 001SGS261). If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 1 (step 001SGS261; N), the special symbol display control process is terminated, and if the value of the special symbol process flag is 1 (step 001SGS261; Y), the variable special symbol designation buffer value, that is, which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is being variably displayed, is specified (step 001SGS262), and the value of the variable display time timer is specified (step 001SGS263). Then, the LED lighting data in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B is set according to the specified variable special pattern designation buffer value and the variable display time timer value, and the special pattern display control process is terminated (step 001SGS264).

To set the data for lighting the LEDs of the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, the bits corresponding to the LEDs to be lit can be set to "1" and the bits corresponding to the LEDs to be turned off can be set to "0" in the output port DG1 and output port DG2 shown in FIG. 239.

Although not shown in the figure, in the normal pattern display control process (step S41), the lighting data for the LEDs in the normal pattern display device 20 is set based on whether or not the variable display of the normal pattern is being performed and the value of the variable display time timer for the normal pattern (in the output port DG4 shown in FIG. 239, the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on is set to "1" and the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off is set to "0").

(Display control process)
FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S43 of FIG. 242 as the display control process. The display control process is a process for lighting each LED constituting the special pattern unit 201 based on the data ("1" or "0" set in the bit of each output port DG shown in FIG. 239) created in the display process and the special pattern display control process described above. In the display control process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the DG counter value is 4, which is the maximum value (step 001SGS271). The DG counter is a counter for selecting which of the output ports shown in FIG. 239, the output port DG1, the output port DG2, the output port DG3, and the output port DG4, to light up, that is, a counter for determining which of the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A, the LEDs constituting the second special pattern display device 4B, the LEDs constituting the first reserved indicator 25A, the second reserved indicator 25B, and the ordinary reserved indicator 25C, and the LEDs constituting the ordinary pattern display device 20 are to be lighted up.

If the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS271; Y), the DG counter value is set to 1 and the process proceeds to step 001SGS274 (step 001SGS272); if the DG counter value is other than 4 (step 001SGS271; N), the DG counter value is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step 001SGS274 (step 001SGS273).

In step 001SGS274, the CPU 103 determines whether the DG counter value is 1. If the DG counter value is 1 (step 001SGS274; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG5 is stopped (step 001SGS275), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG1 is started to end the display control process (step 001SGS276). In other words, if the DG counter value is 1, the drive signal is output from output port DG1 to control the lighting of the LEDs (the LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG1.

If the DG counter value is not 1 (step 001SGS274; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 2 (step 001SGS277). If the DG counter value is 2 (step 001SGS277; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG1 is stopped (step 001SGS278), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG2 is started to end the display control process (step 001SGS279). In other words, if the DG counter value is 2, the drive signal is output from output port DG2 to control the lighting of the LEDs (the LEDs constituting the second special pattern display device 4B) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG2.

If the DG counter value is not 2 (step 001SGS277; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 3 (step 001SGS280). If the DG counter value is 3 (step 001SGS280; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG2 is stopped (step 001SGS281), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG3 is started to end the display control process (step 001SGS282). In other words, if the DG counter value is 3, the drive signal is output from output port DG3 to control the lighting of the LEDs (the LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general hold indicator 25C) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG3.

If the DG counter value is not 3 (step 001SGS280; N), it is further determined whether the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS283). If the DG counter value is 4 (step 001SGS283; Y), the output of the drive signal from output port DG3 is stopped (step 001SGS284), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG4 is started to end the display control process (step 001SGS285). In other words, if the DG counter value is 4, the drive signal is output from output port DG4 to control the lighting of the LEDs (the LEDs that make up the normal pattern display 20) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG4.

If the DG counter value is not 4 (step 001SGS283; N), the DG counter value is deemed to be 5, and the output of the drive signal from output port DG4 is stopped (step 001SGS286), and the output of the drive signal from output port DG5 is started, terminating the display control process (step 001SGS287). In other words, if the DG counter value is 5, the drive signal is output from output port DG5, thereby controlling the illumination of the LEDs (the LEDs constituting the round number indicator 26, the win indicator light 27, the right hit indicator light 28, and the status indicator light 29) corresponding to each bit of the output port DG5.

In other words, in this embodiment, the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A, the LEDs constituting the second special symbol display device 4B, the LEDs constituting the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B and the regular hold indicator 25C, the LEDs constituting the regular symbol display device 20, the round count indicator 26, the win indicator light 27, the right hit indicator light 28 and the status indicator light 29 are configured to periodically repeat a 16 ms off state and a 4 ms on state by changing the LEDs that are the targets of illumination every 4 ms, which is the interrupt period of the CPU 103.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 242, when a start winning occurs, as shown in FIG. 260 (A), the start winning occurrence is determined in the start port switch passing process and a command corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (start port winning designation command) is sent, and then the display process and display control process are executed, thereby starting the light emission control of the hold indicator (first hold indicator 25A or second hold indicator 25B) corresponding to the start winning.

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. 260(B), the special pattern determination process and buffer shift process are executed within the normal special pattern process, and the reserved memory number notification command is sent, and then the display process and display control process are executed, so that the light emission control in the reserved display device after the reserved memory number is subtracted is started in response to the start of the variable display.

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. 260(C), the special pattern display control process and the display control process are executed, and light emission control of the special pattern display device corresponding to the variable display is started, and then subtraction of the variable display time (variable display time timer) is started in the special pattern variation process.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 transmits a pending memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120, which can identify the number of pending memories including the new pending memory, based on the occurrence of a new pending memory while the variable display of the special pattern is being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating the occurrence of the new pending memory (for example, a pending memory number increase notification command) to the performance control CPU 120. In addition, based on receiving the above-mentioned pending memory number notification command or the pending memory number increase notification command, the performance control CPU 120 may light up the first sub-pending indicator 151A or the second sub-pending indicator 151B in a manner corresponding to the number of pending memories.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number notification command that can specify the reserved memory number after the variable display of the special pattern starts to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the special pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may transmit a command (for example, a reserved memory number decrease notification command) to the performance control CPU 120 simply indicating that the reserved memory number has decreased based on the start of the variable display of the special pattern. Furthermore, based on receiving the reserved memory number notification command or the reserved memory number decrease notification command, the performance control CPU 120 may light up the first sub-reserved indicator 151A or the second sub-reserved indicator 151B in a manner corresponding to the reserved memory number after the variable display of the special pattern starts.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 261. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 261 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S151), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S153). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S153; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S153 (step S153; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S154), and a command analysis process is executed (step S155). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S155, the performance control process is executed (step S156). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S156, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S157), and at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update processing (step S157), a demo performance control processing (step S158) for executing a demo performance on the pachinko gaming machine 1, an operation reception control processing (step S158a) for receiving operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and a background display update processing (step S159) for updating the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. Then, the processing returns to step S153. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to display a guide display on the image display device 5 on condition that 30 seconds (3000 ms) have passed without any new pending memory being generated, based on receiving a command to execute a demo display performance from the CPU 103 (for example, a demo display performance designation command), and further executes control to display an image of the demo display performance on the image display device 5 on condition that 30 seconds (3000 ms) have passed without any new pending memory being generated. Furthermore, if a new pending memory is generated while the guide display or demo display performance image is being displayed, control to stop the display of the guide display or demo display performance image may be executed.

In addition, in the operation reception process, the performance control CPU 120 displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 based on receiving the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A when the number of first special symbol reserved memories or the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 0 and no variable display of any special symbol is being performed, and further executes control to change the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 by receiving the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A while the menu screen is being displayed.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, it is possible to execute control to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 based on a change in the game state or a decision to change the presentation mode at the start of variable display.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, and start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
Fig. 262 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S156 of Fig. 261 as the presentation control process. In the presentation control process shown in Fig. 261, the presentation control CPU 120 first performs a presentation mode determination process (step S160) for determining a presentation mode when a variable display is executed, a hold change presentation determination process (step S161) for determining the display mode of the hold display displayed in the hold memory display area 5U and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F, a win flash presentation process (step S162) for executing an entry flash presentation that continuously suggests that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a start winning by emitting light from the game effect lamp 9, a button vibration presentation process (step S163) for executing a button vibration presentation that drives the push button 31B by the vibration motor 36, a button vibration presentation process (step S164) for executing a button vibration presentation that causes the hold display to appear in the hold memory display area 5U, and a button vibration presentation process (step S165) for executing a button vibration presentation process (step S166). The display control unit 120 executes an appearance animation process (step S164) for displaying the reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U and the active display in the active display area 5F in a dwelling manner, a shift animation process (step S165) for displaying the reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U in a dwelling manner toward the previous display position on the reserved memory display area 5U or the active display area 5F, a termination animation process (step S167) for displaying the active display in the active display area 5F, and a sub-reserved display lighting control process (step S168) for controlling the lighting of the LEDs constituting the first sub-reserved display 151A and the second sub-reserved display 151B based on the reserved memory number. The sub-reserved display lighting control process is also a process for updating the display of the first special reserved memory number and the second special reserved memory in the display area 5S described later. After the termination animation process is executed, for example, depending on the value of the performance process flag provided in the RAM 122, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In addition, in the variable display performance process in this embodiment, the lighting control of the LEDs constituting the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B is also executed. After performing such performance control, the final decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped in response to, for example, reading out an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying the stop display of the final decorative pattern. When the final decorative pattern is stopped, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3", and the performance processing during variable display is terminated. Note that the processing of step 172 in this embodiment also performs processing to execute the variable display of small patterns in the display area 5S described below.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Performance mode)
As shown in FIG. 263, in this embodiment, presentation modes A to D are provided, where presentation modes A and B are presentation modes that can be selected when the game state is in a normal state, presentation mode C is a presentation mode that is selected when the game state is in a time-saving state, and presentation mode D is a presentation mode that is selected when the game state is in a special state.

In the presentation mode determination process, when the game state is normal, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode A at the start timing of the first variable display in the normal state. Also, at the start timing of the second or subsequent variable display in the normal state, if the set presentation mode is presentation mode A, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode B by lottery, and if the set presentation mode is presentation mode B, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode A by lottery.

In addition, in the presentation mode determination process, when the jackpot game state ends, the presentation mode is set to presentation mode C based on the reception of a game state designation command indicating a time-saving state from the CPU 103, and the presentation mode is set to presentation mode D based on the reception of a game state designation command indicating a probability bonus state from the CPU 103.

The details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the presentation modes A to D have different background images displayed on the image display device 5, variable display modes of the decorative patterns, and display modes of the active and pending displays.

(Hold change performance determination process)
Fig. 264 is a determination ratio of the display mode of the reserved display and active display in the reserved change performance determination process shown in Fig. 262. In the reserved change performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in Fig. 240 (B) and identifies the presence or absence of an entry in which the reserved display flag is not set. If there is an entry in which the reserved display flag is not set, the variable display result is identified from the pattern designation command in the entry, and the miss performance is identified from the miss performance pattern command in the entry, and the presence or absence of the reserved change performance and the performance pattern, that is, the display mode of the reserved display and active display are determined based on the identified variable display result and miss performance.

For example, as shown in FIG. 264, when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, a 25% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern A, and a 70% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern B. Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the miss presentation pattern is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, a 5% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern A, and a 0% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern B. Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the miss presentation pattern is a normal reach, there is a 75% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, a 20% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern A, and a 5% chance that the hold change presentation will be performed in presentation pattern B. In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the miss presentation pattern is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold change presentation will not be performed, there is a 25% chance that presentation pattern A of the hold change presentation will be performed, and there is a 10% chance that presentation pattern B of the hold change presentation will be performed.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold change effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "0" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will not be executed, sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "1" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed with effect pattern A, and sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "2" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed with effect pattern B.

In the present embodiment, the hold change performance determination process illustrates an example in which the hold change performance is executed or not and the hold change performance pattern determination ratio is changed depending on whether the symbol designation command, that is, the variable display result, is a jackpot or not. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the hold change performance may be executed or not and the hold change performance pattern determination ratio may be changed depending on whether the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot A, a probability variable jackpot B, a probability variable jackpot C, or a non-probability variable jackpot. Also, the hold change performance may be executed or not and the hold change performance pattern determination ratio may be changed depending on whether the jackpot is controlled to a probability variable state after the jackpot play ends. By doing this, it is possible to easily draw the player's attention to whether the hold change performance is executed and which performance pattern the hold change performance is executed with.

In this embodiment, as described above, the pending display flag corresponding to each entry is set to a value between 0 and 2 in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A, and then the performance control CPU 120 executes the appearance animation process (step S164), dwell animation process (step 165), and shift animation process (step S166) described below. When the pending display flag is set to a value of "0", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed in a shape corresponding to the performance mode and in white, when the pending display flag is set to a value of "1", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed in a shape corresponding to the performance mode and in blue, and when the pending display flag is set to a value of "2", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed in a shape corresponding to the performance mode and in red.

With these settings, when the pending display or active display is displayed in blue in display pattern A or red in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the pending display or active display is displayed in white, and when the pending display or active display is displayed in red in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the pending display or active display is displayed in blue in display pattern A, so that the player can be drawn to the display mode of these pending displays and active displays, i.e., whether or not a pending change presentation is executed and the presentation pattern.

(Flash effect processing when winning)
Fig. 265 is a flow chart showing the winning flash effect process shown in Fig. 262. In the winning flash effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in Fig. 240 (B) and judges whether there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301). If there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301; N), it further judges whether there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is already set to "1", that is, whether the winning flash effect has already been executed for another reserved memory (step 001SGS302).

If there is no pending memory with the winning flash effect flag set to "1", it is determined whether or not to execute the winning flash effect from the designation command and the losing effect pattern command stored as pending memory with the winning flash effect flag not set (step 001SGS303).

For example, as shown in FIG. 266, when the symbol designation command indicates a jackpot, the winning flash effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, and the winning flash effect is determined to be executed 60% of the time. Also, when the symbol designation command is a miss and the miss effect pattern command is a non-reach, the winning flash effect is determined not to be executed 100% of the time, and the winning flash effect is determined to be executed 0% of the time. Also, when the symbol designation command is a miss and the miss effect pattern command is a normal reach, the winning flash effect is determined not to be executed 100% of the time, and the winning flash effect is determined to be executed 0% of the time. Also, when the symbol designation command is a miss and the miss effect pattern command is a super reach, the winning flash effect is determined not to be executed 80% of the time, and the winning flash effect is determined to be executed 20% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 001SGS304). If it has decided to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 001SGS304; Y), it sets the flash effect flag for the reserved memory to "1" and proceeds to step 007SGS307 (step 001SGS305). If it has decided not to execute a flash effect when a prize is won (step 001SGS304; N), it sets the flash effect flag for the reserved memory to "0" and proceeds to step 001SGS307 (step 001SGS306).

If there is no reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is not set (step 001SGS301; N) or after the processing of steps 001SGS305 and 001SGS306 is executed, the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 240 (B) is referenced to determine whether there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" (step 001SGS307). If there is a reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" (step 001SGS307; Y), it is determined whether the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" is being performed, that is, whether the reserved memory in which the winning flash effect flag is set to "1" is stored in the entry of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A (step 001SGS308). If the winning flash effect flag is not being set to "1" and a variable display is being performed in response to the reserved memory (step 001SGS308; N), proceed to step 001SGS310. If the winning flash effect flag is being set to "1" and a variable display is being performed in response to the reserved memory (step 001SGS308; Y), the process table of the variable display being performed is further referenced to determine whether the variable display is occurring before the reach (step 001SGS309). If the variable display is occurring before the reach (step 001SGS309; Y), proceed to step 001SGS310.

Then, in the process of step 001SGS310, blinking control of the game effect lamp 9 is executed in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, and the winning flash effect process is terminated (step 00SGS310). Note that if there is no reserved memory of the winning flash effect flag being "1" (step 001SGS307; N) or if the variable display is at a timing after the reach (step 001SGS309; N), the winning flash effect process is terminated without executing the process of step 001SGS310.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated as a flash effect when a start winning occurs, suggesting that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple light emission patterns and light emission colors of the game effect lamp 9 as a flash effect when a winning occurs may be provided, and the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (the probability of winning) may be varied depending on the light emission pattern and light emission color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated as a flash effect when a prize is won, but the present invention is not limited to this. A lamp other than the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a lamp dedicated to the flash effect when a prize is won) may be provided, and the lamp other than the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated as a flash effect when a prize is won.

(Button vibration processing)
Fig. 267 is a flow chart showing the button vibration effect process shown in Fig. 262. In the button vibration effect, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether or not the button vibration effect execution flag indicating that the button vibration effect is being executed is set (step 001SGS321). If the button vibration effect execution flag is not set (step 001SGS321; N), it judges whether or not the game state is normal (step 001SGS322). If the game state is normal (step 001SGS322; Y), it further judges whether or not the first start port winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS323). If the first start port winning designation command has not been received (step 001SGS323; N), the button vibration presentation processing is terminated, and if the first start port winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS323; Y), the number of first special chart pending memories is identified by referring to the start winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in Figure 240 (B) (step 001SGS324).

On the other hand, if the game state is not the normal state (step 001SGS322; N), the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state (step 001SGS325). If the game state is not the time-saving state or the probability variable state, that is, if the game state is the jackpot game state (step 001SGS325; N), the button vibration presentation processing is terminated, and if the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variable state (step 001SGS325; Y), it further judges whether the second start port winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS326). If the second start port winning designation command has not been received (step 001SGS326; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated, and if the second start port winning designation command has been received (step 001SGS326; Y), the start winning time reception command buffer 001SG194A shown in FIG. 240 (B) is referenced to identify the number of second special charts reserved (step 001SGS327).

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects judges whether the number of reserved memories identified in step 001SGS324 or step 001SGS327 is three or more (step 001SGS328). That is, in step 001SGS328, if the game state is normal, it judges whether the number of reserved memories of the first special chart is three or more, and if the game state is time-saving or probability-changing, it judges whether the number of reserved memories of the second special chart is three or more. If the number of reserved memories identified is two or less (step 001SGS328; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated, and if the number of reserved memories identified is three or more (step 001SGS328; Y), the button vibration effect execution flag is set (step 001SGS39), and the button vibration effect execution timer is set, and the button vibration effect processing is terminated (step 001SGS330).

If the button vibration effect execution flag is set (step 001SGS321; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration motor control process (step 001SGS331) to drive the vibration motor 36, i.e., to vibrate the push button 31B by driving the vibration motor 36, and decrements the value of the button vibration effect execution timer by 1 (step 001SGS332), and determines whether the button vibration effect execution timer has timed out (step 001SGS333). If the button vibration effect execution timer has not timed out (step 001SGS323; N), the button vibration effect processing is terminated, and if the button vibration effect execution timer has timed out (step 001SGS323; Y), the button vibration effect execution flag is cleared and the button vibration effect processing is terminated (step 001SGS334). In other words, the button vibration effect in this embodiment is an effect that notifies you that the number of reserved memories is approaching the upper limit of four by vibrating the push button 31B for a predetermined period of time (e.g., five seconds) when the number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reaches three in the normal state, or when the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol reaches three in the time-saving or special probability state.

In this embodiment, when the game state is the time-saving state or the probability variable state, a button vibration effect is executed based on the number of reserved second special symbols being three or more, and a notification is given that the number of reserved second special symbols is approaching the upper limit of four. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since the time-saving state and the probability variable state are game states in which the game ball frequently enters the starting winning hole, the button vibration effect may not be executed in these time-saving states and the probability variable state.

(Sub-hold indicator lighting control processing)
Fig. 268 is a diagram showing the lighting control state of the first sub-hold indicator 151A and the second sub-hold indicator 151B for each situation in which the performance control CPU 120 receives a start winning designation command in the sub-hold indicator lighting control process (step S168) shown in Fig. 262. In the sub-hold indicator lighting control process, whether or not to light the LEDs constituting the first sub-hold indicator 151A and the second sub-hold indicator 151B is determined depending on the received start winning designation command and the number of reserved memories.

For example, as shown in FIG. 268 (A), when the number of second special chart reserved memories is 0 when the first start port winning designation command is received, if the performance process flag value is 0, that is, when the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display of decorative patterns is not being executed, and there are no reserved memories other than the first special chart reserved memory based on a winning entry into the new first start port, the performance control CPU 120 will immediately execute variable display of decorative patterns based on the first special chart reserved memory, and will not execute control to light up a number of LEDs in the first sub-reserve display 151A according to the number of first special chart reserved memories (control to light up only one LED in the first sub-reserve display 151A). On the other hand, if the performance process flag value is 0 and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 2 to 4, i.e., when the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display is not being executed but there are first special symbol reserved memories other than the reserved memories based on the new start winning, or if the performance process flag value is 1 to 7 and the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 1 to 4, i.e., regardless of the number of reserved memories, during variable display of decorative symbols including during execution of variable display start setting process or during jackpot game, control is executed to light up a number of LEDs according to the number of first special symbol reserved memories in the first sub reserved display 151A.

Also, as shown in FIG. 268(B), when the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 or more when the first start hole winning designation command is received, that is, when a game ball newly enters the first start hole and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 or more, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to light up a number of LEDs in the first sub-reservation display 151A according to the number of first special symbol reserved memories, regardless of the performance process flag value or the number of first special symbol reserved memories, since the next variable display of the decorative symbol executed is based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

Also, as shown in FIG. 238(C), when a second start port entry designation command is received, that is, when a game ball newly enters the second start entry port regardless of the number of first special chart reserved memories, if the presentation process flag value is 0 and the number of second special chart reserved memories is 1, that is, when the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display is not being executed, and there are no second special chart reserved memories other than the reserved memories based on the new start entry, the presentation control CPU 120 immediately executes variable display of the decorative pattern based on the second special chart reserved memory, and therefore does not execute control to light up a number of LEDs in the second sub-reserved display 151B according to the number of second special chart reserved memories (control to light up only one LED of the second reserve display 25B). On the other hand, if the performance process flag value is 0 and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 2 to 4, i.e., when the game is not in a jackpot game state and variable display is not being executed but there are second special symbol reserved memories other than the reserved memories based on the new start winning, or if the performance process flag value is 1 to 7 and the number of second special symbol reserved memories is 1 to 4, i.e., during variable display of decorative symbols including execution of variable display start setting process or during jackpot game regardless of the number of reserved memories, control is executed to light up the number of LEDs corresponding to the number of second special symbol reserved memories in the second sub reserved display 151B.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 269 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Fig. 262. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS341). If the first variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS341; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 001SGS342). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

In addition, if the first variable display start designation reception flag is off in step 001SGS341 (step 001SGS341; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS343). If the second variable display start designation reception flag is off (step 001SGS343; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start designation reception flag is on (step 001SGS343; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 001SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 001SGS344). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 001SGS342 or step 001SGS344, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 001SGS345).

Then, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 001SGS346). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In addition, in this feature section 001SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three symbols are aligned as "7" as the stopping symbols. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbols are determined from among multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot patterns) in which three symbols are aligned as even symbols as the stopping symbols. Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the system determines a combination of three mismatched symbols as the stopping symbols, or a combination that results in a miss such as "767" (a losing symbol) according to the variation pattern.

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After executing step 001SGS346, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (step 001SGS347) and starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 001SGS348).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 001SGS349). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 001SGS350). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 001SGS351). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 001SGS352).

(Period related to processing of CPU 103 and performance control CPU 120)
Here, the period of processing executed by the CPU 103 and the performance control CPU 120 (and the display control unit 123) in this embodiment will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 270(A), the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 242 every 4 ms. That is, the CPU 103 in this embodiment executes the determination of whether or not a start winning has occurred, the special pattern process processing, the normal pattern process processing, the command control processing, and the like every 4 ms. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the 500 ms after the variable display of the special pattern as a pattern determination period during which the variable display of the special pattern is not executed. Furthermore, the CPU 103 executes the on/off control of the LEDs constituting the special pattern at 40 ms intervals, with one period being 320 ms (see FIG. 236(A)), apart from the periodic 12 ms off state and 4 ms on state in the display control processing (step S43).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 270(A), the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance control main process shown in FIG. 244 every 2 ms. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 103 every 2 ms (command analysis process), and executes performance control process process, performance random number update process, demo performance control process, background display update process, etc. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control to switch the LEDs constituting the first performance indicator light 152A and the second performance indicator light 152B on and off at 240 ms intervals, with one cycle being 480 ms (see FIG. 236(B)).

In addition, in the display control unit 123 in this embodiment, a period of 33 ms is required to draw an image (image drawing period), and the period (image update period) for updating the image displayed on the image display device 5 to a new image is 33 ms. In other words, in this embodiment, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is updated approximately 30 times per second (30 FPS).

(Details of the performance mode)
Next, the presentation modes A to D will be described. As described above, the presentation modes A and B are presentation modes that can be set when the game state is in a normal state (low probability low base state), the presentation mode C is a presentation mode that is set when the game state is in a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and the presentation mode D is a presentation mode that is set when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability high base state). In each presentation mode in this embodiment, the display mode of the reserved display and active display displayed on the image display device 5, the execution period of various animations, and whether or not they are executed are different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 270(B), the pending display appearance animation is executed over 660 ms (20 frames) in presentation mode A and presentation mode B, over 165 ms (5 frames) in presentation mode C, and over 99 ms (3 frames) in presentation mode D. Note that these pending display appearance animations may be shortened as described below.

In addition, the pause animation for the pending and active displays is repeated once every 2970 ms (90 frames) in presentation modes A and B, but is not executed in presentation modes C and D.

The ending animation for the active display is executed in 165 ms (5 frames) for all presentation modes A through D.

(Display mode of each performance mode)
As shown in Fig. 271 (A1), in the performance mode A, the decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first background image 001SG081 showing a daytime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in Fig. 271 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In detail, each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame-in manner from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward, then moves linearly downward, and is displayed in a frame-out manner from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) displayed in a frame passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set in the center of the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the succeeding decorative pattern (e.g., the "4" decorative pattern) is displayed in a frame-in manner and moves downward. In other words, when the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "2" decorative pattern and the succeeding "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but after the preceding "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the preceding "3" decorative pattern and the succeeding "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the numbers of the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., and then return to "0" after "9," repeatedly updating and displaying "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

In addition, the display area 5S provided at the top left of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of reserved second special symbols, and small symbols, and the reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display reserved displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. These reserved displays and active displays are displayed as cubes containing letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first reserved display, "F" for the second reserved display, "L" for the third reserved display, and "II (Roman numeral 2)" for the fourth reserved display) (see FIG. 285 (A)).

In this embodiment, each time a new reserved memory is generated, the letters displayed in the new reserved display always change regularly from P → W → F → L → II → P → W.... For example, if there are zero reserved memories and four new reserved memories are generated consecutively during the variable display of special symbols, if the letter in the active display is "P", then in the reserved memory display area 5U, the letter in the first reserved display will be "W", the letter in the second reserved display will be "F", the letter in the third reserved display will be "L", and the letter in the fourth reserved display will be "II". Also, in this situation, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the variable display of the new special pattern ends, the reserved display containing the letter "W" shifts to the active display in the active display area 5F, and in the reserved memory display area 5U, the reserved display containing the letter "F" shifts to the display position of the first reserved display, the reserved display containing the letter "L" shifts to the display position of the second reserved display, and the reserved display containing the letter "II" shifts to the display position of the third reserved display. Furthermore, if a new reserved memory (fourth reserved memory) occurs in this state, a reserved display containing the letter "P" is displayed in the display position of the fourth reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the letters "P", "W", "F", "L", and "II" are displayed in the active display and the reserved display in the order in which the reserved memories were generated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if there is one or more reserved memories when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from a power outage, the letters in the active display and the reserved display may be displayed in a predetermined order (for example, "P", "W", "F", "L", and "II") regardless of the order of letters in the active display and the reserved display immediately before the power outage (for example, "F", "L", "II", "P", "W" or "II", "P", "W", "F", and "L"). In addition, the first special reserved memory number, the second special reserved memory number, the small pattern, the reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common to all performance modes, so their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in FIG. 271 (B1), in presentation mode B, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background image 001SG082 depicting a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 271 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scroll display (second scroll display) that moves in a curved shape from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed as frame-in from the upper left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, moving toward the center of the screen, then moving downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and then frame-out from the lower left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R toward the side. The center decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed as it moves from the back of the screen to the front of the center decorative pattern display area 5C, and then frame-out.

In addition, when the leading decorative pattern (e.g., the "2" decorative pattern) displayed in the frame passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the following decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves toward the center of the screen. In other words, when the leading "2" decorative pattern passes near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "3" decorative pattern are visible, but after the leading "2" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the following "3" decorative pattern and the "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in number from "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and the display is updated and displayed repeatedly from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

The pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. These pending displays and active displays are displayed as regular octahedrons containing letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "L" for the third pending display, and "II" for the fourth pending display) (see FIG. 285 (A)).

As shown in FIG. 271 (C1), in presentation mode C, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background image 001SG083 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 271 (C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotational display that rotates around an axis of rotation that faces in the vertical direction.

In more detail, the decorative symbols in presentation mode C have a first surface and a second surface that is the opposite surface of the first surface, and a preceding decorative symbol (e.g., a decorative symbol of a "3") is displayed on the first surface. On the other hand, when the first surface faces forward, it is not possible to determine whether a succeeding decorative symbol (e.g., a decorative symbol of a "4") is displayed on the second surface.

The decorative patterns can also be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from the first side, to the second side, to the first side, to the second side, etc., the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating and displaying "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, when the first surface 5b is rotated approximately 90 degrees or more from a state in which it faces the front and the second surface is displayed, the second surface displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "4") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "3") displayed on the first surface. Next, although not shown in the figure, when the second surface 5b is rotated approximately 90 degrees or more from a state in which it faces the front and the first surface is displayed, the first surface displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "5") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "4") displayed on the second surface 5b.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 001SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a time-saving remaining display 001SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

The pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. These pending displays and active displays are displayed as spheres containing letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "L" for the third pending display, and "II" for the fourth pending display) (see FIG. 285 (A)).

As shown in FIG. 271 (D1), in presentation mode D, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a fourth background image 002SG084 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 271 (D2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In detail, each decorative pattern is framed in from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward, then moves linearly downward, and is framed out from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downward. Also, when the leading decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) that is framed in passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set in the center of the vertical direction of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative pattern (e.g., the "4" decorative pattern) is framed in and moves downward. In other words, when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of numbers "0," "1," "2," "3," etc., before returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increase from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

The pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 display pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. These pending displays and active displays are displayed as spheres containing letters (for example, "P" for the active display, "W" for the first pending display, "F" for the second pending display, "L" for the third pending display, and "II" for the fourth pending display) just like in presentation mode C, but differ in that the color scheme inside these spheres is inverted from the color scheme of the letters contained therein (see FIG. 285 (A)).

(Appearance animation)
Next, the animation of the reserved display in each performance mode will be described. In this embodiment, the "animation" is, for example, a dynamic display (moving image display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame before, and the visibility may be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transmittance of the displayed image different from the image one frame before. In other words, the "animation" includes not only displays that involve image displacement such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarged display", "reduced display", "frame-in display", and "frame-out display", but also displays that do not involve image displacement such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display" in which the display mode such as color tone changes.

In this embodiment, the "appearing animation" is an animation for displaying a reserved display corresponding to the occurrence of a reserved memory at a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory display area 5U when a new reserved memory is generated by a game ball entering the start winning hole. As shown in FIG. 272 and FIG. 285 (B), when a start winning occurs in the performance mode A and the execution of a reserved change performance is not determined based on the start winning, that is, when the reserved display is displayed in white, the new reserved display moves from a position on the lower front side of the reserved memory display area 5U to a position on the upper side of the reserved memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the start winning. Then, when the reserved display reaches the upper position of the reserved memory display area 5U, it descends toward a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory display area 5U, and is finally displayed at a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories in the reserved memory display area 5U. In other words, when a start winning occurs in the performance mode A and the execution of a reserved change performance is not determined based on the start winning, the reserved display moves in a parabolic manner from a position on the lower front side of the reserved memory display area 5U.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 274, the pending display moves in a parabolic arc with its apex at a position above the active display and pending display that are already displayed, so the appearance animation of the white pending display in presentation mode A is an animation that is executed over a wider area than the dwell animation of the active display and pending display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 274, in the appearance animation when a start winning occurs in presentation mode A and it is not decided to execute a hold change presentation based on the start winning, the hold display is displayed with a high transparency in the first frame image (for example, the transparency of the hold display in the first frame image is 90%), and as the appearance animation progresses, the transparency of the hold display gradually decreases to 80%, 60%, 40%, etc. Then, in the 20th frame image of the appearance animation, the hold display reaches its final state with a transparency of 0%, and is displayed at a position according to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U.

As shown in Figures 273 and 285 (B), when a start winning occurs in presentation mode A and it is decided to execute a hold change presentation based on the start winning, i.e., when the hold display is displayed in blue or red, an effect is displayed at the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the start winning, and the effect descends toward the hold memory display area 5U. At this time, the effect becomes invisible (transparency increases) as it descends, while a blue or red hold display gradually descends toward the hold memory display area 5U while decreasing its transparency in place of the effect. In other words, both the effect and the hold display descend toward the hold memory display area 5U. Then, at the timing when the effect completely disappears, the hold display is displayed at a position according to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a hold change presentation in presentation mode A, the appearance animation of the hold display starts by displaying the hold display at a size larger than the active display and hold display already displayed, and gradually reduces the size of the hold display as it moves (descends).

Although not specifically shown, the blue and red pending displays and effects in presentation mode A start to be displayed from a higher position than the active displays and pending displays already displayed, and move (down) toward the pending memory display area 5U, so the appearance animation of the blue and red pending displays in presentation mode A is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the dwell animation of the active displays and pending displays.

As shown in FIG. 276 and FIG. 285 (B), when a start winning occurs in the performance mode B and it is decided not to execute the reserve change performance based on the start winning, that is, when the reserve display is displayed in white, an effect is displayed at the upper position of the reserve memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the start winning, and the effect descends toward the reserve memory display area 5U. At this time, the effect becomes invisible (the transparency increases) as it descends, while the white reserve display gradually descends toward the reserve memory display area 5U while decreasing the transparency in place of the effect. In other words, the effect and the reserve display both descend toward the reserve memory display area 5U. Note that the effect in this appearance animation disappears 5 frames from the start of the animation, but the reserve display continues to descend even after the effect disappears. Then, when a predetermined period (15 frames in the case of the animation) has passed since the effect disappeared, the reserve display is displayed at a position according to the number of reserved memories in the reserve memory display area 5U.

Although not specifically shown, the white pending display and effects in presentation mode B start to be displayed from a higher position than the active display and pending display that are already displayed, and move (down) toward the pending memory display area 5U. Because of this movement, the appearance animation of the white pending display in presentation mode B is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the dwell animation of the active display and pending display.

As shown in FIG. 277 and FIG. 285 (B), when a start winning occurs in the performance mode B and it is decided to execute a hold change performance based on the start winning, that is, when the hold display is displayed in blue or red, an effect is displayed at the upper position of the hold memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the start winning, just as when it is decided to execute a hold change performance in the performance mode A, and the effect descends toward the hold memory display area 5U. At this time, the effect becomes invisible (the transparency increases) as it descends, while the blue or red hold display gradually descends toward the hold memory display area 5U while decreasing the transparency in place of the effect. In other words, both the effect and the hold display descend toward the hold memory display area 5U. Then, when the effect completely disappears, the hold display is displayed at a position according to the number of hold memories in the hold memory display area 5U.

In addition, when it is decided to execute a hold change effect in effect mode B, the appearance animation of the hold display starts by displaying the hold display at a size larger than the active display and hold display already displayed, and gradually reduces the size of the hold display as it moves (descends).

Although not specifically shown, the blue and red pending displays and effects in presentation mode A start to be displayed from a higher position than the active displays and pending displays already displayed, and move (down) toward the pending memory display area 5U, so the appearance animation of the blue and red pending displays in presentation mode A is an animation that is executed in a wider area than the dwell animation of the active displays and pending displays.

As shown in Figures 273 and 277, when a blue or red reserved display is displayed in presentation mode A or presentation mode B (when a reserved change presentation is executed), an effect is displayed at the upper position of the reserved memory display area 5U as the image of the first frame of the appearance animation, so that the player can recognize that the reserved display that will be displayed from now on is the reserved display that is the target of the reserved change presentation, that is, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when a white reserved display is displayed. Furthermore, until the ninth frame of the appearance animation, the transparency of the reserved display is set high so that the player cannot recognize whether the display color of the reserved display is blue or red, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the display color of the reserved display is blue or red, that is, how high the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is.

Also, as shown in Figures 273 and 277, when a blue or red hold display is displayed in presentation mode A or presentation mode B (when a hold change presentation is executed), a common effect is displayed as the image of frames 1 to 19 as the appearance animation. In other words, a common effect is displayed in a total of four appearance animations: when a blue hold display is displayed in presentation mode A, when a red hold display is displayed in presentation mode A, when a blue hold display is displayed in presentation mode B, and when a red hold display is displayed in presentation mode B. Therefore, when the hold display is displayed in blue or red in presentation mode A or presentation mode B, the image data used as these appearance animations can be standardized, and the amount of data required to execute the appearance animations can be reduced.

As shown in Figures 278, 279, and 285, when a new start winning occurs in presentation mode C and presentation mode D, first, an effect is displayed in a position in the pending memory display area 5U according to the number of pending memories based on the start winning. The effect becomes invisible (the transparency increases) as the appearance animation progresses. Then, in place of the effect, the pending display is enlarged and displayed with a decreasing transparency at a position in the pending memory display area 5U according to the number of pending memories. Then, when the effect has completely disappeared, the decrease in transparency and enlargement of the pending display also ends.

As shown in Figures 278 and 279, the appearance animation in presentation mode C takes a longer time from when the effect starts to be displayed until it disappears than the appearance animation in presentation mode D, and the time required from when the pending display starts to when it finishes expanding is also set to be longer.

(Stay animation)
Next, the animation of the reserved display and the active display in each presentation mode will be described. In this embodiment, the "retention animation" includes an animation that operates the active display in the active display area 5F in a manner corresponding to the presentation mode (rotation in presentation mode A, rotation in presentation mode B, non-operation in presentation modes C and D) during the variable display of the special pattern, and an animation that operates the reserved display in the reserved memory display area 5U in a manner corresponding to the presentation mode (rotation in presentation mode A, rotation in presentation mode B, non-operation in presentation modes C and D) when there is one or more reserved memories.

As shown in Figures 280 (A) and 285 (B), the dwell animation in presentation mode A is an animation that rotates the pending display or active display clockwise around a vertical axis when viewed from the front. The dwell animation in presentation mode A is executed repeatedly with one cycle being 90 frames. Also, in the dwell animation in presentation mode A, the text in the pending display or active display also rotates in accordance with the rotation of the pending display or active display.

Also, as shown in Figures 280 (B) and 285 (B), the dwell animation in presentation mode B is an animation that rotates the pending display or active display alternately in a clockwise and counterclockwise direction around a vertical axis when viewed from the front. The dwell animation in this presentation mode has one cycle of 90 frames, and in the first 45 frames, the pending display or active display rotates counterclockwise around a vertical axis when viewed from the front, and in the last 45 frames, the pending display or active display rotates clockwise around the vertical axis when viewed from the front. In the dwell animation in presentation mode B, the text in the pending display or active display also rotates in accordance with the rotation of the pending display or active display.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in presentation mode C and presentation mode D, i.e., the time-saving state and the probability change state, the time required for each variable display is set to be shorter than in the normal state in which the pending display and active display are displayed in presentation mode A and presentation mode B, so the pause animation of the pending display and active display is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pause animation of the pending display and active display may also be executed in presentation mode C and presentation mode D.

The dwell animation in this embodiment is an animation that is displayed at one cycle of 90 frames (2970 ms), that is, at about 30 frames per second (frame rate of about 30 FPS). Here, since the dwell animation is an animation that is viewed by the player for a longer period of time than the appearance animation or the end animation, the idea is to make the operation of the pending display appear leisurely. In addition, by producing the appearance animation at a frame rate of about 30 FPS, it is not only easier to develop the gaming machine, but also has the advantage that the developer can easily imagine the actual operation of the pending display. For the above reasons, the dwell animation in this embodiment is produced as an animation with a frame rate of 30 FPS, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the dwell animation may be an animation with a frame rate lower or higher than 30 FPS.

(End animation)
Next, the ending animation of the active display in each performance mode will be described. In this embodiment, the "ending animation" is an animation that ends the display of the active display corresponding to the variable display (makes the active display disappear from the active display area 5F) when the variable display of the special pattern ends (stops). As shown in Figures 281 (A) to 281 (D) and 285 (B), the ending animation in each performance mode is an animation that is executed in the active display area 5F, and the transparency of the active display corresponding to the ended variable display gradually increases, and it completely disappears from the active display area 5F in the fifth frame.

In this embodiment, the ending animation is exemplified as being executed in a common manner in each presentation mode, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the execution period of the ending animation may be common in each presentation mode, while a weekly rainfall animation of a different manner may be executed in each presentation mode.

(shift animation)
Next, the shift animation of the reserved display in each performance mode will be described. In this embodiment, the "shift animation" refers to an animation including an animation in which the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the first reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U is moved toward the active display area 5F in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol, an animation in which the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the second reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U is moved toward a position corresponding to the first reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol, an animation in which the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the third reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U is moved toward a position corresponding to the second reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol, and an animation in which the reserved display displayed at a position corresponding to the fourth reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U is moved toward a position corresponding to the third reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U in response to the start of variable display of a new special symbol.

As shown in Figures 282, 284 and 285 (B), the shift animation is an animation that is executed when the active display in the active display area 5F disappears (display ends) due to the end animation described above, and the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is moved (shifted) to the active display area 5F as the next active display, the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is moved to the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U, the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the third pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is moved to the position corresponding to the second pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the fourth pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U is moved to the position corresponding to the third pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U.

As shown in FIG. 283, when a new pending memory is generated when the number of pending memories is 0 and the variable display is not being executed, the pending display (the pending display in the final state in the appearance animation) is first displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U without executing the appearance animation. From this state, the only shift animation executed is the movement (shift) of the pending display displayed at the position corresponding to the first pending memory in the pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F.

As shown in FIG. 275, the positions corresponding to the first pending memory in the active display area 5F and the pending memory display area 5U are spaced apart by a length L1, and in the pending memory display area 5U, the positions corresponding to the first pending memory and the second pending memory, the positions corresponding to the second pending memory and the third pending memory, and the positions corresponding to the third pending memory and the fourth pending memory are each spaced apart by a length L2 (L1>L2) that is shorter than length L1. For this reason, in the shift animation of this embodiment, the pending display that shifts into the active display area 5F as the active display corresponding to the next variable display shifts faster than the other pending displays.

As shown in Figures 282, 283, and 284, in this embodiment, the shift animations in presentation modes A and B have been described, but the shift animations in presentation modes C and D are similar to those in presentation modes A and B, so their description will be omitted. Furthermore, Figure 283 is an explanatory diagram of the case where the shift animation is executed when there is one reserved memory in presentation mode A, but the shift animation is also executed in the same way when there is one reserved memory in presentation mode B.

(Regarding the display mode of the reserved message when a new reserved message occurs)
Next, the display mode of the reserved display when a new reserved memory is generated by the entry of a game ball into the start winning hole will be explained for each situation. Note that the following forms will be explained for the presence or absence of execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of reserved first special symbols, and the reserved display based on these first special symbol reserved memory numbers when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state), the number of reserved second special symbols is 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed, but the following forms also apply to the presence or absence of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols, and the reserved display based on these second special symbol reserved memory numbers when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state.

(Details of shortened appearance animation)
Next, we will explain the shortening of the appearance animation of the reserved display (hereinafter, sometimes called skipping). Note that the following explanation is mainly based on the appearance animation of the performance pattern A, but the appearance animations of the performance patterns B to D are omitted because they differ only in their execution period.

As shown in Figures 286 (A) and 286 (B), when the number of pending memories is 1 or more and a new pending memory occurs, and it is decided not to execute the pending change presentation based on that pending memory, the presentation control CPU 120 receives a pending memory number notification command based on the occurrence of that pending memory, and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the appearance animation. Then, when the image drawing of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the appearance animation of the new pending display from the next image update timing.

Here, as shown in FIG. 286(A), if the period from the start timing of the appearance animation to the start timing of the next variable display is 660 ms or more, images of all frames are displayed in which the pending display moves in a parabola over 660 ms (20 frames) toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, and finally the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. Then, when the next variable display starts, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start command), and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. Then, when the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the display of the shift animation starts on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 286(B), if the period from the start of the appearance animation to the start of the next variable display is less than 660 ms, the image of an intermediate frame (the image of the 14th frame in FIG. 286(B)) will still be displayed as the appearance animation at the start of the next variable display. Also, when the next variable display starts, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start command), and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. Then, when the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the shift animation from the next image update timing, replacing the appearance animation that had been executed up until then.

At this time, images that have not been displayed as the appearance animation (images from frames 16 to 20 in FIG. 286(B)) are not displayed as is, and the display of the shift animation begins. The pending display displayed as the first frame of the shift animation is the same as the final state of the pending display displayed as the appearance animation (the pending display displayed as the 20th frame image at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U). For this reason, when a new variable display begins while an appearance animation is being performed, the player will visually perceive the pending display that had been displayed moving in a parabolic arc as the previous appearance animation to suddenly be displayed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, transitioning to the shift animation.

In addition, in Fig. 286 (A) and Fig. 286 (B), a case where a new reserved memory is generated when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more and it is decided not to execute the reserved change performance based on the reserved memory is described. However, as shown in Fig. 287 (A) and Fig. 287 (B), when a new reserved memory is generated when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more and it is decided to execute the reserved change performance based on the reserved memory, similarly to Fig. 286 (A) and Fig. 286 (B), if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a variable display start designation command during the execution period of the appearance animation, the appearance animation of the blue or red reserved display is executed for 660 ms, while if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variable display start designation command during the execution period of the appearance animation, the appearance animation of the blue or red reserved display is interrupted (skipped) and a shift animation of the blue or red reserved display is started instead of the appearance animation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 288(A), when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs immediately before the end of the pattern determination period of an already completed variable display, that is, within 33 ms before the end of the pattern determination period (when the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs immediately before the next variable display), the performance control CPU 120 receives a pending memory number notification command based on the occurrence of the pending memory, and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the first frame of the appearance animation. Then, when the image drawing of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the appearance animation of the new pending display from the next image update timing.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 288(A), variable display based on new reserved memory is started while the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is being drawn, and when the variable display is started, the performance control CPU 120 receives a command based on the start of the variable display (variable display start command), causing the display control unit 123 to start drawing the image of the first frame of the shift animation. Then, when the image drawing of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the display of the shift animation is started on the image display device 5 from the next image update timing.

For this reason, when the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is displayed on the image display device 5, the images of the second to twentieth frames of the appearance animation are not displayed, and the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U (a pending display of the same form as the pending display displayed as the image of the twentieth frame of the appearance animation) is displayed as an image shifting toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 288(B), if the number of pending memories is 0 and a new pending memory occurs immediately after the end of the already completed variable display pattern determination period, in other words, if a new pending memory occurs within 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period, the performance control CPU 120 will receive a pending memory number notification command and a variable display start command almost simultaneously based on the occurrence of the pending memory. This causes the display control unit 123 to prioritize drawing the shift animation image over the appearance animation image.

As a result, in the image display device 5, the image of the appearance animation is not displayed, and the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U (a pending display of the same form as the pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation) is displayed as an image that shifts toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display as a shift animation image.

Also, as shown in FIG. 289, if the number of pending memories is 0 and sufficient time has passed since the end of the already-ended variable display pattern determination period, in other words, if a new pending memory occurs more than 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period, the performance control CPU 120 will receive a pending memory number notification command and a variable display start command almost simultaneously based on the occurrence of the pending memory. This causes the display control unit 123 to prioritize drawing the shift animation image over the appearance animation image.

As a result, in the image display device 5, the image of the appearance animation is not displayed, and the first pending display in the pending memory display area 5U (a pending display of the same form as the pending display displayed as the 20th frame image of the appearance animation) is displayed as an image that shifts toward the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display as a shift animation image.

In addition, in a conventional pachinko game machine 1, if the number of reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new reserved memory (N+1th reserved memory) occurs just before the variable display of the special symbol ends, the appearance animation of the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory will start at a position corresponding to the N+1th reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U. If the variable display of the new special symbol starts while the appearance animation is being executed, the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memories up to the Nth reserved memory is moved (shift animation) in the reserved memory display area 5U. At this time, the appearance animation of the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory is in progress, so it is possible to move the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory while continuing the appearance animation (execute the shift animation) (hereinafter, the first proposal) or not move it until the appearance animation is completed (hereinafter, the second proposal).

Here, in the first proposal, the movement display of the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory and the appearance animation proceed simultaneously, so there is a problem that both the movement display of the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory and the appearance animation are difficult for the player to see. Also, in the second proposal, a situation occurs in which the reserved display is not displayed between the reserved display whose movement display has already been completed and the reserved display corresponding to the new reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U, and if the new reserved memory is the fourth reserved memory, the reserved display does not start moving from the position corresponding to the fourth reserved memory in the reserved memory display area 5U until the appearance animation is completed, so the player may mistakenly believe that the number of reserved memories is still at the upper limit of four even though the variable display of a new special pattern has started, and the player may temporarily stop playing.

For the above reasons, in this invention, when a new pending memory occurs while the pending display appearance animation is being executed, the appearance animation is interrupted (skipped), thereby ensuring the visibility of the pending display shift animation and appearance animation while reducing the risk of the player misinterpreting the number of pending displays displayed in the pending memory display area 5U.

The following describes the display mode of the image display device 5, the lighting control of each reserved indicator, and the transmission and reception of commands according to the timing when a new reserved memory is generated, based on Figs. 290 to 303. Note that Figs. 290 to 303 exemplify a state in which the game state is normal, the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 0, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not being executed, but in the case of a game state in which the time-saving state or the probability of winning state, the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol is 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol is not being executed, only the target special symbol for the variable display is different, and the display mode of the image display device 5, the lighting control of each reserved indicator, and the transmission and reception of commands are the same, so they will be omitted.

(When a new reserved memory occurs during a variable display with 1 to 3 reserved memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
First, as shown in Fig. 290, when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is N (3 ≥ N ≥ 1) and a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt processing as that which determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

Then, when the variable display and the 500 ms pattern determination period based on the variable display end, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first special pattern reserved memory number and controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the reserved memory number after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of the pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Note that, as the appearance animation, the pending display begins to move toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 290, if the appearance animation is started when there is a period of 660 ms or more until the start of the next variable display, the drawing of the appearance animation image and the appearance animation display period will end before the start of the next variable display, and instead, the drawing of the stay animation image and the stay animation of the pending display displayed by the appearance animation will start.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the dwell animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation is started.

(When the number of reserved memories is between 1 and 3, a new reserved memory occurs, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in FIG. 291, we will explain the case where a new first special chart reserved memory is generated when the number of first special chart reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1), and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display.

For example, if a new first special chart reserved memory occurs during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the number of first special chart reserved memories is completed, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special chart reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special chart reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt processing as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special chart reserved memory).

When the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the first reserved memory number, and controls the illumination of the first reserved display 25A according to the reserved memory number after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

Since the execution cycle of the interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command during the drawing period of the first frame image of the appearance animation, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, a new variable display is started while the appearance animation is being executed, a shift animation is started in place of the appearance animation, and a new variable display is started within a period of less than 33 ms after a new pending memory is generated, so that the pending display begins to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N in the pending memory display area 5U without the appearance animation being executed. Also, in this case, the shift animation only needs to shift the pending display excluding the newly started pending display.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory count notification command during the display period of the appearance animation, so the performance control CPU 120 controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A, and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation starts.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 286(B), the pending display appearance animation ends midway through to the player, and the pending display suddenly appears in the pending memory display area 5U in the same manner as the final appearance animation, as if a shift animation were being executed.

(When a new reserved memory occurs during the shift animation after the end of a variable display with 1 to 3 reserved memories and the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in FIG. 292, a case will be explained in which the number of first special pattern reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs during the shift animation after the variable display of the first special pattern has ended and the next variable display has begun.

First, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the first reserved memory number, and controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the reserved memory number after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

When a new reserved memory occurs during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. The CPU 103 also transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special chart reserved memory number notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory during the execution of the shift animation, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, as the appearance animation, the pending display begins to move toward a position according to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Also, as for the appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 286(A), the pending display is moved over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N in the pending memory display area 5U.

(When a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the next variable display starts after the variable display ends with 1 to 3 reserved memories)
Next, as shown in FIG. 293, a case will be explained in which the number of first special pattern reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and after the variable display of the first special pattern ends, a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the start of the next variable display.

First, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special patterns, and controls the illumination of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved patterns after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved pattern number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

When a new reserved memory occurs during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. The CPU 103 also transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special chart reserved memory number notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory, it identifies the number of first special chart reserved memories from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified number of first special chart reserved memories. The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, as the appearance animation, the reserved display begins to move toward a position according to the number N of reserved memories in the reserved memory display area 5U.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Also, as for the appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 286(A), the pending display is moved over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N in the pending memory display area 5U.

(When a new reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms after the variable display of reserved memory numbers 1 to 3 has ended and the next variable display starts)
Next, as shown in FIG. 294, a case will be explained in which the number of first special pattern reserved memories is N (3≧N≧1) and after the variable display of the first special pattern ends, a new first special pattern reserved memory is generated less than 33 ms before the start of the next variable display.

First, as shown in FIG. 294, when a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the number of first special symbol reserved memories is completed, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt processing as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

When the pattern determination period ends within 33 ms from the occurrence of a new reserved memory, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first symbol memories and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the new special symbol (first special symbol), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command during the drawing period of the first frame image of the appearance animation, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, a new variable display starts within a period of less than 33 ms after a new pending memory is generated, and the pending display starts to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number N of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U without the appearance animation being executed. Also, in this case, the shift animation only needs to shift the pending display excluding the newly started pending display.

(If a new start win occurs while the number of reserved memories is variable and displayed as 4)
Next, as shown in FIG. 295, a case will be explained in which a new start winning (winning at the first start winning slot) occurs while the number of first special chart reserved memories is variable displayed as four.

As shown in FIG. 295, if a new start winning occurs during the variable display of the number of first special symbol reserved memories of four, no new first special symbol reserved memories will be generated because the number of first special symbol reserved memories is already at the maximum number of four. Therefore, when the variable display and pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the number of first special symbol reserved memories and controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved memories after the subtraction (three). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and transmits a first variable display start designation and a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (3). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

(When the number of reserved memories is four and a new reserved memory occurs during the shift animation of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in FIG. 296, a case will be explained in which a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs during the shift animation after the variable display of the first special pattern with four first special pattern reserved memories has ended and the next variable display has begun.

First, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the number of reserved first special patterns, and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved patterns (three) after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved pattern number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

When a new reserved memory occurs during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special symbol reserved memory. The CPU 103 also transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as that which determined the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (3). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special chart reserved memory number notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory during the execution of the shift animation, it identifies the number of first special chart reserved memories from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified number of first special chart reserved memories (4). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, as the appearance animation, the reserved display begins to move toward a position in the reserved memory display area 5U according to the number of reserved memories, which is 4.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Also, as for the appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 286(A), the pending display is moved over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories (4) in the pending memory display area 5U.

(If a new start win occurs during the pattern determination period after the pending memory number is displayed as 4)
Next, as shown in FIG. 297, a case will be explained in which a new start winning (winning at the first start winning slot) occurs during the pattern determination period after the number of first special pattern reserved memories is displayed as four.

As shown in FIG. 297, during the pattern determination period after the variable display of the first special pattern reserved memory number is four, the state of the first special pattern reserved memory number being four is maintained. Also, since the first special pattern reserved memory number is the upper limit of four, even if a new start winning (a winning at the first start winning port) occurs during the pattern determination period, a new first special pattern reserved memory is not generated. Therefore, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the first special pattern reserved memory number, and executes lighting control of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories after the subtraction (three). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start designation and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (3). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

(When a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms of the start of the next variable display after the number of reserved memories is four)
Next, as shown in FIG. 298, a case will be explained in which after the variable display of four first special chart reserved memories has ended, a new first special chart reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the start of the next variable display.

First, when the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the number of reserved first special patterns, and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved patterns (three) after the subtraction. Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved pattern number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

When a new reserved memory occurs during execution of the variable display, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories (4) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. The CPU 103 also transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as when the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory was determined).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (3). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a first special chart reserved memory number notification command based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory, it identifies the number of first special chart reserved memories from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified number of first special chart reserved memories (four). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. In addition, as the appearance animation, the reserved display begins to move toward a position in the reserved memory display area 5U according to the number of reserved memories, which is four.

In this case, since the shift animation has already started before the appearance animation, there is a period in which the appearance animation and the shift animation are executed in parallel. Also, as for the appearance animation, as shown in FIG. 286(A), the pending display is moved over a period of 660 ms, and the pending display is displayed in its final form at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories (4) in the pending memory display area 5U.

(When a new reserved memory occurs during a variable display with 0 reserved memories, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in Figure 299, we will explain the case where a new reserved memory occurs during a variable display in which the number of reserved memories of the first special chart is 0, and the appearance animation starts more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display.
First, as shown in Fig. 299, when a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs while the number of first special symbol reserved memories is variable and displayed as 0, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories (1) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interruption process as that which determines the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory).

Then, when the variable display and the 500 ms pattern determination period based on the variable display end, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special symbols, and controls the lighting of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved symbols after the subtraction (0 symbols). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special symbol (first special symbol), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved symbol number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (1).

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of the pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory. When the drawing of the first frame image of the appearance animation is completed, the first frame image of the appearance animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the appearance animation begins. Incidentally, as the appearance animation, the pending display begins to move toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, which is one.

As shown in FIG. 299, if the appearance animation starts when there is a period of 660 ms or more until the start of the next variable display, the drawing of the appearance animation image and the appearance animation display period will end before the start of the next variable display, and instead, the drawing of the stay animation image and the stay animation of the pending display displayed by the appearance animation will start.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (0). The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the dwell animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation is started.

(When the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new reserved memory is generated, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display)
Next, as shown in FIG. 300, we will explain the case where a new first special chart reserved memory is generated when the number of first special chart reserved memories is 0, and the appearance animation starts less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display.

For example, if a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the pattern determination period after the end of the variable display when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 0, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories (1) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as when the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory was determined).

When the pattern determination period ends, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first special patterns, and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved patterns after the subtraction (0). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved pattern number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (1).

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command during the display period of the appearance animation, so the performance control CPU 120 controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the first special chart reserved memory number (0), and the display control unit 123 starts drawing the image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation starts.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 286(B), the pending display appearance animation ends midway through to the player, and the pending display suddenly appears in the pending memory display area 5U in the same manner as the final appearance animation, as if a shift animation were being executed.

(When a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period of a variable display with 0 reserved memories)
Next, as shown in Figure 301, a case will be explained in which a new first special pattern reserved memory is generated within 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of a first special pattern when the number of first special pattern reserved memories is 0.

First, when a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms after the pattern determination period, the CPU 103 does not control the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories including the new first special pattern reserved memory, but instead adds 1 to the number of first special pattern reserved memories and subtracts 1 from the number of first special pattern reserved memories, and starts the variable display of the new special pattern (first special pattern). Based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern, the CPU 103 transmits a first variable display start command and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it does not control the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the first special chart reserved memory number, but instead controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, the pending display is not moved (appearance animation) toward a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, but the pending display starts to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U. Then, the pending display is moved (shifted) toward the active display area 5F immediately after it starts to be displayed.

(When a new reserved memory occurs within 33 ms until the end of the pattern determination period for a variable display with 0 reserved memories)
Next, as shown in FIG. 302, a case will be explained in which a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs less than 33 ms before the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of a first special pattern in which the number of first special pattern reserved memories is 0.

First, as shown in FIG. 302, when a new first special symbol reserved memory occurs during the pattern determination period after the end of the variable display when the number of first special symbol reserved memories is 0, the CPU 103 controls the lighting of the first reserved display 25A according to the number of reserved memories (1) including the new first special symbol reserved memory. Also, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 at the timing when the new reserved memory occurs (the same game control timer interrupt process as when the occurrence of the new first special symbol reserved memory was determined).

When the pattern determination period ends within 33 ms from the occurrence of a new reserved memory, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the number of reserved first symbols and controls the illumination of the first reserved indicator 25A according to the number of reserved first symbols after the subtraction (0). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the new special symbol (first special symbol), and transmits a first variable display start command and a first special symbol reserved number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special symbol.

Since the execution cycle of interrupt control is 2 ms, the performance control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory notification command up to 2 ms after the CPU 103 transmits the first reserved memory notification command. When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command and controls the lighting of the first sub-reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number (1).

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an appearance animation of a pending display based on the occurrence of a new first special chart pending memory.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start designation and the first special chart reserved memory number notification command during the drawing period of the first frame image of the appearance animation, it identifies the first special chart reserved memory number from the first special chart reserved memory number notification command, and controls the lighting of the first sub reserved display 151A according to the identified first special chart reserved memory number. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display control unit 123 to cause the display control unit 123 to start drawing an image of the shift animation in place of the image of the appearance animation. When the drawing of the image of the first frame of the shift animation is completed, the image of the first frame of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation begins.

In other words, in this case, a new variable display starts within a period of less than 33 ms after a new pending memory is generated, and the pending display starts to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories (one) in the pending memory display area 5U without the appearance animation being executed. Also, as a shift animation in this case, the newly displayed pending display is shifted toward the active display area 5F.

(When a new reserved memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more have passed since the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display with 0 reserved memories)
Next, as shown in FIG. 303, a case where a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more have passed since the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display of the first special pattern with the number of first special pattern reserved memories being 0 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 303, when a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs at a timing when 33 ms or more have passed since the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display of the first special pattern reserved memory with the number of first special pattern reserved memories being 0, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the number of first special pattern reserved memories and then subtracts 1 from the number of first special pattern reserved memories, and starts the variable display of a new special pattern (first special pattern) without executing the lighting control of the first reserved display unit 25A according to the reserved memory number (1) including the new first special pattern reserved memory, and transmits a first variable display start designation and a first special pattern reserved memory number notification command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the start of the variable display of the new first special pattern.

As mentioned above, the variable display of the first special pattern in this embodiment involves turning on one of the eight LEDs constituting the first special pattern display device 4A for 40 ms, then changing the LED to be turned on at 40 ms intervals, and repeating this cycle (320 ms) until all eight LEDs have been turned on.

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received the first variable display start command and the first special pattern reserved memory number notification command, it starts the variable display of the sub-patterns while not controlling the lighting of the first sub-reserved indicator 151A according to the first special pattern reserved memory number, and controls the display control unit 123 to start drawing the shift animation image. When the drawing of the first frame image of the shift animation is completed, the first frame image of the shift animation is transferred to the image display device 5 at the next image update timing, and the display of the shift animation is started.

In other words, in this case, the pending display is not moved (appearance animation) to a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U, but the pending display starts to be displayed as the final state of the appearance animation at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the pending memory display area 5U.

As mentioned above, the variable display of the sub-symbols in this embodiment involves repeatedly turning on and off the LEDs that make up the first performance indicator light 152A at 240 ms intervals (one cycle: 480 ms).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the number of first special reserved memories is 0 and the variable display is not being executed, and a demo movie display is being displayed as a guide display for adjusting the performance, as shown in Fig. 304 (A) to Fig. 304 (C), when a new reserved memory is generated by the game ball entering the first starting hole, the variable display of the first special symbol is first started. At this time, the CPU 103 updates the count value of the first special reserved memory number from 0 to 1 in the starting hole switch passing process, and updates the count value of the first special reserved memory number from 1 to 0 in the normal special symbol processing executed in the same interrupt as the starting hole switch passing process, so that the LED constituting the first reserved indicator 25A does not light up (light up in a manner indicating that the number of first special reserved memories is 1).

In addition, in the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number notification command indicating that the number of reserved first special pattern memories is 1 to the performance control CPU 120. However, in the special pattern buffer shift process executed in the same interrupt as the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 transmits a reserved memory number notification command indicating that the number of reserved first special pattern memories is 0. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 receives the reserved memory number notification command indicating that the number of reserved first special pattern memories is 1 and the reserved memory number notification command indicating that the number of reserved first special pattern memories is 0 in the same interrupt. As a result, the LED constituting the first sub-reserved indicator 151A does not light up (light up in a manner indicating that the number of reserved first special pattern memories is 1), and further, the display of the number of reserved first special pattern memories in the display area 5S is not updated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 304(C), the CPU 103 sets special pattern display control data for performing variable display of special patterns in the special pattern display control process in an output buffer for setting special pattern display control data (setting each bit of the output port DG1 shown in FIG. 239 to "1" or "0"), thereby starting variable display of special patterns.

Next, as shown in Figures 305(D) to 305(F), when the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a variation pattern designation command or a first variable display start designation, it starts controlling the turning on and off of the LEDs that constitute the first performance indicator light 152A as a variable display of the sub-pattern. Note that the variation pattern designation command and the first variable display start designation are commands that the CPU 103 sends to the performance control CPU 120 during the variation pattern setting process.

When 33 ms to 66 ms have elapsed since the performance control CPU 120 received the variable pattern designation command or the first variable display start designation, the demo movie display fades out and then disappears, and the normal background image and decorative pattern are displayed. In addition, the pending display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a completed state in the pending memory display area 5U without going through the appearance animation (see Figure 305 (E)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 305(F), the pending display starts moving to the active display area 5F as a shift animation in the pending memory display area 5U. Also, as the shift animation starts, the variable display of the small patterns starts, and the scrolling display of the decorative patterns starts. Although not shown in detail, when the scrolling display starts, the decorative patterns start moving downwards at a slow speed, and then the moving display speed increases to medium and high speeds, and the transparency gradually increases as the patterns fade out.

In the present embodiment, the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts after the variable display of the small pattern starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. The scrolling display of the decorative pattern may not start until the shift animation ends after the variable display of the small pattern starts, and a change start action (not shown) of the decorative pattern may start. The change start action may be, for example, a pre-action such as a character displayed in the decorative pattern moving, or the decorative pattern moving upward once before moving downward.

As shown in FIG. 306(G) to FIG. 306(I), when a new reserved memory is generated by the game ball entering the first start hole during the variable display of the first special symbol following FIG. 304 and FIG. 305, the CPU 103 updates the first special symbol reserved memory count value to 1 in the start hole switch passing process. Note that, since the CPU 103 does not update the first special symbol reserved memory count value to 0 in the same interrupt as the start hole switch passing process, the CPU 103 sets bit 0 of the output port DG3 shown in FIG. 239 to 0 and bit 3 to 1 in the display process. As a result, the LED constituting the first reserved display 25A starts to light up (light up in a manner indicating that the first special symbol reserved memory count is 1) based on the occurrence of a new reserved memory. Also, at this time, the CPU 103 transmits a first special symbol reserved memory count notification command corresponding to the fact that the first special symbol reserved memory count is 1 to the performance control CPU 120.

Next, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance determines that it has received a first special chart reserved memory number notification command from the CPU 103 corresponding to the number of first special chart reserved memories being one, it lights up the LED constituting the first sub-reserved display 151A in a manner corresponding to the number of first special chart reserved memories being one. Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance updates the display of the number of first special chart reserved memories in the display area 5S to "1". In other words, in this embodiment, when a new reserved memory is generated, the display of the number of first special chart reserved memories in the display area 5S is updated from a timing later than the timing of lighting the LED of the first reserved display 25A, so that the player can visually confirm the display of the number of first special chart reserved memories in the display area 5S after confirming the winning of the game ball, making it easy to understand that the number of reserved memories has increased.

Then, as shown in Figures 307 (J) to (L), in the image display device 5, an animation of the pending display appearing is started in response to the newly generated pending memory.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 310, the hold change effect, the winning flash effect, the button vibration effect, and the appearance animation can each be executed based on the occurrence of a new hold memory. Of these, the hold change effect is an effect executed from the occurrence of the hold memory to the timing when the variable display of the pre-read target (variable display based on the hold memory) stops, the winning flash effect is an effect executed from the occurrence of the hold memory to the timing when the variable display of the pre-read target (variable display based on the hold memory) reaches, the button vibration effect is an effect executed for a certain period of time (e.g., 3000 ms) from the occurrence of the hold memory, and the appearance animation is an effect executed for a maximum of 600 ms from the occurrence of the hold memory.

Each of these effects can be executed regardless of the effect mode being any of effect modes A to D. Furthermore, the hold change effect, the winning flash effect, and the button vibration effect are all effects that will not be interrupted even if the effect control CPU 120 receives a variable display start command, whereas the appearance animation is an effect that is interrupted when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variable display start command.

In other words, the reserved change effect, the winning flash effect, and the button vibration effect are effects that are executed to the end without being interrupted by the effect control CPU 120 receiving a variable display start command, etc., regardless of whether the timing at which a new reserved memory occurs during the variable display of a special pattern with a reserved memory count of N (3≧N≧1) is a timing more than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation, a timing less than 660 ms before the start of the next variable display, which is the display execution period of the appearance animation, or a timing within 330 ms from the start of the shift animation when the variable display of a special pattern with a reserved memory count of N has ended and the shift animation has ended.

In the above, as shown in FIG. 304(B), an example of the presentation operation was described in which a new reserved memory is generated by a game ball entering the first start hole when the number of first reserved memory is 0, the variable display is not being executed, and a demo movie display is being displayed as a guide display for adjusting the presentation. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 308(A) to FIG. 308(C) and FIG. 309(D) to FIG. 309(E), the same applies to an example of the presentation operation in which a new reserved memory is generated by a game ball entering the first start hole when the number of first reserved memory is 0, the variable display is not being executed, and the menu guide display and the volume/light quantity guide display are being displayed during the period before the demo movie display starts.

(Mode of superimposed display of hold display)
Next, based on Figure 314, in presentation modes C and D, the reserved display when a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs within 33 ms after the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of the first special pattern when the number of first special pattern reserved memories is four will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 314(A), during the variable display, the active display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and the reserved display is displayed in the first to fourth display positions in the reserved memory display area 5U. Next, as shown in FIG. 314(B), when the variable display ends, an ending animation for the active display is executed during the pattern determination period, and the active display fades out and becomes invisible.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314(C), when a new variable display corresponding to the pending display displayed in the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U is started, a shift animation display is started in which the pending display displayed in the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves (shifts) to the active display area 5F as the next active display, the pending display displayed in the second display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U, the pending display displayed in the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the second display position in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display displayed in the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 314(D), if a new pending memory occurs immediately after a new variable display is started, for example, before 33 ms has elapsed since the new variable display was started, an animation of the pending display corresponding to the new pending memory appears at the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U.

Here, the shift animation of the fourth hold display moving towards the display position of the third hold display in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the third hold display image drawing area, while the appearance animation of the new hold display appearing at the fourth display position in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the fourth hold display image drawing area, which has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the third hold display image drawing area.

In other words, when a pending display that is already displayed in the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U and has begun to move toward the third display position is displayed superimposed on a pending display that is newly displayed in the fourth display position in the pending memory display area 5U, the pending display that is the subject of the shift animation is displayed with priority over the pending display that is the subject of the appearance animation, so it is possible to recognize that the pending display has moved from the fourth display position to the third display position due to the shift animation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 314(E), as the shift animation moves the hold display from the fourth display position to the third display position, the overlapping area with the new hold display becomes smaller, and the appearance animation of the new hold display becomes visible.

In addition, in FIG. 314, the mode of the reserved display in the case where a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs within 33 ms from the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display of the first special pattern where the number of first special pattern reserved memories is four in presentation modes C and D was explained. However, as shown in FIG. 315, in the case where a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs within 33 ms from the end of the pattern determination period of the variable display of the first special pattern where the number of first special pattern reserved memories is three in presentation modes C and D, the only difference is the display position where the new reserved display is displayed. The other display modes are almost the same, so a detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, although not specifically shown, in presentation modes C and D, when a new first special reserved memory occurs before 33 ms has elapsed since the end of the pattern determination period for the variable display of the first special pattern when the number of first special reserved memories is one or two, only the display position where the new reserved display is displayed differs, and other display modes are almost the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, in performance modes C and D, the reserved display in the case where the pattern determination period for the variable display of the first special pattern with three reserved first special patterns has ended and a new reserved first special pattern memory occurs less than 33 ms before the start of the next variable display will be explained based on FIG. 316.

As shown in FIG. 316(A), during the variable display, the active display is displayed in the active display area 5F, and the reserved display is displayed in the first to third display positions in the reserved memory display area 5U. Next, as shown in FIG. 316(B), when the variable display ends, an ending animation for the active display is executed during the pattern determination period, and the active display fades out and becomes invisible.

Here, if a new first special pattern reserved memory occurs just before the end of the pattern determination period, that is, less than 33 ms before a new variable display corresponding to the reserved display displayed at the first display position in the reserved memory display area 5U starts, the reserved display corresponding to the new first special pattern reserved memory will not be displayed until the new variable display starts.

Then, as shown in FIG. 316(C), a shift animation display is started in which the pending display displayed in the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F as the next active display, the pending display displayed in the second display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the first display position in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display displayed in the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U moves to the second display position in the pending memory display area 5U, and at the same time, a pending display corresponding to the new pending memory is displayed in the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U. In this case, the pending display is displayed as the final state of the appearance animation without executing the appearance animation.

Here, the shift animation of the third hold display moving towards the display position of the third hold display in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the second hold display image drawing area, while the new hold display appearing at the third display position in the hold memory display area 5U is drawn in the third hold display image drawing area, which has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the second hold display image drawing area.

In other words, when a pending display that is already displayed in the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U and has begun to move toward the second display position is displayed superimposed on a pending display that is newly displayed in the third display position in the pending memory display area 5U, the pending display that is the subject of the shift animation is displayed with priority over the newly appearing pending display, so it is possible to recognize that the pending display has been moved from the third display position to the second display position by the shift animation.

Then, as shown in Figures 316 (D) and (E), as the hold display moves from the third display position to the second display position through the shift animation, the overlapping area with the new hold display becomes smaller, and the new hold display becomes visible.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, the appearance animation mode was described when one game ball enters one of the start ports and a new reserved memory is generated when the number of reserved memories is N (3 ≧ N ≧ 1) and the variable display is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example, as shown in FIG. 317, when two game balls enter the start port consecutively, the first and second new reserved memories are generated just before the variable display ends, and if the appearance animation of the reserved display based on these reserved memories starts less than 600 ms before the start of the next variable display, the appearance animation is executed based on the first reserved memory at a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories N + 1 in the reserved memory display area 5U, and the reserved display is changed to the final mode based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving the variable display start command, and the appearance animation is executed based on the second reserved memory at a position corresponding to the number of reserved memories N + 2 in the reserved memory display area 5U, and the reserved display is changed to the final mode based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving the variable display start command.

In addition, if the first and second new pending memories occur immediately after the start of the variable display, and the appearance animation of the pending display based on these pending memories starts more than 600 ms before the start of the next variable display, the appearance animation is executed based on the first pending memory at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the end of the appearance animation, and the appearance animation is executed based on the second pending memory at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+2 in the pending memory display area 5U, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the end of the appearance animation.

In addition, if the first new pending memory occurs just before the end of the variable display, and the appearance animation of the pending display based on that pending memory starts less than 600 ms before the start of the next variable display, and the second new pending memory occurs after the start of the next variable display, the appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U based on the first pending memory, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the performance control CPU 120 receiving a variable display start command, and the appearance animation is executed at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories N+1 in the pending memory display area 5U based on the second pending memory, and the pending display is changed to its final state based on the end of the appearance animation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new reserved memory occurs when the variable display of special patterns is not being executed, a reserved display based on the new reserved memory is displayed in the reserved memory display area 5U, and the reserved display is shifted (activated) to the active display area 5F by executing a shift animation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, as shown in Figures 318 (A) and 318 (B), when the number of reserved memories is 0 and a new reserved memory occurs when the variable display of special patterns is not being executed, the reserved display may be directly specified to be displayed in the active display area 5F as the active display of the variable display without executing the appearance animation or shift animation.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 270(B), the display period of one cycle of the pause animation in the hold display is 2970 ms, the display period of the shift animation in the hold display is 330 ms, and the display period of the end animation in the active display is 165 ms. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example, the display period of one cycle of the pause animation in the hold display may be an integer number of seconds (e.g., 3000 ms, 6000 ms, etc.).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the display period of the hold display shift animation and the active display end animation are both less than 1000 ms, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display period of at least one of the hold display shift animation and the active display end animation may be 1000 ms or more.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a jackpot game state in which game balls can enter the jackpot winning hole and more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the start winning hole or the normal winning hole 10 is considered to be an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state or a probability-changing state may also be considered to be an advantageous state as long as it is a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for game balls to enter the winning hole than in a normal state or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot game state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. A gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means;
A performance execution means;
A display means;
A reservation storage means,
The display means includes:
In a first period after the game ends, a background display is displayed;
displaying a demonstration display during a second period after the first period has ended;
the demonstration display includes a company name display scene, a title name display scene, and a warning display scene;
the company name display scene is a scene in which the character display of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in animation,
the title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in characters as an animation,
The warning display scene is a scene in which text display of a warning when playing the gaming machine is displayed in an animated form,
the animated display of the text display of the company name related to the gaming machine is emphasized more than the animated display of the text display of the caution when playing the gaming machine,
the animation display of the character display of the title name of the gaming machine is emphasized more than the animation display of the character display of the attention calling for playing the gaming machine,
The reserved storage means is capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserved storage up to a predetermined number,
The game control means is capable of executing the next variable display when the variable display is completed and there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display,
The performance execution means includes:
When the reserved memory is stored, the reserved display can be displayed by gradually changing a start state, a completion state, and a plurality of intermediate states including a pre-completion state which is a state immediately before the completion state;
When the reserved memory is stored, a winning performance can be executed,
It is possible to move a reserved display corresponding to a reserved memory already stored during the variable display from a position where it has been displayed for a specific period from a reserved shift start timing based on the timing at which the next variable display is started to a position corresponding to the next variable display,
During execution of the N-time variable display of the reserved memory number, which is a variable display in a situation where N-number of reserved memories less than the predetermined number are stored,
When the period until the next variable display is started is longer than a predetermined period, if a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and then the start state is changed stepwise to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state, over the predetermined period, to display the reserved display;
When the period until the next variable display is started is shorter than the predetermined period and a new reserved memory is stored, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the N+1th number, and is changed from the start state to an intermediate state different from the pre-completion state, and when the next variable display is started in a situation in which the intermediate state different from the pre-completion state is reached, the reserved display is changed to the completion state based on the timing and displayed;
When the N-hour variable display of the number of reserved memories is ended and a new reserved memory is stored between the reserved shift start timing and the specific period has elapsed, the reserved display is started in the start state at the reserved display position corresponding to the Nth number, and the start state is gradually changed to the plurality of intermediate states, and then the change is changed to the completion state over the specified period, and the reserved display is displayed;
This gaming machine is capable of executing the winning performance in any of the following cases: when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is longer than the specified period during execution of the N-hour variable display of the reserved memory number; when a new reserved memory is stored when the period until the next variable display starts is shorter than the specified period during execution of the N-hour variable display of the reserved memory number; and when a new reserved memory is stored after the N-hour variable display of the reserved memory number has ended and the specific period has elapsed from the reservation shift start timing.

Images